/ X 



fc\ %■<? 



X ' 

.4? . > 



\ '" 




'. o 



/°" *^W9i J"***. '--lit 

























4 O 








A NEW PRACTICAL 



HEBREW GRAMMAR 

WITH 

HEBREW-ENGLISH AND ENGLISH-HEBREW 
EXERCISES 

AND 

A HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY ' 

BY 

/ 
SOLOMON DEUTSCH, A.M., Ph.D. 



hi 



THIRD EDITION, ENLARGED BY NEW VOCABULARIES 




( 1 
' N0..1&3 



NEW YORK 

HENRY HOLT & CO. 

1876. 

7T 



^ 



« ^ 1 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1868, by 
Dr. Solomon Deutsch, 
ia the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the U. S., for the District of Md. 



Printed bt Deutcsh a Goldirman, 



-,' 



7 



PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 



Although many and valuable Hebrew Grammars have appeared in 
this country, which in completeness and critical ability have left little to 
be desired, I yet venture to offer this work to the public,, with the ex- 
pectation that this result of my labors will still be found useful to the 
Hebrew student. 

It has been my aim, divesting the Grammar of all extraneous detail, 
to present it full and complete in every necessary particular. I have 
especially had in view the wants of those instructing themselves, for 
whom, as well as for schools, I have endeavored to make this volume a 
practical introduction to the language of the Old Testament. 

I shall briefly recapitulate the distinctive features of this manual. 

1. To facilitate the commission of the rules to memory, they have 
been expressed with all the conciseness consistant with perspicuity. 

2. Believing that exceptions are more properly to be sought in the 
Lexicon and Critical Commentary, I have noted such irregularities only 
as, by their frequency, can claim to be held integral parts of the language. 

3. The illustration of the abstract by the concrete being necessary 
to the clear understanding of the former, the rules have been explained 
and confirmed by examples, and further elucidated by exercises. 

4. In elaborating these exercises, I have taken great care to select 
valuable sentences, containing either an interesting historical fact or a 
sententious moral. The internal character of the passage has been con- 
sidered as well as its external grammatical form. — The Syntactical part is 
without exercises, the rules being illustrated by examples only. Never- 
theless the student will become fully familiar with them by the constant 
reference made to them in the Etymological part. 

5. In the requisition of a language, the learner, in order to familiar- 
ize himself with the grammatical forms, should make frequent transla- 
tions into it from his mother-tongue. To this end English-Hebrew exer- 
cises have been prepared, particularly illustrating the rules which they 
immediately follow, anticipating nothing, but exactly keeping pace with 
the student's progress. I have intentionally made the construction of the 
English sentences conformable to the verbal arrangement of the Hebrew. 
Where the English construction admits of no change, I have endeavored 
to aid the students by help of numerals irregularly placed. 

6. The approved results of continental research have been concisely 
embodied in this volume. Gesenius, Ewald, Fuerst (Lexicon), S. D. 



IV 

Luzzatto (Grammaticadella Lingua Ebraica), Naegelsbach, being follow- 
ed in important points ; the latter's arrangement of the declensions has 
been preserved with slight alterations. 

7. In the Paradigms, presented at the end of the Grammar, the 
groundforms are distinguished by asterisks. 

8. Although the words in the Exercises are translated as they oc- 
cur, Vocabularies are added ; first, to save the student's time and labor 
in seeking a forgotten word, secondly, that he may refer to them, should 
he be in doubt as to the form of the word when uninflected. 

9. A Chrestomathy composed of various selections in prose and 
poetry from the Old Testament is given. 

10. The two vocabularies contain about two thousand different 
Hebrew words in general use. How large a proportion this is, one can easily 
perceive, when one considers that the whole number of radical words in 
the language does not exceed 1867. It is therefore expected that the 
diligent student in a few months, will be enabled by mastering the Heb- 
rew exercises and the Chrestomathy to read understandingly the less 
difficult portions of the Old Testament. 

By this enumeration it will be readily seen, that the plan in some re- 
spects possesses the character of novelty, and it is hoped that this fruit of 
earnest and zealous exertion will be found acceptable and useful. 

Baltimore, July 15, 1868. 



PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 



At the request of many prominent and experienced Professors of 
Hebrew, I have added two complete Vocabularies to all the Exercises 
and the Chrestomathy in my Grammar, and present the book in this 
improved form to the public as a second edition. 

Thanking the learned critics and the press for the courtesy extended 
to my book on its first appearance and hoping that in its present more 
convenient form it may meet with continued favor, 

I subscribe myself 

Very respectfully 

THE AUTHOR. 

Baltimore, September 1872. 



PART I. 

OF THE ELEMENTS. 



CHAPTER L 

LETTERS, SOUNDS AND SIGNS. 
§ 1. ALPHABET. 

1. Twenty-two consonants compose the Hebrew Alphabet. 



Form. 



Name. 



Aleph t]^K (• fjSjjt ox) 

D Q) Beth- h»3 (- n?| house) 

J U) Gimel' ^ (- bo| camel) 

n n) Daieth- nVi o nSn.door) 



Power. 

a scarcely audible 
breathing. 

bh, b 
g in go 
d 



He- 

Vav- 

Zain- 

Cheth 

Teth- 

Yod- 



*H (the meaning doubtful) h in he 



*H (a nail, hook) 
T*[ (a weapon) 
rrn (a fence) 
JTSP (a basket) 
i» (- T hand) 



w or v 

z 

ch in the German 
word nach 



D Q) 1 Caph 
7 Lamed* 

D D Mem- 
J f Nun* 

D Sameclr 



£"p (the hollow of the 
bent hand) 

npS (• ibSb ox-goad) i 



D'ft ( = D?0 water) m 

P3 (a fish) n 

TJ8D (a prop) 



J m ye 
ch or k 



Part I. Elements. 



Form. 

V Ayin 


Name. 


Power. 

not pronounced 


Filial. 






5 (£)) tj Pe* 


N£> ( = US mouth) 


ph ; p 


ST j> Tsacle 


Hjf (a fish hook) 


ts 


p Kopht 
1 Kesh* 


£"pp (the eye of a needle or k 

the back of the head) 
^n(*&r'K>-tr>Ohead)r 


^* Shin 
& Sin 


]W J# tooth) 


sh 

s 


n en) Tav 


)F) (a cross mark) 


th t 



Note I. £$ and p| may be respectively compared with the Greek 
spiritus lenis and asper; fl is a deep guttural sound (the German 
ch) ; ]} like K is commonly omitted in reading. The nasal (ng) pro- 
nunciation of J/ is incorrect. In the Septuagint it is sometimes represent- 
ed by the spiritus asper or lenis, sometimes by the Greek Gamma = g. 
In the Arabic the corresponding letter is a deep rolling guttural 
(rg), probably the true pronunciation. 

Note II. These characters are not the original forms, the pres- 
ent letters not having been adopted, until long after the Babylon- 
ian captivity or, according to some, a century before Christ, hence 
this alphabet has been termed, the Assyrian (properly Babylonian) 
square letter : HIC^'K DfD and JD^D DfD . The coins struck 
at the time of the Maccabees and the Samaritan Pentateuch present 
the ancient Hebrew Characters, which are similar to the Phoenician. 

Note III. The names of the letters have probably been selected 
for the sake of the initial sounds. In old Hebrew, Samaritan and 
Phoenician writing, the forms of the letters resembled the things ex- 
pressed by their names : this resemblance is still partly seen in the 
present alphabet : as 1 a nail, f a weapon, £9 a basket, 3 the hol- 
low of the bent hand &c. 
2. Hebrew is read from the right hand to the left. 
. Exercise 1. 
Write the Roman characters corresponding to the fol- 
lowing Hebrew letters : 

,m ,ns ha ro m ns ar /u f s >*\n ms ,yx ,nn ,p 
•on spi n* ;Dr? ,dd r\w ,p trf? ,nSi /n .nm **oa 
.Dp ny >pj >tpp ,6dd >m *ro? -ins mx ,rm ,xob 
.zmtps nnpri may .hSd n» ,pnp ,trrp ,p ^ri 



§ 2. Division of Lettees. 3 

Exercise 2. 
Write the Hebrew letters corresponding to the follow- 
. ing Koman characters : 
1, ch, h, k, t, th, s, sh, r, &, p, y, w, g, f, z, tz, n, g, 
b, ch, lchn, km, rtz, zr, ythni, chl, kl, slib, dbktm, 
hnshrm, bmdbr, gdl, ktn, zvch, sw, shhyt, gy, tw, gbth, 
hzt, nthn. 

§ 2. DIVISION OF LETTERS. 
The letters are divided according to the organs with 
which they are pronounced into: 

Gutturals #ftER* 

Palatals prn 

Linguals n^201 

Dentals or Sibilants g/tfpf 

Labials ^1D13 

The letter *") partakes of both a guttural and dental char- 
acter. 

Exercise 3. 
Give in the- following words the names of the letters, 
and the classes, to which they belong : 

pwfy yto Viu iSwti npnvi aapb 'wy mn? tdk na 
•D&^'n Sk pj dti iDDnn Sn un Sk h^Sni dw -m 
npnvn topo did j mrr un -pbi ^yiS ron*o : nin Dipon 

§ 3. VOWEL - LETTERS AND VOWEL - SIGNS. 

1. The letters ^IHK Ehevi (a word used to assist the mem- 
ory) form a separate class, being called voivel letters, 
they sometimes representing not consonantal but vowel 
sounds. 

2. Besides these vowel - letters, which generally indicate 
long vowels, in the 6th century nine vowel signs (fiijftjfi 
or fillips), were introduced, points and strokes placed, 
with two exceptions, ujiiej the letter, after which they are 
to be pronounced. Of these nine signs, three represent long 
vowels, three short and three doubtful. 



Part I. Elements. 



Long Vowels. 

Name. Form. Power 

Kamets 



14 
Tsere n?f 

Cholem Tin 



a in father 
e in there 
6 in note 



NAME. 



Chirek pyn 
Shurek p'W 
Kubbuts p^ (i J| 



Short Vowels. 

Name. Form. Power. 

Patach tiriQ 
Seghol Sfop 

Doubtful Vowels. 

FORM. POWER. 

i in machine or i in pin 
u in rule 



a in sharp 

e in met 

o in not 

or rather 

u in dull 



u in rule or u in full. 



Note I. Cholem is a dot over the •) as ) or the *) is omitted 
and the dot placed above on the left of the consonant : as 'y * go, 
"1 «- do. Shurek is always placed in the bosom of ) as !|. # The 
Chirek-point is placed under the letter : as ^J ; if » follows it is 
long, if not, doubtful : *J long i, J either long or short i. 
3. The classification of the vowels, according to the three 
primary vowel sounds, from which they have originated, is 
also of importance. These are the vowels A (in father) I 
(in machine) U (in rule), for E and .0 are properly diph- 
thongs : E arising from a + i, from a + u. 

A_ CLASS. I_ CLASS. XJ. CLASS. 

— = a in father * — or — = T in machine 1 = u in rule 

T 

— = a in sharp — = i in pin — = u or u in full 

. „ — = e in there ) or \_ =. o in note 

— = a in fate 

. — = e in met — = u m dull. 

T 

Note II. The above pronunciation is that of the exiled Portu- 
guese and Spanish Jews and their descendants (the Sefaradic); the 
German Jews pronounce (■* ) like 6 in home and ■_ or ) like 6 in 
home or ow in vow; the Polish pronounce (••) like i in bind, ()) 
almost like oi in spoil, ) almost as the French u, the other vowels 
like their German brethren. The Sefaradic is considered the pro- 
nunciation most nearly correct. The proper names in the Septuag- 
int and Josephus and the Hebrew phrases occurring in the New Tes- 
tament, are written in accordance with this mode, which is also con- 
firmed by the present usage of the Jews of Palestine and the ana- 
logy of the Arabic. 



§ 3. Vowel Letters & Vowel Signs. «*> 

4. These three classes respectively correspond to the vow- 
el-letters ^HN which latter may be considered as their re- 
presentatives : K and H represent the A classy or as it is 
usually expressed are homogeneous with this class, ' is homo- 
genous with the I Class, •) is homogeneous with the U 
class. 

5. The long vowels of the I and U class are most fre- 
quently accompanied by their correspondent Vowel-letters. 
At the end of a word the long vowel, of the A class is 
usually written with N or Jl : as NVD , ?VZ ; in the middle 
but rarely with tf : as TlNVE, an( * never w ^ n H (^"Jlb^ 
"Tfif HI? are compound words and Jl considered as quies- 
cing at the end of the first.) Therefore the ^JlK are voca- 
lized, or to use the common expression rest (quiesce) in the 
following cases : 

♦ in * T , >— , ♦— : as h , ?p» # . 

1 in J|, ')'• as {p^. *]pV . 

The consonantal power of N and Jl is so feeble, that K 
without the vowel-sign is mute after all the long vowels 
and final Jl without the vowel is mute after Kamets, 
Tsere, CholemSand Segholi-'as 

•intoa ,ribnx ,r\rx *ma ;*ta *®n ^ >wii >m 

t: t |-— tt •• • t 

% 

6. 1 and * when preceded by a heterogeneous vowel-sign, 
or followed by a vowel or Sh'va (§ 4) or when having a 
Dagesli (§ 7) retain their consonantal sound: as 11 read vav, 
1J! $ gev, *n * chay, *ij| ? goy. In the termination V — the 
* is silent: as V33 read panav. 

Note 3. ) preceeded by a vowel-sign or Sh'va [§ 4] or fol- 
lowed by a vowel must be read as y: as l)ty read avon, JIV^D read 
mitsvoth, Jlf? read love. 

Note 4. When the t^J-f^ especially ") and * accompany their 
homogeneous vowels, the latter are said to be written fully (KvD) 5 
without the quiescent letters they are said to be written defectively 

opn) : rnVip. pnv , bm ^j ; riS*p , &pM > hy. defectively. 



6 Part I. Elements. 

Note 5. The Cholem-point without *| is omitted when jjf pre- 
cedes: as in JO&P or when ^'follows: as in HC'D* 

Exercise 4. 
Read the following syllables and words according to 
the pronunciation of the Portuguese Jews : 

h >p ,y & $ Ay >p ,j ,p h o .? ^ ,n ■? 4 ,in n ,Aa *% >x 

>i n >p i ,1 ,* .j j ,1 ,r an j ,a h toi to to ,to Atf >n 
♦w ,n ,n b & a ,p ,n >n .k >ty *b to to to to 

Exercise 5. 

in »n 7 n n n ni in >n n n « kj ta >3 ■? kk 

NO' >D JO '£ & iS nS *3 »3 V V » w j|^ ^ KD 

T • T T • . T ... T 

W to k# n n ip >p ^ ft tf£ *a £ **9 iy kjj 

.in >n an i# 

T 

Exercise 6. 

or? op ^? rjD jo mi m -3? 2& m sn sn 

o^ d^ d^ pv rv *V9 ^ w T5 *i? p j i*j b did 

.*n? 11 n nS pS rjin *)iy ni d: du 

Exercise T. 

>S vS 13 vS vS *b *b >n >b qj *tt u na ^ *i 

-•-■■• T T T T 

ipb ih& osw Wb Tjctr no# rjpto '? v *o h 

itgfti pet? jir'rr n^T p^y ^p n^'p nj/tr ^ 

.1^ vba *np hq ^p Hfc> cnn r]^'n 

Exercise 8. 

♦dnS my rvSy iW iW p \™n i> 

- T T TT T V T V T T ) - I T T T 

jtdns'i viinoi vjni lip ^i.p np np i^Sj; pr n.iS 
.rWxn ir w nn iW Dtibi rtm : rwi m hi m 

• . T*T • T • T I T T ' T -T ■•--T 



§ 4. Sh'va. 7 

Exercise 9. 
Write the following syllables and words in Hebrew 
characters : ye, ya, bo, hi zii, wu, tii, to, ra, ra, bin, piv, 
gav, bechi, gau, dodi, vav, zodii, bara, pamnu, tttvecha. 
gorolenii, yagilu, yosher, moshel, bosem, shalosh, love, 
kol [defectively] kol [fully] shomer [fully] choshev [de- 
fectively] shi [fully] pe [defectively] nazld [fully]. 

§ 4. SH'VA. 

1. At the beginning or in the middle of a word the 
vowelless consonant also receives a sign, two dots (:) de- 
nominated: Sh'va N1&* (for X)& emptiness) or frOt^' (for 

SO'u* fissure, gap, i. e. bare of vowel): as 7DD > Ph^Qp- Final 
"I mid two vowelless consonants at the end of a word re- 
ceive the Sh'va : as Th > LD^p 5 hence also a letter with 
Dagesh-forte (§ V) : as J"1jT) ♦ 

2. The Sh'va under the initial consonant of a word or 
syllable is called J^ #W vocal Sh'va, because it indicates 

a slight vowel sound, like an obscure or half e ; as 7Dp 
read K'tol. Sh'va under the final consonant of a syllable is 
silent and termed therefore H^ fcOC silent Sh'va. 

t t : 

3. Sh'va is only given to a consonant and never to the 
^ilN when they represent vowels or quiesce: as Mp^'il 

Note I. Yocal Sh'va for the most part originating from the 
dropping of a vowel [§ 14, II. Rejection] retained in pronunciation 
an aftersound [NachMang] of that original vowel, which was indi- 
cated by the addition of this vowel to the Sh'va : as D^lp for 
D^Hp from £np 5 nnn for DHtt from ^n< ; thus always with 
gutturals'. TODN from pDK > D'PHH fromVin* Seethe next 
§ and Note. 

Note II. On the distinction of vocal and silent Sh'va see § 11. 

Exercise 10. 

jrgi,T : rnirrr rnyj rinn* \y& rrfc? nk> rtjn s © did 



8 Part I. Elements, 

'dtid njr*P raakn Mns D^nsr nV-ra nS*Si 

- : : t *t ■- I •. t : : v • : • t : - t - • 

§ 5. COMPOSITE SH'VA. 
When the vowelless initial consonant of a word or sylla- 
ble is one of the gutturals JflftiW (§ 2) a short vowel (-), 
(-•■) or ( T ) is added to the Sh*va, to indicate a more dis- 
tinct sound, as a half a, e or o. This Sli'va is called 
composite Sli'va (compounded with a vowel) or FjtprT Cha- 
teph (rapid) from its rapid utterance. 
These are: -: Chateph-Pattach iD£ 
•••: Chateph-Seghol Hdn' 
t: Chateph-Kamets Hf"T 
Note. In a few instances the compound Sli'vas are also written 
under other consonants: as ^HPU 

Exercise 11. 

r\whx vT\)&m ip^_ n?K tr^s Sn# nbn O'frp 
noyn njnp u%j 'vo ^ : ^ hdin* trpH jnnN 
rviSnx *6> nana niw fposog niw's dSh onrrn 
ibjte -ins* nran nSyn nq?v ^rwn racac >?n& 
♦npHR '*! ^IK^ W?? nr ?pJ? V^ W. 

§ 6. PATACH FURTIVE. 

The Patach (-) under the gutturals (7 V and H [!l 
with a dot called Mappik § 7] at the end of a word is 
not read after the letter as usual, hut before it : as fTH 
read ruach, HH read reach, •JTdJ read, gahoahh. This 
Patach does not belong to the form of the word, therefore 
it falls away when the word is lengthened: as H-H* TPH. 
It is called Patach furtive PD^ Hilt) > because its position 
and pronunciation are, as it were, illegitimate. 
Exercise 12. 

]h rb ohss JTJ56V S^P W?§& nup )W trr. 



§ 7. Dagesh and Mappik. 9 

pjiSs m& nu ep rnn itb mS nb pi in jri 
.mS# rrS^to rpjuip mfh gnji 

§ 7. DAGESH AND MAPPIK. 

1. The six letters fi^DI^D (j"£G"U5) as initial or me- 
dial letters after a consonant entirely vowelless, [a conso- 
nant with a silent Sh'va] represent the hard sound of each 
letter : b, g, d, k, p, t, which is indicated by a point 
within, called Dagesh Lene 7p Kfrl \&i?\ puncture, from 
the Cliald. verb $T\ to pierce with a point] as : Y2, Jlfl^- 

2. If a vowel sound [a vowel with or without a quies- 
cent letter] or a vocal Sh'va precede them, their pronun- 
ciation is softened or aspirated, like bh or v, gh, dh, kh 
or the German ch, ph or f, th ; the Dagesh is then omitted : 

as ^5 nyr,?prp vr- 

3. When the word ending with a vowel is separated by 
one of the distinctive accents (§ 9) from a following word, 
commencing with one of the fiMTQ > the vowel cannot 
affect the pronunciation, so that the fiMTJQ retain their 
original hard sounds and have the Dagesh : as *X'tO Wl ; 

The Dagesh also remains after a vowel sound, if the word 
niiT precedes : as D*0&*3 iTiJT or when two of the letters 

t : x • - T - t : 

HiD3"in come together: as |Yl *;D. 

4. A point in any medial letter except ^nHK that is im- 
mediately preceded by a vowel, indicates the doubling of this 
letter : as ^^ = *P9$ ■ This point is called Dagesh forte, 

cprn tfro- 

I TT •• T 

Note. Dagesh forte in the flWTjQ at tne same ^ me doubles and 
hardens the letter : as D*5*"l = ra bbim. 

5. A point in final Jl serves to determine its consonant- 
al power and is called p*5D Mappik, (i. e. causing to be 
pronounced) : as Tw = lohh. 

6. H and the rest of ^JlN never receive a Dagesh or 
Mappik, when quiescent. 2 



10 Part I, Exercises. 

Note. The -dot in !) represents Dagesh, when the prece<iing con- 
sonant has a vowel, otherwise the Shurek-point : as JTiy * D^p rea ^ : 
tsivva, kavvam. TlC • "VU read shur, gui\ 

Note V. On Dagesh forte conjunctive see § 9, I. Note. 

Exercise 13. 
Distinguish Dagesh forte from Dagesh lene. 

naa KD3 n&K rhi Wk nm rt&it tsd niia 
T»y nan dW npn aan T¥ i*i nta q$a his 

..*■. - .. • •• • |x ~ T - T - T - T - |t- x ■ 

pBa TOD 113$ ai*N TJ& TTN- ^aa B>j21? J?tf 
S^a fiiDN; D*an h# na# fta Drraa** }to|p 
niJ na; n± na^ niw dsjirts dt!3 d^i? Dgna 

.na nS ptifac nnK 

t t - ■.": t : - 

Exercise 14. 
Place Dagesh lene in the fi£D*"Ua where required. 

.ntt5 >nn .t\ty .nn&n .rvn /aaiaa ♦Sin? .9 .'ng^ 
a#j -iij •'J l? 5 '£ •??©? ^3 *^ ^J?3 -ndh* *3a 
r?£ naa r ai& rqn .va nn$!i ♦iro&n npni "ussjj nrrii 
oai^'^ .^V&rn^.^pa .i3a:jte>£»Dfe .p^'Sna^ 
♦rfaya Dn&hn nSiS .bnrr dik-Sd Ta .npai oanS 

• t : v : v : — : •• : - t t t — : } t •• t t • : 

Note. The ShVas under the letters distinguished by asterisks 
are silent. 

§ 8. SYLLABLES. 

1. The number of syllables in a word is determined by 
the number of its vowels : as jT^SOa = two Syllables, 
HOT&n = three S" 

T T -: T 

Note. Composite Sh'va is considered as a vocal Sh'va and not 
as a vowel. On vocal Sh'va with regard to Metheg see § 9, 7. 

2. Every syllable begins with one or two cod sonants, 
but in the latter case the first consonant must have vocal 
Sh'va: as DlttO- 



§ 8. Syllable?. 11 

Note. The single exception is ) = u for ) ,,and" (see § 12, 7, b.): 

•asnn^3^ 

3. Syllables are either open, closed, double closed or 
■sharpened. 

a. Open syllables end with a vowel : as VTD* ♦ 

b. Closed syllables end with a consoant : as pITtf*.*, 

■c. Double closed syllables end with two consonants: as pb*Qp ♦ 
d. Sharpened syllables end with a consonant, with which 
the following syllable begins: as 7Dp == kit-tel. 

4. The vowel of unaccented (§ 9) closed syllables is al- 

> 
ways short : as Dp*l read, wayyakom. 

The vowel of unaccented open syllables is always long : 
> 
as N*Q read: bara. 

TT 

But both if accented may contain indifferently, long or 
short vowels : as Dyfy reac l : olam, T[ 76 . 

The double closed and sharpened syllables have most 
frequently, even when accented, short vowels : as TwlSp > ^lil* 

Note. The Pause (§ 9, 11.) forms an exception to this rule. 

Exercise 15. 

Determine the different syllables in the following words 
and whether they require long or short vowels: 

no%x ijwd wm nm D)h mhp mm yyn ao-run 

t : |t • *t : • •: tt t t | : - -'•t t 

'fiSnS nrn -\t6 d^ ?ps tw: fisti vSk natfi nap w 

.... .. _ T T _ _ J .. T . T T " • T " V — T T T 

bpw lib *p npfr &j?bn nnp rnrr *ip* n^n-n^ ♦lor? 
tpftj$3 njrte n^n-otr anp^p-Stf nap ^Np-nj; n:n nifc>j;S 
^ Dip Sy_ Vp?n rtirn n^ *o biVj pArrbj? iw 
Dnyn-as* rjSrvi own }p rrjrv n&e ttfsn nn^ rno# 

t t - : t -v: tv ■ : t •• : t * - t " t 

Note. The Sh'vas under the asterisked letters are vocal. — The 
sign > is used to represent the position of the accent. 

§ 9. ACCENTS, METHEG, MAKKEF. 

1. Two or even more words having between them a hor- 



12 Part 1. Exercises. 

izontal stroke : as D1£D"*5 > M9 /# are rea d m connection 
and considered as one word. The horizontal stroke is called 
ilpp Makkef (conjunction). 

Note. Makkef, to connect words more closely, is wont to im- 
press a dagesh, called p^tTl Condenser, on the word following after 

I!— H— H— as: DitS-n? J.n*rtrnt- Dagesh without Makkef 

after a word accented on the penult ending in £] , ft , j"J — or |"J — 

L 
is called plfTTO HHN coming from afar : as T\ 7 TW]} • The 

modern grammarians call it Dagesh-forte conjunctive. 

2. Every word, except when connected with the following 
hy Makkef, receives an accent, which marks the tone-syl- 
lable in the word: as DTjStf *03 rWSOS. 

v: tt • •■ : 

3. Most of the words have the accent on the last sylla- 
ble and are termed JTnp (from below) ; words with the 
accent on the one before the last (penult) are termed 7*Jr?0 
(from above.) 

4. The principal tone can only rest on one of the two 
last syllables, therefore, if the word is lengthened at the 
end, the tone is thrown forward according to the length. 
of the addition : as iff?* DHil. 

T t • t : 

5. Besides the principal accent there is a secondary ac- 
cent, a small perpendicular stroke (i) on the left of a vowel, 
denominated jlfip Metheg (bridle). The design of the Me- 
theg is embodied in its name: it is intended to restrain the 
voice, to prevent too hasty a passage over the vowel or its 
connection with the following vowelless consonant: as -l^li^ 

° :|t 

read: sha-r'tsu. , Hence Sh'va following Metheg is always 
vocal. 

6. Metheg regularly stands in the second open syllable 

before the tone, provided its vowel is original and not changed 

from a Sh'va, and again in the fourth, if the word have 
> 

so many : as JWH , JTtillDfinDI • A closed syllable or one 



§ a. Accents, Metheg, Makkei^ 13 

Vith a vowel not original, is always without as Metheg :: as; 
o£*'?Vl; n^m *for 1 cf. § 12. 7, b. 

7. With regard to Metheg vocal Sh'va is considered as 
a vowel and forms a syllable, therefore VO>\ 

3. The accents, [DVJJ^D tastes, i. e. criteria of the sense,, 
or fiiJMLJ modulations, i. e. musical notes, from jlj to play 
<on a stringed instrument, to sing] 26 in number, are a 
species of musical notes or signs for regulating a sort of 
<cantillatioii with which the Jews, since the oldest times, 
were accustomed to accompany the public reading of the 
Law and Sections from the Prophets (Haphtaroth) . 

This cantillation being strictly subordinate to the sense 
<of the proposition and to its logical connection, the accents 
also serve to show the mutual relation of words and to in- 
dicate the connections and pauses to be made in reading T 
hence their general division into : D*D*p59 Distinctive® 
and :D*"]GnD Conjunctives. 

9. The distinctives are divided according to the longer 
or shorter pauses marked or governed by them into : Em- 
pemrs 9 Class I. Kings, Class II. Dukes, Class III. Counts,, 
Glass IV. 

CLASS I. 

1) SillukpHD or pUDfi ^|iD end of the verse: as tSltt 
(J i) two perpendicular points between two verses and the 
sign of Metheg at the tonesyllable. 2) Athnach JTftJTK : as 
0"Tj* • Athnach divides the verse into two parts either sen- 
tences or clauses. In the latter case the clauses respectively 
consist of those words, which are more intimately related: as 

:p**rr nxi own nx dwn jtd rv&tira in the be- 

I, vIt t •• : • - t - •■ ,Y v: t t • - : 

ginning Grod created the heaven and the earth : the heaven 
and the earth, as the object, being divided by Athnach from 
the antecedent, containing the subject and predicate. A 
simple sentence never takes A. Cf, Gen. 1, 3, 6, 8. 

CLASS II. 
3) Seghol Vttp : as D"W divides the first member of the 
sentence into two parts, standing between the first word 



14 Part 1. Exerciser 

and the word with Athnach. Its position is always over the 
last letter. Of. Gen. I, 1. 

4) Zakeph Katon |i£3j} fcjjjf ) as DHK 

5) Zakeph Gadhol Si"U C|j5J $ as DIN 

form smaller divisions either before or after Athnach. Cf. 
Gen. 1, 44. 

6) Tiphcha NH5P : as DIN possessing less separating 
power than the preceding: always placed under the last 
word before Silluk or Athnach or before the last but one. 
Cf. Gen. 1, 6. 

CLASS. III. 

7) R'bhia tyyi as : D"1N a point over the middle of a 
letter, distinguished by this position from Cholem over its 
end. R'bhia halves the semi-clause terminating in Seghol, 

Zakeph and Tiphcha: as >r?N >3 ybbft iTTin? vStf E>'jM 
And Judah stepped near unto him, and said, Oh my Lord ! 

Gen. 44, 18, V^ DO^H Sb 1 ? £©$#6 ^\PV h'y'b&) And 
Joseph could not refrain himself before all them that stood 

by him. f jj jrb jnfii t&kmi mp^-fli* fcf&j And he 
gave him (to wife) Asenath the daughter of Potiphera 
priest of On. Gen. 41, 45. 

8) Zarka NjTtt as 'blN ) both over the end of the last 

9) PashtaKD^asD-lNS letter - The latter is heTehj 

T : " T T J distinguished from Kadma the 

yb/2 two Pashtas are used : 
^935 ♦ Kadma is always placed on the tonesyllable. 

10) T'blr V2ft as DIN ) These two and Zarka and Pashta 

11) Geresh BhJ as 0% ( divlde the cla ™f ° r se ^ clause 

T T j terminating with any ol the tour 

preceding accents: 

Zarka precedes Seghol: OffiJ^li^B* WpA 
And Joseph took them both. Gen. 48, 13. 
Pashta precedes Zakeph : y%$tl OT^ fO^l 

. And he rested on the seventh day. Gen. 2. 2. 



§ 9. Accents, Metiieg, Makkef. 15 

T'blr precedes Tipheha : iEJH^K DW^rtl tflil 

He and the men that were with him. Gen. 24, 54. 

Geresh precedes K'bhla: PTTin? V% B>>\ 

Then Judah stepped near unto him. Gen. 44, 18. 

12) Y'thiMOTT as: D"JN stands a little before the first 
letter and is distinguishable by this position from Mahp- 
ach, the latter standing immediately beneath the letter to 
which it belongs. 

CLASS IV. 

13) TTish&Gh'dhola hSh^ N^Sfl as D*1N always over 

/ t : t • : t t 

the first letter. The other distinctives, the separating power 
of which is of no perceivable consequence to the sense are : 

14) Shalsheleth HW as D"]N* over the tonesyllable. 

15) Paser ^3 as D"JN over the tonesyllable. 

QP 

16) Karne Pbara tVfa *i")D as D"[K over the last letter. 

17) G'rashayim D'u f "U as D"]N over the tonesyllable. 

18) P'sik ) T)VS 

T , , f ' ' . as l D"TN a perpendicular stroke 

L garmeli f nr j^rvnh T T v \ * i 

) 01 ' • VW? between ,two words. 

The Conjunctive accents are: 

19) Merka N31D 20) Munach (1*10 21) Merka Kh'phula 

nS-ia? Nirv? 22) Mahpach ^gr?0 23) Darga NTTl 24) 
Kadma KGlp. 25) Yerach ben Yomo 1DV"J3 HT. 2 ^) T'lislia 

q f 

K'tanna n3ftp JWvfl over the end of the last letter. 

t - | : t • : 

10. The distinctives of Class I. denote the longest pauses, 
which may be compared to our period and colon ; Class II. 
to Colon and Semicolon ; Class III. to Semicolon and 
Comma ; Class IV. to Comma and half Comma. 

11. The distinctives of Class I., and some of Class II. 
by their strong accentuation change short vowels into long and 
very frequently Sh'va into a vowel: as T^itf earth — ¥")8 

?jTtny hand-- Tj'T 
A word so accented is said to stand in Pause. 



16 Part L Exerciser. 

12.. Per the sake of completeness,, we here give the rules 
for the position of the accent,, though they will not yet he 
fully understood hj the beginner and must therefore he 
passed ov<er for tUte present, 

I. Nmm have the tone on the last syllable r 
<a. When amding with a long vowel both in open and closed 

syllables; as l^T' H^G coming, but If JO she came. 

N©tb- Tke participle is in this respect considered as a noun. 
.5. When ending with a short vowel, that stands, for a long 

one: as yjjfi for JWV 
,c. FenMiiine nouns, that change their long vowel in the 

st. const, into a short one: as rnj^D from mj?D> 

d. Nouns of which the two last syllables are closed: as TTO- 

e. Nouns which end with Jl— preceded by a long vowel: 

.as flgfa- 
f. Nsoums with the following Suffixes: as 

.jfi ,D<1 r}3 ,Oj) >{- ^ A ,T\- ,;*- ,*- 

hnnys >\ysft >6?~)2l >fpi ^ frigi r^si s hy^ 

</. Fer&s in the Pret. form with the afformatives DHr Jil- as 
7i. Verbs in the Pret. form with Vav, Conv. : as fHDp but 

i&bpi > *o&* t>ut *rotrn ■ 

T i r |t, • : - T • : -t; 

Note. The verbs K"7 and H / form exceptions to 7i. : as 

T T T T - "t: 

II. The following have the tone on the penult : 
i. All the nouns, of which the last vowel is a helping 
Seghol or Patach (a class of words called Segholates) : 

ast^'in, pep', ^9' 124 • 

> > 

7c. Words ending with Patach furtive: as fTD » JJ13Q • 

> 
Z. Words ending with D.V (Dual form): as D*pL?- 



§ 9. Accents, Metheg, Makkef. 17 

m. Verbs in the Pret. form with the affirmatives Jl, *fl> 13 : 

T 

as msc', ♦mots', mow- 

t:-t ■ : - t :-t 

n. The regular verbs in Hit', and those of Y'Jf and )}"$. in 
Kal, Nif. and Hit", with the affirmatives Jl— , ), *— : 

as nzb> ed, nS^n- 

t - - t • : • 

o. Verbs with the suff. H— • 1!% U *i Tj. 
jj. Paragogic H— or JT— attached to nouns, pronouns and 
adverbs: as ffiTlN, flSH , rlW, rb3- 

t : - t ■• V •■ 

> 

Note I. Paragogic * — most frequently has the tone : as ^j-pJJQn* 

q. Verbs with the Vav conv. of the future, provided the 
penult is an open syllable ; (of. the following under r) 

as nbK> but 7Qt$\, Xnpi and not &Op*V 

r. When the tonesyllables of two words immediately follow : 
\> > > > 

as in 17 Hfe^ pT£ *91^> tne tone of the former recedes: 

as H XV&y^ pl>' '5T* ClirTN JliD3 •) Such a receding ac- 
cent being considered as a Metheg and having its posi- 
tion, cannot recede to a dosed syllable (cf. 6. of this §). 
In this and a few other cases it drops entirely, its word being 
connected by Makkef with the following: as ftTJflpfi 

for t$ *npn; nrnpn for r^fn^n- 

Note II. Both the vowel-signs and accents were added to the 
Biblical Text between the 6th* and 11th Centuries by eminent Jew- 
ish scholars. Critical and linguistic notes were also added, the most im- 
portant of which are called Hp and ^j"0 • DVI3 signifying written, 
that is the M. S. reading and **|H ' rea d h e - the expression con- 
sidered by the Jewish critics to be preferable. 

This body of notes is called the Masora (JTii'pQ i. e. Tradition) 
and the compilers themselves the Masorites. (n*T)DO ' /J73)* 
Exercise 16. 



Place Metheg where required ! Metheg cannot precede 

3 



silent Sh'va or Dagesh. 



18 Part 1. Exercises. 

.nf?33 d*Vd|3 onbro .p'fnp^riin .onStfn 4l3T! 
.r«5hari .d-usti .HHVI .njpsoi .nnno .ner .Sants* 

t •• : - t t t I -: - •• I : • • tt: t •„• -;- •• t : • 

^H.?^ ^hbfo ♦ttt?** 1 ! .i^Q^pinn .&?♦ .p'Ti 
.H3J89 *t]bw. :vffr\ ^n*qn .rynnjiyr} .rppt *TGgJt 
/k>p ri5j;S .dwti .to nH&nro .pkrfi .^jn 

Note. The Sli'vas under the letters marked with an asterisk 
are silent. 

Exercise 17. 
Give the names of the accents and the classes to which 
they belong: 

nprriS # ^P^l vrcpi ink rpnn 3pj£;^t prhp *njn 
♦a** Sxinn nn>3 trw nna nS Dip :jwd m^m ntr'N* 

j- -: v.- : t ;•• T-: |t jv - | •• ) > J ~ |t : j : ■ k.t ■ 

hp Ski :Tp* t?k pS hi^3b nt?N o&p ^"np) ^m 

-m i?W) :D W ^Fph 0*01 ^ns ill? 3 -! $m* ip9! 
rpT4P p*rnjt Vjntr) 1 ? rjn^ ^Q^ H 1 ? d 07?n n J?1l 

tjv- | •. V- I -:l~ V J t : ■ <- : • - |t t : - : r v: i j- r v -; 

: ifc>jn ipy on np:n ♦rtx ^inh Swra-p pS-Sa d^k 

jt f- : j v -:|- ;•• J t : • j- -: • — : jt - : I v I<tt v ^t~: 

Exercise 18. 
Point out the tone-syllable in the following words : 

,n ; rn .nxrn .-±j# .dh-v ,^p .Dip&3 .>pp -npj/r 
.nnyrn .Dnnjnn^ ^Sin •p2n.|3^ri ^33 oj/# 
♦ppK .ntt? -ow tsrin * 3;id^'d ♦"■?#! ♦ n}ppnr)pKn 
.ornnpi .nntfty .jnvirp .bnnsp.S^r? -nthsj -t^rys 
♦p^l-nW .tpna .p9 •tWP«P F 'pwn .n^p.Dn^.nD-rN 

§ 10. Distinction of Kamets and Kamets-Ciiatuph. 

1. The sign (V) serves at once to represent the long a 
and the short 6. 



> 10. Distinction of ILoiets axo Kamets-Chatuph. 19 

2. M is a: 

1) in an open syllable: as ^TOtT, read shamarta : hence 

2) when Methes; stands on" the left of it: as m2£'\ read 
sham'ra. 

3) the (V) in final "J : as ?Q, read becha. 

4) in an accented syllable : as 1RH, read echad. 

3. It is o ; 

a. in an unaccented closed syllable: as TODn> HOI* - read 
cliochma, omdi : hence 

b. in a closed syllable before Makkef : as °OKPl"7D' read 
kol : and 

c. in the final closed syllable of a word beginning with Yav 

> 

cony. (§ 33) : as DD*1 read vay-ya-kom : 

d. before Chateplf-Kamets : as 1t2^ read yo°macl. 

EXERCISE 19. 

.\i-\p .«n .rror .p"t^ ..be* .msjr .op .mm *nbn 

I _ :|t • t t:t I t : |t t t : |t Jt " : t tt- 

. : mw .rrvoji .bSiirpn /Btis .ip-ip .d*5tk -niins 

t *t : t t . - 1 t - : : i |:|t ■'- : t : t 

. mraE . nprn .nprn -urn . rra . isr • Dnrnc . orrSnN 

tt: t • ) t: |t I t : t " t : t : jt - t:t • - t: t . t - t: t 

•rrv.rrbiK .nSbN .'Sna .n^n .Sbiin -.w^rnm .n&u* 

t t : |t t : t ■ t: t t j ; • t t t - I - ■ t: t r Tt 

men .t^rra -rann .oyn .vras .jo >rh >)by .ph 

•■ T I •• T T ; T ^T T ' T : • T | T T *V J TT" 

.ttShk .njDK ♦ dti .on-n .on:#n -o^iha .rn& .nru 

| v t: t - : jt ■ t t t - ■■ . t|t • — : t • : t • : t 

---It: t t t \ t : V 

§ 11. DISTINCTION OF VOCAL AND SILENT SHTA. 

The Sh'va is yocal : 

1) at the beginning of a word: as 7bp = k'tbl. 

2) in the middle of a word after another Sh'ya: as 
'IDpfi = tlk - t'li. 

3) after every unaccented long vowel : as Y?t0p = ka-t'ln, 
but -Wl!32^ read sha-mar-ti, the vowel before the Sh'va 
being accented. 

4) after a Metheg: as ?|N*V = ye-r'u 3 but iJKT == yir-u . 

5) under a letter having Dagesh : a=; *7l2*3 — kat-t'li. 



20 Part 1. Exercises. 

6) under the first of two similar letters: as V7^n = ha-l'lil. 

7) in most cases under a letter, which is followed by any 
one of the DtD^D without Dagesh: as Op&'=shi-ch'bhl. 

Exercise 20. 

• ffx?xl; ♦IWf > .iflp? .'Dff^## ♦nJntphV OD^pn 1 ? 
♦nvppS ••y3#i ♦ 'W? .Dnrnn .^ra ♦DJi^rn 
.^#W'n -raSp -0^10 *J?i^55 ♦nbnVt??i ♦ DTteiDg 

CHAPTER IE* 

PECULIARITIES AND CHANGES OF LETTERS & VOWELS. 
§ 12. CHANGES OP CONSONANTS. 

1 . The formation and inflection of Hebrew words are ef- 
fected by changes, partly vocal, partly consonantal. 

2. Changes are also made for the sake of euphony, to 
prevent the concurrence of vowels or consonants of difficult 
pronunciation. 

3. The different changes of which consonants are sus- 
ceptible are : Assimilation , Transposition, I? eject ion, Com- 
mutation. 

4. Assimilation. Vowelless 3 in the middle of a word, 
when the syllable is unaccented, is assimilated (made sim- 
ilar) to the following letter, } being dropped and the fol- 
lowing letter taking Dagesh. The Dagesh doubles it, thus 
indicating the assimilation: as C'jp = £K\}\ for $!}*• In 

an accented syllable, assimilation does not take place; fUD^ 

> > 

with the exception of the verb jro to give : Pit)} for P\}P\^ 

* This chapter being placed here for reference, will be passed over 
for the present, as many of the rules can only be understood by the more 
advanced student. 



§ 12. Changes- of Consonants. 21 

If the following;, letter be one of the JttTTW» either 3 is not 
assimilated: as TTtt*, ^N3fl > or the dropping of J is indi- 
cated by the lengthening of the preceding vowel : as HfT 
for fifty. 

The assimilation of other consonants occurs only in the 
following cases : 

7 in the verb ftpb to take : as lip* for Hp_ V. • 
H in the syllable fill of Hithpael before "J; tO amd in a 
few instances before sibilants : as !"?D*Tn for H^'irin > ^HDH 

for nntpnn , Din for ^rnn , oojfen for apVipn « 

n in the relative , # for ^N . 

"1 at the end of a few words before fi, as fi 1 ? for JT17 » 

nnx for nirrK ■ 

* in a few verbs y "£ before y : as p-J\ for p¥" ♦ 

5. Transposition. In grammar, transposition occurs only 
in the case of fi in the syllable J"H of Hithpael before sibi- 
lants, it being easier to pronounce st than ts, thus : 1£fi&*n 
for "Upg'nn . Before y it is even changed into CD : as pTOV} 
for pV^ i 

6. Rejection. Rejection may take place at the beginning, 
in the middle or at the end of a word. 

The following are regularly rejected: 

A. At the beginning. 
Yowelless ♦, 3 (or 7 in the verb lip/) in the Infinitive 
and Imperative of the verbs V '<D and JJ"jD : as 1 7 > JTD from 

iV, \r\ from jru, np, nnp_ from npS. 

4 as a silent consonant after a vocalized * : as D v i3 for D ,v Ll 
from *1j| , 

N is dropped in ^m for Wftjg, in .^ from 7#K. 
i>. 7?z f//e middle. 

1. The first of two similar consonants, when yowelless, 
is not written, but represented by Dagesh forte 1 as 

uni for luru; ma for nms, 

-t ; - t t-t t;-t 

2. In the verbs *§'"$ the first of the two similar letters is 



22 Part 1. Hkercisbb.. 

dropped, even when possessing a vowel, if a vowel less letter 
precedes : as 2D for 32D > ^D for ^30 . 

3. The weak letters ^HX (especially Jl) are dropped or 
quiesce, though having vowels, after a letter with Sh'va: as 
DTO for P!D{2?iig, Dp for D^&j for vS^ 7trh& for 

K often quiesces in the long vowel, resulting from the con- 
traction, of its own vowel or half vowel (Composite Sh'va) 
with the preceding vowel: as fiNVD for HNVb^ ""ON 1 ? for 

io*6, d^hSnS for D>nb?*S dhn for nrn*N .'"' 

"C. At the End. 
At the end of a word J and D are rejected in a few ca- 
ses. The J of the verbal ending p and p— . This original 
J has been very rarely retained : as pJH*> pi^H ♦ D is regu- 
larly dropped in the st. const. Plural : 

as nn f. onn, *ra f.»D»na. 

" T ' T " T • T 

7. Commutation. Commutation comprises a) interchanges 
of consonants with other consonants ; b) Interchanges of 
consonants with vowels. 

a. n interchanges with D> see above § 12, 5. 

Initial *) interchanges with *>, especially in verbs v '£) : as 

-lS* for *lSj. FT for JHV S^p* for S'DpV 
^Tedial 1 interchanges with * on account of homogeneous 
vowels preceding it : as D'D for Dp > D S J1 for ^H . 
Final 1 and * interchange with H : as H ?| for »7J . H^u* 
for V7tP« When the word is lengthened, the original 
consonant reappears : as jl v| ' TO^ • 

b. 1) The conjunction •) "and'', preceding a vowelless letter 
or one of the labials (^pD), is converted into its homo- 
geneous vowel -?|: as *"* iyn for nDII Hgtol for H^JDl • 

t x - it - : 

111 the same manner * following a vowelless letter is 
softened to I : as JlTlftfJ for ITjWa . 
2) In the middle of a word 1 and \ are often contracted 
into a diphthong or a long vowel: as "T7i* for T/V 
(a + a),. yO" for 3*pw (a + i) iSin for -fan (o + u 



§ 13. Peculiarities of the Gutturals. 23 

contracted into u). 1 after Oh irek becomes ) , the Vresting 
in its homogeneous vowel: as D&'ID for 3£>\J, D^'iH 
for y&)Fl . 

o. 1 and * final after a vowelless letter are softened to 
} and '— ': as irifl for inn ; HQ for H3? W for TW. 

§ 13. PECULIARITIES OF THE GUTTURALS. 

1. The gutturals instead of the usual (simple) Sh'va, 
receive the composite Sh'va, (see §5). 

2. They do not admit of Dagesli forte, i. e. they cannot 
he doubled, (see § 7. 4). The half-guttural "1 partakes of 
this peculiarity. The omission of Dagesli causes the length- 
ening of the preceding short vowel : as DTXJl for DltfH > 
1p2 for ^3 . 

H and H> being harder gutturals, in most cases retain 
the preceding short vowel: as ^fli"! • D v n<?- 

3. The gutturals fT- ]?, and j"f (with Mappik) when final, 
require the a sound before them. Therefore they change 
mutable vowels (§14, 1 e) into Patach: as ilSt^ for tTTffii 
if the vowel be immutable, a helping Patach, called Patach 
furtive (.§ 6), is written under them and pronounced before 
them. 

Note. On the gutturals see further Chapter: VII. § § 40, 41/42. 

§ 14. VOWEL CHANGES. 

I. The vowels are immutable or mutable. 
Immutable ; 

a. Vowels regularly written with their homogeneous vowel- 
letters : as N— ,*>— , '— , ), i. 

T 

b. The long vowels defectively written, (§ 3. Note 4.) as 

S'p = bp , on = DKn . 

c. Vowels after which a Dagesh forte has been omitted 
on account of a guttural : as CHI1 for CTT> DTTN for 

d. The short vowel in an unaccented closed syllable : as 

t - : ~ • 

Mutable : 
c. All the long vowels, without vowel-letters and not in- 



24 Part I. Exercises. 

eluded in the eases specified under b) and c), both in 
open and closed syllables : as r7Q\)\ from 7£3p* > H^ft 
from im . 

T T 

/. All the short vowels in open and in accented closed 
syllables : as TwtOftJrom 7£Dp T » 

II. The changes which the mutable vowels can undergo, 
are : Lengthening, Shortening, Rejection and Rising of neio 
vowels. 

Lengthening: The short vowels are made long: 
( — ) becomes ( — ) 

T 

( — ) becomes ( — ) 

(— or — ) become (_) or 0). 

1. When a closed syllable is made an open one: as 
iStpp. for StOp T > 1QD for "Ijpp > DpjlH for DpH , properly D^pil , 

2. Hence when a required doubling of the following letter 
does not take place : as 1)^T] for Tfofrh rHfT for rTFP; 

3. When one of the vowel-letters quiesces in the vowel : 
as NVDJ for m®} . 

t : • - : • 

4. When the final word of a sentence or clause has the 
pause accent : as ft/Dp. for ftyKSjJ » JON for jHX ♦ 

Shortening : The long vowels are shortened : 
(— ) becomes (— )• 

(— ) becomes (— ) or with the strong shortening (— )• 
(_) becomes (— ) or stronger (— ). 

This takes place : 

a. When an open syllable becomes a closed one : *BHp 
for ^'ip ; 

b. When a syllable with Dagesh or a sharpened syllable 
arises ; in this case the strong shortening is used : as 
D^pn from ph> '?# from DN; 

c. When a closed syllable loses the tone ; as DIN'D from 
n, Hifr*""?* from IS ^K-Sd from Sb. 



§ 14. Vowel Changes. 25 

Rejection: The vowel falls away entirely. It occurs, 
when the word is lengthened at the end, so that the ac- 
cent must be thrown forward. This is particularly the 
case : 

1. With pretonic Kamets and Tsere, (the latter gener- 
ally when followed by Kamets: as DD7). Kamets and 
Tsere in an open syllable preceding the tonesyllable, are 
called pretonic: i. e. they are pronounced only before the 
tone and are dropped upon its being moved forward : as 

Stop, rhbr) but brfasp. ~oi but on:n, nr' but vw". 

- I t t : - I t v : - | : t t t .- t •• • t : 

2. With Tsere in a monosyllable: as Dfi?* or in the last 
syllable of a polysyllable, when all the preceding vowels 
are immutable : as -y^, thus *Qtf , On-ltf, Tffi-* DHDiP . 

3. With (-), (••), (_) in the last syllable of verbs, when 
the word is lengthened by an addition commencing with a 
vowel: as nSpfD from Soj3> &PpR from h®p\. 

The following rule regarding the rejection of vowels 
deserves attention : 

When the accent is thrown forward, in nouns, the 
vowel of the penult drops, in verbs, of the ultima. Com- 
pare : H!TT m y word, from "CH word, H St?p she has killed, 
from 7Dp he has killed. 

Rising of new vowels: Instead of Sh'va a new short 
vowel arises : 

I. No word can commence Avith two vowelless consonants 
or with two Sh'vas, therefore the first Sh'va is changed in- 
to Chirek : 

A. When one of the prefixes Sm (§ 18. II, b,) or of the 
preformatives JiTN (§ 31, 1.) which regularly take Sh'va, 
is connected with a word beginning with Sh'va: as *7CPpS 

for S^'pS * Sbj?! for Sb|T * Sbj^ for Sbj>V , 
Note. Respecting ^ before a letter with Sh'va see § 12, 7, b. 

B. /bpK for VtDpNt can serve as a memorial word for the 



following rules 



4 



26 Part I. Exerciser 






a. When the first of two vowelless letters has comp. 
ShVa, the helping vowel is that of the comp. Sh'va : as 
HBftK for HStttf from Q»BftN, W1H for *BHfi from O'BHn. 

•• : - •• : -: * t -: : r ■• . : t: • tt: 

&. When the second of two vowelless letters has comp. 
Sh'va, the helping vowel under the first is again the 
vowel of comp. Sh'va: as 1#*0 for *H?>>0> JT3JT for 

rncp'-i §40, e. 

II. IFM a jpawse accent. When Sh'va is heightened in 
pronunciation by the tone^ either Seghol arises from it, or 
the correspondent long vowel of Comp. Sh'va, or the origi- 
nal vowel which has been dropped by the lengthening of 

the word : as tjS from TtS; ^f7 from hpl; HN^D f. HN^D 
from nSdj n'ftfc" f. HB«# f rom iOtJ* . 

Note. In all the cases given tinder II. the word is 7*J? /£D ♦ 

III. When one of two similar letters or of the weak 
letters ♦IHN drops, (§12, 6 B. 3.) its vowel recedes and 
takes the place of the preceding Sh'va : as JT5? f° r JT3D/ ' 

StOD* for W)fT , bx for yhl » MsSo for UsSnD, DD for MD. 

•J t- • |t • : [r : t •• : - •• : - : : 

3D' for D3D* . 

IV. The meeting of two vowelless final consonants is 
generally avoided : most commonly by the insertion of 
Seghol between the concurring consonants, Patach, if one 
of them is a guttural, Chirek, if one of them is a * 5 Shurek, 
if the last one is 1 : as "ID for 1)2 , JTA for jnt» SjH for 

by\, n*a for rva. nrta formi 



CHAPTER IIL 

§ 15. SERVILE LETTERS. 

1. Letters added to words for the purposes of formation 
or inflection (serving) are called Serviles, while those three 
letters which constitute most frequently the root or the 
radical idea of the word are termed Radicals. 

2. All the 22 letters of the alphabet can be used as 
radicals; the 11 following only as serviles: 

& a n- r \ a, b> o, i, v> n chs) n^to jmo.. 



§ 15. Servile Letters. 27 

They are called prefixes (preformatives) when placed at 
the beginning of a word, suffixes (afformatives) when added 
at the end. 

Note, When the letters added are used to convey the acci- 
dents of tense, gender, number, person (in the nominative case) and 
to form derivatives, they are respectively called according to po- 
sition preformatives and afformatives. 

§ 16. THE PREFIXES fit^D ♦ 

1. Q as a prefix has Chirek and in the following letter 
Dagesh. It is the abbreviation of |p from, away [from \ } out 
of , by, of which the 3 is assimilated, as nnr)p from below, in- 
stead of Jinn |p . Before gutturals the (— ) is lengthened 
to (■) (§14, II. 2): as hvj? from above, instead of: ^ [D, 

Before (1 the lengthening is sometimes omitted : as pfip 
from without ( § 13, 2.). 12 before * becomes *p as DwWTYfi 
from Jerusalem, for D'SgTVD (§12, 1, b.) 

2. —2^' as a prefix, see § 23, 2. 

3. J! as a prefix, an interrogative particle, see § 24, 5. 

4. H as a prefix, the article, see § 17. 

Exercise 21. 

7 nKD & iw 5 rvii9 ^mo 3 c\vp 2 din*d ^TP 
u n®nT2 l3 S^no 12 -vra n i2M io rm:ao ».Ski3 8 ronK8 
20 npnp 19 ^np 18 7inp 17 torrp 16 trtnp 15 ji-qrip 
2G oSirp 25 iir?p ^Di^p 23 N-nrra 22 tp 21 S&p 

. 29 b£rrp 28 ^n9 27 nD^p 

way 1 enemy 2 fire 3 hero 4 house, within 5 pit 6 brother 7 love8 God 9 
covenant 10 man 11 generation, agei2 palace 13 they 14 n. p. of* a city 15 
month 16 thread 17 sandl 8 milk 19 clay 2 *) dew 2 i hand22 n . p. m. 23 day 21 
n. p. of a. city 95 a time unlimited, eternity 26 a maidenS? head, beginning'^ 
n. p. rn. 29 

Exercise 22.* 
From a father 1 ) from Abraham 2 ; from destruction 3 * from 
a cistern 4 , from a lands, from bloods out of a house 1 ?, 

* The learner is advised to form for himself an English- Hebrew vocabu- 
lary, by which his memory may be assisted and a tedious search through, 
the exercises avoided. 



28 Part T. Exercises. 

from a mountain 8 , from Edom^, from Haman 10 , from life 11 , 
from to-morrow 1 2, from a river 1 3, from Jeberechjahu 14 , from 
Jedidja 1 ^ from a Jew 1 ^, from a panther 1 ?, from Nimrod 18 , 
from the Most High^, from a plant2o, from Eden 21 , fromdust22. 

iiD"n io mn 9 din «in 7jv3 6di sv-ik 41x3 3pi3K 2oni3N ok 

It t v: - t • vv •• : I - -; t t: - r 

2onDX 19 rrSi? 18-pdj nioj ifi'"wv i5rr"rr w-irtoirr i3ifor i2mnn 

"v I : . : ' •• t : i : •: t: vv: : tt:t 

:2213j> 21 pjjjP 

§ 17. THE ARTICLE. 

1. The definite article is represented by the prefix Jl 

with Patach and Dagesh in the following letter : as D*bt^' 

heaven, D?5$H the heaven. Before the gutturals, especially 

IJ^tf the Patach is changed into Kamets (§13, 2.) : as 

jnKn the master, 7^H the foot, ^3J$1 the servant. Be- 

> 
fore the unaccented ]f , (1, Jl into Seghol ; as O^D^D the 

> > 

clouds, DHJin the mountains, D3llfl the wise man, hut 

'•TV T T V ' 

> 

2V n the cloud, UlU the mountain, cf. 5. 

*T T ' . T T 

Before H and ll the Patach is commonly retained : as 
D w .nn the life, 7311)1 the vanity. § 13, 2. 

2. A noun without the .11 is to he translated with the 
indefinite article, except the noun in the st. const. (§ 19, 5): 
as JT3 a house. 

3. When the noun is preceded by the prefixes 733 > the 
article is only represented hy its appropriate vowel under 
the prefix and the Dagesh in the following letter (§12, 
6. B. 3.): as 1313 in the word = 131ft3, V^tify to the 

' l T T - T T ~ : J V T T 

land =pX|l% 

4. The Dagesh after the article is often omitted in let- 
ters with Sh'va: as O^JHldVil the frogs, especially in 
nouns with initial *: as liNNl the river, and in participles 
of Piel and Pual (§25, 7.): as 131pil the speaking man. 

5. Some words lengthen the accented vowel, when the 
article is prefixed, e. g. DJfil from DJN f*)N<l ^#f1.^ 

inn from in, mpn from riNp ; 

TT - 7 | T - -|t 



16 



§ 18. The Prefixes rfov 29 

Exercise 23. 
Prefix the article to the following words. 
TV^ft 7 Op2 O^. 5-D^g 4-yjK **yfftt 2pj< igtggf 

enrris^n l4 S^n 13 rrn i2 ]nt n npi3 10 o5n *lvy 
»no"tt* 21 MiD 2(> Vtt mw is^Sn in^'r »#irr 
29 nirr 28 pr 27 ni3n 26 vtr? 25 nn 24Q^n 23^-1 

I T *T T T T - • - V V 

.33 mn 32 mn 31 nnn 30 mrr 

It- t t : v t • 

heaven 1 earth, land2 darkness3 light 4 water 5 evenings place 7 dry 
land 8 herb 9 wise 10 morning 11 seediS animal 13 cord, rope 14 grass 15 newi6 
rich man 17 fat 18 weary 19 pipe 20 star 21 ground, soil 22 foot 23 life 24 spirit 25 
ornament 26 thought 27 cloud 28 majesty 29 riddle 30 joy 31 vision 32 intuition, 
vision 33 . » 

§ 18. THE PREFIXES *±>y\ ♦ 

I. 1 called the conjunctive, Vav denotes: and, as DH/ 
bread 0(171 and bread. It is changed as follows: 

a. Into J| before a consonant with simple Sh'va : bb /1 and 
to all, § 14, Rising I ; or before the labials 3 > > 5 > to 
avoid the recurrence of two sounds of the same organic 
class : as ]>y\ and between, JD1 and from, 1£M and a bul- 
lock (§12, 7, b,). 

6. Into 1 before * becoming quiescent : as Wl and it may 
be « 12,7, b!). 

c. Into ), ), ) before comp. Sh'va, taking the correspon- 
ding short vowel : as *>&) and I, TDK! and eat, *jty\ 
and sickness (§14, Rising I, B. b.) 

d. Into ) before D\i7K: as D^Stf). and God (§ 12, 6. B. 3.). 

Note. Before jTJJT into 1 : as HUT*! ♦ This most sacred name 

t : - t |- 

of God was believed to be incommunicable and the word ^11N 
my Lord substituted for it, according *to which latter word the 
vowels of 1 and the prefixes D733 were adapted, as niPP3 > 
fifth > iTjiTp corresponding to ^fij, >p$h > ^-IgO* W nen 
however, HIIT is already preceded by *jlK ? to avoid repetition, 
it was written with the vowels of D^li/ltf > s0 tnat HiJT ^1N 
is to be read DWK tflK ♦ 

e. Into 1 immediately before the tone-syllable, especially 



30 



Part 1. Exercises. 



when the latter has a distinctive accent and short words 

are connected in pairs : as }H3i ^rifl. desolate and void, 

OIT} 1p cold and heat, vpni Y\p summer and winter. 

Note. !)J"fal shows that ") before ZV2'2 (a) in case of (e) has 
— and is not ) , 

T , 

II. a. 5wO* 3 preposition of place and time: in, on, 
among: as H^fcOD in the beginning, "1H3 on a mount- 
ain, 7$nfi5^3 amongst Israel, or it has the force of the 
prepositions: with, by, through: as JJN3 with a stone, 
*"D"!? w ^ n or °y a word. 
5 adv. and prep., generally expressing comparison and 
proportion answers to the words : as, like, so, about, nearly, 
almost: (HX? as a land, H|)*iO about an ephah, ib^J/D 
Q\Jw* about ten years. As prep.: according to, after, 
when, (comparing the time of two actions) ^HID^D after 
our likeness, *7ip 'DHH3 when I lifted up my voice, 
T?£?rf T? according to the bounty of the king. 
I." Kings 10, 13. 

7 prep., denoting motion or direction toward any ob- 
ject, to, unto, towards, for, hence it is the sign of the 
dative (§ 19, 2.): ptfS to a land, T[S??S to or for a king. 

b. 3»70 always with Sh'va except in the following cases : 

1. With Chirek = 3> 7 5 3' before a word which has 
Sh'va under the first letter : as "Q"]3 D 7 tne word of, "O"! 1 ? f > 
•Q-p- (14. Rising I. a.) 

Before * the * becomes quiescent (§ 12. 7. b.): as >p*3 

in the days of iTTIiTy to I. H*3 as tne hands of. 

2. JF^A (t), (-), (-) before composite Sh'va : as fOO 
in truth; "tDJH to stand, vHD as a sickness; or when dis- 
placing the article Jl (§19, 3.) : as Di*3 = DiTD in the day, 
OZrh = DpnnS to the wise, f*]n = fynS on the tree, but 
DV-J in a day, i*J?5 on ^a tree. 

3. With Kamets = a, often before the tonesyllable, 

> > 

especially before monosyllabic particles; OPD in them, HO 



§ 18. Prefixes rtol. 31 

as this, t&Zijh to a soul, person, 7 before several forms of 
the pronouns and the infinitives of verbs : as HP to this, 
H /N 1 ? to these, fD77 to go. Before nouns with a clistinct- 

V " T ' V V T tJ 

ive accent, especially when short words are connected in pairs : 
as: D'BS D?5 p? between water and water, JT^SS Vtt |d ' 
between stroke and stroke. 

Exercise 24. 
Exactly translate the following words. 

atyyhztyyh riflh '*dW? ^S? ^nS; 1 ?? >d*m >d?d? 
.ategno afrjige .pic ,p*o Jftjirrs wpsa iDipra 
#nSi ,««fy*^ -TTiira »rr"Sf«TO ^rrwo ^ww > 4 ^ijto5 
stejm ,To^n, 8 ntoD nruVi nmh ,nmS .pw-tcji ,b&kd 

TT - : TT- TT T T — : TT- TT; • T " • " 

.^?np ^£9 ,7^91 £|Wt! ,^@g ,T|^3 i».^ .1BD1 

nightf image 2 dry land 3 bird 4 field 5 man 6 river 7 rain 8 king 9 - 

Exercise 25. 
Translate into Hebrew. 
And light, 1 and the light, and in the light, to the earth 
and to the heaven, and the fruit, 2 and fruit, and from the 
fruit, evening and morning, day and night, I and he, 3 
and Jacob's hands, 4 and to an animal, and in a land, and 
in the land, and a river, and Jonathan, 5 and Jerusalem, 
in Jerusalem, to a man, 6 to the man, from a tree, from 
the tree, from morning, from the morning, in a cloud, 7 in 
the cloud, as an image, as the image, to a bird, to the 
bird, from the bird, from a man. 

.7jjj£ 6D*™ 5 jJJJfrv o'piWT 3 N ? ' n ."Jg 2, "?s nik 

Exercise 26. 

•• t t : - •• t : • : : ^ t | t 

: 15 T]Sin u rpnz 13 Vp5n : 12 aro U ^P55 10 n?j?P? •itf? 

* 8 teas rich. In sentences with a noun, pronoun or adjective in the 
predicate, the copula (i to be" must always be supplied. See §77, 1. 



32 Part I. Exercises. 

22 mini 21 mvD 20 ^ :m 19 *w 18 jno : 17 nyur 36 nvro 

t : t : • . t tt m — "t : t 

?S$£ "nbaj : 27 Sk 26 nnN dSijt 35 ^ ^oSiyip : 23 niK 
:»^*aKpj *pr^5 34 dj : 33 rpra 32 Sn^' M pra 30 n>v 

v t - • V v t : ■ I • t T T t : 

50 d^i 49 \tevt? 48 T)y%m 47 rnr?9 :*aaj 45 nira 44 SiNtr 

:nirr 52 Dtr' 51 S^hd 

t : •• t \ : 

not 1 arose 2 prophet 3 since 4 Moses5 Israel^ Abraham? rich 8 very 9 
cattle 10 silver 11 gold 1 ? fool 13 darkness 14 walks 15 § 18. I. Notei6 deliverance 17 
evil 18 goes out 19 lamp 20 commandment 21 law 22 light 23 eternity 24 to 25 thon 
(art) 26 God 27 says 28 slothful one 29 lion 30 without 31 roarer 32 way 33 also, 
even 34 laughter 35 may ache 36 heart 37 he was 38 thief 39 abroad 40 destroys, 
makes childless 41 sword 42 death 43 n. p. m. 44 chosen 4 5 good, beautiful 46 east 47 
west 48 north 49 sea 50 (in general the Mediterranean Sea, lying west of Pales- 
tine, hence: the west, but sometimes the Dead Sea or as here the South 
Sea, therefore here: the South.) is praised 51 name of 52 . 

§ 19. CASES OF NOUNS AND PRONOUNS. 

1. To express the relations between the different nouns 
and pronouns in a sentence, Prepositions or the correspon- 
ding Prefixes D^OS are chiefly used. 

2. The Dative is formed by the prep. 7N or its abbrevi- 
ation the prefix S (§ 18, II). 

3. The Ablative is formed by the prep, JO or its abbrevi- 
ation, the prefix D, Q or by 3 and 3 (§ 16, 1. § 18, 11). 

4. The Accusative is denoted by the jmrticle j")N or "HN 
(i. e. before Makkef) when the noun is definite, i. e. defined 
by the article, a possessive pronoun (Suf. § 21), a follow- 
ing genitive or by itself as a proper noun, otherwise it has 
no designation, being entirely similar to the nominative: 
as pKH nNl P!£trn DN the heaven and earth, 'fl-flN my 
son, hDNiTp ilN the son of the servant, DH^DN fl8$ Abra- 
ham, but Gen. 2, 4: In the day that God made &M) j>"|N 
earth and heaven. 

f>. The Genitive or possessive case remains entirely un- 
ci) an ged, with which the preceding noun, (which is limited 
and more nearly defined by the Gen.) is most closely con- 



§ 19. Cases of Nouns and Pronouns. 33 

nected. For this reason the latter is said to stand in the 
Construct State, or simply in the Construct. 

The "better to effect this connection the article of the Con- 
struct is thrown off and its mutable vowels are shortened : as 
D^DJl the horse, but 7| P&TJ DID the horse of the king (not 
D1DH); fjiyri the fowl, but &D®n?)ty the fowl of the heaven 

(not rpyn)/ 

Kegarding the shortening of the vowels and other 
changes, which the word in the st. const, undergoes, see § 59, 

6. The direction towards a place or the time is indicated 

by the unaccented syllable !"!— appended to the noun, called 

> 
local H— ♦ as D* sea, ity towards the sea, }i$S the north, 
> > 

rUijDV northward, towards the north. Q\!D* year, HD'D* to 

T T ' ■ T * ■ ' T ■ T 

year, j"7£*p* D*p*D from year to year. 

Note I. Local j"J — is the remnant of an old accusative Q — , 

T T 

yet appearing in many adverbs : as DD1* by day, in the day time, 
Dmrtft to-morrow, (cf. § 85. 4, B, B.) 

T tt; t \ O 

Note II. On the Segholates with local H* se e § 66, Note I. 

Exekcise 27. 

6 n^N3 nirr 5 ^tb 4 rhn in : 3 isi±> *pnv lta or 

■.■:•::• t : •• : • | - t • t t t : ■ | 

t : -t: t ..... |t t: ■ 

17 wi in : i6 njrv3 dW 15 nm H rah&2 nut 13 nw 

^TUfl??? ®n# 2 ^41 "alien nxi 20 >oi ]9 jk¥3 ™nyi 

nnyp p k stt? : 29 pinp sw 28 rj;^ 27 Sd^o 26 n£ ^dkhd 

: 35 p- 34 Np? 33 b# 32 n?rv r^p : 3 snnr]pn S*n^ 30 ypi 

41 p 4o n ^ 3 imy\ s 39 ^pj5 38 ^^'5 ♦npw'n 37 nSj; 36 *p 

4 nionS 46 ra 45 did^ 44 Di£> : 43 Td3 S'ddS 42 m*o-Kb 
_. _ v v _ T . . . ._. T 

:d^dd 49 ^ 4S to3^"i 

memory 1 just2 blessing 3 walked 4 before 5 truth 6 righteousness? offer 8 God 9 
thanksgiving 10 good 11 all 12 to wrap, to put on 13 garment 14 stretches 15 
curtain 16 was 17 shepherd 18 small cattle 19 came 20 bear 21 took 22 lamb 23 flock 24 
eater 2 5 came forth 26 food 27 strong 28 sweetness 29 moved on 30 desert 31 sitting 32 

5 



34 Part 1. Exercises. 

on, in, over 33 throne 34 judgment 3 ^ who ? 36 ascended 37 snow38 summer 39 
harvest 40 thus 41 becoming, suitable^ honor 43 a whip 44 horse 45 bridle 46 ass 47 
a stick 4 ^ the back49. 

Exercise 28, 
Translate into Hebrew: 
The evening (accus.), to the evening, to an evening, a 
man (nom.), a man (accus.), the man (accus.), from a 
man, from the man, the head 1 of the man, the head of a 
man, from the heaven, the grass of the earth, the land 
(aceus.), the land (nom.), a land (accus.), a land (nom.), 
the light of the heaven, to the judge 2 , to the jndge of the 
land, to a judge of the land, the fruit (accus.) of the trees. 
God created 4 earth and heaven. God created the earth and 
the heaven, the voice 5 (accus.) of God, a voice (accus.) of 
God, a voice (nom.) of God, the sign 6 (accus.), a sign 
(accus.), by a sin?, by the sin, towards the east^ towards 
the south9, to the mountain, towards Samaria 1 ^. 

: io pnpty 9QiTj 8rnrp 7j\p 6 mat sSfp 4 *03 3y% sogg? i#*n 



CHAPTER IV. 

OF THE PRONOUN. 
§ 20. THE PERSONAL PRONOUN. 

1. The personal pronouns are either separate words or 
syllables, contractions of the first and appended to nouns, 
verbs or particles, thence receiving the name of Suffixes, 
The separate pronouns represent the nominative, (see ex- 
ception to this § 93, 2.). The suffixes appended to the verb 
stand for the accusative and for the dative in rare instances. 
The suffixes appended to the noun properly stand for the 
genitive or possessive cases and then serve the purpose of 
possessive pronouns : as *D1D the horse of me = my horse. 
The suffixes appended to particles either represent the nomi- 
native or the accusative cases: as ^1D-D as I, VVIN me. 

T * ■ 



§ 20. Tiie Personal Pronoun. 35 

2. The separate personal pronouns are : 

Sixgular. Plural. 

p5i« , in pause ^N | ftiftjg » W&) | 

fm. fTOK, " " nriN] fm. DfiK [ 

2 * jf. ^,(P^p^nK)m[ tnou 2 -jf. fo»-r?j®f) yc 



we 



fm. nm he fm. DH, fieri 



Wj 



3 - j"£ wi she 3 - ]f. jn, pranj-4 - 

i i T $ 

3. Remarks, ^tti is the ancient form and more used in 
the Pentateuch than OK , while the latter occurs often in the 
later books. fifiX* compounded of nn^Xi as the kindred 
dialects have : Chalcl. HFUX > fi3N » Arab. anta. 

The fern, form *fiN occurs only in k'thibh (7 times), 
but it is the foundation of some verbal inflections, (so the 
form VTpDp before suffixes, § 43, 1.) Wft is of common gen- 
der in the Pentateuch and also signifies she. But whenever 
SOJ7 stands in the text for N\*7> it has the pointing NIPT 
and must be read NVt- 

^("UK is formed from the pronominal stem |K found in 
*}ti,3 tlftK and Up tn e harder form of. Qg we; DfiN and 
JfiK are blunted forms ofDIHK' properly Olfi^K (Chald. 
pn^Kj Arab, antum). Before verb. suff. this original form 
is retained (§ 43, 1.). DPT. \tl from DV7* pfi, hence not 
seldom the 2. and 3. masc. plur. in p J as pj^3^!» P'TDS 
DI^W! Is- 35,. 1. HQIIj Jl^n have a demonstrative character. 

4. The separate pronouns, when connected with a noun 
as predicate of a sentence, always include the copula or 
the verb to be: as £]DV ON I am Joseph, WWtl fifiN thou 
ar£ the man. 

Exercise 29. 

jWwiw :Snon : 2 ^'iip nna :mn»-n2W , *?FfQ 

t ■ t • ~: ..... j TT _ T . t _ j t 

: 5 pTiK mr\ ^tranwri niaa nm j&gtei pnx ran 



36 Part 1. Exercises. 

I V t t ■ t •• t •• v v • • v: t : ~~: 

: 12 oni^n nan : [£in «rvfo3 : n atete nsjj Hn nrw 10 i£y x 
DiarnrvnriK n^ma i5 d^ ^wy &Mf : 13 mw^ 

t : x - : t -: ■ - t "r " : T . ■ -.: 

•sop 19 nn ^ kvtdj ^Twsrrn :nih i7 wrK j^rtan 

I •• t : |t • - T ~ : - : • -: t - • 

pin rrirr d» ^n* jrwrrSy ruwi DW3 Dt?V**n 

I •• : T : • |t -It j v t t *^ t - : • - t - ■ v: T 

23 nSd »& pan-riM DWn-nt? : B j?i?>iD 21 HJ^3P 
28 fpl x efyi : 25 D^£np ^iiKl p'l^ti niftj :niir ^osj 
3 nr^ni *on9# 28 nno r^rti 3^9 nnt^n-p 27 k? 

blessed 1 holy 2 woman 3 the first4 the lasts honest, upright (J3; pi. m. O'X?, 
pi. f. niJ3 $ 58, l.) 6 idols 7 vanit}', foolish 8 stranger 9 dust 10 thou shalt return 11 
Dm'3: pl.fr. liSti cfA 12 the only child (girl) 13 twelve 14 brothers 1 ^ forgiving™ 
my sister 17 younger 18 bare 19 son 20 beside me 21 Saviour 22 filling 23 declaration 2 * 
guilty 25 old 26 came 27 mountain 28 n. p. m. 29 dwelled 30 n. p. of a city 31 . 

Exercise 30. 

Ye are strangers* with me 2 - Lord, thou art a refuge 3 
to us from generation 4 to generation. From eternity 5 
to eternity thou art God. Not a G-od delighting^ (in) wicked- 
ness? thou art. I am dust and ashesS. God is in heaven and 
we are on the earth. Justs art thou Lord ! Thou art neario 
Lord ! Ye are a 1] seed of falsehood 12 . 
lo-ai'iD 9 p^ 8 *\3x 7#Bh 6|'2n soSty <nn 3|tyn snsjt iona 

(in pause!) 12 1 T)p 11 jpy 

§ 2.1. NOMINAL SUFFIXES. 

1. The nominal suffixes appended to Nouns in the Singu- 
lar are ; 

Sing. Plural. 

1. com. *— i 'DID my horse. 13 > 1J— . 1JD10 our horse 
m . ^ (in pause 7|-) TjpID } D? . D?D1D ) 

2. „ ,_ ^ **l fc -. > thy h. " " " ,_ ? your horse 

f. 7|, rj— rjp^iD C J p> ppiD y 

in. in, i. iDIDhish. DH, D— DD1D ) (poetical) 

:i - T > IP— 

' f. n ) n T ,(n-)npiDherh. jn, j T , pin 



their hon 



se 




§ 21. Nominal Suffixes, 37 

Appended to Nouns in Plural : 

Sing. Plur. 

my horses W— , WD1D our horses 

ny-> ay o^o ) 

thy horses ■ ^ ^^ J your horses 

his horses DfT— > DiTD'lD ) (poetical) 
n»p 1D her horses [H-, fri'DlD \ ^F^ 

2. Bemarks. The suffixes of the noun are divided into 
two classes : of Singular and of Plural nouns ; the forms 
of the latter are longer and may he recognized hy the 
plural t ; as Up^D our horse, hut Wp^D our horses. 

3. The suffixes Dp> p> and DH> JH , they invariahly 
having the tone, the better to distinguish between the D 
and the pare called grave, the others are light suffixes. 

4. ^1— is a favorite longer suffix for '1, particularly 
in monosyllabic words and in nouns with the ending if— : 
pp species, i^D and MlTO his, its species ; PIN*)'? appear- 
ance, ^HfrOp his appearance. 

5. The suffixes denote the genitive of the pronoun (§ 20, 1). 
The other cases are represented by attaching prepositions 
or prefixes and particles to the suffixes. The dative by 
^ or 7; the accusative by fltf (VT.K) '■> the ablative by 112 > 
3>71K (>ftt$) etc, See Paradigm A. 

6. The possessive pronoun is also represented by*C* 
(§23, 2.) followed by S with the suffix, thus: >W == 
**7 Ij?^ which is (belongs) to me = my. See Paradigm A. 

Note. On the suffixes of the verb see § 42. 
Exercise 31. 

rb txfacf rnfr isfatt rfa \bw x o^ iwrhx nirr >±ik 

I: tv vt | : v ■" • v v, I v v: ,:--., 

•7 nm :M&]rn$ hin; 5 tw&j in : 4 itvoj 3 d# 2 ]mi; 

DDITI u fi^pN :DDS 10 DiW JDftb 9 DttD 8 -DN TD^D 1 ' 

T T : I T I •• V T T V *• T _ T T ; • : 

is^np^rifp "TprnnN j.^Vapfffl 13 JW 12 ni3 :^idd 
: 21 ^tdp wn *°nryf :DpiM 19 rnS *S dj : 18 j\x 17 d-jk;> 



38 Pakt 1. Exercises. 

• •••-: x : - : t \ : - t : | : * t v — . - T 

imo$ rb m^as fea 30 Wi£> nav : 29 Tirm 28 ra^m 

t | :t : - •• t- -: -.. -. 

:7|7 ^tiflis 32 DHi^ wffa& 31 nnjn 

vineyard 1 strength 2 withs might* will forsake 5 people, nations 
safety, protection? perished, was lost8 refugeQ peace, welfare 10 intelli- 
gent 11 who digs 12 pitis shall fall 1 * good man, pious 15 upright 10 man, 
here collect, men 1 ? there is none 1 ® heart, understanding 1 ^ drink 2 ° cistern 12 
also 22 rock23 shelter 24 strength 25 greatness 26 glory 2 ? victory28 majesty 2 ^ 
rulingso nowSi thanking* 2 , cf. to 32, 33, § 107, 3. 

Exercise 32. 
His light, our light, my tree, their tree, her tree, thy 
tree, thy trees, his day 1 , thy (fern.) day, my stars, our 
star, our stars, to the fruit of his tree, thy voice, my be- 
ginning, thy (fern.) beginning 2 ? your beginning, thy (ac- 
cus.) voice, the voice of G-od. I am giving^ from the fruit 
of your trees to the ruler* of the city 5. The strengths of 
my arm 7 . The light of our torches 8 ; the sand9 of their 
shores 10 . 

.ios|in sSi'n 8 T3S 7jgii 6ri3 syj? 4 l ?^d 3jn: ajvefrn mr 

Exercise 33. 
God created him, us, me, them (fern.), her, I gave 1 thee 
from it, from them, I come 2 to thee (m) (f.), and she came 3 
to him, to them, to us, I (am) with thee, in it, by us, as 
we, as I. G-od took 4 him, thee, thee (in pause), thee (f.), 
I shall establish 5 my covenants with 7 you, with them, with 
him, with her, with thee (f.). 

• • - v • : It I-t t - t • -t 

§ 22. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. 

1. m. nn 

.' \ this 
F. fSM \ (rarely fit) 

Com. M (without distinction of gender or number.) 
Plur. rh$j 6tf rarely) these. 
Note. In Jit /H or apocopated J?,*! this, the demonst. has the 



§ 22. Demonstrative Pronoun. 39 

original article with 7: (Sjl) before it; W7H f. occurs only 
once Ez. 86, 35. 

2. The demonstrative referring to a remoter object is repre- 
sented by wnn, Wtin> DC?n. fnrr : as onn D'fifa 

in £7io«se days, while Jly^H D*?*3 in £7ie«se days ; or they ex- 
press: the same: as NIHil t^Kll the same man, 

3. The demonstratives are thus declined: 
Norn. HN TW this, H^N these. 
Dat. nih, niih to this, nW? to these. 

vt : ' v ■ t 

Acc. nrnj*, nNrn^ this, h^ntin these. 
I r?ra> nrio* roto- rnao 

4. Syntactical rules. § 94.* 

Exercise 34. 

v •• • t : - v •* " t • t -: - w - t v t - 

^ -t t t : *- t • : - t w - v • ■•.•••: 

9 Sv? nW 8 njfl jnjn ditt 7 nj; ng>6 wqrr)** k*n 
n*l?0 rir*6) t]mjn rip* 1 ? : n ^p?n S*3 ftWi 10 np?n»n 
-D| : 15 N3 n.n "nam? nj 13 my :nW? D*r?% 12 ^m nS 
:n^'NH nar :b*nh nih : 18 iriD tt : 17 nSin 16 njn rir 

T • T • T T *T T 

21 dp 21 n'r 20 ^ nW 19 mrW :nwi msfttr? ;min r\mr\ 
... .... T . . - T . T T . T 

in »*jtwroy irwrrhz ffl rw&i m?^ a nfin 21 nm 

• : -t w ~ I V T T T T : t ...... VT: T . 

27 on x^nn #wi mm 26 io^* 21 ni*N "prptf? »t0 &$ 

:jno 2 nm dwk 28 ntj ntr'n 

^ t •• t : • v: •• • t t : 

* The learner must refer to the respective paragraph before translating 
the exercise following, and in all cases when his attention is called to the 

Syntax. 



40 Part 1. Exercises. 

city 1 words2 I have redeemed 3 thou hast made, performed 4 knew 5 
sepulchre 6 unto? lo! behold! 8 shadow, shelter, 9 wisdom 10 money 1 * 
chosen 12 while yet 13 (was) speaking 14 came 15 evil 16 sore 17 strength 18 
three 19 sons of2o n. p. 21 was overspread22 I formed 23 chariot 24 we will re- 
member 25 his name26 plain 27 fearing 28 departing 29 . 

Exercise 35. 

This man 1 , that man, that woman2, this woman, these 
men 3 , these women^, those men, those women, this is the 
man, that is the woman, these are the men, that is the 
words, from that man, to this woman, this is my God, 
this boy 6 , this is the law^, this pillar 8 , these are the 
namesQ of the sons l o, those brothers 11 (ace.), these are thy 
uncles 12 . 
jmo^f. sn^Df. 7rrrffi 6 "un 5 "i:n 4 d^3 sd^bur 2 n^« i^k 

.12DHn HDT1R iOD'J!! 9nfDttf the names of 
• t : 

§ 23. THE RELATIVE. 

1. The relative pronoun for both genders and numbers 
is *K£W who, which; often including the pers. pronoun: he 
who, she who, that which: "1KJ1 Itftf he whom thou 
cursest. 

2. In the later biblical books and the modern Hebrew 
writers, the abbreviated form . fi? or ,g> (with following 
Dag., omitted before gutt.) is most frequently used. 

3. 1S$J (or t yf) gives to every word to which it refers 
relative signification: as D^ there, D^° *fi#N where, *1^K 
Dt8^"D whence. 

T • 

4. It is declined as follows : 



Gen. 


(ID^lD his horse) 


iDID TtSfti whose horse 


Dat. 


CiS to him) 


iS *")## to whom 


Ace. 


(iniN him) 


iniK i#%t whom 


Abl. 


(I)©?? from him) 


^{DD ir'K from whom. 



5. Before participles the article fl frequently . represents 
the relative : as TlVinH he who goes. 



§ 24. The Interrogative Pronoun. 41 

Exercise 36. 

m i*!T5iap3 5 B7p^ 4 d^1 : 8 "t3h? 2 im M nn ing% 
11 mb lo :n 9 np Jp*cn p?9^3 8 nb>j; rnrr 7 f§n n#i* 
15 tp*???g> p ; # rjS i4 w :b 13 nm ngfttj? nw 12 j§¥ n#** 
: 20 iaS 19 mo* rfliT p!i dik3 18 nton* nfcte -our? 17 -win : 16 iitt 

t t : I • t t t - : • v -: v V - t - t 

*dmS "rhBKnvr : 23 inco^nin^ 22 D^itr'Nn^n *h#K 

• t-;|t : t : |t t : • t : t v ~: v v ~ •• : ~ 

oyn new 1? 30 n:Dr oyn n^K ;ra Trirw ♦ay 

, t v: t :|v 

spirit 1 with 2 may speak" fishes 4 are taken^ net 6 wishing, desiring 7 he did 8 
how 9 great 10 goodness 11 has laid up 12 confide, trust 13 woe 14 the king 15 a boy, 
a youth 16 cursed 17 trusts^ departs 19 3 1 ?, nS) heart 20 hail! happy ! 21 makes 22 
trust 23 said 24 mother in law 25 thou goest 26 I will go 27 thou lodgest 28 I will 
lodge 29 thus 30 - 

Exercise 37. 

The field which Abraham boughti. The horse 2 upon 4 
which the king 5 rode 3 . Daniel^ whose name 8 was called 7 
Belteshazzar9. Not good 1 ** (i s ) the counsel 11 that he has 
given 12 . Nigh 13 is the Lord 1 * to all 15 that call upon him 1 ^ 
in truth 17 . And 18 God^ saw 18 all that he had made 2 **, and, 
behold 21 , (it was) very 22 good. 

(his name TDK') 8 tDV 7t-OpJ 6^1 5 f?D 4rSy 33m 2 D!D imp 

it no* M*ronp'' is Vs urriir 13 unp 12 vy nnvj? lomto p.i2t«^Sja 

..... •-tI:- t : It I -t t" t ~ - : :~- 

* . 23 -ixp 22 ^'d 2l n^ni 2 on^ "-d^k 18 n*h 

§ 24 THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 

1. The interrogative pronoun is ^ who? usually applying 
to persons, HD> HD* PlD what? applying to things. 

tlD before N and *) and always in pause: hyNjID what 
(are) these, DJVN*"] HO what did you see ? 

Commonly it is written pjjg or ♦ HD (followed by Dag.): as 
ifttrTTD what is his name ? or with a small word, it is con- 
tracted into one word: as HJD what is this? (§9. 1. Note.) 

HD before H» H > V '• as H* CW MO what hast thou done ? 

T T ^T T W T 

6 



42 Part I. Exercises. 

At the beginning of a sentence jlp also frequently stands 
before letters not guttural : as Tip Hp what voice ? 

2. The cases are indicated by the prefixes and the par- 
ticle riK- 

Dat. >£)S to whom ? 

Ace. *p riK whom ? 

*PP from whom? 
Jbj with or through whom ? 
The Gen. by *P78? whose? but more frequently it is 
indicated by putting the interrogative immediately after the 
noun: as 'pTQ whose daughter? 'p"""^3 through whose 
hand? DJ17 HpTlppn Jer. 8, 9. the intelligence of what 
remains to them? 

3. npis also used adverbially; as D^TTpl D1D"Hp how 
good and how pleasant ! 

4. Interrogative particles: W or ITK where? with suif. 
n?*X where art thou? i*N where is he? D^N where are 
they? 

With adverbs and pronouns, Jl? *N which ? what ? 
where ? whither ? JltD *X whence ? from what ? fiNP *K 

V ' T 

on what account ? wherefore ? rO*N how ? JiiW where ? 

T 

5. Interrogative prefix: Jl (Jl with comp. Sh'va) fre- 
quently before non-gutturals : as 17 017^71 is he well ? Jl 
before a letter with Sh'va or a guttural : as p7"i7N DJHJ^Tn 
know ye Laban ? 7]7K!l shall I go ? H before gutturals 

having Kamets : as *3^&?D have (or am) I ? fctflil pjnn is he 
strong ? 

In negative sentences this M is always connected with 
the negative particle: as JnypW K/.D nas ^ ^ nou n °t heard? 
^37p? filrP }*KD is not the Lord in our midst ? 

Exercise 38. 

3 rpb> *p :hw 2 nnb>i; rtinn? >3 hWSm ^t-nS v 
an ftp w : 7 D^n nj >p-/3 : fi i^ *m&) 4 n^ ^W? 



§ 24. The Interrogative Pronoun. 43 

-no :ni.TD^*a rriM >d : 9 «n«b 8 dk nnx «Sn trrntf 

t: ■ '• t I " t • ■• t : * t- t-: tt 

noK 19 on wn >5 *eb 18 *i9N 17 Dinn fiDprtn 18 itk : i5 to^„ 

25 11^ >pS 24 D^HD ^S 23 >i!tf* >pS 22 >iN >pS : 21 Hfttf 20 fN 

~Sy 30 DnnxDS 29 d^t 28 mSS:>n »oS 27 D^n 26 d^s vjS 

J .. . T . . _. _. . _ _ T T T - w - " • It- 

34 B*q : 33 ^nSir pa jw'idi pnv^N niftap D'riS^ my 
M n^S 88 ?n^ >a : 37 rnpn >w ^ 36 m : 35 nK nto^S 

• : v - I - 1 ■ - 1 t - t t Ivy- t t t - 

43 nnr>n nA n\n no mrr 42 ni^r : 41 W *» ^S : 40 n:o 

~ ~ -: t t t v t : : • -r — : • : t ■ 

nil? hrno :™d^s 

knows 1 has wrought 2 * the feminine is used for the neuter § 81, 1. made 
thee 3 chief 4 judge 5 over 6 youth 7 or 8 enemy 9 the planter 10 ear 11 he shall 
hear 12 the former 13 eye 14 he shall see 15 where (is) 16 depth 1 ? says 18 sea 19 
(it is) not 20 with 21 woe' 22 misery 23 contentions' 2 ^ sorrow 25 wounds 26 without 
cause 27 darkening of 28 eyes 29 that tarry long 30 wine 31 knows (prop, (is) 
knowing) 32 besides, except me 33 there is, it is 34 father 35 womb 36 ice 37 gave, 
put 38 the insight, mind 39 understanding 40 toiling, labouring 41 remember^ 
in stead of 43 . 

Exercise 39. 
Who art thou my son 1 ? Who art thou my daughter 2 ? 
Who is this man? What is his name 3 ? Who are these? 
Whose daughter is this maiden 4 ? What has he done 5 ? 
Who is this that cometh 6 from EdonV 7 ? For whose son do I 
labour8? Whom wilt thou sends with me™? What is that 
in thine hand 11 ? Is 12 in a dreami 3 truth ? Whose ox* 4 have 
I taken 15 ? or 16 whose ass 1 7 have I taken ? or 18 whom have 
I defrauded 19 ? or 18 of whose hand have I received 29 (any) 
bribe 21 ? Is he strong 22 or 23 weak 24 ? What is the land* that 
he dwells 25 in, is it good 29 or bad 29 ? is it fat 2 ? or lean28 ? 
Is not one 29 father 39 to us all 31 ; has not one God created us 32 ? 
What did this people do unto thee? Who has done this? 
9nS^n sSdjt. 7 dhk 6 K3 enfrjj 4 nDSj£ stdb> 2^3 (r»|) i'ja (ji) 
rnvon (uonj.) 161 15, nnpS wifttf lsoi'Sn 12^ (hand t) ,ii*jt io*jd# 

fefem. yy»* 24 nan interrogative PI 23 22 pm 21123 20, ^npS 19, ^P^ 18 1 



44 Part I. Exercises. 

31*73 ,*. 90* 2. 303N 29"»nX 28 HP 27njD# 26^1 ,7131£3 fem. 3U3 25 3tfT 

T TV I" T T" : T T . T 

:82««na ,71^73 ,1^3 withsuff. 



CHAPTER V. 

OF THE VEEB. 
§25. GENERAL VIEW. 

1. The verbs classified with respect to their origin are: 
a. Primitives : as THD to govern ; b. Derivatives, which 

are either derived from other verbs : Verbal Deriva- 
tives: as p^V to justify, from pT^ to be just, or are de- 
rived from nouns : Denominatives: as W^\ to remove the 
ashes, from W 1 ! ashes, 

2. The groundform or stem of the verb is the third per- 
son singular of the preterite : ^Dp he has killed. It regu- 
larly consists of three consonants (radicals), the most import- 
ant vowel of which follows the second radical ; in transitive 
verbs it is Patach : as 7t?p > in intransitives, Tsere or Cho- 
lem: as 1J3 he was heavy, JOp he was little. The Kamets 
after the first radical is pretonic and drops when the tone 
or accent is thrown forward : as DH^pD you have killed. 

3. The infinitive construct, *7bp to kill, is another ground- 
form and was so considered by the earlier Jewish Gram- 
marians, being called by them &H&? root. It consists of 
the three radicals with only one vowel, after the second. 

4. These groundforms are both of great importance, 
controlling the other forms of the verb derived from them. 

Note. From the infinitive as the second groundform are deriv- 
ed the imperative and future. In some guttural and irregular 
verbs, where the infinitive is differently vocalized from the impera- 
tive or takes a nominal ending, the future is derived from the 
latter. 

5. The modifications of the simple and primary idea of 
the root are effected by external variations of the ground- 
form. These variations are threefold : 



§ 25. General View. 4o 

a. Vocalization, or the alteration of the vowels : as tl7&' 

l " T 

he sends, Vr?& he dismisses. 

b. Reduplication, or the doubling of one, and in rare in- 
stances of two of the radical sounds: as 7©p=i 7t?tpp» 

*7(gh "vvnp fr. nnp. 

c. Augmentation, or the prefixing of one or two formative 
consonants : as ^Dp3 > /'t?pn > /^pH > 7L?prn ♦ 

6. These new forms, more properly called derivations, 
having altered not only their external form but also their 
internal sense, are now generally termed Conjugations, in 
the language of the ancient grammarians 0*^3 buildings, 
forms. 

7. The ancient grammarians, who employed the verb 
7^3 to do, as a paradigm, named the conjugations, accor- 
ding to the various forms derived from this verb, thus: 

1. PJ?}} ~ Paal, he acted, (now generally 7p) ♦ 

2. byp} — Niphal, he was acted upon. 

3. 7^3 — Piel, he acted vigorously. 

4. ^JfJ ~~ Pual, he was vigorously acted upon. 

5. /*]/*$n — Hiphil, he caused to act. 

6. 7l?$n ~~ Hophal, he was caused to act. 

7. 7#3nn — Hithpael, he acted upon himself. 

These terms have been retained with the exception of 
the first, which has been supplanted by the equally an- 
cient: 7p_ light, intimating, that it is the simple original 
form, without external or internal change, while the other, 
six are DH33 grave or heavy i. e. freighted with a weight- 
ier meaning, which brings with it a corresponding exter- 
nal change. 

§ 26. SIGNIFICATION AND CHARACTERISTICS OF THE 
CONJUGATIONS. 

The Characteristics and the signification of the derived 
conjugations are: " 

1 . 7#?3 ' Niplial is the passive, or often the reflexive or 



46 Part I. Exercises. 

reciprocal of Kal : as *\fi& to keep, Niphal ; to be kept, 
or to keep one's self from. 

2. /%&> Pid signifies in general intense action, energy, 
frequency : *\y& to break, *"D^ to shatter, Vh& to send, 
Hp^ to dismiss. It is often the transitive or causative 
of Kal, when the latter is intransitive : as ^jl to be great, 
to grow, V"^ to cause to grow : CHp to Joe holy, t^*lp 
to make holy. 

3. ;]}_§> Pual is the passive of Piel. The characteristic 
of both is the doubling of the second radical by Dagesh 
forte. 

4. 7*yhtl* Hiphil signifies causation: to cause another 
person or thing to do that, which is indicated by the 
primitive Kal : as 2JTD to write, DTDi! to cause to write. 
If Kal is intransitive, Hiphil signifies only the transitive 
of Kal : as ptn to be strong, Hiphil : to make strong, to 
strengthen. 

5. 7j^$n> Hophal is the passive of Hiphil. The charac- 
teristic of both is the prefixed H and the proper vocali- 
zation. 

6. 7#BJ"irT,> Hithpael is generally reflexive, sometimes re- 
ciprocal: as btDDflJl to kill one's self, jlN^nn to look at 
each other. Barely has it a passive signification : as TOnt^'H 
to be forgotten, Ec. 8, 10. fpnnn to be embittered, pro- 
voked to anger, Ps. 73, 21. 

Occasionally it denotes to pretend, to feign to be 
or to do what is denoted by the root, hence it has 
been called by some the hypocritical conjugation : as ^&]}_T)7} 
to pretend to be rich, Pr, 13, 7. DDfinn to show ones' self 
wise Ec. 7, 16. Its characteristic is the prefixed syllable 
jlil and the doubling of the second radical by Dag. forte. 

Note. There are also unusual conjugations: 1. Pod as 7J£ip* 
reflexive StDlpfin , hit. S^ip' , part. St?ipP » hit. pass. h*Q)p y . 
In the regular verbs it occurs very seldom': ^iD^'p m y judge, 
Job!), 15. SgH# to take root Is. 40, 24. In verbs tf'y it is 



§ 27. Inflection. 47 

frequent: as 77111 > 33iD> 731(1 ♦ 2 - Pile1 ' ?uUl, Hithpalel, es- 
pecially when the second radical is a guttural : as pNLJ' to ^ e a * 
rest, rjJH to be green. 3. Pealal (the two last letters being re- 
peated) as ~)rnnp to beat quick, to palpitate, from IHD to go 
about. 4. Pilpel, formed from a biliteral root by doubling both 
radical letters: as ^D/D to sustain, nourish, ^/f to tinkle, 

Wpy. to flutter. 

§ 27. INFLECTION. 

The different derivative forms or conjugations are in- 
flected, to indicate the various grammatical conditions of 
Tense) Hood, Gender, Number and Person. 

a. The Tenses (D^fti) are two: Preterite (1JJJ) and 

Future (TflJ£) • 

b. Moods: Two forms of the Infinitive Oipft fountain), 
an absolute and a construct; an Imperative ^^ (com- 
mand), excepting in Pual and Hophal as pure passives ; 
two Participles, [*Ji3*3 (middle) or Hip (,, being, "y~Ps,ib of 
the verb JTH to be], a Part, active (7Jfi£3) 3 a Part, passive 
(Tl^iD), as derived nominal forms. 

c. Two Numbers: Singular (TfT alone, single), Plural 
(D*?*! many). 

d. Three Persons: I. P. (i1J^3^31? speaking for himself), 
II. P. (N!p3 present), III. P. OJJDJ concealed, hidden). 

e. Two (renders : Masculine (""pf a male), Feminine (i"Dp.J 
a female). 

§ 28. CLASSES. 

1. The verbs are divided into regular or perfect and irregu- 
lar or imperfect verbs. Kegular 0^7^' (perfect) are those, 
of which the three radicals undergo no change and always 
remain audible. 

The regular verbs include the gutturals : i.e. verbs of 
which one or more radicals are of the 7J/nnN > the changes 
which they suffer affecting the vowels only, not the radicals. 

2. The irregular are divided into DHpH Defective, D'fU 
Q.uiescent and O^tD Reduplicate^ 

Defective verbs in some forms drop one or more of their 



48 Part I. Exercises. 

radical letters. Quiescents have one of the half vowels 
^HN as radicals, which in some forms either drop or quiesce. 
Keduplicates have for the two last radicals similar letters. 
3. From the old example ^;D> of which the first letter 
is £) > the second ]} , the third 7 » those, the first letter of 
which quiesces or drops, were called 'fiHpn or '£) *f73 i. e. 
defective or quiescent in Q, those, the second letter of 
which quiesces, ']} *(!} i. e. quiescent in J/, and those in 
which the third is quiescent, '7 'fTl i. e. quiescent in 7* 
Thus &M is called ¥£ i. e. the £ or the first radical is 3 ; 
-ftp = Y'j; i. e. the J? or the second radical is \; fi7J = H"^ 
i. e. the 7 or the third radical is H; DDD is called JTJ? i. e. 
double y , its second and third radicals being the same. 



CHAPTER VL 

THE REGULAR VERB. 
EXPLANATION OF THE SECOND PARADIGM. 

§ 29. THE PRETERITE O?^). 

1. The principal vowel stands after the second radical. 
In the transitive verb it is Patach, in the intransitive 
Tsere or Cholem. For the sake of brevity the former are 
called: Verbs middle A, as 7fcDp> the latter: Verbs middle E, 

as ^*iDfl to incline., to delight in, and middle 0, as 7D* to 
be able, can. 

2. The Kamets in the first syllable is joretonic (§ 14 Re- 
jection 1) and drops when the tone or accent is thrown for- 
ward: as Drpfcpp ye have killed. 

3. The conditions of Person, Number and Gender are in- 
dicated in the preterite by attaching at the end fragments 
of the personal pronouns, which are called : -AJformatives. 
(§ 15, 2. Note). 





§29. The Preterite (*D]£). 


L The afformatives of 


the preterite 


are : 


Person : 


1. 


2. 

m. ri 

T 


3 


Singular. 


^H com. 


f. fl 


f. n- 

T 


Plural. 


^ com. 


m. DH 


com. ) 



49 



5. The vowel iu the second syllable: — , — , •_ drops in 
the third person fern, and plur.: as T\TCT>^ ^PP T (§ 14 Ke- 
jection 3). 

With a pause accent it is restored: as Jl ?J0D > n¥£l"T> Jl/b* 
(§14 Rising II). 

6. The verbs middle E. generally lose the sound 7 in 
their inflection : as T^H > fi^gl! ♦ 

The verbs of middle retain the Cholem in the second 
sing, and first persons: as n?y> W?5^ ♦ 

In those cases, however, where the tone is shifted, Cho- 
lem changes into Kamets-Chatuph : as o£y?y ♦ 

7. Verbs ending with H suffer a rejection of the jl before 
the afformatives beginning with j") : as JVG for JVH3» from 
mj. TO> DJVp (§ 12, 6. B. 1.) 

8. In combinations with the afformatives p\, F\, )2 the 
word is Milel, otherwise Milra: as fhw> fhw > DnStDD » 

t : - I t t : I | T v : ~ ) : 

(§ 9, 12. II. m.). 

9. Syntactical rules § 100. 

Exercise 40, 

io rhm :nS noon 9 nMn 8 dn osy 7 m:i 6 ^SipD 

tt: |tt:-t t : - t ■ - - : T | : | • 

v -: t x - v : .-■ t . t t -: - • | t - t : |t 

: 25 ^nip9 2 ^nnw\:n^ 23 ninii 22 nW|) : 21 rhtyj°rhyB 

7 T 



50 Part I. Exercises. 

- x t • v: t t •• • '.•:-"; -.- - 

t : It I vv • t -: - • • : | t •• t : • ^- t : - 

ntfoSb^Vi : 38 iD^ 37 n^ jrriir-nK ^^nni : 35 nS^ 
rfirv u i^i 43 j$n vSj; 42 p^' 4U 5 40 n^iD brtN-Ss 39 KinS 
tk* 48 %h>rii$ 47 p^ T napi nxD r^ji^tentng 45 ^? 

:w w riNDi iiKDi 48 DiS^N 

•t ■ : - t t : " r . : t : - 

to be great 1 work 2 very 3 to be deep 4 thought 5 voice 6 to flee 7 if8 to be or 
become wise 9 ant 10 to gather 11 harvest 12 food 13 to remember 14 fish 15 to eat 16 
Tyre 17 to say 18 the perfection of beauty 19 to work 20 iniquity 21 to fall 22 
street 23 to keep 24 precept 25 to send 26 hither 27 but 28 Saul 29 to take 30 rule, 
dominion 31 to be too little 32 mercy 33 to give 34 the produce 35 to seek 36 to be 
able 37 to endure 38 to enter 39 the tent of the congregation 40 because 41 to rest 42 
cloud 43 the glory of 44 to fill 45 dwelling, Tabernacle 46 to counsel, to advice 47 
n. p. m. 48 - 

Exercise 41. 

Kacliel 1 stole 2 the images 3 - Why 4 hast thou sold.5 thy 
horse? Jacob 6 rent 7 his clothes8- A dream9 I dreamed 16 - 
Why have you not sent" a messenger 12 to our father 13 2 The 
woman dipped 14 the bread 15 in 16 vinegar*?- Kuthis gleaned 1 ^ 
ears 26 in the field. Our enemies 2 1 took 22 our city (f.) and all its 
men they killed 23 with 16 the sword 2 4. Why did you laugh 25 ? 
(fern.) They have not kept 26 the covenant of God. We 
loved 27 , I loved. Thou wast able 2 8, you were able. I slept 2 9, 
Ye slept (fern.), thou hast cut 36 ,- I have cut, Ye have cut. 
The Hebrews 31 went over 32 Jordan 33 - Jacob gave 3 4 Esau 35 
bread and pottage 36 of lentils 37 - Sacrifice 38 and offering 3 ^ 
thou didst not desire^, burnt offering 41 and sin offering 42 
hast thou not required4 3 - 

9Di'Sn (pusDHia 7 ;n£ 6 ip^;_ 5H i3n 4 n^S (pio'sq^a 2 3ij ibni 
i 7 }>pn lea 1 5 onS uhi® i 3i 3« with suff. ,3_x i^kSd nnb# looSn 

(in Pause !§. 14 24 3111 23 nn 22^ 21 D^X (pi-) 20 D ,l ?3^ 19£3pS 18 Jin 

-T ~T • : • T • |-T 

32-1317 (pl.)31Dn3V 30 m 3 29ntf" 28Hy 27 3HN 26 m^ 25 pnV Lengthening 4) 

~*T ' '.' _ T I "T T -T ~T | ~T 

finSfy 4oyan sonmn sena.T (pi.) ?? D^Tg. 35 tu 34 r^ 34|nj 33 ^t 

: (in pause) 43 l 7X$ 42 flNOn 



§ 30, The Infinitive. 51 

§ 30. THE INFINITIVE. 

1. The second groimdform is the Infinitive 7DD to kill. 
It is called construct, because it is always connected with 
the Prefixes D73D > or with a following noun : as 01 'Dhii 
to lie in wait for blood. With the prefixes : as A0p3 in 

killing, SbpD as killing, T£p7 to kill, SftpD from 
killing. 

2. The 7"M are regularly vowel ess ; the Chirek here 
is a helping vowel. The Dagesh after the is for the 
assimilated j , SbpP for Sbp ]D . Of S"M the S is most 
closely connected, so that -the following Sh'va is silent, 
while the Sh'va after D and 3 are vocal : as 7307' "but 

4^3.^5. (§n, 7.) 

3. The Cholem is shortened before Makkef: as WSrTVffc* 

t t : 

4. The Infinitive has a form with Patach of but rare 
occurrence: as 22& to lie down, ^££> to be humiliated. 
Sometimes it is lengthened by H— : as HD7p7 to approach. 

5. The second form of the Infinitive is the Inf. absolute 
7i£0p 9 with immutable Cholem. It is used .before or after 
finite verbs to indicate continued action, energy, intensity: 
HM TpSnoSn they went, going on and lowing, TI&WT) iDtf 
ye shall diligently keep. 

6. Syntactical rules § § 105, 106. 

Exercise 42. 

j*-d# 3 rp£S oniaa 2 nn j.WNirns n'qS H^n pS 
♦raj^'byc? : 6 ra^'n dv m tw jdsw *H|2i 5 "lp| 
njn 13 Ti£p 12 nj; : n ^ 10 ^.P Hjsng^ 9 nt??n 8 rnfp3 
18 >riN 17 nn» :nSft) nW' 16 ^ ^fiS 15 Si£D : 14 nipn 
: 22 :prn a anS 20 DhiD :rrnrr-nN noxo 19 DK£n dtiSn 

j ... - •• tx T t : v t : -. T t -: • v: 

^D^n 28 ^ 27 ^ 26 ^^ 25 ddSS 24 ^S *m 



52 Part I. Exercises. 

:ontp 3r Sirp 36 n3^- 35 ^ 

shear 1 ho! wo2! mix 3 strong drink 4 to think of 5 sabbath 6 to taste 7 with 
the end of$ rod 9 a little 10 honey 11 time 12 to lament 13 to leap 14 to fall 15 sons 
of 16 ah! alas 17 ! Lord 18 to reject 19 to break assunder 20 a hungry one 21 thy 
bread 22 to go down 23 garden 24 to gather 25 lilies 26 the days of 27 to judge28 
judges 29 he that shaketh 30 hand 31 to hold 32 here includes negation § 106, 2. 
bribe 33 good cheer, delight 34 much less 35 slave, servant 36 to rule 37 - 

Exercise 43. 
God made 1 the sun 2 and the moon 3 to rule 4 overo the 
day and over the night. I hired 6 a reaper^ to reap 8 the 
wheats and a builder 10 to repair 11 the house. They have 
slaughtered 12 an ox to sell its meat 1 3. He gave me rai- 
ment 14 to put on 15 - I have rejected 16 thee that thou 
shouldst not reign 1 '' (from reigning) (§ 106, 2.) over 18 them. 
The Lord saidiQ that He would dwells (tr. to dwell) in the 
thick 21 cloud 21 - The man went out 22 to lie23 on 24 his 
couch 2 ^. 

npi3 lonia 9 ntan siyp f"m'p 6 "ot# 53 *S#n 3rrv itivti ir\wy 

I -t v r • . - It -I -t - t — t vv t"t 

19-IDK (with plur. suff.) 18 ^ l 7 f?n itfDKD 15 tfoS 14"U3 ' 13 fa&3 12J13B 

-T ~ l-T -T ~T VV T : ~T 

■2a23U/V 24 2 23 33J7 22 N^ 21 Ssitf 20 \j& 

T : • - T T T v t -: I - T 

§ 31. THE FUTURE. 

li The future is formed from the second groundform 
70D by prefixing the preformatives JfVN» which are origi- 
nally vowelless, and receive the helping vowel Chirek. N 
receives Seghol. (§ 14. Rising I. a.) 

2. The preformatives |il*N indicate the personal relation, 
while the aflormatives determine the relations of Gender 
and Number. 

3. The preformatives and the affirmatives of the future are : 
Person: 1. 2. 3. 

m. D m. * 

Sing. com. N f ,__ n f> ^ 

m. 1— f) ra. 1— ^ 

Plur. com. j ( . nJ _ n f . nj _ n 



§ 31. The Future. 53 

4. The Cholem in the second syllable generally is onl}' 
to be found in the transitive verbs (middle A), whilst the 
verbs middle E and regularly have Patach : as 7*li\ 
from 7"y to be or become great, "DD* from 1J3 ^° be 

honored, JDp' from [ftp to be little, small. Before Mak- 
kef, Cholem is changed into Kamets-Chatuph : as Dt^"Dfl3*l 
and he wrote there. 

5. The vowel of the last syllable which drops before the 
afformatives commencing with a vowel (§14, Rejection 3.), 
is regularly restored in pause. The restored vowel re- 
quires the tone and lengthens its restored A vowel (Patach) 

into Kamets: as ^Dpfi* but »^DpJ1» ftrW> but &1V they 
will be great. 

6. The forms ending in } or '-— have occasionally, especially 
at the end of a period, a paragogic ?. (§ 12, 6. C.) In this 
last case the vowel of the second syllable is restored : as 

'P2in> but \'pT}F\, %yy m , but pny. 

7. The form ri^bpfl often appears without the H '■> as 

8. Syntactical rules, see § 101. 

Exercise 44. 

•tppTK Jp^jf ' 6 ia?! .nin» : 4 p"iD 8 ph# ?jru 1 pK5. 

w. T . . T . t : • •• "t - t ^- v*t : : " 

♦13 Str'o^Si Dm w 12 SraN rib : llta i£i^' 10 np^' 9 *W 
16 t^ :^n- 15 d^ m b^n 13 p^-nB :dm 7Mw nin? 039 
r^iurntS : 18 p!inn nyrfax nirra ibwo* l7 D^*ro 

: • | t : • v " v: t - • • t : 

26 D^^n t : 25 |)N- 24 n¥p: rb$ 23 yir : 22 Sr 21 Vpri 20 Sk 

-^ :D^rlS^ rnrv ^rftypws jnp#n ntbaf : 30 ]*p^in 
»Bh# S>p:d : 36 npT 35 D*jnjn db> : 34 DnN- 33 ro 32 Trp& # fi 



54 Part 1, Exercises. 

rhb) oh 41 ^jni pp\ 40 dm 39 ipi Typ T 1 jht : 38 n^tf 

without 1 tattler 2 to cease 3 strife 4 to counts how long 6 injustice 7 
to lie down, to sleep 8 in vain9 to wake, to watchi the keeper, watch- 
man 1 ! to rule 12 to be just 13 manH withis rich 16 poor 17 to cleave 18 to steal 19 
not 20 to rob 21 poor 22 he that soweth 23 to reap 24 vanity 2 * the diligent 26 
upright 27 to dwell 2 8 young men29 to keep fast 30 commandments 31 to be joy- 
ful 32 daughter 33 Edom 34 unrighteous, a sinner 3 * to decay or perish 
quickly 30 to spread out, to extendi folly 38 cold 39 warmth, heat 40 autumn, 
harvest, frequently including (as here) the winter 41 to cease 42 - 

Exercise 45. 

In that day shall be great 1 the mourning 2 in Jerusalem 3 - 
The Lord shall judge 4 the world 5 in righteousness 6 - In those 
days^ I will pour out 8 my spirits upon 10 all flesh 11 - Do ye 
thus 1 ^ requite 13 the Lord 14 ? The work shall he lieavy 1 ^ 
uponiG the men. Of thee 17 she will require 1 ® the blood^ 
of her brother20, f i-2i thou hast killed22 him. I shall make23 
a covenant with24 you, for you are my people25, that I have 
chosen26. 

10 hy 9 nn s-™ 7D , ?r 6p-w s^n 4^3^ 3d ,1 ?£'-iv 21330 iVu 

- - »-T -t I w ■• •• -t --t : ••: • -t 

16Stt 15^33 fem. 14n*l3y seldom as here with S 13 Sd \ 12 J"\KT 11*1^3 

- -T T ~: - T T T 

23 m3 22 L ?ftp 21 \3 ('fix with suff.) 20 nK 19 D"T 18 ^"H trasl. at thv hand 17 

-■ r - | T • . T T - _ T 

.26 1J13 OrpjT with suff.) 25 DJ» 24 0J1X) ,na 

§ 32. THE LENGTHENED FUTURE OR OPTATIVE. 

1. The first persons in Sing, and Plur. of all the active 
future tenses are frequently lengthened by the syllable 
H — > seldom ,1— > which has the tone and affects the final 

T 

vowel of the future/ in the same manner as the afformatives 
1 and »-: as H^Ri ^?P?^ 

2. The lengthened form has the signification of the 
optative and expresses self excitation, purpose, direction of 
the will: as nilDC^ let us be joyful! — 

Note. In a few instances it is found attached to other per- 
sons: Is. 5, 19. Ez. 23, 20, Ps. 20, 4. (with H— ) .. 



§ 32. The lengthened Future or Optative. 55 

Exercise 46. 

-na 5 n&rn : 4 r\m 3 rana 2 mapa : wvmd x rnoStf 

v t : : • t t • •• y t :|:v I V : ■ t : : v 

• t : • • t : | : v • y:|t v -: t :| : ■ T : 

t : : v I- t : : • ^ • t I •• - • T 

to learn 1 to bury 2 a dead person 3 thither 4 to seek 5 come near, approach 6 
hither 7 to gather 8 heads, chiefs 9 here 10 prophet 11 further, besides 12 to ask. 
inquire 13 mouth 14 a muzzle 15 therefore 16 to wail 17 come 18 to bend the 
knee 19 - 

Exercise 47. 
Let us keep the testimony* of thy mouths. I may keep 
thy precepts 3 - Let us make a covenant, I and thou. I 
will pursue 4 aftei'5 Davids. I w iH forget 17 my complaint8. 
Let us sends a letter io unto the king of Israel. I will 
remember 11 these things 12 and I will pour out my soul 1 3 
in me 14 - I will make 15 with 1 *? you an everlasting cove- 
nant^. At 1 ® thy hand I will require^ the nock 2 o of my 
father. 

8rrfr 7rw e in snns 4fp-i 3QH?pa (with suff. •>&) 2na irwvj 
una i^h 15 rna (with pi. suff.) w^ 13, ^pj * 2 nS?« inpi 10 ?$o 9 nS^ 

: 20 jX'i' 19 &y\ (prefix) 18 JD 17 nSty 

§ 33. VAV CONVERSIVE. 

1. The preterite when connected by 1 with a preceding 
verb in the future or imperative is made dependant upon 
this verb, and its time is thereby seemingly changed — it 
receiving a future meaning. 

Vice versa the future when connected by 1 with a past 
tense either expressed or understood, receives the significa- 
tion of the preterite. See § 102. 1. 2. 3. 4. 

2. This 1 is called Vav Conversive (TpSfin 11) ♦ Pre- 
fixed to the preterite it is the simple 1 or ) conjunctive : as 
1DX he said, -)£N1 and he will say,'S#3 he made, ^J/JDl 
and he will make. Prefixed to the fut. it has Patach 



56 Part I. Exercises. 

and following Dagesh, before & Kamets (§ 14, II. 2.): 
as iDC* be will keep, iD^I and lie kept, iCfifrn and 
I kept." 

3. The pret. with Vav conv. removes the accent in the 
first and second person sing, to the ultimate syllable: as 

>nS&p>but ♦nStDpi. rno&but rrow. 

• • : - | t '.--It; t : - t t : - t : 

4. The fut. with vav conv. suffers the removal of its 
accent from the ultima to the penult, and consequently 
the last long vowel is changed into a short one. This 
rule, however, can never be applied to the fut. Kal of 
the regular verbs, because the penult here is always a 
closed syllable, § 9, 12, r. General exception to this rule : 
When the third radical is &, or the accent is a principal 
distinctive. 

5. Syntactical rules, § 102. 

Exercise 48. * 

riSn >a 8 Nm a w- -l np3 in** im nyh b)w 'iBth 

| - t • ; t | : • • v - : " T t t v - 

jnjv 8 n^i : 7 vS:? 6 n^i 5 [rgi> pa mri) njjsfi **jaW9 
iWYin ?mira nniN "Saw its Wk nosrt wp-nat 

t : - - : _ : t : •— t: v -:' v ~ " "| : 

17 W'T\ "*fnfl pi? 15 PT^ :D ?^ 14 'T$ ^ rinpn-n^ 
"fpVnK 18 o^tan :?|S jru^jSf* ninp^pNn-n^ 
i^mta 22 r\wy : 2l Di:a ^njrorrnN hzm man jo 

v -: v t - |; - *•■ t - v .. - v : • - - J • 

:inN,T'N Djjirngt in ip$n : 23 irrnnK npSm pi^p* 
^pyn 28 W|rn# 27 d j^S ^2W) : 26 i£i^'5 *##♦ 24 rpw_ 
rbf iJt : •# *» DiS^pK 31 DiW'?K ♦# 30 Si-i| Sip rjS^n 
ipj^i 35! ^Sp3? M n$tj mil? : y2 Sxn^3 33 b&) 32 ipr_3 #i» 
88 nnjn M3#i 37 in^n-^S awto ox : 36 n::S£ spri 

t : | t : t : - t : A^" : • - . . . . V t . • | : : - 



: 39 .u 



number 1 interj: denoting respectful entreaty 2 and see 3 from»us4 n. p. m.' 
the bearer ol'*> arms 7 to put forth 8 the end oft to dip 10 (honey) twig, honey- 



§ 33. Yav Coxversive. 57 

coml) 11 because 12 judgments 13 to cut 14 ? JV^ 1X}3 to make a covenant (from 
the ancient custom of cutting up victims on such occasions.) justice, right- 
eousness 15 to pursue 16 to inherit 17 to drawl 8 n. p. m. 19 coat 20 blood 21 eyes22 
after 23 to blow 24 n. p. m. 25 trumpet 26 to wrap around, to muffle? 7 face- 8 
to cry, to lament 29 great, loud 30 n. p. m. 31 3 into, upon ; n. p. m. 32 to fall 33 
shall be 34 strength, support 35 capture, noose 36 to be in dread 37 to be sweet 38 
thy sleep 39 - * 9 96, 3. 2. 

Exercises 48. 

And 1 God remembered his covenant with 2 Abraham. 
And 1 Abraham weighed 3 to Ephron 4 the silver 5. And I 
hewed** two 7 tables 8 of stone 9 , and he wrote ] o on 11 the 
tables the 13 ten 12 commandments 13 - And* a mightyis king 
shall stand up 14 and he shall rule (with) greats domin- 
ion^. And 1 Moses 18 wrote this law. And 1 Kachel stole 
the images 19 that (belonged) to her father. Hear 2 **, Is- 
rael, the Lord, our God 21 , the Lord is one 22 - And 1 thou 
shalt love 23 the Lord thy God. If 24 God will be 2 5 with 
me26, and 1 will keep 27 me in this way 28 , and 1 will 
give 29 me bread 3 **, then 31 will I serve 32 him forever 33 - 
God shall send 34 his angel 3 -5 before 3 ^ thee, and thou shalt 
take 37 a wife 38 to my son 39 from thence 4 *). 

8rilV? 7-'}UT 6 Sp3 5f ]D3 4 p3£ 3 Sp_^ 2r\K l Connect „and« with the verb! 

15113J, connect the article! :13 d'' 131 12rrV#£ 11 ^ 10 3/73 (stones) 9 D'J^K 

•t : vv : - t . T -. 

18n*^D cf. §. 90, 2- itbtini? I 6 31 14 stand up l?p>% after the noun! cf. §. 90, 2- 

27 ip^ 26 Hsy 2sn;n; 24 dx 23 3HN' 2 2-inx ai o-rtSjwe 2oj?p# wo'sin 

35 "]*hl? [f»t. A.]34nW 33DSl^S 3 212]^ (vav Conv.) 311 SODPlS 29 JfU 28 TH 
;40D^ [with sufT. >:3 etc.] 39 ?3 38T\&X 37^*7 [with plur. suff. 'J^S etc.] 36.->j£)S 

§ 34. THE IMPERATIVE. 

1. The imperative belongs to the second groundform: the 
infin. const., and in most instances is identical with it in 
form; as ^bp Inf. const, and ^Op Inip. 

2. The verbs with A in the fut. retain the same in the 
imp.: as fut. 22tt?\ he t will lie down, $2b\ he will be 
clothed, Imp. ^V", BO 1 ?. 

3. The Chirek in the f. sing, and m. plur. is called by 



58 Part 1. Exercises, 

the ancient grammarians il7p flj^f! light vowel, its sound, 
originated from Sh'va, being so lightly passed over, that it 
cannot form a closed syllable with the following Sh'va, 
hence 'I'ST'}* read: ri-d'fu and not rid-fu, 0>J? (§ 11? 7.)- 

4. To the imp. is annexed very often the paragogic 
H— > expressive of wish and entreaty, emphasis. With 

paragogic 17— the form 7DD becomes Jl/tOp > the form 7Dp 
becomes nSfcOp: as i.^, mOtTiM^. HMt^. 

t : ) • : t : t - : T : • 

5. Before Makkef the Cholem is changed into Kamets- 
Chatuph : as £0"& 1 *"H enquire, I pray thee. pT^"D5^ 
judge righteously. 

6- In pause the dropped vowels or A in the forms 
htop:> nStpp return: as VCSti DDK tDb&Q execute true 
judgment. 

7. After the imp. and fut. if the latter be lengthened 
(optat,), N3 is often put, as a particle of incitement and 
entreaty: I pray thee! (the German : fcod)! the Latin: dum 
with the imp. or quaeso, age.): as !?jT N^'fl^ put forth 
thy hand. rOTn , ")K I will go down. 

8. Syntactical rules. § 104, 

Exercise 50. 

:io#tDStp4M 4 hdh : 3 Dim hi w&vf : 2 rbra i n^ hi® 
mrr-m* : 6 Dbij?b nw mop" : 5 nniD7 mrr ^ rror n^r 

t : v x w : t : T * t : t .; t : t 

: 12 D£ n ^irS 10 i^ : 9 o?J3£!«Dj27 :n"Dr Wi^ni 7 Sixjn 
:umx itty b nor jnxtn ^TvtWrriK- cddS. 13t ora 

: t -: t *r t " t • - v V t : 

18 niVPHVJ ♦nin;-n^ 17 p^™^ :riin; l6 n:n 16 jpp# 
Tyn 23 ^ *!pj0tfi 21 fj; 20 irrp m^ia? h£P ••■?*]?** 
29Djr 2 npt? :>fij* 27 ^n nrrW : 26 r^) 25 nprrr 24 h^Sd 
:*rt?*? D>pH2 inptf :whp ^nV "nnrjjrs Seft $?&7i 
^wsTDms D^rruK "mno 32 my nrarr "W'Mtf 

| *^t t t • - - v t •• : : • | v - - • : • 



§ 34= The Imperative. 59 

morsel, sc. of bread 1 vinegar 2 orphan 3 mercy 4 for good 5 tor ever 6 great? 
terrible 8 stones 9 keep 10 tongue 11 evil 12 to write 13 song 14 to hear 15 the 
word of 16 women 17 the commandment of 18 mother 19 to hew 20 tree 21 to cast 22 
against' 23 a mound, rampart 24 to be strong 25 to be courageous 26 boy, youth 27 
to mark 28 the perfect (man) 29 behold 30 the end 31 to pass over 32 quickly, 
hastily 33 to advise, with /# against one 34 n. p. m. 35 then cried 36 wise 37 -(f) 

Exercise 51. 

Flee 1 (pi. m.) from this place. Write (pi. f.) a letter 
to the king. Keep (sing, f.) the word of 2 the Lord. Seek 3 
(pi. m.) the Lord. Seek (sing. f.). Seek (pi. f.). Seize 4 
(pi. m.) the prophets of 5 BaaR Shut? (pi. f.) the door 8 - 
Keep (paragog.) this (f.) forever^- Preserve 1 ** (paragog.) 
my soul 11 ? for pious 12 I (am). Remember (parag.) this 
(f.) my God! Stretch 13 out 13 thy hand towards* Him. 
Send (parag. fut. A.) me, I pray thee, one^ of the young 
men 15 - Offer 16 unto God thanksgiving 1 * 7 - Sacrifice 18 
(pi. m.) to your God in the land ! Trusts in^o the Lord 
with 21 all thine heart 22 - Remember (following Makkef !) 
I pray thee, the word 23 of thy father, 
lointf Qririyh snSi 7 -no eS;»3 5^33 4tisr\ 3 ^-n 213*1 itri3 

- t t : v v -x - - ■• • : - t - t - : -t 

[fut. a.] lernr lsonr] 1-nnx 1 *wmi pi. suif. Sx ,i3 2ha 12 Ton n'#in 

-t • t: tv V -t • t ■•: - 

.23131 [with suff. ^S] 223S 213 30 Sx [fut. A.] 19HB3 18 n3T 17 mffl 

- : • • •* v - t - t t 

§ 35. THE PARTICIPLE. 

1. The participles are formed from the first ground-form 
(the preterite). Kal has two participles, one active and one 
passive. In the act., the first radical takes i or — , the 
second — ; in the pass., the pretonic Kamets remains (in 
sing, masc), and ) (or sometimes, in order to form pass, 
substantives * — § 56, 3.) is inserted between the two last 
radicals: *7)Dp killed ; *V)DK fettered, TDK a prisoner. 

2. The participle involves in its signification the person 
or thing to which the action is attributed : as 10& keeping, 
properly one that keeps, or a keeper, !DliX a loving person, 



60 > Part 1. Exercises. 

friend, ^jlN a beloved person. The participle thus having 
the character of a noun is treated as such : receiving the 
article : as 3HNn > and possessing the same terminations of 
gender and number. (§ 57, § 58). 

3. The part, preceded by the personal pronoun expresses 
present time: as llhtl *J3N I go. 

4. /L?p (or ^tplp) is the regular participle of the verbs 
middle A, like 7\QT) '■> the participles of the verbs middle E 
and are identical in form with the pret.; as jp? (to be 
or grow old) pret., Jpf part. *Vp (to fear) pret v '"u* or Tto* 
part. 

5. Sometimes poetically, the old union-syllable *— is ap- 
pended to the st. const, m. and f. of the part. act. : as 
njD ^Dtr the inhabitant of the thorn-bush. 5. Mos. 33, 16. 
TTs^TT 'PSh who changes the rock; Ps. 114, 8. D^.Ps. 
123," 1. 'npN 1. Mos. 49, 11. »fQfJN Hos. 10, 11. Some- 
times the vis not read: as TO^X r fih& Jer, 22, 23. 51, 13. 

6. The inflection of the participles active and passive are : 
Part, act Part. pass. 

S 'L R L H P ' L 

m. TC)p m. D^Dlp m. TlDJJ m. D'TltOj? 

nSioip t t L 

f. c v f » nrap f. nVitop f. jiitidp 

cnScpip) : ' T ,: ,: 

7. Syntactical rules. § 107. 

Exercise 52. 

-n$ on Dnrptr 'jD'pny ^rtK nirv :Sm Wo oriSs 
S k sntr>-m hd^ mm : 3 djtqk not:' netoa niir im 

:iB£ S&ji 8 pnj; 7 W:> :riyp! 6 n~n? 5 ny T P15 erjnjp 

kwi 17 *"on w y#3-?pK npic) 14 io k sn 13 n\ Sru : 12 ninS 

24 nnn 23 nV3i1 flN : a2f ipnp» dw d*o :om 21 r$0? 



§ 35, The Participle. 01 

trypan rhx tan 31 D^Sty' rhxn 3o d^nh ishtm 

■ | ; - •• • •• : v •• t ■ t -: t • : 

T]£tD S>p?rn ; wtft$ vfy Djrtn rppai rwb np.s ntfg 

rrtnj :jry ^ nn *\#w jt]ra 32 io^-kS ^p? nriN :T]Sirr 

jrray oSiy 1 ? pxrn aq ni-n rjSn mi trja 33 ^S jro 

to love 1 as 2 their fathers 3 between 4 tear 5 joy 6 to totter 7 to help 8 book 9 
there is, are 10 riches 11 evil, harm 12 his father 13 his mother 14 (it is) not 15 
transgression 16 companion 17 destruction, corruption 18 sound 19 words 20 de- 
sire 21 to be sweet 22 to lie down 23 under 24 thy burden 25 righteousness of 26 
to stand, endure 27 for ever 28 to uphold 29 men 30 peaceable 31 to have abund- 
ance oft 2 faint 33 - 

Exercise 53. 

The Lord raiseth up 1 (those that are) bowed down 2 - 
Three 3 kings 4 are standing up 5 - Wherefores do ye trans- 
gress? the commandments of the Lord? The wealth of 9 
the sinner™ is laid up 11 for the just. The iniquity of 12 
Ephraim 13 is bound up 14 , his sin 15 is hicUG. She dwells 1 ? 
in the midstis of my people. Ye (fern.) go 19 the way 20 of 
all the earth. The beasts 21 of the field flee 21 from 22 the 
lion23. The door 24 is opened 25 - Wherefore liest thou 2 <> 
upon 2 ? thy facets? The ant29 gatherethso her food 31 in 
the harvest 32 . The fool foldeth 33 his hands 3 * together 33 - 

'£) st. const, 8 H3 7*13^ ^pisS 5 lay 4 DoSlp ZTyvhp 2^£)3 ir|p|_ 

141^V lSD^SK ,pj>st. const. 12 py 11T3Y lOtfipin ,b"T\ st. const. 9Vn 

2irP3 21JTITI 20 ljnt| 19 3^Sn 18^'ri3 17|3tf 16|3V (fern.) 15lT\N£3n 

[fent.] 29 nSnj 28 rp J3 27 hv 26*733 25 flfiS (fen>.) 24 jlSl 23 n k S 2-2-JSn 
T r : I y-r - - T - t v v - - : " : • 

:34VT 33 p3n 32 V2fp 3lS:3KD 30 1 JK 

. § 36. NIPHAL. 

L The two principal forms again pointed out in the 
paradigm by larger type, are the preterite ^££3 and 
the inf. const. 7g)j5fl ♦ To the first corresponds the 
participle 7pp} > with the exception of having like all the 
other participles of the- passive conjugations Kamets under 



G2 . Part 1. Exercises. 

the second radical. The rest of the forms coincide with the 
second principal form 7Dp?> for StOpJin ♦ 

2. From the original StDj^rV (§ 31, 1.) arises h&p¥ 
(§ 12. 6, B. 3.), from this, 7 pjT (§12, 4), the future Niphah 
The first person of the fut. is sometimes found with Chi- 
rek under K- as fcD^N I shall judge. The optative al- 
ways has Chirek: as Hp/^N I will escape. 

3. The 3 pers. fern, of the pret. fl A?p,!l is in pause 
Jl7pp^ (§ 14. Kising II), identical with the feminine of 
the participle rODp} ♦ They are distinguished by the po- 
sition of the accent : Hl!K?ft ITD (Milra) part. , H^n ijhfl 
{Mild) is preterite. (§ 9, 12, I. Note.) ' 

4. In the Infin. after D and 7, the Jl occasionally drops 
and its vowel recedes (§ 12, 6. B. 3.) : as iS^M for 

: t • : 

5. The infin., imp. and fut., when followed by a mono- 
syllabic word, throw back the tone, shortening the final 
Tsere into Seghol (§ 9, 12, r., § 14, Shortening c.) : as 
rO l^i\ he shall be taken by her, m? Dron this shall 
be written. 

6. With distinctive accents Patacli is sometimes put for 
Tsere : as ^'£33*1 and he was refreshed, 7DJPI and he was 
weaned. 

7. The second and third persons plur. f. regularly have 
Palach, but once with Tsere : hlljtt) Ruth 1, 13. 

8. The imper. of Nif. is reflexive or reciprocal in mean- 
ing, for no passive verb would allow an imperative. 

9. The participle passive of Kal and the part. Nif. thus 
differ in meaning: the part. Nif. representing the noun 
to which it belongs as being acted upon in present time, 
whilst the part. pass, of Kal does not take the time into 
consideration: as nfiri&J Hy^O ^ ne c ' oor opened now, fl/lfl 
nrftiil) the door opened, "13G?^D njJpJD the cane broken 
now, iDy&il njpJl the broken cane. 



§ 36. Nipiial, * 63 

10. The Inflection of the participle is: 

s. m. Sop: p. m. ahvpi 

f. ri7pj33 (n^pp:) f. wpjy 

Exercise 54. 

•• T • T : T : I " T : • TT • T ■■ T • V - 

t : : • fyT t V : • t : t : - | •• t •• t • 

"1912& ran 18 D>p*"pv 17 ngp no?©? 16 ^iS>¥3 lb W$l * u chp_ 

10"! dins d-tnh di 22 ti^' : 21 -n3> 2 nnjn£ Sn ;rrirv 

T T T T T T T '- I " "T • ^ T T : 

*nj£l&i 25 xw ^iyp? ^rniED :V?&D »p^ 'in :r[$tf. 

30 ant?D5^n : 2 nnjnnniN^rj^pnn|)n i^rriNTis* 
■td roSn rjSn :nirr 32 nrwib ♦Bte: 31 ndD^ reJSBfti 

t : - t | t t : : - : ■ : - t : : ■ : • 

35L wnS itaa :o^^r nns newt DrrriSx mrv ma 

•• t • • v t ^- - t v -: v •• v: i : • : 

40 ^- 5 39 Dt ^ 38^5^ 37 n^Sv p*i ^T** :rb- 36 :n5 

: 43 total Dpnvyir :«nty|P' fl >l3?&W ^ rnrr :pN 

:nrroj dw"i 47 nnna 46 nn^ 45 nD^'jj **d^s 

t t : ■ • t : •-;- t: _ ::• • : 

wicked 1 mischief 2 darkness 3 at what 4 stumble 5 (the Tsere in Pause! § 14 
Rising II.) poor 6 to meet each other 7 to deliver 8 to break 9 wickedness 10 net 11 
to hide 12 to take, catch 13 their foot 14 our soul 15 bird 16 snare 17 fowlers 18 
arms 19 neighbour, friend 20 to separate 21 to shed 22 Zion 23 prosperity 24 to be 
grieved 25 enemy 26 adversity 27 friend 28 to take heed 29 before 30 to long 31 
courts 32 that not, lest 33 to neglect, forget 34 to be delivered 35 multitude 36 
shadow of death 37 to hide one's sell 38 there 39 the worker of 40 to trust 41 
youth 42 to be delivered 43 the transgressor 44 to be destroyed 45 together 46 the 
end, future 47 - 

Exercise 55. 

The soul 1 of Jonathan 2 was knits with 4 the soul of Da- 
vid. And 5 the number 6 of 6 the children 7 of' 7 Israel shall 
be as 8 the sand 9 of the sea, which will not be numbered -10- 



64 * Part 1. Exercises. 

Is not 11 the whole 12 land before thee 13 ? separate^ thy- 
self, I pray thee, from rue 15 - And 5 they separated them- 
selves the one 16 from the other 17 - Suddenly 18 Babylon 19 
is fallen and destroyed 2 *). Were ye also 21 sold for 22 
slaves 23 ? Thus 24 saith the Lord : Behold 25 , I 25 will give 2 6 
this city into the hand of 27 the king of Babylon, and 
thou shalt not escape 28 out of his hand 29 but 3 <> shalt 
be caught 31 and given into his hand. We are sold, ye 
(fem.) are sold, thou (fem.) art sold, ye will be deliv- 
ered 32 - And in all 33 things 33 that I have said to you, be 
circumspect 3 - 1 . 

5 connect „<znd" with the verb : and shall be fTTH 4 3 3H#p 2jr01"TT f. 1 #3 J 

T t : - | T I "t t : V V 

15<SlH3 14113 13TJ3S 12-S'3 UX'Sn I013D m. 9^'n 8 3 7, J3 613DD 

tt" -t i vx : t -: -t • : •• : ~: • 

24H3 23DH3I? 22 1 ? 21QJ 201317 (fem.) 19^3 18 DXHS 17)T1J5 ^D J6#'X 
•t-: - -t vt : • • t '-•' 

Ni. 31jy£)i1 30 "3 291TD Ni. 28 ^Sd 27 Y3 26 Part. act. 25 behold I "J JH 
-t • y -t -: •:• 

.Ni. 341D# 33 Si Ni. 32 t^D 

_ T ~ T 

§ 37. PIEL AND PUAL. 

1. The first principal form is ^tpp> the second ^?tDp_* 
With the second are allied: the imp. ^t?D> the fut. /$?[?! » 
the part. 7t?DD ♦ In Pual the two principal forms are 
identical. 

2. Under the second radical the pret. Piel has Tsere, 
which changes in the inflection into Patach ; as ^Dp > 
H/Dp ' 7V7DP ♦ Occasionally even the principal form is 
found with Patach : as ^Ofr*") ~DK ne destroyed and broke 
in pieces, especielly before Makkef : njTT"*!© 4 ? he teaches 
wisdom. Segliol in the following three verbs : *D*1 ^° 
speak, D33 to wash, ^§D to atone. 

3. As the first radical in Piel and Pual must be vocal- 
ized for the following Dag., the preformatives of these 
conjugations can retain their original Sh'va : as 7IDp*> 

4. The participle in these and all the other conjugations 
(except Kal and Nif.) has a prefixed ♦ 



§ 37. PlEL AND PUAL. 65 

5. The inflection of the participles in Piel and Pual is 
as follows : 

Part. Piel. Port. Pual. 

S. P. B. P. 

m. Stop? m. 0ht$pD m. h&$6 m. ah&ffi 

£ njptp? f. riiSgpp f< n^pp f. niSsppq 

Note I. Without ft the participle seldom occurs : as ^N H5^ 
I praise, Ec. 4, 2. UpS taken, 2 Ki. 2, 10. 

Note II. The feminine in Piel is usually Jl — , the ending 
H — indicating a nominal signification : as JltD^DD a sorceress, 

t t •• - : 

witch In Pual the fern, in ,1 — is rarely found: flpt^D I s - 23, 12, 
maSo id. 29, 15. 

t t '■ : 

6. In those forms of Piel and Pual, which have ShVa 
under the second radical, the characteristic Dag. is often 
dropped : as nrV?t# for TTfoVf she dismissed. 

7. The part. Pual like that of Nif. is distinguished by 
Kamets in the last syllable: as 7t3pp- 

8. The infln., imp. and fut., when followed by Makkef, 
or a word having the tone on the penult, generally take 
Seghol in the final syllable: as ^'Clp sanctify unto me; 
i/Wpy he seeks him. 

Exercise 56. 

sonjbgn m? rja nr?D 8 nn^ iu?r*n&v s 6 D^nn n:)S 
12 nSrin :nstea naVo mm u ni* : M ?plr?D nim*nK 9 -D3 

.... • : - t : - t : t t Iv •• t : v •• - 

- 19 c v p.5 : 18 mn 17 t|T¥? 16 o ws>n : 15 dS 14 nSnp 13 n^fl^ib 
m *id# : SbS "pft^i 22 W? nim *|m? i*fw rt 9?0 20 H? 
VwTpD; rnin :*mji? s isr'pg piv^'p? :"Ep^ 25 nroin 
jnnito nnn njn onSW nsS :-pS njno 28, d^ : 27 ;rtDD 
mm i 29 rnt2 isy ton 11^ :njn roitD nnn dWt» 

- t : t t • - ■. : • t •• - : w -r t t -•-.-;- 



66 Part 1. Exercises. 

?WM ^-n-n?* t^n? o<rh# i 32 W® 31 p>3# $3#! 
34 nvJ?.l irP9 rnirn no-io 33 prn ^£3 tbnl^fns* &>]39> 
1539 jvrijtf 3s jjn l^^nV^^t^^rt^Pi : K buj>r£ 

: T \ : t : t t \ t w t : t t I : *•; 

* 7 av$z 46 i^ : nn^'n : 45 D¥it 44 j&hji rnitD ^njfiop 

-rusn D?ii780 nj *9 53 ^3pJ aiDrrna* djj nrnri 52 nra:in 
D^riSxS 56 nsr j 55 pi; 54 7?p^ : h»n npri? 63$ *& inrr 

. Babylon 1 to destroys to reward 3 /}DJ any act done, good or evil 1 to do, 
show good or evil to any one» entreatiesG to speak? 'F\ 13^1 to speak entreat- 
ingly, glorious things* to honor9 wealth. plentylO interj. of entreaty, I prayll 
hopel2 to deferl3 sicknessli the heartlo sinnerslG to pursued wickednesslS 
to seekl9 a scorner20 j'N not21 (including the verb to be.) to make great22 to 
give strength23 to regard24 reproof25 meekness26 priest 27 to wash28 D'JG sons, 
children29 to raise30 poor, indigent31 affliction32 a vision33 counsel34 an- 
cients35 ship36 to be about37 to be merciful38 (const, with ace.,) the Most 
High.39 toil, troubled to bear, bring forth41 to praised a report^ to make 
fat44 bone, body45 to blind46 seeing, having the eyes open±7 to pervert48 
the words of±9 his wife»0 one of^l foolish women52 to receive 53 to forgive»4 
sin 55 to sing hymns,, praises56- 

Exercise 57. 

Haman 1 stood up to make request 2 for 3 his life-*. Be- 
hold 5 ? the righteous 6 shall he recompensed? on the earth. 
The Lord rewards 7 the man of violence 8 - I taught 9 ye 
(the) lawio. Miriam 11 sung 12 praises 12 to the Lord, with 13 
the harp 1 -*. I have preached 15 righteousness in a great 17 
congregation 16 - Did ye hope 18 in 19 the Lord? Why 2 ** 
have ye (f.) not met 21 the traveller 22 , with "bread and wa- 
ter? I shall not lie 23 , thou (f.) wilt not lie, ye will not 
lie, they (f.) will not lie. Do (pi. fern.) not profane 2 -* the 
name 25 of our God. This (is) the law, (which) the Lord 
commanded 26 to teach you. Thou (f.) art gathering 27 ears. 
Five 28 cities 29 in the land of Egyptso are speaking 31 the 
tongue of 32 Canaan 33 - The poor 3 * (women) are seeking 35 



§ 38. HlPHIL AND HOPHAL. 67 

bread. The ears are gathered by the poor. The tongue 
(f.) of Canaan is spoken in Egypt. 

Pi- 9T3 1 ? SD^n [Pi. act.] 7 qS^ 6 p'1Y 5?n 4^3J ^V Pi.2#p3 1|DH 
17 3"! m. 16 ^Hp Pi- 151^3 1411*53 13 3 Pi- 121DJ 11 D'lO 10 HUP 

T I T ~T • -X T : " T 

25 D^ Pi. 24SSn . Pi. 23-lpB" 22)118 Pi. 21 Qnp 20j£HD 19 b$ FL 1813fr 
SBr»3» Pi. 31131 30DnVD [f.] 29D"ir 2S#an 27D ,l ?3^ Pi. 27 DpS 26 H'Y 

Pi. 35tfp_2 »nftl>3K 33]J^33 

§ 38. HIPHIL AND HOPHAL. 

1. The first principal form is 7^pi"1> the second VppH- 
From the second are drawn all the other forms : imp. 
SppH, fut. -TpjT, part. -VtDpD, for S'CppST, ^DprtJD 
(§ 12. 6. B. 3.). In Hophal, even the two principal forms 
are the same. 

2. Besides the lengthened fut. (§ 32) a shortened, or 
apocopated future exists, which in the regular verb is re- 
cognized only in Hiphil by a shortened form in Tsere : as 
Vpp>_ fat., W?! apocopated fut. 

3. The apocop. fut. is especially found : 

a. In expressions of command and wish, more usually in 
prohibitions with "7N : as D'ly he may cut off, Ps. 12, 4. 
RJtfl let her bring forth, 1. Mos. 1, 24. nnpJT^K 
hide not, Ps. 27, 9. fift&lrbX destroy not, Ps. 57, 1. 
Hence called: Jussive. 

b. After Yav. Conv. excepting in the first person, which 
generally retains '— J as vtOp^ but TDEW and I de- 
stroyed, Am. 2, 9. Tj^tfY and I cast,' Zee. 11, 13. 
rpbBKVmLd I made king^ l'Sam. 12, V 

4. Before Makkef the Tsere of the imp. and apoc. fut. 
becomes Seghol: as SO'DDil become familiar! Job 22, 21. 
i3"ptn*1 and he laid hold upon him. 

5. The tone in Hi. differs from that of the other con- 
jugations, in not resting upon the afform. PH - ? *— and V 



68 Part I. Exercises. 

as nSbpn, &>bpT}> hhp.ft* With Vav Conv., however, 
they receive in the pret. the tone : as Jl7**13rT1 and she 
shall divide, Ex. 26, 33. 

6. In the inf. after 7DD generally no contraction takes 
place, and the form remains 7'tpptl'2'> occasionally, how- 
ever, the H drops and its vowel recedes : as TD&V to de- 
stroy, Is. 23, 11. rVZW 1 ? to put an end to, Am. 8, 4. 
2HN 1 ? to cause to languish, 1, Sam. 2, 33. 

[ 7. In Hophal there is a second form with Kuhhuts: as 
T|^£N1 he is cast, Da. 8. 11. In the part, this form occurs 
more' frequently, than the reg. one. *t!DpD, Mai. 1, 11 
P57P,Ps. 22, 16. 

8. The inflection of the participles in Hiphil and Hophal 
are : 

ParL Hiphil. Part. Hophal. 

S. P. S. P. 

m. S*pp9 m. nhtQpQ m. Sppp m. D'Sppp 

f. rbppo f - rv^tppp f. th6pjo f. nibppp 

Exercise 58. 

7 ?|4.?w opS'p? f rtjw' njn Skt^-Sd-S^ 6 Wid# 5 np*o 
^yhn-hx i^nn pi ni^n p? DtiVg 9i3*i :rjSp dd^Sj;. 
.13^ 12 ^ ,11^5 nr?» n#N 10 7]bt?'fn :nmx Sk -d# 
16 TpfiNT]T3 : 15 W?c?n np-Sj; fTgr? 14 >:R£ • t|W^ tfKl 
20 ^ f T ^89 19 £tnn 18 dto^ 17 hir^ rtipB Sk nfrr rrft 
: 26 nppn 25 S^3 jrtD *npjD-^3 : 2:j m 22 topc^! 2 d>§k 
■erS'Siraii jSaotr-Sy 28 i:n 27 ribW-na tpt ata*! 

...... T: . _ : : v ,-T i- :- 

nn.q^ ♦? ^rjn 33 7$t?n -wp i^p : * jpjyyj 31 nnrp 30 rrnr 
37 DinDnin 36 &ywm *£ra *dt tc# ••"nan wm-hz 
*iryS)j5 :^jpp wn 40 pDT) jns^o pn'in : 39 v?p 38 owjp 



§ 38. HlPHIL AND HoPHAL. 69 

ZHth$ nvxn iqx™ nb'#n >nb b >( ?*p? rnirr d# 

holyl profane^ to divide, to show difference3 cause to stumble 4 said 5 
n. p. m.6 to make a king7 to slander 8 master, § 82, 4. b.9 to castlO a piecell 
the upper millstonel2 uponl3 fundament, foundations ofl 4 to sink in, to fasten 
in!5 to commit* 6 perversenessl7 ]ipsl8 to put farl9 slowness20 anger21 to 
give rest, to still 22 contention, quarrel23 an offering to God24 (especially a 
bloodless offering) wholly, entirely25 to burn sacrifices26 Solomon27 his 
son28 to be wise, pious29 to shine^O brightness^l firmament32 to humble33 
worm, collect. worms34 all35 (they all, § 98, 2.) to hearken36 hight37 to 
lift up, exalt38 words39 to be far ofBO to mention with praise, i. e. to praise 41 
overi2 walH3 lot, fate 44 - 

Exercise 59. 

Do not cause 1 a stranger2 to dwell 1 in 3 thy housed This 
woman lay 5 upon her son 6 and he died7 and she took 8 my 
living^ son from my bosom 10 and laid 11 her 'dead 12 son 
beside me 13 while 14 I slept 15 - And they stript 16 Joseph 17 
of his coat 18 and they castJ9 hi m into 20 the pit 21 - 
The wife 22 of Potiphar 23 slandered 24 Joseph. Ye shall 
not deliver 25 the servant 20 to 27 his master 28 who is es- 
caped 20 from 30 his master unto ye. My ^ons 31 strip off 32 
your garments 33 , my daughters 34 clothe 35 the naked 36 - 
This woman is clothing the poor. Hide 37 (sing, f.) the 
child 38 - Hide (pL f.) this money. This girl 3 ^ is hiding 
her brother. Darius 40 was made king 41 over the realm 42 
of the Chaldeans 43 - The girls 44 are warned 45 - If 46 your 
father 47 taught you wisdom 48 and knowledge 49 ; then 50 a 
good property 51 was given 52 you as a possession 52 - 
8 npM'?ngj0 6nj3 f£D# 4 ^n^3 3ip'na 21? m. jussiv,not:Sx, § ios i^M 

Vhtfir 141 13 ,L ?¥X 12 riD Hi.ll33!# 10pn (with the Article § 80, 2. g 90, 2.) 9 Tl 
I-t •:-.-•• - t I •• 

20 § 19, 6- Hi. 19 7jStf 18JP:P3 17 t|^)> Hi. (with two ace. § 85, 2. b.) 16 D^3 

28 nnx 27*™ 26 n^ m. j uss . 25 n;o m. 24|^S 23 na-ipi's 22/^ znia 

Hi. 35a,»aS 34^133 33D3 , "U3 Hi. 32&U/2 31^3 30 Q#D flit. Niph. 29 ^J 
43Q^J3 42rioSp Ho. 41}SD *>$PY» WrflV 381 ^. Hi - 37 j?? 36 DW^ 

Ho. 52 ^n 1 51[fem.] nSfU 50 TK 49JVH 4S 7113311 47D3 , DX 46 DX Ho. 45 171? 44nfU?J 
- t t : - t t : t -.-•-; - - t t : 



TO Part I. Exercises, 

§ 39. HITHPAEL. 

1. In Hithpael the two principal forms coincide. 

2. The rules given above (§ 12, 5.) apply to Hithpael, 
In Verbs commencing with a sibilant, transposition occurs : 
as ngJlBfa for yi&m ♦ Before $ the n is changed into 
D : as j-hffijjjj, for pT^J (§ ibid.). 

3. Verbs commencing with 1, ft, ft, sometimes also 
with J » 3 and the sibilants, assimilate the jl of Hithp. : 

as nsjrrri for rM2>^r\ (§ 12, 4.). 

4. The pret. has usually Patach in the final syllable: 
as piprin to show one's self courageous, 2. Ch. 13, 7. 
Patach occurs also in the fut. and imp,, especially in 
pause, and in the future, when expressing command or- 
wish: as JGjyiH delight thyself, Ps. 37, 4; W'ipftrl sanc- 
tify thyself, ' Jos.' 3, 5. D^JWT^K hide not 'thyself, 
Ps. 55, 2. iDt^ H*!5W ^ s name De blessed ! In pause the 
Patach oftentimes is lengthened into Kamets: "lT^Hr? he 
girded himself, Ps. 93, 1. ^MV he mourns, Ez^ 7*, 12. 

5. When the accent is thrown forward by Vav Conv. 
(§ 33, 3.), the Tsere in the pret. sometimes is shortened 
into Chirek: ♦fiJ^Tpnrn ^Pb^ntl) I will show myself 
great and holy* ' Ez." 28, 23. Dn^p_nni and ye shall 
show yourself holy, Le. 11, 44. 

Note f. A form of very seldom occurrence is Hotlqmd. (with 
Kameth-Chatuph or Kubbuts under the preform. T\), the sense 
of which is purely passive , as ^"IpBJTin they were mustered, num- 
bered, Num. 1, 47. D5^^ (arising from D^fiil) to be puri- 
fied, Lev. 13, 55. tf&Etfl to be defiled, Deut,'24, 4. J^HH 
to be made fat, Is. 34, 6. 

Note II. In later Hebrew (Mishna and Talmund) a pret. form 
Nithpael is very frequently used in a purely passive sense i as 
n^DHWU she became a widow, n*VJfi3 she was made a prose- 
lyte, nuv~UrO she was divorced, K:D*V"0 he was cured, etc. 
In Biblical Hebrew this form three times only occurs: 13551 
to be forgiven, Deut. 21, 8. ^pl^l to be instructed, corrected,, 
Ez. 23, 48. r\MT\P2 to be alike,' Prov. 27, 15. 



§ 39. IllTUPAEL. 71 

6. Forms followed by Makkef, takeSeghol: as }/&~\2jyr\\ 
the snow hides itself, Job, 6, 16 

7. The inflection of the participle is : 

s. m. Sppnp f. rhvppn ?. m. D^tpprip f. mbtppnp 

Exercise 60. 

w sniiTvujt *)txi ? Wn ^?Dr>pn '^.nn; nxn 
■njocun Sn nysa ^? 7 p^fi rib dk : 6 S-) *p*o 4 ife#np 
Sn ^p »ieV| wtbipiEh n plQW bx : 10 raS ^tfirfg 
: 14 3ipj 13 nny-S^ ^?P?'9 &a#W kVi 12fc ipn^pn : Dprrnn 
niro "toon? opnvn :pj;p npn#? ^ b*nS did 
:nirr "nnnpp Sn nnx ir pN jdiSb> :n Sy_ 16j U|gnrri 
23 -"Din* 22 vSSyos d n : Dpnv 21 uaSnn 20 tffcter 19 rm njtt 
: 29 npe> 28 Ti:m ^"laDno^N 26 ~tf 25 vttf:> ?rnnnD :iw 

| V t : • ..... . T •.••■: •• - : • w -t 

: 35 Sds 
v t 

to glory 1 to understand 2 to know 3 to feign one's self rich 4 nop (including 
the verb „to have") anything 6 part 7 to think one's self wise 8 thou beconaest 9 
contempt 10 to justify one's self 11 to earn wages 12 bag 13 to bore, pierce 14 to 
obtain 15 to delight one's self 16 surely, truly 17 to hide one's self 18 distress, 
adversity 19 to purify 20 to cleanse one's self 21 works, deeds 22 to be recog- 
nised 23 to decorate one's self 24 cloak, mantle 20 strange 26 to show one's self 
honorable 27 honor of 28 lie, falsehood^ to grieve one's sell 30 joy 31 to make 
great 32 sorrow 33 to multiply 34 folly 35 - 

Exercise 61. 

Behold men beat 1 at 2 the door. And 3 Jonathan stripped 3 
himself of the robe 4 > that (was) upon 5 him, and gave it 6 to 
David. Little 8 children' came forth 9 out of the city and 
niocked 19 Elisha 11 - David is hiding himself 12 in the des- 
ert 13 - Joseph made himself strange 14 unto his brethren 15 - 
Before Thee 16 > Lord ! we shall not be justified i ?• Wo- 
men disguising themselves 18 and putting on 19 other 21 gar- 
ments 20 - Always 22 we shall purify ourselves 23 and walk 24 
with 25 the Lord. Do not hide thyself 26 from thine own 2 * 7 
flesh 2 *- Consider 28 ( p l. f.) the deeds 29 of the wicked 39 and 



72 Part I. Exercises. 

turn away3i f r0 m them. Do not feign yourselves ricli32, 
if in truth the Lord has not givenss you wealth^. 

(*Si? with plur. suff.) 5 Sj? *h\$b Hith. (with ace.) 3 L31^£3 2*71? Part. Hith. 1 D21 

-*r • : - T | - T 

lljn^Sx Hith. (with foil. 3) 10 DSp T 9.R3P ({ 90, 2) 8 D'ilDp 7 onj»J BtfMrt'l 

20DHJ319 &jh mth.i8Bran i7pny 16T33S isrn« 14*03 i3-a**o i2ino 

• t : - t - T I -t I VT : TV - T t : • - T 

27Tp£>3 Hith. 26 dS^ 25 fix Hith. 24 ^H 23l£hp 22TOT (g 90, 2.) 21 QnnX 
:-34"!2rty 33jnj 321#j£ Hith. Slpni SO-D^Bh 29 ^£73 *?# with Hith. 28 "?3# 

CHAPTER VIL 

THE GUTTURALS. 
§ 40. VERBS PE GUTTURAL. 

1. When the first radical is one of the gutturals J?f7nN > 
in all the forms requiring simple Sh'va, it receives Sh'va 
comp. as Dnibj^to stand (§5.). 

2. When standing for vocal Sh'va, it is generally Cha- 
teph Patach: as iEDJMbr iDtf; iDJg. from the Inf. const. 

3. The helping vowel under the serviles JJTN is always 
that of the Chateph: as "tol£(§ 14, Rising I B.). 

4. If the Sh'va be silent, the vowel added to it must be 
either identical or homogeneous with the preceding : as 
HIDJtt'fbr "IDjp (Pret. Niph.), Seghol and Chirek being 
homogeneous (§ 3, 3.) 1Dty%for 1DI?n (Pret. Hof.^TDgl, 
for T9J£- 

5. In forms with the afformatives J7— , *|, * — , before 

T 

which the vowel of the second radical drops, the comp. 
Sh'va loses its Sh'va points : as JHOlft from ??JDg$ HD^hi 

from igjjn; nnpj;>from TOJ?^;. 

6. The future of the verbs Fut. 0. in most cases has 
Chateph-Patach : as l2]£.to serve. The verbs Fut. A. take 
Chateph-Seghol: as RJfT'.to be strong. 

Note. Sometimes verbs with Chateph-Seghol take Patach, when 
the form is augmented by afformatives: as I'DN^ to bind, with 

suff. nrnpKt' tp#i to colloct > *&$&!» '&?££• 



§ 40. Verbs Pe Guttural. 73 

7. "Some verbs retain simple Sh'va under the guttural. 
This is most frequently the case with n : as "iDIT to covet, 
*1DIT to want, lack. 

8. The Inf., Imp. and Fut. Mf., which require a Dag. 
for the assimilated J Nif: (§ 12, 4.), will lengthen the 
vowel under jJVK' to compensate for the Dag. : as jTlIT 
to cut in, engrave, for JYllT. 1JJJ^.for "fD-JJt* 1 m this 
characteristic is associated with the gutturals : as fl"]TP to 
pursue. 

Exercise 62. 

S*p? 5 f£rv kS : 4 rnj; 3 to ^brrri J 1 ^" ^JtSk 
pHV :nri Dtyeh iagai 12 nnp "f^ri D*p*Rf 10 ^^3 

nppnn D»n j># : 19 t^inS 18 j?0 }» nriN :" 17 agflrg Mrr 
"iptjl.ehjl 22 D^ri Sn 21 |h?n one :ro "ffjTfQ®!? 
27 ni?#n kS :p*3$p 26 n# 25 ^nn Sk tee^p 24 Tw 
30 row yen Sfctoa mot M flWi ono »a D^n 28 n:n? 

nS^ y&hS ^nannDi rra p^n^ M nflra 35 ?hNO :«*y#s 

(_..... »■ T TT .. _ . . TT - 1 - .. ..... •• - : ^ - T 

41 roy ^D'nai "inon njn nan "onp : w vnirpK 

: "|t • t : t : • : "r t t t ^t t ; t 

: 50 n^p ^S iD£ w 49 ^ ( k 48 ^^'i 

sleep 1 to change 2 Ethiopian 3 skin 4 to have delight 5 understanding- 6 to de- 
vise 7 to dwell 8 securely 9 prosperity 10 to rejoice 11 city 12 to draw, deliver 13 
intelligence 14 a fool 15 to keep silent 16 to count 17 oil 18 to become rich 19 to lay- 
hold 20 to examine 21 to condemn, punish 22 to explore 23 after, then 24 to hold 
back, restrain 25 help 26 to leave, miss 27 the words of' 28 to learn 29 to mourn 30 
the fool, simple 31 to believe 32 to be wanting 33 trespass 34 to seize 35 pitch 36 
to join one's self 37 way 38 .prudent man 39 simple 40 to pass on 41 to punish 42 
to hate 43 unjust gain 44 to lengthen 45 fierceness, cruelty 46 fury 47 a flood 48 
wrath 49 envy 50 - 

10 



74 Part I. Exercises. 

Exercise 63. 

In the place of 1 greats men 2 do not stand 3 - The house 
of 4 the righteous shall stand. The fatherless 5 and the 
widows do (in. pi.) not oppress 7 - And 8 Pharaoh 9 heard*** 
this thing and® he sought** to slay* 2 Moses* 3 - Thou shalt 
not oppress* 4 a hired* 4 servant* 5 ? do (£ s.) not take 16 to 
pledge* 6 the raiment* 7 of a widow. My heart* 8 trusted* 9 
in the Lord and I am helped 2 ** and my heart rejoiceth 2 *. 
The Lord said unto these wicked : as 22 you have forsaken 23 
me, thus 24 I will forsake you, as you have plowed 25 wick- 
edness 2 ^ thus you shall reap 27 iniquity 28 , and 8 I will cause 
you to eat 29 the fruit 30 of falsehood 3 *. Let be put to si- 
lence 32 the lying lips 33 , which speak 34 against 35 the right- 
eous arrogancy 36 - 037 sword 38 ! put thyself 39 into 40 thy 
scabbard 4 * and rest 42 - 
7p#y erijoSx stulnj m. try* § 104, % &«in^ 2a ,l ru ijafpp 

13n^D 12jnn Pi- H^p3 [Fut. A] lO^OIir 9^13 8 connect and with the verb. 
Fut. 21 h$ Nif. 20 -1TV 3withl9ntt3 18 m. 3 1 ? ,"3S 17 "U3 16 ^3n ifylkVDW 

--T -T - T .... vv - T . T 

[g 25 7, 5] 29 S3N 28 nnS)^ 2 7*lVp T 26 ^^"). 25t£^_n 24 j3 23 3TJJ 22^10X2 

35*71? Part. 3413T [f.] 33 Ipar-TlSltf Jussiv Nif. 32 dSk Pause 31 \l)Y\2 30 n 2 
<- - T Ivt •• : • - t - - • ; 

:Nif 42yjH 41^-l^n 40 bx Nif. 39*jDX [f.] 38 31T1 37 ""fn 36 pflj; 

§ 41. VERBS AYIN GUTTURAL. 

1. These verbs are subject to the same variations as the 
verbs Pe Guttural, taking Sh'va comp. in all those forms 
where the second radical has Sh'va: as HDrp to go far 
away, for tffjftl; W£T) to slaughter, for 'tpn^fl . 

2. The fat. and imp. in these verbs are regularly A : 

as prrv . 

3. Pi. Pu. and Hith., which require the characteristic 
doubling of the second radical, lengthen the vowel under 
the first to compensate for the omitted Dag. : as ?p3 
for rp?, TpDP for Tj^p, rp^p for Tpj3p. 

Before H > fl and J^ the preceding vowel very often re- 
mains short ;: as 1J75 t° destroy, pfl^ to mock, 1tl\QO to 
cleanse. 



§ 41. Verbs Ayix Guttural. 75 

4. In Pi. and Hithp. the Tsere of the last syllable is 

shortened to Seghol by throwing back the accent, which 

> 
often occurs after Vav Conv.: as 5JH-V1 and he drove away, 

for EH3* » n*1jy*5 and he ministered,, for rVT[fiS^> or when a 
monosyllabic word or one with the tone on the penult 
follows : as *3 PDV^? t° mock me, D^ ft*)]%7 to minister 
there. (§ 14, Shortening c). 

Exercise 64. 

Sy ^pnWps di^oi w l?? *1>'! ®'^ ln ^? fehw d!?3 

10 $¥] $ 9 fch| JDiW's teirn** 8r p?- wit 03 ^hrj 7# 
Dnn?K-n^ rp© nirm : 12 ii^_NSi d nr»! Wsdis rjVTp 

-Sn rafcrr^ ^n ton*i : le Dnann'p 3p#_**l8D!! :iS 
n^ hn jrpK 18 ^^' ^k "Wk ~ot *3»d 17 nron ki 

v -; I t •• • t v -: t t • v ■ ■ -: - : t 

fiTirtop nS p# W n|pD« oi!f 19 j3 : T"P'? TW 

• : t t : *• t : t : ■ f ■ - "-: - • ) : - : 

garment 1 training, instruction 2 not 3 to mock 4 to grow old 5 to boast one's 
self 6 to hew 7 to bless 8 to cast out 9 shall go 10 to flee 11 to continue 12 early 13 
§ 105, 6. a curse 14 to refuse 15 to comfort, console one's self 16 to hide 17 to 
ask 18 son»of 19 to purify, to clean 20 to change 21 garments 22 to deny, deal 
falsely 23 to lie 24 fellow- man 25 deceit, fraud 26 to abhor 27 - 

Exercise 65. 

Serve 1 (p. m.) the Lord in truth 2 > and if (it be) evils in your 
eyes 4 to serve the Lord, choose you 5 this day 6 whom you will 
serve, whether*' the gods, which your fathers 9 served 8 or 1 *) 
the gods of 11 the Amorites 12 , in whose landi3 you dwell; 
I and my house 14 , we will serve the Lord. And* 5 the 
people saidis. Q d forbid 16 that we should forsake 1 '' the 



76 Part 1. Exercise! 

Lord, to serve other 18 gods; for the Lord drove out^ 
from before us 20 all the people 21 ;' also we will serve the 
Lord , for he is our God. Do not deny 22 your (pi. m.) 
God. The Lord trieth 23 the righteous. They cried 24 unto 
God and were delivered 2 ^ Truth (f.) does not spring up26 
until 2 * the lie 2 ^ is rooted out 28 - We blessso you in the 
name of the Lord. And he drove out the man. How 
long 31 refuse 32 ye to keep my commandments? Haste 
thee 33 (fern, s.) escape 34 (f. s.) thither 35 - How long will 
ye despise 36 intelligence 3 ^ will ye regard 38 it as 39 an ad- 
versary^, whilst^ 1 it loves 42 you, seeks 43 your welfare 44 * to 
lead 45 you in the way of 46 integrity 4 ? • 

8 verb before the noun 7 QX 6 DVTI 5Dat. A D3"T#3 3 JH [f.] 2 riDX l"t3>? 
15-I3X'^ 14, r\'3 [§ 23, 4. § 96, 2j 13 Q:nX3 12 HroXH ll'ffSx 10 DX1 »p3*ntes$ 
[the adj. after the noun \ 90, 2.] 18 D'lnX 17 transl. from forsaking [§ 30, 1.] 16 -ljS H^Sn 

• — : T T • T 

24pT»: Fut. 23?n2 Pi. Jussive with 3 22#n.3 21 Q'Etf 20 -IJ^jan Pi. 19 i^ H 

IT? Pi. pret. 30^3 m. 29 3T3 Pu. 28£'1# 27 It* Fut. 26 m¥ Pause ! 25 D^D 

"- »-T TT ~T ~ -T -T 

[f.]37rnofi 36vxj ^rvw Nif. 34bSq pi. 33 ma pj. pret. 32 ran 3irux 

T : I -T TT — T _ T I- T TT 

trans, seeking 43 ghl transl. it [f] is loving 42 3HX 411 Part. act. f. 40 Vtf 39 ^ 38 3&'n 
: 47 D'lpn 46 TY^ Pi. the vowel short ! 45 Sn J 44 y,Q 

§ 42. VERBS LAMED GUTTURAL. 

1 . To this class belong only verbs with f"? » $ and |"1 (17 
with Mappik § 7) as the third radical, 

2. Their peculiarities are: 

a. These gutturals when final require the A sound before 
them, hence every other mutable vowel is changed into 
Patach; the Inf., Imp. and Fut. therefore have A: as 
tfh&\ to send, rhV ♦ 

b. The gutturals preceded by the immutable vowels ), ^, 
>— , » T take Patach furtive (§ 6.): as rTQJh JftDB>> 

3. The forms with Tsere before the final guttural either 
retain the Tsere and then Pat furt. must follow, or Tsere 
is changed into Patach: as HaTO- or H^Cft. 



§ 42. Verbs Lamed Guttural. 77 

Note. The form with Tsere and Pat. furt. is found more frequently 

at the end of a period (with distinctive accent): as JHT* Lev. 11, 37, 

but jnj» Na. 1.14. fin? Job 12, 18, but fUgj^Job 30. 11. 

4. In the second sing. f. of the pret., which ends with 

two vowellesa consonants, the guttural takes Patach instead 

of Sh'va: as T\fftXf> for gJJDtf; the sing. f. form of the 

participles, take two Patachs instead of two Seghols : as 

ruse* for wpp . 

Exercise 66. 

3 nr\hy 2 riwzh dwi bSri irbn : on 1 ? x i«on nS ajhfl 

•.•••-:- • •• t : |t | t v t ^ -: • " T '♦ 

r 3*)$? |iq# 6t nn; nS :nrn Dj?n 5 py : S w- 4 nSp :TjSp 

-nnp :^>s*3 ?|J1*3^ TT n £ hJ P^ 9 ^ n § 8 P"^ H$0 
*6 dhn is *?ir) n^3^n kS 12 [Vi3$i u SiN&> : 10 D^-.?fe 
kS : 15 n5PN niinn 14ta ]in? pn? ng Svj; ton :"r?jjf3t«i 
riB&yjsDsrj iBfafif 18 23^ 17 n&^}» :jfr3fc*3#? ^ni^S 

jrttfn a p*re& nab 20 rvS^ *<in own 19 ^hSn j^S 
:nirr : ogi>3Jf7*< 3/9^ :rnrv ^rojttn pnv 22 y:ur\m 
:D?n 26 nn^ jwS dib :S»>sn- 25 nn3 nj?Dir 24 rntr 
mn* wro* rnrr Saoty* y^tr : rafc riafe* nban 3rfcne*K 

t : •• v: t : ■• t : • w — : • t - - : t : t 

to withhold 1 to anoint' 2 §97, 2. 3 to pardon 4 iniquity of 5 to cease 6 midst 
of 7 therefore 8 to open 9 dumb 10 hell 11 destruction 12 the eyes of 13 in 14 to 
slay 15 for ever 16 to cheer, to gladden 17 the heart of 18 the God of 19 to cause 
or make to prosper 20 to justify 21 to condemn 22 abomination oft 3 n. p. f. 24 
door 25 § 85, 4. b. rebuke of 26 other 27 - 

Exercise 67. 

Behold upon the mountains 1 (are) the feet of2 him that 
bringeth good tidings 3 ) that published peaces. Dost thou 
(f. sing.) not know6 whither 7 the men 8 did go? I flee 9 
from the faceio of Sarai 11 - And he rose upi2 to flee 
unto 13 Tarshish 1 *. And David said: arise^ and let us 
flee 16 - But 17 to the king of Judah 18 ? which sent 19 you to 



78 Part I. Exercises. 

inquire 2 o of the Lord, thus 21 shall ye say 22 to him : be- 
cause 23 thine heart 24 (is) tender 25 and* thou hast hum- 
bled thyself^ before 2 * the Lord and* hast rent.28 thy 
clothes 29 . I also have heard thee. I will hear what 
God will speak. Again 3 * (there) shall be heard in this 31 
place the voice of joy 32 - The house of 33 the wicked shall 
be overthrown 34 ) but 1 * the tent 35 of the upright 3 ^ shall 
flourish 3 *- He that trusteth 38 in his own heart, is a fool 39 , 
but whoso walketh 49 wisely 41 he shall be delivered 42 - 

4part. Hi. of T?D# 3 part. Pi. of "tt#3 the bringer of (him that br.) g. tidings 2^.1") 1 D^n 
— : — r •• : - • t 

10 'jfaib §part. f. s. rP3 8 the noun a/fcer the verb (§ 107, 4.) 7 HJX 6pret. VT 5 DvW 

" : • -T TT ' - T T 

lSnTITT 171 lbfut. parag. in pause 15 HMD 14tf*tfhfl 13(§ 19, 6.) 12Qp") 11 ^V 
x ; : I • : - Itt- ~t 

25Tp 24n33S 23 W SB.npKft 21 p|3 20 with ace. tfTT 19 part, with article 

32nnO^ 31(§94, 2) 30 "ity 29 ^133 28 jpn 27^30 26Ni. JJJJ! *Vavconv. 

39S'D2) 38 part, with 2 ,n ^3 37Hi. J-p3 36Qnar 35Shx 34 Ni. "in# 33n\3 
• : - t - t • t : v - -r 

.42£3 l 7D 41 (in wisdom) nd^n 40 part. "jS PI 



CHAPTER VIII. 

THE SUFFIXES OF THE VERB. 
§ 42. IN GENERAL. 

1. The suffixes of the verb are: 
Person : 1 . 

Sing. com. *J 
Plur. com. 1J 

Note, ")£ » poetically used for D : as 1DD3 it covered them. 

2. The suff. are annexed to the verbal forms by vowels, 
called: Union vowels; to the pret. by the A. vowel (— 
or — ), to the future by the E. vowel (— or — ). The union 
vowel is only applied to the verbal forms, ending with a 





2. 




3. 


m. 


*| 


m. 


in (i) 


f. 


T 


f. 


n <n-> 

T T 


m. 


DD 


m. 





f. 


» 


f. 


I 



§ 42. In General. 79 

consonant: as ^™7Dp > ^?£0p he killed me; whilst with all 
the forms ending with a vowel the suffixes are connected 
immediately: as ^tpp> ^H^tpD they k. m. 

§ 43. THE PRETERITE WITH SUFFIXES. 

1. The lengthening of the word by the suffixes causes 
the dropping of the pretonic Kamets. Hence the pret. 



undergoes the following changes: 



Person. Person. Person. 

1. 2. . 3. 

ri?9p T into rfep troop) Sop/nt" *bpp 



I J (Deroro^ j ♦ 

n?L)p T WOp TD£?£ fl7 

dmSdp 



CDD 



v- Vbtop Ijftttp X ~ ,s > !U*E)p £top ^Dp 

: " It : " ,: I07Bj?.5 : " ,: :,T t|: 

2. Verbs middle E retain this vowel before the suffixes: 
as ^DilN to love, OC'^fr to put on a garment. In Pi. and 
other forms with final — , this — changes before the suf- 
fixes T\, DID ' p into Seghol ; before the other stiff, it falls 
away entirely i as StSp , ^Stpp - D^^p ■ tf?t?j? • 

3. The form tv?Qp sometimes undergoes a contraction : 
^Ifi— for IJin— ; Jin— for nfi— as Ifi^pj) she weaned him, 
I. Sam. 1, 24. tlftinX (fear) has laid hold on her , Jer. 49, 24. 

Exercise 68. 

2 ^iy S*ob» nriNi tcps-trwa Mittfinx dttSn tinira 

■ : ~ ■• • t : • T~: |vt |t: - t:-: • v: t : - : 

nif?! : M plV pM ^W8Jr*|fc* ^JT}Ur*lN 4 ^V£N 
10 nzh hx hx : w npi^ 9 We W w 'h:q •utf'aSrr 

* /tOp before grave suff. 



80 Part 1. Exercises. 

'jnin* rnn> nm : 18 n^o 17 irn^ ie fo^ rnn ^^S i5 pro 

to prove 1 my servants fear 3 to strengthen 4 my righteousness-^ to clothe 6 
(with two ace. § 85, 2, 6.) garments of? salvation 8 the robe oft why 10 to be 
willing 11 to repay 12 thanksgiving 13 to deliver 14 straw 1 ^ chaff 16 to carry 
off 1 ? a hurricane 18 - 

Exercise 69. 
She did 1 Iiim good and not evil all the days of2 her 
life 3 - For 4 a shorts moments I have forsaken thee (s. f.)., 
but^ with 4 everlasting9 kindness 8 I will have mercy on 1 ^ 
thee (s. f.). Thine 11 (are) (the) heavens alsoi2 Thine (is) 
(the) earth, Thou hast founded 13 them. Sarah 14 has 
driven 1 ^ me out of her house 16 - No 1 ^ fear of 18 God (is) 
in this place and they will kilUs me. Very 2 2 reflned 2 o 
(is) Thy saying 21 , and Thy servant 23 loveth 24 it. Dost 
thou (s. f.) know25 the men that have asked 26 thee (s. f.) 
for 2 *? my name 28 ? I do not know 2 9 them. Who has 
killed him? her? them? We have touched 36 thee, (s. m.) 
thee, (s. f.) her, him. Thou (s. f.) hast touched her, him, 
us, them (p. f.). Why hast thou (s. f.) forsaken us? 
her? me? him? They have forsaken them, you. W T hy 
has she persecuted 31 him? us? you? (p. f.) thee? (s. f.) 
her? He has gathered them, you, thee, us. 

9dSu? 8 "?Dn 71 6?bp 5WJH 4 3 3withpl.,suff. D'Tf S-'D" 1 with ace. ^Q J 
t * ::• I It -V - - -: -t 

,rV3 15Pi. £'"U liT\^W 13 ID" 1 12*1N ll-nS 10 Pi. with ace. to have m. on : Dtl"! 

-T TT -t I- ': •• - 

221ND 21 (f.) *|inp« 20 part. pass. tpy 19 >nn 18 HNT 17-p« 16 with suff. rv\3 

.31«rn 30j?JJ 29pret. 28 with suff. "Dtf ,D# 27 S 26^0 25 JJT 24 3HK 23ni3^ 

§ 44. THE FUTURE WITH SUFFIXES. 

1. The Cholem of fui Kal, "before ?j, DJ and p changes 
into Kamets-Chatuph ; before the other suif. it drops : as 

2. The verbs with the fut. A. (including the verbs Ay in 
and Lamed * Guttural) not only retain their A sound 
(Tatach), but even lengthen it into Kamets. the syllable 



§ 44. The Future with Suffixes. 81 

"becoming an open one : as ^^TT lie will clothe me ; 
*n6*U? they pollute him. 

3. Pi. loses or shortens its Tsere, like Kal its Cholem : as 
?|¥3j2! ne wil1 gather thee, DV$(2 ♦ 

4. The plur. fern, forms, 2. and 3. person (in HJ)) are 
changed into the corresponding masc. forms (in )) before 
connection with suffixes : as ^y^fly) Sty TlHpN my maids 
count me for a stranger. Job 19, 15. 

5. In pause, there is occasionally inserted instead of the 
union vowel a union syllable ?— , 7— , called : Nun epenthetic, 

as in^nn\ 

3 epenthetic is usually assimilated to the first letter of the 
suffix and expressed by Dag. forte. These suffixes are : 
Person. Person. Person. 

L 2. 3. 

Sing. c. ♦J-and >•)- ^- (H3-) m. tf- ■ f . H-H- 

Plur. 15- and ^j- 

Exekcise 70. 

*3 ^133^ ^.P?T0 r»fKd"!?K ny? r?3f? noon -\rijp 
-S«i u n3; ^£tnS) i\ ^n* J-^-iprn? ?|WJ3 9 ^np;. 

t|v • : t v •• -t v : t J : v.- ) v t : 

b*n y?nn w : 16 ^.f'Kfi 73 b»k 15 np &7 njj jmsd 

175 innpnpi i-npon »? onK-pyi i^rr? #iJ£"no :jnD 

^3 :nirv ^^ : 18 rn^i?n "nm tedi D^rt^D &#? 

: 20 ^Wpn ^ MD^^l^n^ "wnfts nan 

buy, acquire 1 to embrace 2 to be attentive 3 to sustain 4 the bed of 5 sick- 
ness 6 pride, arrogance 7 deed, act 8 to bring near 9 to put far away, remove 10 
stranger, foreigner 11 lips 1 * 2 to bind 13 correction 14 had died 15 to pronounce 
happy 16 to make inferior 17 to crown 18 (§ 85. 2. b.) our fathers 19 to compare 20 - 

11 



82 Paut 1. Exercises. 

Exercise 71. 
The Lord will requite 1 me according to 2 my righteous- 
ness 3 - The name of 4 God will set thee on high5> will send 
thee help 6 from the sanctuary? and sustain 8 thee out of 
Zion. From the extremity of 9 the heaven, thy God will 
gather 1 ** thee. Now" I shall gather them, thee (s. f.), 
you (p. f.), her. When 12 my brother 14 will meet thee 13 
and ask 15 thee: whose 16 (art) thou? Thou wilt meet him, 
she will meet you. Thou (s. f.) wilt meet her. Why 
dost thou ask me (fut.). They (pi. f.) will ask us. They 
(pi. mas.) will ask you. Who will honor 17 him, that 
dishonoreth 18 his life 19 ? Now will love 20 me my hus- 
band 21 - Thou (s. f.) wilt love him. They (pi. f.) will 
love her. You (pi. m.) will love us. 

V^lp 6(§ 93, 6.) thee help ?pTJ7 5 set on high, Pi. 3Jjp 4 Qttf S^DIV 23 1 SdJ 
(usually hxti) hut 14TIX 13#J3 12\3 11T\F\V 10 Pi. V^p 9^p 8fut. A. 1J?D 
.21 ^K 20 fut. A. 2T\H 19)^33 18 HT13 17 Pi.133 16 to whom 15 with Vav conv. fut. A. 

§ 45. THE INFINITIVE WITH SUFFIXES. 

1. The infln. Kal when connected with suffixes appears 
in the form 7pp> and according to its signification receives 
either the verbal suffixes or the nominal suffixes : as \37£0D 

• • • : J T 

to kill me ; vi?p my killing. 

2. With the suffixes T] , DJ ? D a f° rm sometimes occurs 
with Kamets under the second radical : as ^DN thy 
eating. 

3. The infin. 7£0p assumes with suff. the form btQp '■ as 
iJt?b>S to hinder him. 

Exercise 72. 

rhv >jik hfmfh$ Sk^' -v?k*i : mp&h r^o vh- 1 mn 
wrtS# np\ mv : 7 dS^ 6 SyD Dpmn, 5 ^ 1 ? 4 dwh 



§ 40. The Imperative with Suffixfes. 83 

| : : • : ■.- ■ v : t -; : t : t : t t ~- v : • t 

imrnt 14! iarv 0-0*01 d-tn irw oy&h 13 nm i 12 ayyy 

| • : • t : t : t t •• t • w ' t : | : V " . " 

oni ho bin* rpru ran wn mn SixrS th itsth 

• t : • t : t : } : t : v - - • • • t : ■ T 

ae^ ^pp ^rng Trap o ho ^? M *p3rn8 15 nao 
jytffli nrn ho j\st o i8 jH 17 ^nno 

give 1 the sons, children of 2 to sell 3 Greeks 4 in order that 5 away from, from 6 
territory 7 keep holy 8 to surround 9 to seize, capture 10 to open 11 your eyes 12 
when rise 13 become many, multiply 14 see 15 the skirt ofr6 to kill 17 know 18 - 

Exercise 73. 

He sufferedi no 2 man to do them wrongs- And 4 the 
manna 6 left off 5 from the morrow 7 after they had eaten^ of 
the produces of the land. David has sent comforters™ unto 
thee to search 11 the city, (§ 57, 5. D ) to spy it out 12 and 
to overthrow 1 ? it. And 4 Ruthis said i4 entreat^ me not 
(§ 104, 2.) to leave 1 7 thee (s. f.). Haman 18 has devisedi9 
against20 the Jews2i to destroy22 them. Preserve 2 3 ? my 
son, the law oi'2 4 thy mother 25 , when thou goest26, it 
shall lead27 thee, when thou sleepest-28, it shall keep 
thee29. 

7nin!3 6TD 5fl31# 4Vav Conv. 3pt£h? 2 no tf'S (before the verb) 1 n^H 
tt: t I t - t I - t - - • 

14*lDltn 13^3H 12 Pi. *7Jl*1 n ^pT\ 10 part. Pi. DHJ 9 T&JJ 8 transl. in their eating 

23iyj 22 Pi. nax 2i Dn«T 20 S« i9^n isrron irya> i6with 3 iua 15 nn 

"T : "- - T I TT -*T ~T 

28 inf. with 3. 33$ 27nnjj^ 26 transl. in thy going. "jSn Hithp. 25 3J3K 24JWlfl 

.29 with pi. suff. ,S^ "IDtf 

§ 46. THE IMPERATIVE WITH SUFFIXES. 

1. The form 7bp changes before its annexion to suff. 
into *7tpD ; as the infinitive. The form Wpft and 17830 re- 
main unchanged; H^COp takes the form of I/Dp ♦ 

2. In verbs Ayin and Lamed Guttural, the A vowel of 
the final syllable is retained and lengthened into Kamets : 
as ♦XtSc' send me ; >2iSn# ask me. 



84 Part 1. Exercises. 

Exercise 74. 

--S- - : t: t I-- | • : • : t : • •• : T 

6 ^V?D :nirr »£jpo ; 6 >i?tf? ♦rfrN nm q 4 71<27l 3 ^?K3 

Tp >jW?b JirnsyjrW? 15 injn T 3 erjn ^T£ M ^*W 
^nptfi *ro? nirr Jijrr r«w :y&n td into^s :-« 

■• I : t • •• : t t t ; — r t - w t t - • -■ : - t 

: in 5T)5 >S 16 oprn 

according - to my rigteousnessl to lead 2 in Thy truth 3 to teach 4 my sal- 
vation 5 to deliver 6 to redeem 7 to cleanse, purify 8 to be or become clean, 
pun- 9 ye that fear 10 thy throat 11 the table 12 thy heart 13 to enter 14 to 
avoid 15 tu revenge 16 persecutor 17 - 

Exercise 75. 
Hear me (pi. hi.) and entreat 1 for2 me to 1 the king. 
Remember me, pray3> and strengthen 4 me, pray, only 5 this 
once^.that? I may he avenged^ on.8 my enemies^. Gather i° 
them from among 11 the people^ (pi.). Fear* 3 the Lord 
and love Him. If 14 iniquity 15 (be) in thy hand, put it 
far away 16 andi7 leti8 noti' wrongs dwells in thy tents 20 - 
And he said : draw? 1 thy swords, and thrust me through 23 
therewith 24 , lest25 these uncircumcised 2 ' come 2 ^ and* thrust 
me through and* abuse28 me. Hear (s. f.) us. Hear 
(pi. f.) me, Help29 (pi. f.) me. Help (pi. m.) him. 
Bury 30 (pi. £.) her, for she is a king's daughter. 

8 Ni. optat. with D ,DDJ *1 6(gS4, 3.) f. Dj;3 5}N 4 Pi. pm 3*0 2^ I with 3 ^jg 
17^1 16 Hi- Dm 15 |W 14 DK 13 KT 12 O;0 11 |D. 10 Pi. pp 9*£* 
<f. 3111)243 23np_T 22rj3~;n 21 BjStjf SO^SriS i9 rHl^ 18 § 104, 3. Hi. J3# 
:30-Qp 29-lTj; * Vav. Conv. 28 with 3, Hith. hh]? 27 D ,l 7")# 26ttti? 25 |£j 

§ 47. THE PARTICIPLE WITH SUFFIXES. 
The participles of Kal and Pi. lose their final Tsere and 
like the infin. according to their signification, receive either 
the nominal or verbal suffixes : as ^""l?^' he who keeps me, 
**")Dt^ my keeper. 



§ 49. The Participle with Suffixes. 85 

Exercise 76. 

3 rip ims* hms : 2 Stt ^rvtNo Sk ttifcfitf nirr 

t ^ - : • t : v t : t T •• t . 

niir :o*n oro* rrnniN "ma 16 fiWi no^nn nrW' 

t : • - -: t t v ~: t v t I •■ - : t : t - •. : • 

i a '?W?5 "♦SDifr 19 roV. t^jw T^E 18 ^ n 3 n : *D^ 
*S#q ivrh&b B }OH3 *t$ tvr Oi>3 "jfcg^niV? 
^•nptr :D*geh 29 vnn : ^p-S3 np^ V28 n3T^_ , *3Mj'j39 
:"?|Djfi» r J?i ^rtx nin? 32 S^! 31 Tpn ^natf ^^jp-^g 
pN "wh^ ^Tpp : 35 ^ikk 34 ^V?j^ ^;raq nroa 

•• T • T T | •.. : 

to gird 1 (■§ 85, 2, b.) strength- (that which is) holy, consecrated to God 3 to 
be or become guilty 4 to swear 5 by his right (hand) 6 if~ (§ 108, 4.) I give 8 
corn 9 enemies 10 drink 11 the alien 12 new wine, must 13 to gather 14 to store up 15 
to teach 16 her, its children 17 shade 18 to clothe 19 adversaries 20 confusion 21 as 
the cold of 32 snow 23 messenger 24 faithful 25 a ruler 26 to hearken 27 word of 28 
servant 29 say 30 continually 31 to be great 32 salvation 33 to curse 34 I will curse, 
devote to destruction 35 shall inherit 36 to be destroyed 37 - 

Exercise 77. 

These (are) our judges 1 that judge us. The land 2 shall not 
he expiated 3 oi' 4 the blood that is shed 5 therein 6 ; but 7 by 8 
the blood of him that shed 9 it. For I was ashamed 1 *) to ask 
of the king a force 11 to help us against 12 the enemy 13 in 
the way: because 14 we had spoken 15 unto the king, say- 
ing 16 > The hand of 17 our God (is) upon* all them that 
seek 18 Him for goocU9; but 2 o His power 21 and His wrath 22 
(is) against* all them that forsake Him 23 - They that curse 24 
thee shall be cursed, and they that bless 25 thee shall be 
blessed. Lord, who is like unto 26 Thee, who deliverest 27 
the poor 28 and the needy 29 from him that robbeth 3 o him. 

8 3 *ON - \3 6 3 5Pu. 1j3?# 4S 3Pu. "i£J3 2 Dative=to the land (f,) I part. £J3# 

•Sj? i7 t i« ^bx 1 ? i5*ina u'3 is ym 120 n Vn wmia apart. 



86 Part 1, Exercises. 

25 Pi. part. rp3 24 part. TIN 23 part. 2213N 21 VT^ 20 ) 19 nSltt 1 ? 18 ri. part. KJpS 

; 30 part. SU 29 tf"3X 28 *JM 27 VXD 26 (before grave suff. 103) 1D3 
-t I : •.• • t • - it 



CHAPTER IX. 

IRREGULAR VERBS. 

§ 48. VERBS tf"£) . 

1. The verbs of which the first radical is K partake of 
all the peculiarities of the verbs Pe Guttural. In some 
of them, however, the N is quiescent in either Cholem or 
Tsere, hence they are called; & '£) *ptJ = quiescent the £} 
i. e. the first radical K ♦ 

2. In the fut. Kal the five following verbs: 1DN to 
perish, |"D^ to be willing, 75^ to eat ? *®N to sa 7 an( i 
rit3N to bake, have the K quiescent in Cholem: as ^3Kfi 
thou wilt eat, "DK* he will perish. In the first person 
the N drops : as *tt?K I shall say. The verbs ?n& to take 
hold, ^|DN to collect, have beside the regular form ttlW > 
ep&, the form of the N"£: inW, f)p*l 2. Sam. 6, 1. 

3. The final syllable has generally Patach, Tsere is for 
the most part used in syllables with a distinctive accent: 
15K* Job 3, 3. 1p& Job 20, 7. S?Kn 1. Mos. 3, 14, 
S:?Kn 1. Mos. 2, 16. 

4. With Vav Conv. the accent is thrown back: aD^V 

TQ&Y, but with a distinctive accent, Milra : S^kTV "l£K1 ♦ 

••• ~ >«:-*'-. 

5. The inf. Kal of TDK with 7> is iDtf*?, for iD*6 
(§ 12, 6. B. 3.). 

6. In the verbs 7]N to go away, ^flitf to tarry, to delay, 
Hntf to come, the N quiesces in Tsere: as 7?N>for ^ftW* 

rim*, for ntnjr; niw,for -twn (cf. § 12, 6, b. 3.). 



49. Verbs N"S . 



87 



Exercise 78. 

y& : 4 mpn 12m yen din 3 niM :na^- fl D^r3r?iy 

t| : • - w i t t t : • t : *•• 

10 tfsu 9 wsn nVi 8 n^ S^n 7 mn i 6 nnz S^tf 5 n^n 

vt '"•:' : t t _ v v t : • - t •• : 

16 >3-n rnriDj no^n Sn : l2 n^ -ibo in b>md u aai 

• : - t : : • - - v - : t t w - : ■.••.•• t t : 

new* fmiT 16 ^n toTvi prop ^ u vm 14 Di-mi rnrvD 

— :- t : •• : : : ■- • •• t : • t t : • t •• 

!»vSm vt l9 n«hs-nN 18 i»pn infc nrrrKn 17 pn ir o'-iK 

t: -: tt v : |-:- -: ) •.• t -: 

tin bank? ^g to*n jtstot S^rr htya *t>7 *? 23 S^tro 
tonyso "rc^irr? 28 p?0 nS ♦? 27 nvip 26 riw 25 pv3n 

: 3l nfilpj; nnNi w »ira jdS'dj; 

witness 1 lie, falsehood 2 § 82, 5. and § 83, 6 ; when dies 3 expectation, (sup- 
ply ^is) 4 fig- tree 5 fruit 6 sword 7 flesh, body 8 meet, reach unto 9 soul 10 lie, 
falsehood 11 ruins, destro} T s 12 my way 13 hight of 14 his heaven 15 sons of 16 
p. n. m. 17 to cut off 18 thumbs, great toes 19 feet 20 weak 21 fool 22 wise, prudent 23 
in proportion, according to 24 dough 25 cakes 26 (§ 85, 3) unleavened 27 leav- 
ened 28 drive out 29 I have sojourned 30 now 31 . 

Exercise 79. 

Say ye to the righteous (man), because 1 (he is) good, 
that2 he shall eat the fruit of 3 his doings 4 - Not shall es- 
cape 5 the wicked, and the patience oft the righteous shall 
not be in vain 7 - And§ the children of Israel 9 said: who 
shall give 10 us flesh 11 to eat 10 ? We remember (pret.) the 
flsh 1 2, which we did eat in Egypt 13 freely 14 - Eat thou 
not the bread of an evil eye 15 (i. e. an envious, malig- 
nant person), for eat, saith 1 ^ he to thee, but 17 his heart 18 
is not 19 with20 thee. The children of Israel are not will- 
ing to hearken to thee. And8 the asses 21 of 22 Kish 23 were 
lost 24 . 

9*7*0?^ ^3 8VavConv. 713K 6fem. nipfi 5Ni. dSd ^StfD 3 nfl 2 \3 1 \3 
•• t: • •• : -t -I : • t"=:- ■ : 

in 16 fut. 15 PV in l 4 D3n 13Dn2fD- 12 nj^ ll*lt2G 10 Hi. S^K (give to eat) 
\.<- * ~ T . ._.. TT TT 

.-24T3K 23 Br-p 32 (§ 80, 10) S IK'K or S 21(fem.) nfo JrtK 20 D# 19^3 18 faS 

§ 49. VERBS N" 1 ? . 
1. In verbs of which the third radical is ft, the N qui- 



88 Fart I. Exercises. 

esces whenever the final syllable has A or E, and length- 
ens final Patach into Kamets: as W£ft, for &^'D (§ 14. 
Lengthening, 3.); X7p to be full. 

2. Before the consonantal afTormatives (HO) & quiesces 
in the pret. Kal in Kamets : flK'iD » in the pret. of all 
the other conjugations in Tsere : jl^VD^J in the imp. and 
fut. of all the conjugations in Seghol: as Jl^NV?' nttttfEfl. 

3. The verbs middle E, like K*T to fear, retain Tsere 
throughout the rest of the forms : as J1N*V » 'JlK^D I have 

o T .. T . .. T 

filled. 

4. The part. fern, is commonly formed by contraction 

nNvb.for n^h (§ 12, 6. b. 3.). 

Note. The Infinitive sometimes has the termination H& or p\\ 
as n^tr Prov. 8, 13. nJGJfi Zech. 13, 4. HlSt^ Ez. 36, 3, 

: : t • - 

Exercise 80, 

6 in) 5 #niD 4 Man? nro* Sk &bn 3 )&±> 2 im 1 ix xbn 
h^ lo mnL) nS : 9 wrto£ nn^ 8 SW? 7 rti^ b»k 
^y_ l5 ^?rh 14 nV^ : 13 T)p? 12 ^.rr n pDj rrrn s &rh$ 

: 23 D>in.P 22 ^DR W$> : 21 k^S nj?i : nn^ n# ^jtfte^V 
"D3 : 28 f^0 27 ^n^- 26 N*S^ 25 nrh\) npa> an 1 ? ^>nS 24 :nj/ 
31 wk:d 3o *op_rrStt id^twjj 29 ^riK) en xiw\ ^njhf? 
P'^8 :KS?n npnv (pHS 33 nn*b> n^n 32 m^. :run 

«fflri] 39 Ktprr 38 Q1£T£ :?>>* ^^?0 K ^ n ^^^ 
: 41 ^n^? ?prw-n£ aoirrn6 j^k^-Jin 

father 1 one 2 to all of us 3 to create 4 why 5 to deal treacherously 6 against his 
brother 7 to profane 8 our fathers 9 clean 10 right 11 renew 12 within me 13 to 
cast 14 bread 15 upon (the surface) 16 multitude of = after man}' 17 da}^s 18 to 
find 19 to heal, cure 20 to hate 21 congregation of22 evil doers 23 agreeable, 
sweet 24 afterwards 25 to fill 26 his mouth 27 gravel - stones 28 (§ 85, 2. a.) 
friends of 2 9 to be envious 30 men of 31 (§ 83, 6 ) crown 32 gray hair 33 to 
wound, to injure 34 to bind up35 to split, to dasli3(> unrighteousness^ n. p. in. 38 
siri39 (§25,7)40 thy heart 4 *- 



§ 50: Verbs J"£. 89 

Exercise 81 . 
I said, Lord heal 1 my soul 2 > for I have sinned 3 against* 
Thee. And Moses said unto the people: ye have sinned 
a greats sin 5 - And? (there) remained 8 two of9 (the) men 
in the camp 19 > the name of the one 1 * was Eldad 12 and 
the name of the other 13 Medad 14 and? they prophesied 15 in 
the camp, and? (there) said a young man 16 to Moses: 
Eldad and Medad do prophesy in the camp. And? Joshua 1 ? 
said: my lord 18 Moses forbid 19 them. And Moses said unto 
him, enviest20 thou for my sake 21 ? would22 God2 2 that 22 
all the Lord's people (were) prophets 23 - The ear 25 is not 
tilled 24 with 26 hearing. In the lips 2 ? of the intelligent 
(man) 28 wisdom is found 29 - And 7 Jehosbeba 30 stole Joash3i 
and hid 32 him from* Athalia 33 , and he was 34 hid 35 in the 
house of the Lord six years. 

9'Jtf 8Ni. IXtf 7VavConv. 6nH"\i 5riXBn *S 3XDn 2'#3J 1X31 

t : tt -: t - • : - t t 

is 'hx wgtffrr wij^ i5mth. xaj i4itd 13^ ^ttSn ninx i°njriD 

25 [fern.] «N 24fut. Ni. tfSrD 23 D\S^J 22 tW TO 21 S 20 part Pi. tfjp 19xSj 
i v ... i ... . I TT 

33 irrSny. 3=2 m. fut. nno 3itfar wyaaftVp 29 nl fut. 28 p'aj vneto 26 d 

.*U3D 37 0'^ 36#tf 35 part. Hith. JOn 34 TH 

§ 50. VERBS p3. 

1. The verbs, of which the first radical is 3 , lose }, when- 
ever it should take Sh'va, by assimilation, hence the sec- 
ond radical is doubled, i. e. receives Dag. forte: asGJty, 
for #3)», tr'^H.for B^P? (§ 12, 4.). Before a gutt. the 
assimilation does not take place: as pN^V ^V^tl (ibid.). 
In the infin. and imp., 3 drops without compensation, the 
following letter commencing the word: as C'J) (Dag. lene); 
before Makkef -&$, with pargog. H> H^« The regular 
form of the imp. is found occasionally: as £>£} leave, VVllj 
vow ye. (See 3 of this §.) 

2. With these verbs, in order to make the infin. dissylla- 
bic, it takes the fern, nominal ending ft— — ,or fl— — when 
the second or third radical is a guttural : as D^il > t\]tjk to 
touch. (See 3 of this §.) 

3. In most cases, these verbs have a fut. and imp. ; 

12 



90 Part I. Exercises. 

many A: as *75* to fall, K?J*. The imp. and infin. of verbs 
with fut. 0, are regular: as bhl> inf. ^b^5 ♦ 

4, The verb JH3 to give, has besides the irregularities of 
the verbs J' '5 the peculiarity, that it also assimilates its 
final 3 before the afformatives D and J: as DrO>for JWt3> 
1111 for U111 infin. mfor ftffl (2) ; with" D^M • Hli, 

- T • I : ~ T " " : 

nn?> nrv% nri?; imp, jj-i, ^n, ^ri, with parag. rpron* 

5. In flfj^ to take, the 7 is analogous to the 3 of 
the verbs' f"fi, Fut. HpUbr Hp^, inf. iTTpj with D^: 

nnp> nnpb, nnpo; imp. tip_, >np> inp, runp. Ho.np> 

for npT (§ 14, Short, b.); but Ni. always Hp^ . 

Exercise 82. 

rrjrv 16 &ran D!D#d : 15 dW ^jr^g hk : 13 ian kSi 

• ^ t : • ~: I v w ~ -: t t t •• : t v t t 

22 nirrK 21 Jipn jn^w 20 r?: D^pj 19 >£ :^3! kSh py_ 
nppnn \h'\V) *T$R napn n'Djm * pirns rrpnyi costro 
^ 26^ 25^5 j-jjp r^S-fp** ifiji igtyi T|S pry v^t\\ 
: 32 ^n 3lL "?J?9 80r !^ 29 W : 28 nrjyn v ^y\ ^yjri. 
njnnyjoSnj; : iS-ptr-n tfin :^3 V M np T ^^^r 33 n^ji 
39 Sra : 38 ron 37 i>5^ *^>f 33 f^3 D'J??Hn :}?tDJ ^ipi; 1 ? 
nin? nn? :^S np 43 ^Dnm 41 a>9an -S fti mp* 40 i$j;d 
nniy npn xb :Sb^ ntj^ ru?;? dd^ 

to dig 1 a pit 2 to fall 3 to break down 4 a fence 5 to bite 6 serpent 7 to despise, 
contemn 8 all, every thing 9 for., in behalf of 10 soul, life 11 to revenge 12 to keep, 
retain sc. anger 13 to make a vow 14 to pay, perform 15 to look 16 to plant 17 to 
form, make 18 the mouth of 19 to pour forth, utter 20 to turn away 21 backward 22 • 
afar off 23 knowledge 24 my son 25 thy heart 26 my ways 27 to observe 28 to put 
off 29 shoes 80 from 31 feet 32 to step near 33 to kiss 34 root out, pluck up 35 the 
chaff 36 to drive away 37 a wind 38 iron 39 earth 40 persons 41 (coll.) substance, 
property 42 - 



§ 51. Verbs *"fi). 91 

Exercise 83. 

Put forth i thine hand and touch2 his flesh 3 - He made4 
a pits, and digged^ it, and is fallen into the ditch?, (which) 
he made 8 - Keep 9 thy tongue* from evil and thy lips 1 * 
from speaking 12 guile 13 . And 1 -* she vowed 15 a vowiG and 
said: Lord of Hosts 17 , if 18 Thou wilt remember me and 
wilt give to thine handmaid 19 a man-child20, then 2 * I will 
give him to the Lord all the days of 22 his life. And 
he dreamed 23 , and behold 24 , a ladder 25 set up 26 on* the 
earth, and the top of it 27 reached 28 to 29 heaven. Right- 
eousness 30 delivereth 31 from death 32 - To take away 33 my 
life 34 they devised 35 - Lord give us Thy help 3 *?. Thou 
shalt not inherit 37 in our father's house 38 - This woman 
said to me: give (s. f.) thy son 39 and we will eat him 
to day 40 and I will give my son to-morrow 41 - 
loajitf 1 ? 9fut. o. nvj sbya 7nn# 6-ian sifa 4ni3 3nw 2njj inS# 

I; : -t —t -- -t tt t:^-t ~ t 

18 DX 17ni'K3!f 16*113 15 fat. Oil] UConv.1 13riDl*3 12 Pi. 131 Hl'nSK* 
x : ■.".• -t t : • I v T ; 

26 part. Ho. 32f J 25 Q^p 24 Hi!! 23 oSf} 22 *pi 211 ^D^K^IT 19?|ilDN 
32r\1D 31 Hi. fut. Si' J 3Q^m. npl^ 29 (§ 19, 6,) local H 28 part. Hi. Tt JJ 27 ftfxl 

VT I TT : " -T 

41 -inn 4onrn 39-113 ssjva srbnj 33 ny^ 35 dot a^rtfaj 33npS 

tt - '••: " -t '•.•:• -t • :- | -t 

.(§ 85 ? 4, 6.) *ny*1N 

t : - 

§ 51. VERBS v'£ , 

1. The verbs of which the first radical is * are divided 

into three classes : 

a. The first class comprises those, in which *> is used as 3 
in the verbs 3"fl, i. e. * is assimilated and indicated by 
Dagesh in the next letter. In this class are four verbs, 
which all have ¥ as the second radical: fW (Ni. D^ » Hi. 
rr^rO to set on fire, to kindle, JA^ to spread down, to 
strew, pV* to pour, pour out, *)V* to form. 

&. The second class is but slightly irregular. The weak 
letter * quiesces in the preceding vowel in fut. Kal and 
all forms of Hi. The fut. Kal retains Chirek: as 2&\ 
from y^; Hi, changes the Chirek into Tsere: as^p n < 
for ryp'MPatach + * = a + i = e, § 12, 7. b. 2.). To 



92 Part I. Exerciser 

this class belong six verbs: 7^> (fut. T^t an( l IS!"' a P 0C * 
IV" and T£*) 1g>VtQ be straight, right, D&* to be good, 
py to suck, 77* to wail, lament, Vp^ to awake.. 
e. The other verbs *"£} belong to the third class. The verbs 
of this class are properly Y'£, but the 1 is changed at 
the beginning of the word into *: as I^Sfor lVl> D?^> 
for 3d (§ 12, 1. a.). In those conjugations, which have 
a characteristic letter at the beginning (Ni., Hi., Ho.) 
the original % being now in the middle of the word, re- 
turns: nl pret. ^li. fut. i^n, hi tWt*Ho. 1S1. 

In Hithp. the 1 in a few verbs only is restored: as^Tini* 

from JTP, to know. 

The preformatives have not the usual vowel, but one 
homogeneous to V l^llfor l^t) > T^for T^TH, iSlH' 
for 1^1 (12, T. b. 2.). 

2. In fut. Kal the * drops. The preformatives now form- 
ing open syllables, lengthen the Chirek into Tsere : as 17*> 
for iS"* With conv. ): 1*71; in Hiphil with con v. V 

3. About half these verbs have the future E. The 
■others with future A retain ♦ quiescent in Chirek : as 2^1" 
to take possession of, to inherit, 

4. The infln. const, is formed as with 3"£), i. e. the t 

drops and the segholate ending H^— (§ 66.) (with Grutt. 

n-— ) is appended: as ni.7> with b^D- rrfr2> tV^S-i 

JIlV? > J71 /O ♦ Occasionally, it has the fern, termination 

H— »like H17 to bear, nil to go down, 
t T " L T : 

5. The imp, 17, DC^with 1 parag. FB& ♦ 

6. The fut. Kal of the Verbs £^*V to take possession of, 
Ufy to be or become dry, Jfy to labor, toil, is formed like 
the" second class: £?1»» tfyfw? (3), but in Ni., Hi., Ho. 
they are inflected like the third class: as ttfOiJI, 1^17 > 

<*»?■ L 

7. The verb 17* to go, belongs to v '£, taking its irregular 

forms from ♦*£ : fut. Kal 17** imp. T]7> infm. fp7 > Hi, 
1^11- 



§ 50. Verbs '"£3 . 93 

Ift all cases, however, where the verbs v 't3 are regular 
it is inflected as from Tl^H : pret. Kal T?I7> part. Kal 

^in.Hith. rfiri?\n, 

Exercise 84. 

*my hTjffiwiyrvh :o<7? n?^ np^'ri ^rpirrig 
^3*1 5 W;i :^9#3 4 S^n T]Srn*S jdji^ iiii-p 
Kr 10 Wtn &$trb$ 9 nyjn 8 >3*< to*! 7 ruT 6 DHW 
mvS ro* : Bfytrrna ratfS M *iWi ^in : rt^S u 3Kn n rSi 

tt : t • t v v v t - -• - v I v - - • : 1 • : 

i i9 uhv »y?in l7 *tio : 16 D^ 15 ^Din mrr my i u ibv 

•T- : • t | • t : - : • " t • 

:'""ipHn aSiy "tj; 25 Drrnp b>'k :d3^Sj;di 24 d;t3T! 
:r\m ™vhr\n »3 nye^n 27 ^r^'in NifM rnrp win 
T]nnp rfix 31 nyx : 30 in» xh\ 29 ?\y» kS nirv dSij; >rhx 
35 niwn una* ^dc'dw' 33 pdn-dn :iton 82 7pso ww 
rrirv nmx >3 38 ?trw n^^'N "vim diS^3 nn 36 biK^' 

t : t - • It-: t : : V t : - t t | v • : 

onnow 42 Dsnrra rnrr 41 orunin : 40 vymn ntonS 39 -nnS 

V S.T -: - •.■•:•: t : ; * : ~ .... - -.- t t t : 

:rnrv tid sito jn 45 nbty- 44 b3 mtoo uwin 43 hm 

t : - m — i ~ t v t v ; t v: v ■ : t t - 

statute, law 1 sons 2 the fear of 3 slander, TOI T2$ to slander 4 to sit down 5 
both of them 6 together 7 the father of 8 the damsel 9 to consent 10 and lodge all 
night 11 to be good, merry 12 Levite 13 to bear, bring forth 14 to add, increase 15 
days 16 a drunkard 17 squanderer, prodigal 18 to become poor 19 to put, place 2( > 
before thee 21 to be pleased to do anything 2 ^ to make good 23 your ways 24 to 
kindle 25 to burn 26 to help, succor 27 praise, object of praise 28 to be wearied 29 
to be fatigued 30 whither 31 from thy presence 32 (prop. f. thy face) to ascend 33 
there 34 to spread down, make one's bed 35 grave 36 together, at one time 37 
to sleep 38 alone 39 to make dwell 40 to weary, be troublesome 41 words 42 
in what 43 every one 44 that doeth 45 to make rare 46 thy foot 47 to be satiated, 
weary 48 bitter 49 - 



94 Part I. Exercises. 

Exercise 85. 
Kebuke 1 not a scorner 2 , lests he hate 4 thee ; rebuke a 
wise mans, and he will love thee. Grive (instruction) to a 
wise man, and he will be yet 7 wiser 6 ; teachs a just man 
and he will increase^ in learning i°- (It is) good to go to 
the house of mourning 11 - G-o, eat with 12 joy 13 thy bread 14 - 
And* the king put forth 1 ^ his hand, saying 16 , lay hold 17 
on him. And* his hand dried up. When 18 your children 2 ** 
shall ask 19 their fathers 21 in time to come 22 , saying, what 
(mean) these stones 23 ? Then 24 ye shall let know25 your 
children, saying, Israel came over 26 this Jordan 2 ? on 28 
dry land 2 9. For 3 *) the, Lord your God dried up 31 the wa- 
ters of 32 Jordan from before you 33 , until 34 ye were passed 
overdo. That 36 all the people of 38 the earth might know 37 
the hand of the Lord. Labor 39 not to be rich 40 - Know 
thou the G-od of thy father and serve 41 Him. Boast 42 not 
thyself of 43 to-morrow 44 , for thou knowest 4 ^ not what a 
day 47 may bring forth 46 - We will do thee good 48 - 

7"Tl'y 6 fat. A. (to be wiser) D3T1 5 D3n L ? 4&OIP 3 \2 Zy 1 ) 1 Hi. Juss. fty 

t t : -T ly I •• 

i5nS# wrj^nS i3nrw 123 iiSsk lo np_S 9 m. with ace. ep-» sm. jrv 

22in t. t. come nriD 21 DJltiK 19 S^ 20 D3'.33 18 "3 17 with ace. &£& 16 nbtfS 

T T t -: - T v ..... ... . - T 

31 Hi. 30*11#K 29H!^3 1 28 3 27 HT 26 to come over *l3j; 25 Hi. pret. 241 23-D"J3&$ 

37 inf. (connect 36 and 37) 36 jj,'^ 1 ? 35 inf. = your passing over 341^ 33 03-333 32 "»p 

44*inrD DV 43 3 42Hith. Juss. ^H 41 13^ 40 Hi. inf. with S 39 Juss. p^ 38 ^ftp 

.*Vav Conv. 48 to do good 3 £3" Hi. 47 DV 46fut. iS" 45 fut. 

§ 52. verbs yy . 

The verbs belonging to this class are contracted, the 
second radical having been repeated in the root, as D3D » 
now 3D > hence termed p"tf ♦ 

Irregularities : 

1. The repeated letter is generally written but once, 
with a Dag,, which is, however, omitted at the end of the 
word : as 2Q , for 3D* but !QQ (§12, 4. Note). 

2. The resulting monosyllabic word from this contraction 
is vocalized similarly to the regular verbs, but differs in 



s 



Verbs #"]; , 95 



this particular : the vowel of the second radical in the 
regular verb recedes to the first radical of the verb J?"]/ : 
as imp. DD, for 3hp> like Sbp* fut DD*> for 22D\> like 
SbjT, (comp. 3), (§14, Eising III.), 

Note I. Infin. and fut. Ni. excepted, which have Patach in- 
stead of Tsere. 

3. The preforrnative forming an open syllable, which 
requires long vowels, has the pretonic Kamets : fut. Kal 
DD>> for 23D'» fut. Hi. DD>, for MD>; hence this Kamets 

t : • •• t ... - 

drops, when the tone is thrown forward : as n^DpH (§ 14, 
Eeject. 1.). 

4. When the afformative begins with a consonant (fi , 
H> *]•!* U» i"D) a helping vowel is used: 1) to avoid the 
meeting of three consonants with but one vowel : as 
rGp = rDDD 5 2) to render more perceptible the doubling 
of the radical. This helping vowel is Cholem in the pret. 
(written fully or defectively) : as r\)20 or H20 > and in 
the future *— : as H^DD . 

t v \ : 

5. This helping vowel receiving the tone, shortens the 
vowel in Hi., and in the forms with H3 in the imp. and 
fut. Kal: as niDDn, HCT, 

t • — ; t v \ 

6. In Pi., Pu. and Hith., which require Dag. in the 
second radical, in order to avoid the meeting of three 
similar consonants, as D5P = 335P> a long vowel (invariably 
Cholem) enters instead of Dag. Thus the forms Poel, 
Poal, Hithpoel, arise, which are regularly inflected : as 

7. With convers. 1 the Cholem of the fut. Kal is short- 
ened into Kamets-Chatuph, and the Tsere of the fut. Hi. into 
Seghol: as loh, 2lF) (§ 33, 4.). 

8. Before suffixes the same change takes place, for the 



96 Part I. Exercises. 

same reason (§ 14, Short, c.): as ^JlT may He be gracious 
to us ; ^firi ye shall solemnize it ; or Kubbuts is chosen 
instead: as ^D^ Hipb. *J5p*, Tsere into Chirek (the 
strong sharpening) (§ 14, Short, b.) 

9. The accent is not here thrown forward upon the 
afformatives PI— > *1 * *— > as with regular verbs : as rOD > 

♦IJ13D > toD . 

Note II. In Kal are found examples of middle (according 
to VD* § 29 > !•) : as ^'^ tne y snoot arrows. Gen. 49, 23. V2H 
they are lifted up. Job 24, 24. The fut. A. of these verbs has 
Tsere under the preformatives : as *")£> it is bitter, Is. 24, 9. ^pKI 
and I am despised, Gen. 16, 5. QPP it is hot, De. 19, 6. 

Note III. Ni. in the final syllable has Tsere occasionally: as 
DDZ > D.OT > ^pj » ("GCtf 5 sometimes Cholem p-)J he is broken, 
Eze T 29, 7. VD^they are spoiled, Am. 3, 11. 

Note IV. Hi. sometimes takes Patach in the final syllable, 
especially with gutturals: ^DH he has embittered, Job 27, 2. 

rrn he cuts off, is. is, 5. p-rn, ^pn> 

Note V. In many of these verbs the vowel of the preforma- 
tives in Kal, Ni., Hi. and Ho. is short and Dag. forte follows. 
This Dagesh compensates for the one omitted in the second radi- 
cal*, as it occurs generally with this class of verbs in Chaldee : 
fut. Kal 2& and ^5 DT (&• DOT)> ti®\ shall be astonished, 
1. Ki. 9, 8. ip? to bow the head; Hi. 2DI Jud. 18, 23. ^ 

Ex. 23, 21. 

* V 

Exercise 86. 

ova mrvb 9 yv)r\> B n2v ? ?n :ino e vrfrro 5 t>j)vSn 
12 \ty%& n &nw inw) 7&yp> y? '36? 10 H'^n" n ^ n ! n - nj 5 
Dprtg iojj rrn ^p^'n DTi 16 pS\\* "pais 14 nnn 13 0)i 
19 aiiwh&hji wnn dv? Snr l8 Sip? nirr 17 dj?ti : vjjk >iJ 



§ 53. Verbs YJf and "'j; , 97 

nDN* 2r rtD :ini< u'nn 26 T^n trira 25 nr^ dw 24 njftB> 

- T t • . • : — — t ■>■ — -t — : • 

Tin? dj rMn Tin? rwo dvh » vn?-n^ 28 ngrrDN rtiir 

.- t - t : • r- v -: •: - ■ T v 

"Wjjpho ninn^tr nin; : 37 mtDp-Sj; S>t t 1 ^rryv" 1 ^ 
^pjrupfc "W? njr? >? : 40 J?in ^in : 39 ^#v San 
44 ^w ^ WNnpn nsb :jnnb 43 Sns ^n 42 rvby **&# 

• *t:t • t v| : • t t w ■- t : t t v t • : 

nin*t 48 ouiD^ 47 D>nn n.^n ;ikd >b jnm 46 n&n «hb>1 
... . ... : 

r?7 50 DOin^ ♦sirq : 49 vd? ooniaji 

adverb 1 (§ 24, 3.<} to be many 2 works 3 to roll, to commit 4 my outcry, cry- 
fur help 5 to be languid, weakened 6 then 7 (§ 101, II, b.) s Joshua 9 Amorite 10 
sim 11 Gibeon 12 to stay, stand still 13 moon 14 valley 15 Ajalon 16 cause thun- 
der 17 thander 18 (prop, voice, sound) Philistines 19 to contound 20 to defeat 21 
to celebrate 22 festival 23 seven 24 year 25 seventh.26 so, thus 27 to break, make 
void 28 my covenant with 29 as 30 the host of 31 to measure 32 I will increase 33 
door 34 to turn 35 hinge 36 his bed 37 to inscribe laws, to rule 38 to save 39 to do 
evil 40 my name 41 (§ 96, 2.J 42 to open, begin 43 n. p. f. (my sweetness) 44 the 
Almighty 45 to embitter 46 (sc. life,) to be terrified, dismayed 47 to recede 48 to 
beat down 49 to be astonished, confounded 50 - 

Exercise 87. 

Three 1 times 2 thou shalt keep a feasts to me in the year. 
And he rolled 4 the stone 5 from 6 the mouth of' 7 the wells. 
The Lord of Hosts 9 will defend 10 Jerusalem 11 - The soul 
of'12 the wicked desireth 13 evil, his neighbor is not fa- 
vored 1 ^ in his eyes 15 - This day will I begin 16 to mag- 
nify thee 17 in the sight of 18 all Israel. And I will de- 
fend 19 this city, to save 20 it. And the Lord discomfited 2 1 
Sisera 22 - Hills 23 melted 24 like 25 wax 26 - He that trusteth 27 
in 28 the Lord, mercy 29 shall compass 30 him about 30 - Be- 
seech 31 * I pray you, God, that 32 He will be gracious 33 unto 
us. Hazael 34 ) king of Syria 35 , oppressed 36 Israel. And 
the Lord was gracious 37 to them and had compassion 38 on 
them. (He) whom thou blesseth 39 (is) blessed 40 , and (he) 

13 



98 Part 1. Exercises. 

whom thou curseth 41 is cursed^. Why 43 art thou cast 
down 44 > my soul 45 ? hope 4 ^ thou in 4 ? Grod ! 

6Sj?Q 5pX 4 Hi. fiit. with Vav Conv. SSj 3 to keep a feast Jjn 2 lT^JH I'tthu/ 

i4Ho.fut.rjn i3nmK 12^33 ncWn 1 iom. fm. m oni&ovnirr 8*1x3 ^3 

1 t : ■ vv • ~t : I t : T : " : 

20 Hi. jfljh 19pret. with Vav Conv. |j'J 18^^ 17 Pi. inf. SlJ 16 Hi. ^Vn 15 )T% r 

27part.n£D3 26 JJfa 25 3 24 Mi. DDE 23 Qnn 22 800^0 21 fut. with Conv. 1, Don 

- T - 'T t : • 

Z6Vph 35D1K 34 l 7Xin 33 nn 321 31 faf] 30 Pi. fut. 33 D 29 "ten 28 3 

I T „. .. T _. I 

40 Pu. part. 39 Pi. fut. "p3 38 Pi. fut. with Vav Conv. with ace. QT]1 37 fut. with Vav Conv. 
;47S 46 Hi. ^n 1 45 (f.) *ti?p} 44 Hith. fut. nntf 43 HD 42 Ho. fut. 41 fut. 11K 

§ 53. VERBS yy AND *y , 

To the ]}")J the verbs >]7 are nearly related. To this 
class belong those verbs of which the second radical is f, 
which are best compared with the preceding }?Jf, whereby the 
points of similarity or difference can be rendered most 
conspicuous. 

In common with ]? ; 'J? : 

1. The stem is monosyllabic. 

2. The prefbrmatives have long vowels: in fut. Kal and 
in the pret. Ni. Kamets (Tsere in rare cases). 

3. The forms Poel, Poal, Hithpoel. 

4. The insertion of the helping (union) vowel Cholem before 
the consonantal afformatives, but only in M. and Hi., not 
in Kal and Ho. 

5. These peculiarities originate from the principle, that 
the weak letter 1 cannot retain its consonantal power be- 
tween two vowels; (not even between a following vowel 
and a preceding vocal Sh'va,) the 1 either drops or qui- 
esces, and as with J7"^ its vowel recedes to the first radi- 
cal: pret. D[> instead of DV3; inf. D^lp » for Dip; fut. D^p* > 
for D'1p* (§ l\ 6. B. 3); T Hi. &$!!, for D^pH (§ ibid. 
§ 12, 7, a.); Ho. Dp1.%for D^pH ■(§ 12, 6, B., 3.) (Kamets- 
Chat. now in an open syllable becomes ) (§ 14, Length. 1.). 

6. These verbs differ from ]^"]7 in the following points : 



§ 53. Verbs Y]f and fjf. 99 

a. The vowel in VJ* is longer: ) in Kal, *— in Hi., a 
vowel-letter quiescing in it. * 

b. The Ni. has a final Cholem DlpJ. for D^S fht. Dipt' 

for Dip* (the 1 becoming '1, § 12, 7. b. 2.), after remov- 
ing the mutable Patacb in pret., and Tsere and the 
pretonic Kamets in fut. 

7. Intransitive verbs occur with middle E. and 0: DO > 
DDO> DO (for nnO § 12, 6. B.). Part. DO', Inf. D)Ol Fut. 

D)o>> zrte, m&Ha, ntr'35 Fut. &w. 

T T T : 

Note. In some verbs, the ^ of the inf., imper. and fut. is al- 
ways quiescent in Cholem : as TiX to he light, KID to come, 
CT'D to be ashamed, ^1^1 and he came. 

T - 

8. The apocopated Fut. is DJT> with Vav Conv. D|T1> 
with gutturals 1D*1 ♦ 

9. The usual form of 2. and 3. pers. pi. fern, is given 
in the paradigm: nTtDlpri; a form like pbTl is sometimes 
met with. 

10. Several verbs V]f in common with ]?"]? (§52 Note 5.) 
double the first radical : as jTDiT for JTpn ♦ Some thus 
modify the signification: as IT^H to cause to rest, ITIin to 
permit, suffer; j*7n to pass the night, J^Jl to complain, 
murmur. 

11. Verbs *"]? ♦ Verbs having for their second radical a 
quiescent * have a twofold inflection in Kal*; they are par- 
tially inflected like the Kal of VJN partially like its Hiphil, 
after having removed the characteristic syllable of Hiphil 
(H and PI). Several verbs occur only in this form, others 
possess both forms of VJ? and '"J? : as V\7 and 7*7 , 

Note. The fut. of Hiphil can be distinguished from that of 
Kal, by the signification only : as l*y he understands (Kal), 0y*lf1 
he gives them understanding, Job 32, 8 (Hiphil). 

Note II. Not seldom Kal and Hi. agree in sense in these 
verbs (VJf an( l v '^) : ^IH to rejoice, Kal and Hi. 317 to quar- 
rel, Kal and Hi. \yt* io set > P lu \ Kal and Hi. etc. 



100. Part 1. Exercise.-, 



Exercise 88. 

4 



7 pa 6 rmm B D*ipfi 4 hd^ 8 *jsb ::aS- 2 nDn inirn a ?3 
1k u tr""in ik dW d^->d 10 iK dtoS 9 ns 8 d# >ft :rpr 

.... ... T . T T -T V T • I) "T 

n§iB nnn njn i4 n^'p :nir? ♦jjn nSd 13 Tiy ik 12 np$ 
20 -t^S 19 p^"kS 18 Dnpt^ ir .iyr : 10 W3,p njn 15 trton kS 
p>st 23 np; nppra nin? : 22 iKp3 21 pn d^'s nirr :^ 

nimS 3l afr : so npn 29 d^^ 28 t]T 27 n^p j.^S 26 S^ 
: *13 34 D?nii rrpiv : 33 bio? S3 nSiyb p^v ♦ ^ 32 SSinnrn 
yi&\ i^h? 39 d^3 3S npn ; 37 np; }6 36 p;?-nS 35 D*£n33 
Dipan 41 \»nb Pijp?i t^Wn 40 so->3 DB> fVl DipM Dpy: 
trtnS 44 nn^3 jwnn Dipaa 23^1 "vnfcftr® 42 d^_ 
jrj prh 47 ^'innp Ss jw ^ng'jyio b* : jsc^sn ^.opjin 
r^'ibjjD DpD rrvrt^ :*}®9 nor? np# rpn. : 49 ^p 4 W3 
: 50 ^'ia-KSi D^pHV in^ nin^3 : D3'37l ^ 0333^ W 
nsrVi 55 n^nSo dvS 54 p^ * 8 d j id : 52 ^rv2n W 5l fiwn 

t _ : t t : • : I -t : -*t -■-:"- 

to despise 1 (§ 107, 4.) void of 2 (§ 84, 7.) before 3 gray hair 4 to rise up 5 to 
honor 6 the face of 7 to make 8 mouth 9 or 10 deaf 11 open-e}'ed 12 blind 13 to re- 
turn 14 (§ 107, 4.) to depart 15 his house 16 to tell 17 lies 18 to be firm, estab- 
lished 19 before' 20 to" establish 21 his throne 22 to found, to lay the foundation 
(of a building) 23 to set up, fix 24 3 bef. inf. const. 25 (§ 106, 2.) to exult, re- 
joice 26 answer 27 soft 28 to turn away 29 wrath 30 to rest 31 to wait 32 to totter, 
to shake 33 to raise 34 vineyards 35 to shout, sing 36 to shout with joy 37 tore- 
move, put away 38 anger, grief 39 to set 40 (prop, to come) stones of 41 to put, 
set, lay 42 HtlfJOn (from &'JO) place of the head, hence: at his head 43 first 44 
to raise 45 pretend to be rich 46 § 26, 6. pretend to be poor 47 to mark, attend 48 
meditation, prayer 49 to be ashamed, disappointed 50 desire, lust of 51 to kill 52 
horse 53 to be prepared, ready 54 war 55 help, victory 56 deed, act 57 to bring, lead 58 - 

Exercise 89, 

And the Lord spake 1 to Moses, saying ; Send2 men, 
that 3 thev may search 4 the land of Canaan. And the men 



§ 54. Verbs IT 7. ^>1 

went up 5 and earned into the land and searched it. And 
they returned? from searching of the land after 8 forty9 
days 10 - And they came to Moses and brought back 11 
word 1 s to him 1 2 and said : we came to the land whither 14 
thou sentest us and surely 15 it is very 16 good. Neverthe- 
less 17 im people be strong 18 that dwell 1 ^ in the land. 
And they murmured 20 against* 21 Moses and said : Would 
God that 22 we had died* 3 in the land of Egypt. And 
wherefore hath the Lord brought 24 us to this land, to 
fall 25 by 26 the sword. And they said one to another 2T > 
Let us make 28 a captain 2 ^ and let us return into Egypt. 
And David besought 30 God forSl the child 3 2 3 and he fast- 
ed 33 and went in (pret) and stayed all night 34 and lay 35 
upon the earth 36 • And the elders 37 of his house arose 38 
(and went) to him 3 ^, to raise 40 him up from the earth: 
but he would not 41 - And it came to pass 42 on the sev- 
enth 43 day that 44 the child died. And David saw 45 that 
his servants 46 whispered 47 and he perceived 48 that the 
child 4 9 was dead. Then 50 he arose from the earth and 
washed 51 and anointed 5 2 (himself 52 ) and came into the house 
of God ; then 50 he returned into his (own) house and (when) 
he asked, they put 53 bread before him and he did eat. 

S |»Sp " y,& 6 K13 5 -iSjp 4 (§ 101, 3. c.) -^jl 31 2(§ 84, 2) 1 Pi. with Vav Conv. "Ql 

i6 mica isqji i4n#x i2fnx i3*i:n uhl 2ivr losing. (§ 92, 3) qd-w-^x 

t - : v * : t t • t : - 

21 ^ 20 Ni. j.-! 1 —? 19partic. with the article (§ 96, 8) 18 (§ 90, 2) \$ 17 '3 D3t^ 

~Sx &"*# 26 3 25 i 73j 24 part. Hi. K13 23pret. rWQ 22 (§ 116, a) would God that : ?S 

V - T 

321;*} 3in:»2 30 Pi. with Vav Conv. t^pa 29i*/jn 28 parag. fut. TJ1J 27 (§ ST. 4) mX 
3S with Vav Conv. Q."|p 37 "Jpr 36 Hi "IX 35 pret. 230 34 pret. to stay all night SlS 33 QW 
«TO,g 45&TH 44 Vav Conv. 43'J?*;itf 42TT1 41 7"DX 40 Hi, lZ^D 39 Sj? 
.53 Hi. UW 52 Hi. rprj 51 VJVi 50 Vav Conv. 49 Pause ! iS 1 48 Hi. ?-13 47Hithp. part. ^nS 

§ 54. VERBS r\'h . 

1. The third radical of these verbs was originally V- of 
some few *) ♦ 

2. All forms ending with the third radical, change i into 



102 Part I. Exercises. 

?1? as tlbXi for >7| (§ 12, 7. a.), excepting the pass. part. 
Kal, which is regular ^jj. 

3. To all those forms ending with a consonantal afform- 
ative, (y\, F), >ft, )}, rt)) the original * returns. This * 
quiesces in the pret. Kal in Chirek: as jfl^JI » in the pret. 
of the other active conjugations, promiscuously m Tsere 
and Chirek : as JT^j) and JT^iU in the pret. of the Passives, 
only in Tsere : as fifoS} in the imperative and future in 

Seghoi: as mbmVtitfh). 

4. In the 3. pers. fern. sing, pret., !"T is commuted into 
jl » in order to avoid the repetition of H : as tlpbl > for 

t : t 

5. Before the vocal afforuiatives (i|, *— ) the il drops : as 

rci 7jri, for !inip|,prop. vS:> ^n (§ 12, 6. b. 3.). 

6. The H quiesces 

in all the pret. forms in Kamets: as rhl > f"H^ » H7il etc. ; 
in all the imperat f. in Tsere: as jTW> H^iirb ^ etc.; 

in all the fut. and part. f. in Seghoi : as HTJtf > till > 
rr?lK> tlbll etc. 

7. The inf. const, 'ends in all the conjugations with jYl : 

asrrfcu nhm, nhi etc. 

: t • - 

8. The apocopated future is formed by throwing off 
the Jl with the preceding Seghoi, whence in Kal and 
Hiphil forms would arise, having three consonants and but 
one vowel: as ^1*, from tlbl' > bl\> from tlbl[> which to 
avoid a helping Seghoi is used: as *11* Kal, 7JJ* Hi. (formed 
like the Segholates § 66.). With a guttural the helping 
vowel is Patach : as )}Vf\ let him look, (§ 14, Rising IV.) 
with Pe Guttural, B$£> and he made, (§ 66, 10.). 

Note I. Sometimes the first syllable is not affected by the 
guttural: as *"lfTH and it was kindled, 1IT1 and he rejoiced, 
JIT1 and he encamped. 

Note II. The preform atives of the apocopated Future, forming 
an open syllable sometimes has Tsere : as It)!) and we turned ; 
ynni and she wandered. 



§ 54. Verbs n^ ♦ 1Q 3 

Note III. The helping vowel can be omitted in case the first 
radical is softer in sound than the second, (a liquid before a mute): 
as 3^1 and he took captive, pt£^\ and he gave to drink. 

9. In the verb il>n to see, the apocop. fut. lias two 
forms: NT and with Yav Conv. NTI, 

10. njn to be. pret. 2. pers. pi. 01??$ \ with V DiTTTli 
inf. consY DVH , with prefixes VftTVi* hiT?S; imp. 'iTf?; 
fut. JTiT* fut apocop. NT > in pause *jT, with Yav Conv. 

11. pPf! to live. 2. pers. pi. pret. Kal DJTTT* inf. fiiTT, 
imp. PITT* with V PITA* fut. HWj fut. apoc. TV, in pause 
TV> Hipbil pret. iTrjiY. inf. nWjW. 

12. nn^" (original TT#) to bow down. Hithp. WTW"??. 

fut. mrrr^. fut. apoc inri^ (for "tnftB*) (§ 14. Rising iv.) 

13. The annexing of suffixes, occasions various changes : 
the termination H with the preceding vowel drops before 
the suffix : as ^J£ (from H3JJ) he answered me, £pjf (from 
HV^) he has commanded thee. Piel T[73^' (from TlbS), 
for ^73^' Hiph. Zfiy.jl* In the third person fern. sing, 
pret., the suffix, is attached invariably to the form J"l7 1 : 
as *1"^J? > ne nas ma( ^ e me ? Pi e ^ '40?? ' (shame) has cov- 
ered me, § 44, 16, 1D731 it shall consume it, for VTfta? . 

Exercise 90. 

•ri|rv Sapn nbpn-S&i a njfj rv??* :jra ^m^-nagra 
7 oron 6 fwn k7 nMnn : "to* nS 5 D^yn rrxh : 4 nn:n 
njy_ :?p» mo-^3 9 nn^ ^nS nrobo Sba : 8 T£iK 
kSi htv nm ^ iDm p*rc win &Vi wproj ♦iwi 

: v : . .• 4 t V :v ! ■ • • t : • : | - T - • ■ T 

^ 17 nj^tp 16 ipm 15 d^?k :rnrvS 14 rrn?n u#&j : i3 S^i 
: 19 no?S D^rn TyS o^j; rvft : 18 n^..KSi jc,p» Kin-aj 
a p$S nj?. :nn{rDj i^mtfrrfs in^o S»p? jjyrSN 



104 Paht 1. Exercises, 

nnVbijrt 28 t\#m 3#T D $ : WW ^ 27 fW:i : •tfwf'JJ ^ ^ 

:rnv or? nirv ^1 :d?o 30 inp.^'n 2 ^pro^ crib 
-ta : 35 ^>T^ 34 ")D^? 33 ptnn :nirr 32 wp 31 ^njw >( ? 

D^niK p> : 40 Ttt nvnS nra ova n^' 39 ^ ns^n Sk 

fljn * 44 ^'P 43 npjr ^pfn 42 ni3$? 41 nw ; £n 41 t£? 

:rnon ra njn mp 46 ir:p no 45 mDn 

t . : - t - " t • J ' t t • J t ~ t:-t 

to build 1 to buy 2 to make or do much, increase 3 words 4 clouds 5 to be 
weighed 6 for the gold of 7 Ophir 8 to drink 9 death 10 secret of 11 another per- 
son 12 to disclose, reveal 13 to wait 11 to stop 15 his ear 16 the cry of 17 to an- 
swer 18 lame 19 to be equal 20 to break down 21 to weep 22 to laugh 23 to keep 
silence 24 to do 25 a declaration of 26 breath of, mind of 27 enemy 28 thirsty29 
to give to drink 30 help 31 wait for, hope in 32 to hold fast, adhere to 33 instruc- 
tion, correction 34 to let go 35 to associate 313 possessor, owner, lord 37 anger 
H - iy_3 a possessor of anger = an angry man 38 § 89, 4. perhaps 39 enemy 40 
sun-dial (literally : the shadow of the degrees) 41 to turn 42 to stop from, to 
desist 43 help, assistance 44 to want, to be without 45 to possess 46 - 

Exercise 91. 

If ye walk 2 in my statutes 1 : and keep* my commandments 3 
and do 5 them, then 6 I will turn? graciously* 7 unto you, 
and make you fruitful^ and multiply^ you, and establish 10 
my covenant Avith 11 you. Ye shall not afflict 12 a father- 
less child. If thou afflict 13 him and he cry 14 at allio unto 
me, I will surely 16 hear his cry 1 * 7 - And the Lord spake 
to Joshua, saying: As 18 I was with 10 Moses, (so) I will 
be with thee: I will not fail 20 thee, nor 21 forsake thee. 
Only 22 be thou strong 23 and very courageous 24 ? that 2 ^ 
thou mayest observe 26 to do according to all the law, 
which Moses, iny servant 27 , commanded 28 thee: turn 20 not 
from it toso the right hand 31 or 82 to the left 88 - This 84 
book35 of the law shall not depart 86 out of thy mouth 87 , 
but 88 thou shalt meditate 30 therein day and night 46 , that 41 
thou mayest observe 42 to do according to all that is writ- 
ten therein. If thou return to 43 the Almighty*** thou 



§ 55. Verbs Doubly Anomalous. 105 

slialt be built up 45 - From the confined spaced I called 4 ? 
upon the Lord 4 s, the Lord answered 4 9 me in the large 
spaced. The Lord is on my sides 1 = what can (§ 101, III. 1.) 
do 5 2 unto me man? (It is) better 53 to trust 54 in 55 the 
Lord, than 5 *3 to put confidence 5 ? in man. Thou hast 
thrustss sore59 at me thateo I might fall; butei the Lord 
helped me. Be26 not wise 63 in thine (own) eyes. And 
he despised64 the birthrights 5 . My well-belovedes hathe? 
a . vineyard66. And he fenced69 it and clearedit of stones?o 
and built ?i a tower '2 in the midst of it, and he looked? 3 
that? 4 it should bring forth? 5 grapes? 6 ; and it brought 
forth wild grapes'?- 

Hi. m£> 7 7*133 6Conv. 1 5pret. TWV 4fut. 3 T\12f D 2Kal. firt. tHt\ l'ftt'pn 

T T T T T T - I • I - T - I \ 

12 Pi. TIM* 11 JIN 10 Hi. with Vav Conv. Q-lp 9 Hi. with Vav Conv -D*"1 SwithYav Conv. 

T T •• | T T 

18T^N*JD MinpyX 16 inf. abs. (§ 105, 1) 15 infin. abs. (§ 105, 1) 14fut. nr»2f 13 fut. 

V -:- It-:- I -t 

25 infin. with S 24 (fut. A.) VQK 23 (fut. A.) p?n 22 p"i 21 5^71 20 Hi. HS - ** 19 DV 

I - T I -T I - ; T T "• 

^iWCftj 321 31 X'Xy 30 ace. (§ 85, 4) 29 "■HD 28 Pi. HIV 27 '""D V 26-lD# 

41 JT^ 1 ? 40 nS ,L 71 DrDV 39 mil 38 Conv. 1 37,-]'33 36 nn 35-130 34(§ 83, 9) 
i ■ — : t :tt t tt i ■ • v •■ 

50 3mD 49Hjy 48 JV 47 with ace, JO p 46iya 45HJ3 44-^ 43TT> 42fut. 

T :•.• TT T tIt -•• TT • - 

58 nm 57ntD3 56 (§91, 1) D 55 3 54HDn 53 ni£3 52n^y SI on my side = to me 

TT-T T T TT 

65fl"TD3 64 with Vav Conv. n?3 63 UDT\ 62 nT? 611 60 with inf. "7 59 inf. abs. (§ 105 1) 

T : TT T T T T 

73Pi. HIP 72 L 7lJin 71HJ3 70 Pi. ^pD 69 Pi. pn? 68 ^TT 67 hath = was to 66Q13 
tIt t: • tt l-T I -t • •: 

.77D"^«3 76D 1 3Jt t feftfry 74 with inf. 1 ? 
■ \ : • T~: t "t 

§ do. VERBS DOUBLY ANOMALOUS. 

Doubly anomalous verbs have two radicals, both sub- 
ject to the anomalies of the different irregular verbs: as 
Ni?3 to bear, carry, belong to >'£) and K"S flSM to be will- 

T T ' I T T 

ing, to N"5 and JT 7 . 

Verbs of the most frequent occurrence of this kind are : 
a. iT'S and N"£), fi£K to bake, fut. Kal ft&W . 

T T 

6. H"7 and }"£, j-DJ to smite, pre! Hi. rDH- part HDD. 
fut. nS*' with Vav Conv. TW> imp. njr?- apocop. TlH^ 
inf. niDHj particip. Ho. TOD; HlD3 to bow, incline, 

14 



106 Part 1. Exercises. 

fut. Kal HLDSwith Yav Conv. £TV fat- Hi rW,witli 

Yav Conv. &Yi 
c. i-fi and X<h > NB>1 fat. Kal N&*ynf. nNB> and ntffe? » 

imper. NJ»3 amT&V. 
A N"*j and >"£, N£ to go out, fut. Kal *W, imp. **¥., inf. 

nN¥> Hi. pretrs^yin, fut kw . 

e. H"^ and >"£, flT to throw, Hi. to confess, to give 
thanks. Piel fut. !fi*5 and they cast, (for VT'l (§ 12, 
Reject. B. 3.), Hi. fut. iTTiS with suff. ?]TiN, pret. 
Hlin, part. rnio. 

/. YV and H'h N % 12 to come, Kal pret. «3, TtiO, fut, 
NlDN' Hi. to cause to come, lead, bring, pret. NOD' 
fut.K^. 

• T 

Exercise 92. 

-Vn *rhjti) teh &t\ dw Haiti own i rtnrtsa hmi 

9 rjnnD^n>pnin^ ^ 6 vnrr>v3 

rn? ir^J? nirv n^n rrto jd?:? dw ^jni' d^Sk d'jbj; 

tt v " = -:- •• t ■ • : - t • -• J V t - • t, - 

lib) u n#r\ lib 13 \ 13 v^y& 12 by n m^i ^b iva tb 
19 hinix 18 rrtonS np> 17 ywi 16 pra nn^' : 15 ^r/?n 

: 26 iw N7 D5^'3 25 1 -err? idid nj?jp 24 i^prrStt : DnjnS 
31 £on-S^ : 30 Drrv 3UH "TniUM ^irSy* kS v^o 27 np3p 
36 ^idi 35 ^>vyi 34 ^3^' tins ^n non 33 Skd?>i 32 pp; 
- 39 n;n own rjiyi rpirii ^niorp Nr 37 W :nirr j;t 
-*6 >p :dti 42 \n ^ 4l n$on ^]ini p^b 40 n*> iN :rjS 
^nSx hut-tin : 43 dk? r?nfc>y mrr-T ^ h^k-Sm irr 
tifr&n torai pmn mi 41 i^n ink *rwi 



§ 5G. In General. 107 

the end, remoteness of 1 to go up 2 the mountain of 3 to teach 4 ways 5 paths 6 
to go forth 7 the word of 3 to give thanks, to praise 9 to fear, be afraid™ to 
bear 11 the yoke 12 youth 13 to vex, to be extortionate 14 to oppress 15 out of the 
bosom 16 subject of the sentence 17 to pervert 18 the ways of 19 to incline 20 the 
words of 21 wise men 22 to set, direct, turn 23 to withhold 24 to beat 25 to die 26 
to cover 27 to prosper 28 to confess 29 to obtain mercy 30 to incline 31 the right 
hand 32 the left hand 33 (§ 85, 4.) to sit, abide 34 to go out 35 to come 35 to ask, in- 
terrogate 37 the beasts 38 to tell 39 to speak 40 to declare 41 the fishes of 42 (§81. I.) 43 
to serve 44 . 

Exercise 93. 

My son, fear* thou the Lord and the king. Jerusalem 
bear 2 thy shame 3 - Peradventnre 4 there be 5 fifty 6 right- 
eous within 7 the city : wilt thou also 8 destroy 9 and not 
spare 1 ** the place for 11 the fifty righteous that are therein 12 ? 
Thou shalt not bear a false 14 report 13 , neither 15 shalt thou 
answer 16 in 17 a quarrel 18 to incline 19 after 20 many to 
wrest 21 (judgment). Trust 22 in the Lord, and He shall 
bring forth 23 thy righteousness 24 as the light. Who 
would not fear 25 Thee, King of nations 26 ? Arise 27 * 
get thee out 28 from this land 29 and return 30 to the land 
of thy kindred 31 - I (am) a little 33 lad 32 : I know 34 not 
(how) to go out 35 or come in 36 - Thou comest to me with 37 
a sword and with a spear 38 , but 39 I come to thee in the 
name of the Lord of Hosts 40 - This day will the Lord 
deliver 41 thee into 42 my hand, and I will smite 43 thee and 
take 44 thine head from thee 45 , that 46 all the earth may 
know 47 that 48 there is 49 a God in Israel. Go and I will 
be with 50 thy mouth, and teach 51 thee what thou shalt 
say 52 - And 53 Jehu 54 came to Jezreel 55 and Jezebel 56 heard 
(of it): and 53 she put 57 paint 58 (on) her eyes and 53 tired 59 
her head and 53 glanced^ out at 61 the window 62 - And 
Jehu came in at 63 the gate 64 * and 53 he lifted up 65 his 
face 66 to the window, and said : Who (is) on my side 67 , 
who? And 53 there glanced out on 68 him two 69 (or) three 70 
eunuchs 71 - And he said, Throw 72 her down. So 53 they 
threw her down: and 53 (some) of her blood spirted 73 on 
the wall 74 ) and on the horses: and he trod her under 
foot 75 - 



108 Part 1, Exercises. 

' nfJ!3 6 D^Dn 5 $" 4 iSlK 3 ^n^JD 2 Jerusalem fern. (§ 57, 5 3) ^J 1 XT 

I . . ... .. _ |.. T .. 

l?Sj? 16HJJT 15 and not 14^1^ 13 yptJ? 12n|1D3 11 f^S 10 K^ 9H3D 8^X 

24,-jpny 23 Hi. pret. with C. 1 , J^ 22 HDD 2lfli. J1DJ 20 ^nX 19 HC3J 18 yi 

3S|bp 32l;»j 31 ^rjlSlD 30 31^ 29fem. 28 tf3P 27 DID 26 Q-fa 25fut. NT 

42^ 41 Pi. TJD 40/11X3V 39 1 38 mp! 37 3 36 inf. XU 35 inf. K^ 34 fut. J»T 
t : •■*■: 

4S , 3 47 fut. j^T 461 45 S>*rD 44 Hi. pret. with C. V 110 43 Hi. pret. with C. 1, H3 J 
65 [§19. Bj^M^ir 54W7T 53Conv. 1 52 Pi. 131 51 Hi. pret. with C. % PIT 50 QJT 49 ^ 
59 Hi. fut. SD" 58 [transl. she made With (3) paint her eyes] ^3 57 Hi. fut DV£' 56Sl!rX 
67\HX 66 D"Ji3 65 fut. KtW 64 Pause ! "TptSJ 63 3 62jlbn 61*TJ?3 60 Hi. fut. flp# 
74 Vp 73 fut. with C. 1, Hi J 72 BDJ# H CT , D' , '10 70 nttfSstf 69 D'Jttf 68 ^tf 

.75 fut. with C. •), 0^*1 



CHAPTER X. 

NOUNS. 

§ 56. IN GENERAL. 

FORMATION AND INFLECTION. 

1. The nouns are: a) Primitives, b) Derivatives. The 
more numerous derivatives are for the most part derived 
from verbs: Verbal nouns; as fllfift a gift, from |J")3 to 
give ; fiJ^T knowledge, from J?T to know. Nouns derived 
from other nouns are called: Denominatives : as fUS'p archer, 
from rWD bow. 

2. The derivation is effected in the same manner as 
with verbs: 

a. By Vocalization, or the modification of vowels: as TjSfj 
king, from 7|^*J to reign. # 

6. By Reduplication, or the doubling of one radical, gen- 
erally the second, or of two of the radicals: as H3J 
thief, from 313 to steal, ^DiDDK rabble, (people gathered 
together from all quarters) from fjDN to gather. 

c. By Augment at ion, i. e. the prefixing or postfixing of one 
or more of the formative letters VrO£NJ7 {nomina he- 



§ 56. In General. 108 

emaniica) : as Dipp place, from Dip to stand, Jlftlp 
eastern, from Dip to be, come before, in front. 

3. a. By Vocalization : 

7J0p, this class contains as many adjectives as substan- 
tives, which, being of the old participial form (cf. act. 
part, in verbs VJ? : Dp = DNp' f° r Blp)> express either the 
attribute, , or the attribute and subject together: as DDPf 
wise, or wise man, DJlf gold (the glittering, sc. metal). 
Frequently the product or result of an action is signified: 
as 171 child, prop, he that is born, natus ; Dpi an object 
seized with rottenness, (from Dpi to rot). 

7t?p ' these nouns are intransitive, but when "derived 
from transitive verbs, passive : as /JN mourning, NDlO un- 
clean, |p! old, b&S cooked, done. • 

7i0p> (partic. of verbs mid. 0) intransitive and passive 
adjectives, a few only in use as substantives : as ^ilJl great, 
Dilp near, D'te* peace. 

Scpip* SfiDp, (regular act, partic.) (cf. § 35). 

TliDp-- (i'eg. pass, part.) passive and intransitive adjec- 
tives : as fT)£>D anointed, D1VJ? strong. 

Vi?p' (Chaldaizing) (pass, part.) 1. passive substantives : 
as yQH prisoner, captive, from 1DK to bind, to fetter, (it 
is distinguished from TiCOp by being always used as a 
noun, while the latter is a participle only). 2. Names of 
dignity are often thus formed : as TPD3 a sovereign, ruler, 
Tp§ an officer, T^ overseer, f^p a judge, prince. 3. The 
season or time in which the action of the verb is perform- 
ed: as 1'Vp harvest (prop, time of cutting, reaping) t^lfl 
time of plowing. 

, bpp (for 7K^p> hence the Kameis immutable), btDp (for 
TiDp> hence the Tsere immutable), Tpp, ^IfcDp; ^Dp 
mostly inf. forms of abstract meaning : Dj-Q a writing, ^ 
a howling, piny laughter, y)f} a military . post, VDJ a 
border. 

SbD. Sep.- StDp cf. § 66. 



sense 
occu 



110 Part I. Exercises. 

3. b. By Reduplication : 

^£3p (Kamets immutable), a) adjectives intensifying the 
: VrVtl ver y w eak, ft|p jealous, b) nouns of habitual 
nation : ftm cook, D13 thief, 0^ (for &*T}) smith. 

/&D> adjectives, denoting a permanent bodily defect: 
"Vjtf blind, D*?K dumb, VfT} (for Pit?) deaf. 

7it9p» a small class, adjectives and substantives: H3j| 
strong, substantively: a strong one, hero, *))y& adj. and' 
subst. drunk, intoxicated, a drunkard, *Yi£Ti a bird, prop, 
the chirping, twittering, from 1£)!£ (Arab.) to twitter, to 
pipe. 

7^D ' passive and intransitive: 7)2& bereaved, ft^D com- 
passionate, p*T? (for pin) a diligent one. 

7*t?p > adjectives and substantives: p^j? righteous, TDX 
fettered. Instruments of action : 7^5 an axe, a hoe. 

77i?p* nouns in which the third radical is doubled: 
nrp$ a young brood, knaves ; VW& quit, undisturbed; p}H 
green, fresh. 

Sft^OT > nouns ^ n which the last two radicals are doub- 

\ Li" (1 ' : led : D^PIS reddish, "THD^" blackish, denot- 

I 7u7up : > - n g colors, i. e. an inclination to the color 

specified (English: ish). Many nouns of this class, compensate 
for the reduplication of the radical by doubling or length- 
ening the vowel : 3Di3 star, for iDDS » from DD (Arab.) to 
shine, to glitter; C]D1D* for fjipOD a band, a fillet, from 
ftfcO (Arab.) to bind about; 733> for 7^3 > Aram, to con- 
fuse, Hebr, 7^2.^ 

3. c. By Augmentation : 

$ . Prefixed : 
I. as a preformative occurs frequently, it comes either 
from D , H3» to give the idea of an objective : ivjio, what, 
somewhat^ or it is related by its labial character to the prepo- 
sition 3— in, by, on. Accordingly, nouns of this class de- 
note something, somewhat, 1) in which, 2) by which, 3) at 



§ 56. In General. Ill 

which, or on which the action expressed by the root is 
performed: 

1) r?5?9 an altar, (from |"Qf to sacrifice) i. e. on which sac- 
rifices are offered ; H1HP pasture, (from MJH to feed) i.e. 
where there is feeding, D^KO an ambush, (fr. 21X to 
lurk) where there is lurking ; DipD place, (fr. Dip to 
stand) where one stands. 

2) linO? k e y> (from nn5 to open) an instrument by 
which one opens a lock; &TOft a mortar, (fr. CJTD to beat 
to pieces, to pound) a vessel for pulverizing. 

3) flip 1 ?? booty, (fr. (Ip7 to take) = what is taken; 
li/v^'P a possession, (fr. VhW to stretch forth the hand) 
object to which one stretches his hand. 

II. ri ; generally abstraoPsubstant., hence for the most part 
with f. formation: HlpH the hope, (fr. Hip to hope); H^ttfl 
prayer, (fr. ^£) to pray) ilDI&Tl a return, a reply, (fr. 
y\tif to return) ; |DTl m. the south, (fr. JO' to be on the 
right hand). 

III. K » is a prepositive, a) usually to give easy pro- 
nunciation, when the first of the two initial consonants is 
a sibilant : VOHK and Sbfl yesterday ; rnjftft* and fnjfif 
bracelet: JHi^ and JHf arm; b) to intensify the action: 
DDX drying up (properly deceiving, lying, from Dp to 
lie), *TpK bold, daring. (Aktal, the regular Arabic form 
of the comparative and superlative). 

IV. S often in proper names: as pfT*! Isaac, Dp J?* Jacob. 
Some are formed from the future, the 3. p. m. s. having 
been converted into a substantive : as *\TV$\ oil, (properly : 
it shines, gives light, from 1H¥ to shine, lighten) ; yy 
adversary, enemy, (prop, he strives, from y\1 Hi. to strive), 
DIpV a bag (prop, it gathers, from Dp^ to gather, to col- 
lect) ; Dip* an existing, living thing (prop, it is, stands, 
from Dip to be, stand). 



112 Part 1. Exercises. 

D ♦ Affixed: 

1. The most important is H— (to which T\— or H— cor- 
responds) : this, besides indicating the fern, gender (§57.) 
is appended : a) to the infinitive, to give it a substantive 
sense: iiJflOtP the hearing ; njTT knowledge, b) to convey 
an abstract meaning ; rWp3 a request, niSt£)f7 sin. rh)H 
foolishness, TTT)$_ blindness, filTlp (fr. Hip to burn) the 
burning or heat of fever. 

2. 01 > D— j pj D— > f— a (the last not so often, the 
Kamets frequently immutable). These terminations form : 

a. Adjectives: fi^H outer, exterior; pHflK hinder, latter. 

b. Concrete and abstract nouns : 7*J3 a building, JiDJH 
hunger, scarcity. 

c. Diminutives : |W*K (from fc^K) little man (of the eye), 
pupil ; pl^ (from "M or "tfljfc) neck - 

d. D1 occurs many times as an adverbial termination : 
DNH3 suddenly, DiB^t? and OVh& the day before 
yesterday. 

e. D— ^ an old accusative ending, the words that have re- 
tained it, are mostly adverbs : D|H in vain, Op*"). em P - 
tily, vainly, DmflD to-morrow. 

3. >— , this termination forms a) adjectives from nouns : 
*31S¥ northern, from Ji£¥ the north, *iinn lower, from 
rinri the under part, b) Gentile nouns and patronymics : 
^nj2? an Israelite, n3# a Hebrew, H1IT a Jew, HVO an 
Egyptian. The feminine is either fV— or fT^-J HHVO an 
Egyptian woman, HH3J7 a Hebrew woman. 

4. jT— > tV\ form abstract nouns: jT^N*l the beginning, 
rV\y?f2 kingship, rule. 

4* Compound words are for the most part proper nouns: 
as ^^0 (El is King), ^QOg (Ab is King). Com- 
pound appellatives are rare: iT^ipN/? horrible, frightful 
darkness (the appended pp Grod, intensifies the idea § 91, d.). 

5* The primitive as well as the derivative nouns are 
inflected, to indicate : 



§ 57. The Gender. 113* 

a. the grammatical conditions of gender and number ; 

b. the attributive relations of the noun. These latter are 
twofold : 

1 . A noun in the genitive or possessive case follows as 
an attribute, with which the preceding word is joined or 
put in the Const, state (§ 19, 5.): ifi&il "D*l the king's 
word. 

2. Suffixes are appended to the noun : H^TT my word. 

§ 57. THE GENDER. 

1 . The genders are two : masculine and feminine ; a neu- 
ter gender in Hebrew is wanting. 

2. The gender can be ascertained : a) from the signifi- 
cation of the noun^ b) from its termination, 

3. Masculine by signification: 

a. The names of men and males in general : as DN father, 
?f2Q king. 

6". The common and proper nouns of nations, rivers, mount- 
ains and months : as D]7 people, "im river, *|Jl mount- 
ain, &HI1 month, tt/*^5 Canaan, VTV the Jordan, 'j'p 
Sinai, |D\? ^Nisan, the first month of the Hebrew year. 

c. The names of seasons : as y^X Spring. 

d. The names of metals : as DH| gold ; except H£*rO cop- 
per, and rn£jy lead, which are fern. 

4. Masculine by termination : 

$0 The niasc. has no characteristic termination, hence 
nouns ending with original radical letters can most fre- 
quently be considered masculine: as "U3 a garment. 

2) Nouns ending with T\? preceded by Seghol: as 7YV& 
a field. 

y) Most of those nouns ending with *— , D'1 » D— > f— or 
T— : as H3J? a Hebrew, D1H3 a ransom, JS^R a saci 'ifi ce > 
Ji^N the pupil of the eye,. 

5. Feminine by signification : 

15 



114 Part I. Exercises. 

a. Names of Women and females in general : rt£'N woman, 
roVr? queen, iTJV a female gazelle. 

b. Common and proper nouns of countries, cities, towns : 
as yy city, ptf land, country, *\W# Assyria, D^t^T 
Jerusalem. 

Note. In case the names of countries or cities represent the 
people or nation living in them, they are masculine; as HI^H 
(applied to the people) Jews. Compare: ^53 Jll^iT Isa, 3, 8. and 

icnp^ irnrr rum ps. 114, 2. nnvn l» t . 19, ig. 

: J t : t : t ; t • - : ' 

c. Names of the members of the body, which are in pairs : 
as T hand, ^JH foot. 

6. Feminine by termination: 

I. Nouns with the accented final syllable Jl — : as hO'DH 
wisdom. 

II. Nouns with the unaccented final syllable ft— and 

> > 

after gutturals fl— ' as nitOJf crown, njHiO acquaintance, 

and with the accented ending ft— , JV|, ft—: as fiHHK the 

end, JTO^D kingdom, fiinD the morrow. 

' : - ° J tt: t 

7. Many nouns are used in both genders : as 17V) wind, 
VX fere, rfH. way. 

Exercise 94. 

3g* S*n^: : 4 pnp&r 3 snp$ tefthi 2 p'mi_ ^itf m*\ 
nil?? if?;x i*)m T & ay^jrhyi : ffi p#? dtop n$? 
n-nrv idSi : 9 n9¥ 8 xn> ^5D T >>* Oivvraj ^ikr r m 
rrvsnrnt$ nirr ?ni : 9 p^irn*n 9 pSp^'NTtNl 9 rr-rj?-n^ 
Dpi *? ppyn >3tp-n?$ "^'nin 1 ? kS q infi-ru* 10 trrn 
:nin**jw'irr ".jfraaa "nviqiM rni-p *6 torh 12 Sns 
n??nS 16 fW eg jniin 15 d«i nKn-ast 15 dj rjn in wiri 
21 itt? 20 itt (jni : rj^'nn jp liKrt u jwj 18 ™S:pprr i7 p 
j^pj •.*msi5pin-»o»p3 2 *pim i^d w^p3- 23 i5vni 22 nS 
ram dnS »jj&i w : 38 ^n n&ry nirr w 27 nMii rnrr 



§ 57. The Gender. 115 

:- T> n^r>,p rt&pKn ^Snr 33 T?y 32 nn^ 31 on 3o nnp)^ 
:rra dv? 40 i^3 39 ny?p *rn$b Sn\ 87 ni^ 36 I# 

Aramaea., Syria 1 Damascus 2 Ephraim (the kingdom of Israel) 3 Samaria 4 
a leaf 5 to sprout, blossom 6 with 7 inhabitant ofS n. p. of a city 9 take pos- 
session of 1° to dispossess, drive out 11 ( § 83, 6.) 12 spear 13 javelin 14 *]}&' 
(H of Hi. retained) (§ 117) 15 preeminence, excellence 16 more than 17 (§ 91, 2.) 
follyis (§ 12, 6. B. 3.p Tyre2o fortress 21 (§ 97, 2.) 22 to heap up 23 fine 
gold 24 the mire of 25 street 26 to be high, lofty 27 strength, Vn HJ'j; to do 

valiantly 28 (§ 96, 4) 29 nnp\ const, st. of •"l^pl obedience, respect 30 mother 31 

.> 
to pick out 32 ravens of 33 the valley 34 young eagles 35 tooth, masc. 36 HJH 

(part m. from #JH, with accentless H— ) to be broken, to be rotten 37 (for 

rn#DD I 37, 5 Note I) to be made to waver 38 trust in 39 (§ 83, 4.) an 

unfaithful man. 40 

Exercise 95. 

By reason of i (the) cold 2 (the) sluggard 3 will not plow*, 
therefore 5 shall he beg 6 in harvest, and have nothing 7 - 
The ravens 8 Droughts to Elijah 10 bread and flesh in the 
morning, and bread and flesh in the evening. Tyre 11 was 
a mart of 12 nations. Reprobate 13 (§ 90, 2.) silver they call 
them, because the Lord hath rejected 14 them. Their land 16 
is full 15 of silver and, gold 1 ^- The silver and the gold was 
weighed in the house of God by the hand of 18 the priest 1 ^. 
Lo, the winter 20 is past 21 , the rain 22 is over 23 (and) gone 24 ; 
the fig tree 25 putteth forth 20 her green 27 figs 27 - When2S 
a wicked 29 man clieth, (his) expectation 31 shall perish 30 : 
and the hope 32 of unjust 33 (men) perisheth. Weeping 36 
may endure 35 for a night 34 , but 37 joy 30 (cometh) in 38 the 
morning. The realm 41 of Jehoshaphat 42 was quiet 40 , 
and his God gave him rest 43 round about 44 - When 4 **, 
pride 46 cometh 45 , then 47 cometh shame 48 - The end 49 of 
the wicked shall be cut off 50 - A river went out to water 5 * 
the land. Gihon 52 compasseth 5 ^ the whole land of Ethi- 
opia 54 - Sinai 55 and Tabor 50 are 57 mountains. Siv 58 is 57 
the second 59 month. Hebron 60 is 57 the city of graves 6 * • 
The eye 02 sees 63 , the ear hears. 

7 to have nothing Vtf. Paused e^X^' 5Con*. ) 4{£^n 3 Si" >' 2Fp'n 1 By reason of D 



116 Part I. Exercises, 

kVd 14 0X0 13part.Ni.DXD 12 inO m'i' l°Wl ,l ?K 9 pan. Hi. K)3 8 Q*2"ij» 
20VnD 19|H3 1ST Si* 17371T 16Di'1X le Ni. fut. with Conv. 1, with ace. (§ 85, 2 a) 

T ; I ■ - '*- TT T ; - 

28 inf. with 3 (§ 106, 2) 27 m3 26 BJn 25 mKfl 24 (§ 84, 2) ItSh 23 *hx\ 22 D^i 21 -»3# 

T V - ~T T " : I- f I-* T V V *" T 

38 4 371 36 'J3 35 rS 34 3*H'3 33 D' JIN 32-nSrifn 3013 tf 3inipn 29 j?Kh 

I ■ Y*VT • VV "T *U ' T T 

to give rest n-IJ Hi. 42 D3Eh"iT 41 H-loSo 40 to be quiet I3pt } with Conv. ) 891T\j~S 

50Ni. part. m3 49 n^nX 4S |V7p 47 Conv. 1 46 ?H7 45 part. 44 3'30Q 43 with Conv. 1 
-t - — : — I It It ■ t" 

59*jtf 58 VT 57 r§ 77, 3 j 56 ^)2y\ 55TD 54*^3 53 part. 330 52 rfrva 51 Hi. T\\)V 

T - • ~T I |TT 

.63 TIKI 62r;» 6iD"i3p 60 rron 

T T I ■ - • T I : I ; v 

§ 58. THE PLURAL AND DUAL. 

1. Masculine nouns form their plural by adding □*— , 
feminine by adding HI to the singular: as D^pID* from 0)0 
horse, rVHJO > from IN? a well. 

Note I. The masc. plural sometimes is p — : as p7p Job 18, 2. 
Prov. 31, 3. Micha 3, 12. More seldom *>— : as >jfc-] Cant. 8, 2. 
♦3D Ps. 45, 9, In later Hebrew (Mishna) the ending }*— is the 
common one: as fHlp > pp^DStD- Pp&*D 5 sometimes without the f : 
as HtDD' HU> ^fl. A few add ^— after the Syriac: HJJ\. 
and thus ^N* Lord (§ 82, 4. b.). 

2. Nouns ending with *— ,take D only: as DHDjMrom 
H23J^> or the final * of the noun is omitted and indicated by 
Dagesh : as D"V?> from *t) , 

3. Nouns ending in Jl— drop this syllable when form- 
ing the plural: as D\?n> from njil (part. act. from D^fl 
to encamp.) 

4. Fern, nouns in if— > i"l— = HI cliange these termina- 
tions into HV asTHin law, pi.' HillD- rnriD a crown, 

pi. nnro (§ 72.) nn# a precept, P i. ninj?. 

5. The fern, ending fy— is to be considered as a contrac- 
tion from JT.T 5 n€lu;e the plural (ft— being changed into 
HI) HV— • as itjjjp pattern, model, pi. T)$£jR . 

Nouns with two fern, terminations in J"V— and JT-pform 
the plural from the latter, thus rnTinri the lowest parts, 
the depths;. mnD^ Hebrew women, f. OTOg. and rr"0# . 



§ 58. Plural and Dial. 117 

Note II. Some nouns form the plural irregularly : as fVD/D 
kingdom, pi. HTOSd* WJD and nlW?ifrom H^/p a part, por- 
tion; ninpN. for >liDK /from H£N a" maid /servant, D'ttSt? > 
for ah® . from nSp a lamb, rAN^D , for fYfr?0. from H^pD 
a fold. Such, or similar plural terminations by prefixing H tf or ft, 
are very common in the language of the Mishna: as fiiilSN* 
fromQ^ mother; nlVTiN* from JTiN letter; fTi^D.? from |b*D 
sign; niJO"J^> from 1111^ back-bone, spine. 

Of. Geiger, Lehrbuch zur SpracJie der Mischna. P. 49, 8. 

6. Nouns used in both genders (§ 57, 7.), in the plural 
often terminate both in D*— and JTl : as D*£'£)3 and JTiJ^t33 • 

• t : t : 

7. Nouns (both masc. and fern.) representing objects, con- 
sisting naturally or artificially of two parts or in pairs 
(especially the members of human or animal bodies) term- 
inate in U\— > called the Dual ending: as D^JH feet, DH* 
hands : DTTp*7P ( m longs, snuffers. 

8. In a few instances the dual denotes not a pair, but 
simply the number two: as D*Di* two days, DTO^ two 
years. 

Note III. In the dual ending the tone rests on the penult ( — ), 
the Chirek being only a helping vowel, which drops, when the 
word is lengthened. 

9. Many nouns occur only in the form of a plural : as 
Cn£) face, D w n life, DW? old age. 

10. A considerable number of masc. nouns form their 
plural in HV as Dtf father, pi. Hi'DK'J *WN treasure, pi. 
h11«Ki nN3 or -)b cistern; M roof, r\2\0 altar; Di^fl 
dream ; 7VTPT vision ; KD3 seat, throne ; (1^ tablet ; 7^ 
night; niKD light; -|£)Q rain; DipD place; ^pD staff, stick; 
fl^'P habitation; Sj lamp; *\ty skin; n&jMust; Ditfafast, 
fasting ; ^lp voice ; Dip encounter, battle ; Ifiifc^ trumpet, 
curved horn; ill^ a table; D^ name, etc., and vice versa 
many fern, nouns in Q*— : as r\T& year, pi, d*Jfl^'; 4 nt£*K 
woman, pi. D^'J; [^ stone, D»Bgi W3 egg ; T nSlTl a 
cake of dried figs ; rniDl a bee ; m law ; HtDfl wheat j 
r\y£tl darkness ; f"Oi* dove ; flXy? brick or tile ; T)7f2 word; 



118 Part I. Exercises. 

fibm ant ; T# city, pi. QnjJ; n&&$ flax ; n*i^ barley; 
n^Kh fi 2j-tree etc. 

Exercise 96. 

ir_n>n : rrj&s n^\v *Djayb 8 Tw? D^^ra 2 Sp x Wib># 
8 nnrjMniN 7 nn>i v^jrn^ *np«VJ^P^W D>ii0$ 
nS : 12 oniD**n no? n jnito >n*i 10 o:ntjT?33 9 «tnwei 
or? 1 ? crpDrrS kS pji nppVsn onW? j6i 13 f ingr? D^p 1 ? 
17 M9 J TO o 16 jn "p»jrfS kS nx\ *)*0 u a^h sh ox\ t 
ti$h PJ?rrpN : 19 |itfS T? D w ro nja :D^?rns "rnfjt 
pon? jon^n 22 nSn^ rrin! "njD^Sanfe* ^D^'rnp;? 
nirrS 25 f§nn :vn^ bvyn p £wj?S "i^jai ^dW? 
30 niovj; : 29 Dpn : :nirr Sip? 28 ybtp 27 DTDFi 26 ni^? 
*ni*p*iK 32 nv»ie# 82 ni*3NonnN rioV' rj^n : n n»jp 
*thr\ : 36 nio^9 35 tfT}N "npi; 33 p T -p : 32 ni*nn 32 ni\m 
42 niKn? -irn* 41 rqp3 to r\hy 39 nhiw 38 yy& rum rijn§ 
^phvy "fyp ^noD D?i-i [n :o?n *ntefca npS :nttiDi 

i 48! Qir'ro 47 D^r*io 

t v: "." • ~ : 

n. p. 1 light, swift 2 one of 3 roebucks 4 Samson 5 to bore through, put 
out 6 to bring down 7 to Gaza 8 to bind 9 fetters of copper 10 to grind 11 
( § 107, 8.) captives, prisoners 12 a running, race 13 men of understanding 14 
men of skill 15 favor 16 chance 17 to happen 18 tongue 19 tribe of 20 priesthood, 
office of the priest 21 possession, estate of 22 the teeth 23 the smoke 24 de- 
light 25 burnt offering 26 sacrifice 27 hear, obey 28 decay, rottenness 29 bone 30 
jealousy, envy 31 gent, noun fem. pi. 32 p. n. of a son of Japhet (Gen. 10, 
2. 4) the founder of the Greeks, Ionian^ stand up, arise 34 four 35 king- 
dom 36 to dream 37 seven 38 ears of corn 39 come up 40 stalk, cane 41 full 42 
souls 43 a drop of 44 a bucket 45 the small dust46 a balance 47 to count 48 - 

Exercise 97. 

The Lord hearethi the poor 2 - And 3 Absalom 4 pre- 
pared 5 hiiri horses and men to run 6 before 7 him. There 
is no 8 God, are the thoughts 9 of the wicked. God know- 
etlii ,) the secretsii of the heart. Judgments 13 are pre- 



§ 59. The Construct State. 119 

pared 12 for scorners, and stripes 14 for the back 15 of fools. 
And 16 Uzziah 17 built towers in Jerusalem and in the des- 
ert and digged 18 many wells 19 * for he had 20 much cattle 21 * 
husbandmen 22 (also) and vine-dressers 23 in the mountains 
and in Carmei 24 : for he loved husbandry 25 - There are 2 ? 
six 26 (things), which 28 the Eternal hateth 29 : ye& so > sevens 1 
(are) an abomination 32 unto Him 33 : lofty 34 eyes, a lying 
tongue 35 , and hands that shed innocent bloods^, a heart 
that 28 deviseth 37 thoughts 38 of iniquity, feet that 28 are 
swift 39 in running 40 to mischief' 41 , a false witness 42 (that) 
breatheth 43 lies 44 and (he that) soweth 45 discord 46 among 47 
brethren. Many sorrows 48 (shall be) to the wicked. 
Job 49 was a father to the poor, eyes to the blind 50 and 
feet to the lame 51 - God (is) father of the orphans^ and 
judge of the widows. 

7'}Dh with suff., "jaS 6 part. V?1 5 T\t'V 4 DrW3K 3conv. 1 2?r3K 1 part. 
- t : • ■ : • I t t t : - I : v 

12 Ni. pret. N3 llH^S^D 10 part. 9 H?3TD 8there is no ftf, before a noun p$< [6 108, 1] 
18 3Vn 17«VU? 16conv. ) 151 J UTTsSna 13 [Batf before the pi. ending:] B3# 

- t i- \ t ■-;- t : 

24 l ?pn3 23 [the Tsere drops] Oia 22""GK 2injpD 20 to him [was] 19 113 
32 n3j?jil 31 j?3ltf 30 1 29 tfjip 28 [g 96, 4] 27 7\-,T\ 26 ifiV 25 HDIXi part, he was loving 
37 part. ]£nn 36^-01 35 "1D^ \wh 34 Q*1 33 [an abomination of his soul] j#£)J 

- T | • T T | V T I : T : - 

inf. fr. VJH 39 Pi. part. IH^O 38 [before the genitive the pretonie Kamets drops] rO^'PlD 
' t t -:- 

4*fip«0 bef. the pi. ending] 1p# 43 Hi. tut. n-13 421D# 1? 41 nyi 40 to run, 
5inD3 WTjg 49 3fX 48 31N30 47 j'3 46 only in plural pft 45 Pi. part, phu/ 

,[the pretonie Kamets drops] Dl/V 

T 

§ 59. THE CONSTRUCT STATE. 

The word standing in the construct state (§19, 5.) 
suffers an alteration of its form: 

a. Nouns in ,1— change it into 17— : as tl^HD camp, 
b*Ob» run? Israel's camp. 

b. Nouns in *— change it into *— : as *H living, life, 
rtlTlg '0 by the life of Pharaoh ! 

c. Feminine nouns with final Jf— change it into fi— : as 

n3*?o > n:te . 



120 Part I. Exercises. 

d. The plural and dual terminations D*— and D*— are 
changed into *— : as *D1D the horses of, 'J'1* the eves of. 
Note L The vowel changes, which the word in const, state 
undergoes will be shown in the following § §. 

Note IT. In poetry the const st. sometimes is found with pa- 
ragogic ') or >— : as <\ft 4. Mos. 23, 18, <\}fiflQ Ps. 114, 8. n?K 
1. Mos. 49, 11. n^NJ 2. Mos. 15, 6. ♦jjjy 5. Mos. 33, 16. 

Exercise 98. 

:pra cmn 8 njn rnn : 2 p-jn V?3W%» Ssjj rjrj 

• t - t v : ' - t : t v t : • v t ) v •/ - v : - '■. : 

w rbv 9 Sx#} vb 8 ^o%n) T vtyvjby\ 6 Stt nteirhz m\ 
wirn$ ^tSn 13 md r -p^p Snj? tp.Nn-Dj; 11 ^^ 
W2& : n^ d?d# rnrm 16 nbb$ D'sgn >nS?fS:> : 15 Sj3rr 
bytyanift nrvnO pan ^ Sb ^uwni u^tn nat 

27 'ja? piv W*o : 26 npin 6j£ non^o >&%*? *jwnf p 
mina mm w r«a* : ddS rrrr pmf 29 ?m pnv »nw pny 
imnw Dibs? 3 ~^yyb) in 3l ^'in-a?5 no-p :n^ rfp? 
ma mm ?m *»ate* ^rumma d^ »ay ^pm nma 33 nn^ 

- : t : 1 t : • .. -. - v _ . »-. | ■.• r t- - 7 T 

:dtt# 



hedge, fence 1 (a species of) thorn 2 wickedness 3 p. n. m.4 to carry captive 5 
the force 6 engraver, artificer 7 smith 8 to remain 9 save 10 poverty, hence the 
poorest sort 11 p. n. 12 to kill, (animals) to slay (persons) 13 Elijah 14 Baal, the 
tutelary god of thp Phenicians 15 idols 16 to give ear, to listen 17 fathers 18 my 
land 19 mighty 20 number 21 lion 22 the appearance 23 horseman, rider 24 to run 25 
a wall, rampart 26 stone, weight 27 an Ephah, (a corn measure) 28 a Hin,' (a 
liquid measure) 29 the fear 30 to imagine 31 to counsel 32 to-morrow 33 the camp 34 - 

Exercise 99. 

The wisdom 1 of a man maketh his face** to shine 2 - The 
Lord smote 4 the first-born 5 of Egypt. The inhabitants^ 



§ 60. Inflection of Masculine Nouns. 121 

of Jebus 7 said to David, Thou shalt not come hither8. 
Nevertheless 9 David took™ the castle 11 of Zioni 2 ,- which is 
the city of David. The Lord is far is (§ 79, 3. a.) from 
the wicked: but 27 Hehearethis the prayer 14 of the righteous. 
All Israel saw that the wisdom of God was ini6 Solo- 
mon, to do judgment 17 - The queenis of Shebai9 heard 
(of) the fame 20 of Solomon and she came to prove 21 him 
with hard 22 questions 22 - Of the Lord (are) the goings 23 of 
man 24 - Man's 25 are the projects 2 ^ of tlfle heart, but 27 from 
the Lord (comes) the answer 28 to the tongue's (request) 
(transl.) : the answer of the tongue. Abel 29 was a keeper 30 
of sheep 31 and Cain 32 was a tiller 33 of the ground 34 - And 
the man Moses was very great in the land of Egypt, in 
the eyes of Pharaoh, and in the eyes of the people. 

9Conv. 1 8HiH 7 D*T 6 3£" 5 "1133 4 Hi. H3J 3 0^3 2*1?K Hi. fut. 1 ITO! 
t ■• : •• : tt -t t : t 

lsnaSra wasted i6 3"ip3 is Jut. unban 13 pirn 12 n** nrran ioidS 

t : - x ; • v I v ; f • : I t > t \ : .- x 

271 26 TVJJ2 2501*6 24 13J 23-U'yo 22 nTTt 21HDJPi- 20 WDtfir 19 iO# 
i T _._ TT . .... -^ . . T . * _ .. T . 

*(t> drops .34rmx 33 nij? 32 p.P 31 j^ so run 29 S:in zsjt^d 



t— : 



§ 60. RULES FOR THE INFLECTION OF MASCULINE NOUNS. 

1. The formation of the Feminine, Plural, Dual, Con- 
struct state, and the connection of the noun with suffixes, in 
addition to the changes mentioned in the preceding para- 
graphs, cause considerable vowel changes. 

2. These changes are principally effected by the tone, 
which moves forward one or more syllables, producing 
greater or less modifications in the form of the word. 

3. Generally the two last vowels only of the word are 
changed by the inflection, the third from the end being 
very seldom affected. 

4. The penultimate vowel, being mutable, may be re- 
jected, the ultimate either rejected or shortened. 

5. Two grades occur in the change of vowels, which 
are represented by the two forms of the construct state: 
the const, state in the singular : "D1 and the construct st. 

16 



122 Tart 1. Exercises. 

in tlie plural: H5*l ♦ The comparison of these two forms 
shows : 

a. In the construct st. sing, the vowel in penult is re- 
jected and that of the ultimate is retained, but short- 
ened: 121, fr. 121. 

- : t t 

b. In the construct st. plur. both vowels of the penult as 
well as of the ultimate are rejected: H31' properly it 
is HT1; the Chirek under 1 being only a helping vowel. 

6. In the vowel changes therefore are distinguished two 
classes: a lower grade, corresponding to the const, state 
sing., and a higher grade, corresponding to the const, state 
plural. 

7. The following forms are inflected according to the 
lower grade: the singular forms with suffixes, the femi- 
nine form, the plural in the absolute state, and the plural 
forms with light suffixes. According to the higher grade: 
the plural forms with the grave suffixes: as D3H> const, st. 
sing. D^H. const, st. pi. 'DDil (prop. ^5(7), fern. HOT. 
pi. 0*Dpn, with light sufT. 'sing, and plur. ♦ODn. 'DDti* 
with grave sufF. pi. D?^??n ♦ 

Note I. For Segliolate forms, (which are not included in the 
above rules) see § 66. 

Note II. Feminine nouns having no distinctive feminine termi- 
nation : as H£0 a well, are inflected like the masculine, except- 
ing that they regularly form their plural in ff\ 3 which form re- 
mains unchanged before suffixes and in the construct state. 

§ 61. DECLENSION OF MASCULINE NOUNS, 

1 . With reference to the vowel changes exhibited in the 
foregoing paragraph, the nouns are classed as follows: 
Class I. Nouns with immutable vowels. 
Class II. Nouns with a mutable vowel in the ultimate. 
Class III. Nouns with a mutable vowel in the penult. 
Class IV.^ Nouns with mutable vowels in both syllables : 

the ultimate and penult. 
Class V. The Segliolate forms. 



§ 62. First Declexsiox, 123 

2. This division is observed in the Paradigms. For the 
sake tf brevity we will use the terms : first, second, third, 
fourth and fifth declensions. 



§ 62. FIRST DECLENSION. 

1. To this belong all nouns, of which the vowels are 
immutable, (§ 14, 1.) : as *V# city, ^ip voice, fc^'lD 1 ? gar- 
ment, IfaZ hero, JTTO'D destroyer. 

2. Some difficulty arises with Kamets and Tsere, as these 
vowels are sometimes mutable and sometimes immutable. 
In forms similar to Dp and *ljj» Kamets and Tsere are im- 
mutable, being derived from Dip and "flJ! and standing for 
DNp T > *V$ (§ 3, 6. Note 4.). In forms like V^)p, ^p, the 
Kamets is immutable, standing for ?Nt3p_> ^KDp (§56, 3.a.b.): 
P|J thief, % TOD executioner, 3TO writing. To the form 
^tDp_ belong £H3 rider, for &*1Q > C^ll engraver, artificer, 
for Bf'in , 

T — 

Exercise 100. 

mrrbx :1n 4 d B n$?\ ^nrrjsn 2 -#>>p ^Jw'ao fTrji 
j^in ^rix 7 d^dto nnnrr^ ntyvfrnn 6 j9 5 nriD 4 :nS 
-Sk : 12 niinpn u wii 10 o*ph3n 9 iSy. o^ion 8 npN 

V T . • - T V T T .._ ; T • ~ : | T 

jdW| dW nin; 17 niSp^ Sk *p nniaa 18 n?S:i "Tri# 
yy : 20 niND^ninn^^mTO- 19 D k \* 1<M 3rbn tib) Vto nS' 

• i : t : - t • - : ■ - : 

22 Dinp-^ tirm 1 ? 21 t*td p# -it#* e^n ram jw nyns 
24 3^^9*1 tj 1 ? ne>]£rvsrj£ 23 i^p d^it^s^x rtinrsii* 

on ^ jpxn-73-Sy 29 n^'nintoh^ Sra 28 nisySi 27 -ras 

I V t t t ~- v : v : - - : t : • 

:nj 30 i^n mm hdn ^ :mm rn^S otn* 

• t t : t - t J vt : : : 



124 Part 1. Exercises. 

beginning- 1 small 2 to increase 3 contention, quarrel 4 hastily 5 for feav that 8 to 
put, to shame 7 to harness 8 to go up 9 (§ 80. 5.) 10 to put on 11 coats of maiP^ 
to flee 13 escape 14 a spoiler 15 to conquer 16 the recompense 17 (§ M, 2.) 18 
H US) 19 the hosts 20 control 2 ! near 2 ^ ($ 96, 3.) 23 turn back, return 24 to be 
high 25 (§ 96, 4.) to give, to make? 6 fortification, hence : a fortified city 27 
(§ 83, 6.) a column 28 copper 29 to give light, illuminate 30 - 

Exercise 101. 

Hear counsel, and receive* instruction 2 ; that 3 thou may- 
est 4 be wise in thy (latter) end. Ands David ran, and 
stood upon 6 the Philistine? and slew him 8 and cut off9 
his head. And when 16 the Philistines saw their cham- 
rnonii was dead, they fled 12 - And David took 13 the head 
of the Philistine and brought 14 it to Jerusalem. And 
Haman took the apparel 15 of the king and the horse of 
the king and arrayed 16 Mordecai 1 ^ and brought him on 
horseback 18 through^ the street 2 ') of the city, and pro- 
claimed 21 before him, Thus 22 shall it be done *unto the 
man whom the king delighteth to honor 23 - Her lamp 24 
goeth not out 25 by 26 night. And 5 Delilah 2 ? said to 
Samson 28 ; Tell 2 ^ me, I pray thee, wherein 36 thy great 
strength (lieth), and wherewith 31 thou mightest be bound 32 
to afflict thee? Then^ Samuel 33 took a vial 34 of oil 35 ; 
and poured 36 it upon his head, and kissed 3 ? him, and 
said, Is it not because 38 the Lord hath anointed 3 9 thee to 
(be) captain 46 over His inheritance 41 ? And 5 the king of 
Babylon 43 slew 4 2 a ll the princes 44 of Judah 45 in Riblah 4 6. 

SPi.rra 7, i^^ l ?3 6*?K 5Coiiv. 1 4 Ait. [§101. ITT. a)] 3JJ,*dS 21D-1D lPi-S^p 
14 Hi. Ki3 13npS 12 0^ 11 transl: that C3) their champion 11'3J lOConv. ) 9fH3 

|-T • • -T 

21JOD 20 31'm 19 3 18jto bring on horseback. 3 jn Hi. ir^TID l^Hi. U/2 1 ) 15 tfob 
x| t : ~ : : t - t : 

transl. in whose honor the king is delighting, delighting in 3 VS51 , honor "Ip" 22 H33 

: I •• t It: tt 

29 Eli. parag. imp. (§ 34, 4. § 104, 1) 1JJ 28 p'tfbtf 27 nS 1 ^ 26 2 25 H33 24 "\J 23 (g 96, 2) 
37p#3 36 (§ 51, 1. a) pr 35jDt^ 34^3 BsSlHDtS 32Ni. fut. IDf 31 HM 30 H S3 
46-riTH 1 44 D'Titf plur, ifr 43^33 42Bn# 41irr7nj 40TJJ 39n^D 38 '3 

T : • T _ V T - T T -: - • T - T 

. T]rh21 here with par. T], 7lS3"l 
. tt : • t : • 

§ 63. SECOND DECLENSION. 

1. Under this are included all nouns having a mutable 



§ 63. Secoxd Declension. 125 

vowel in the final syllable ; they are either monosyllabic, 
or their preceding vowels are immutable. 

Ad I. (in the Paradigm.) Monosyllabic words with a 
mutable A sound (Kamets or Patach). 

a. Nouns with Kamets: as ^ roof, T hand CTT' DDT)' 
D1 blood (DDOI) . 

t v : ■ 

h. Nouns with Kamets, doubling the final consonant, when 
the word is lengthened at the end: as D* sea, pi. &&' 
Jty time, D|p?» The Kamets is shortened (§ 14, 
Short, c). 

c. Nouns with Patach: "7£^\ dual DH^ breasts, ^3 son, 
Hi my son. 

d. Nouns with Patach, which double the final radical 
(derivates from ]}"]?) : as in mountain, (with article 

~\nn) piur. Dnn(for nnr\),ay_ people, pi. dw.» V 

living, pi. D^fl/n^ chief, prince, pi. DHfe' (for iyi&) . 

Ad II. Polysjdlabic nouns with final Kamets or Patach: 
as t038PD judgment, 33"D star. Several nouns double the 
last radical: a) D^N vestibule, porch, D'P^K; piN a 
wheel, D^SiN; Tj^TO darkness, dark place, D^ETTpi pHK 
gift, D^ilK; jiK^ adj. quiet, subst. wantonness, pride, 
D\5W'; J$1# a* lily, p^ifiy. b) 'nto threshing-sledge, 

^4c? Ill Monosyllabic nouns with mutable Tsere. Chirek 
in TVy^f is the helping vowel. Other nouns of this kind, 
drop the Tsere only in the construct state plural, hence 
also with the grave plur. suffixes: as W tree, ^]£, ^ViV.' 
D'VP.' TB? S ' *¥!?.' D3^JT. 15 back, nj, ?pi'i JH knowledge, 
♦Jfl » JH companion, friend, *JH * ^1 , , 

Ad IV. 1) Several nouns of this class in the const, 
st. have final Patach: as *7£DPP lamentation, "15DD; 03?P 
altar, TOtD; pSTD couching place, HiffSQ tithe. ' 2) Be- 
fore the suffixes 7\ , D3 > p some of these take Seghol : as 
OD/pP y° ur staff; DDHibiD your sign, wonder. 3) Some 
nouns retain the Tsere in the plural absolute: as l&jV? 



126 Part I. Exercises. 

descendant of the third generation, JSPtfyM . 4) Several 
double the last consonant: as ?D3D palm-branch, D^DJD* 
^P15 well cultivated plain-orchard, 1 719*13 ♦ 

. Ad V. Nouns with Cholera, changing it into Kubbuts 
before the doubled final radical : as 0*1*10 an axe, D^Tlp 5 
Dftlfl sacred writer, person skilled in. hieroglyphics Q*3p*inj 

33*13 margin, border, 0*33*13 5 p3| n % nt ? summit, 0*3133 • 
To these also belong the derived nouns in *— , which often 
double the', when the word is lengthened: as H93 a stranger, 
JT*133; HVP a Jew, D'HliT and DHVT- 

t • : t •: . J ■ • : ■ ■ 

^4c? F7 t Participles Kal, Piel and Hithpael, with the 
exception of H" 7 ♦ Observe here that the forms with the suf- 
fixes Z\, 03, p are fourfold: 1) ?]Stjp> in Pause rptip . 
2) With Ayin guttural vpijfr* ♦ 3) With Lamed guttural 
+jb!?# • 4 ) ^3?k ( on account of the , 

^c? F77. Participles and other derivatives from verbs 
ft"? * which terminate in tl~ : as *1X*1 seer, TOp end, 
change Jl — in Jl — in the const, state and drop Jl — en- 
tirely before any of the afformatives : as HKI : const, state 
n*0> with suff. \>h.plur. 0'ft*1> with local tl— ■ as flftD 
downwards, from nt?0 > ilbj® upwards, from nSj® ♦ 

In a few instances the original termination '— (§ 13, 7. a.) 
is restored. Thus with suff. 7PD3P (sing?) thy covering 
(as from '03?); ^D (sing.) Is'. 30, 23, T]^>p(sing.) 
(erroneously taken for the plural). Ca. 2, 14. VW]? bis 
Creator Ps. 149, % 

• Exercise 102. 

3pl£ ^Tl3 ^fety nirv *ip&-rb : nil? rj^n-i rou; kS 
i n^'*? ^5^3 •Ji'fcnp T ^ribssq p n^jtSn bx*i£^ r\yp : 
"S3 no^-^noSp :wfc>3 ^s>n* m\ nm *b np\ 

^^dS^-Sk rnN*pV 4 ni.T ^ix 3 ^ip >3 ^3'-SNv:o*pVir 



§ 63. Second Declension. 127 

virrSK : 7 vrrN-n^ #>n ^# 6 D>Drrn npm : ib£E>' ro* 
n?_: rvzh ahah ^-pN-DN 10 niNfro 9 oq^5 *p" 8 ^pm 
nry nnN nip! :jlp$ niiipipe^'o : 12 rj^rtnp 11 rj???'p 
174> n?&m 18 *pfc> 15 nnns >S 14L 7iraS 13 hsdd roan ^ 
npirr iiK5 oni!3?crp-ty in nj/pi 18 pi.K"0^'n >in :nncfc> 
22 ^JpQ "i^Dp 21 tojw 20 ^ni£3 jdt/ 9 SnS"B* »g rwjn 
25 nWp? *ni3&' t? &'n 23 t£)S :^nrr& np# n:?^ crfi 
28 ?prjp_ DsrriNi rnys ^p^D! 27 D'jn mp : 26 S;g T3 

: piD 

supply: my desire 1 kingdom 2 to wait on 3 (§ 18. Note) 4 to be ashamed 5 
compassion, pity6 (§ 97, 4,) 7 to strike s to become a surety, to pledge 9 debtl° 
couch, bed 11 (§ 75, 7.) 12 lamentation 13 dance 14 to loosen, untie 15 sackcloth 16 
to gird 17 (§ 85, 1. b.) iniquityis i n the power of 19 HID with surT.20 (g 66, 14.) 
to be or become little, few 21 to envy 22 a torch 23 intoxicated, drunk 24 do- 
minion, rule 25 wicked, foolish 26 friend 27 to help, assist 28 without 29 to go out, 
be extinguished 30 - 

Exercise 103. 

And 1 the scribes2 of the king were called at 3 that time 4 ? 
and it was written according to all that Mordecai com- 
manded to tEe Jews and to the rulers 5 of the provinces 6 - 
Keceive? my instruction, the fathers' instruction, our in- 
struction. The angel 9 of the Lord encampeth 8 roundabout 
the just and clelivereth 10 them. And 1 the Philistines 
gathered 11 their camps together 11 to fight* 2 with 13 Israel. 
The Lord thy God walketh 14 in the midst of thy camp, 
to deliver 15 thee and to give up 16 thine enemies 17 before 
thee; therefore 1 shall 18 thy camp be 18 holy 19 - And 1 Jethro20, 
the priest of Midian^ 1 , Moses' father-in-law22, heard (of) all 
that God had done, for 23 Moses, and for Israel, his people, 
and he said: I, thy father-in-law, am come 24 to thee. 
Blessed25 (be) the Lord, my strength 26 , which teach eth 2 ? 
my hands to war 28 - Myrefuge29, my deliverer 30 and (He) 



128 Part 1. Exercises. 

in whom 31 I trust 32 ; who suMueth 33 my people under 
me 34 - The Lord is thy keeper 3 ^ : the Lord is thy shade 36 - 
The Lord upholdeth.37 all that fall 3 *- My son .meddle^ 
not with rebels 40 - Whoso mocketh 41 the poor reproach- 
eth 42 his Maker 43 - He that trusteth 44 in his (own) heart 45 
is a fool. Deceit (is) in the heart of them that imagine 46 
evil: but to the counselors 47 of peace (is) joy. 

^N 1 ?:? Spart. njn ?np_S 6 nTT3 5Y£ 4fem. ft% 33 2*13b IConv. 1 

i7 3\x i6jnj 15 Hi. Sv: 14 Hit. part, ^n 13^ is Ni. urh n 'f5p T 10Pi - pSn 

26 1« 25part. Kal. *p3 24 part. 23 ^ 22 jnn 21 p? 20n/V J9tfnp lajttl 

31 13 30 Pi part. ftSa 29 (doubles the last cons.) lUti/V 28 3")p 27 Pi. part (§ 96> 8) H^ 1 ? 
-t t : • t|: 

(doubles the last ^tf 35 part. iDt^ 34 (§ 75, 7) >F\T\R 33 part. (§ 96, 8) Til 32 pret. HDI"! 

- T T ; - T T 

41 with 1 ?, part. jyS 40 n^ 39 Hit. 3*)# 38 part (§ 96, 8; 37 part. TJDD 36 cons.) 
45 [doubles the last cons.] 3*7 44 with 3, part. nt33 43 part. TW$ 42 Pi. pret. "pn 

.47 part, yy 46 part. ghn 

§ 64. THIRD DECLENSION. 

1. This declension comprises all nouns with an immuta- 
ble vowel in the final syllable and mutable Kamets or 
Tsere in the penult: as VH| great; pDft faithfulness, truth; 
JlTD? remembrance. 

2. The Kamets or Tsere of the penult is dropped in the 
const, state and invariably when the word is lengthened. 
In forms like fTD^ Dagesh of the middle urtdical is like- 
wise dropped : as JV"D? ♦ Words as \T\^\Q ruler, leader, 
with suff. i3in$ (Chirek helping vowel) ; fDjH famine, 
with suff. Jiaft, for |13jn (§ 14, Kising I. b. B.). 

3. Some nouns of the form jV"Dt> when inflected, take 
Seghol instead of Chirek. Thus JV|ft vision, const, state 
JtRfl, plur. nUVjn; \VSV2V. a tentl1 P art ( cll T measure), plur. 

prjfiiw?.. 

4. A few nouns of this class retain the Kamets : as £"7u* 
a measure, (prob. the third part ofanEphah), and a peculiar 
class of soldiers. H^p refuge, fortress >•?#£; Jjjft shield ^LJD; 
j£Dfc> week PL D'Jpt? and nijft^. const. st,^ij©t?\ 



§ 64, Third Declension. 129 

5. In this class are comprehended several nouns, which 
double the last radical: as Di*IJ7 naked, O y t2T)Vj ^TH net- 
tle, D'Vf? ♦ 

6. In several nouns of the form DipD place, especially 
those derived from verbs )"$ , } is changed into ) : as DUD 
flight, with suff. *pWSi fTUB rest, pi. DTODJ JI^D habita"- 
tion, pi. DW?5 TUB fear/pl. DH^O; IIVD fortress, with 
suff. ?p«B; piHD sweetness, pi. tTOlhb. 

Exercise 104. 

ni>qy niir E>np tfhg ^np ihtizish S^p? nSi tiwfr 
K3Pl T pTj K3 : 6 oSiy 5 [ror p*ja£ : 4 1TQ3 p.Kr?-Sp 8 kSd 

rwn :nirr 14 ri^n i3 rabi^* 12 pK :nirr t^ u cd^d« 

t : t t : I : t •• : I v v T : " '". 

p 19 rup-p 18 nm Tiara :tri 17 ipn wSa -torn w 
*YJ$ii m h^rp^ »TT$-no mix niir hbipsip TiJ b*k 
24 twm 23 wrnhx : rta wt wr 22 ?n w^a 21 nfe pn 

:nS ,{ 7 31 p7n? 30 tti •tfrwra? th\ 28 ^jr> 27 Dibn? pfeh 
jTernbjniiT :D?TrS$* tip] qg t^np p vnn D^'np 
35 n^yn J hn 34 »Wi kS : 33 t$j oSiy oiairbs 32 nyttp-Sir 

to raise 1 to bend, bow down 2 the fullness of 3 glory, majesty 4 (supply : is 
= His majesty fills the whole earth) remembrance 5 (§ 83, 6) 6 wantonness 7 
ig*nominy 8 with 9 lowly 10 faithful 11 weight 12 perfect 13 delight, acceptance 14 
proverb 15 to conceal 16 to search out 17 to wander 18 nest 19 mighty 20 word 21 
behold 22 to touch 23 the anointed (applied to priests, kings,) 24 old, aged man 25 
healing 26 a dream 27 to fly away, vanish 28 (§ 76, 2. c.) 29 Hi. to chase away 30 
vision 31 foundation, basis 32 "137 perpetuit}', eternity, 7Q D ^>' = eternity 
and eternity = forever and ever 33 , avaricious, hard hearted 34 riches 35 but 36 - 

17 



130 Part I. Exercises. 



Exercise 105. 



Our Eedeemer 1 , the Lord of Hosts (is) His name, the 
Holy One of Israel. The multitude 2 of all the nations 3 
that fight 4 against 5 Israel and that distress 6 them shall 
he as a dream of a night vision 7 (of the vision of night). 
The upright 8 shall inherits (what is) good. A son 10 hon- 
orethn (his) father, and a servant his master 12 : if then 13 
I (be) a father, where 14 (is) mine honor 15 ? and if I (he) 
a master 16 ; where is my fear 17 ? saith the Lord of Hosts 
unto you, O 18 priests, that despise 19 my name. As 20 a 
dew 21 upon the grass (is) the favor 22 of a king. God still- 
eth 23 the noise 24 of the seas 25 > the noise of their waves 26 
and the tumult 27 of the people 28 - The Lord reigneth 29 , 
clouds 30 and darkness3i (are) round about Him 32 : right- 
eousness and judgment (are) the habitation 33 of His throne 34 - 
He that walketh 35 uprightly 36 and worketh 37 righteous- 
ness 38 ; and speaketh 39 truth in his heart 40 - He (that) 
backbiteth 41 not with 42 his tongue, nor doeth evil to his 
fellow 43 ; nor taketh up 45 a reproach 44 against his neigh- 
bor 46 ; He that doeth 47 these (things) shall never 49 totter 48 - 
God stands 50 at 51 the right hand of the poor. 

80'DPI 7p'?n 6Hi. part, with S,ptt 5*?J,* 4 part. $ 96, 8) 832? 8^ 2 p'OH 1 S*U 

i6(g82,4b.)D\]na i5Tf:i3 MrpK i3DNi i2rviK nfut. (§ ioi, i. c.) io p 9 Sm 

24pK# 23 Hi. part. n3?^ 22 Jftfl 21 L ?ft 20J 19 part. HT3 18(§89, 5) 17*pVQ 

plur., doubles Q^S 27 p'ftH 26 (doubles the last cons.) Sil 25 (doubles the last cons.) W 

29 pret. Pause ! T70 28 [strong shortening of the vowel g 14, II. Shortening c)] the last cons, — 

36D"Dn 35 part. Kal 34JKD3 33pjQ 32 with plur. sufFO^O 31 SsiJ^ 30 sing, 

44HS^n 43 »n 42 St?- 41 pret. S}*) 40 33 1 ? ■ 39 part. Kal. "OH 38 p-tf 37 part, hl'2 
t ::■ '....'- _ T T .. | .... <_ T 

.51 S 50fut. 49DSll ,i 7 48 Ni. fut \yfo 47 part, in const, state 46 3 flp 45 pret. X&'J 
x \ It t t 

§ 65. FOURTH DECLENSION. 

1. To this belong nouns of two syllables either with 
mutable Kamets in both, or with Kamets in the second 
and Tsere in the first, or with Kamets in the first and 
Tsere in the last: as "CfT word, DD^ heart, Jpt old. 



§ 69, Fourth Declension. 131 

2. Vowel changes in this declension ; 

a. Kamets or Tsere in the first syllable always drop : 

b. Kamets and Tsere in the last syllable, are changed in 
the const, state sing, and before the suffixes 03' f? & 
sing, into Patach: as nyr > JpN MS* OTISM ' D3J|2? ' 

c. In the plural and before the light suffixes sing, and pi t 
final Kamets and Tsere are retained: as DH3*1> D^p?> 

hogVHyr* up.?. 

d. In the const, state plur. and before tlie grave suffixes 
plur. final Kamets and Tsere drop: as H!D1> D3V!p? ; 
but 'Mil, T&fi?^ *3S?' tne helping vowel is" Patach on 
account of the guttural. 

3 In £"p3 wing, D^f tail, JHtf rib, the helping vowel in 
the 4 plural is Patach instead of Chirek: as *£)!?> Hl33t? 

4. In a few nouns of the form 7£3p and /COD* the 
Segholate form (§ 66.) is used in the const, st. and before 
suffixes: as Wtf smoke, const, state |£*J£ and W^} £"pJ7 
branch, with suff. DD?^ ]]h'£ rib, const, st. )fy£ and 
JfSjf , with suffixes ^^V ^ 

5. Some nouns of the form 7£pp take the Segholate form 
in the const, st. e. g. f|j"D shoulder, const, st. fljlD' TT[| 
wall, const, st. Till J ' ?VV hip, const, st. TV* ^M robbery, 
const, st: 7^; TpN long, const, st. Tj^; Hji) heavy, once 
const, st. HDD; 7*1^ uncircumcised, const, st. *7l]/ and T1J7. 

6. Some nouns of the form 7pp retain Tsere in the plur. 
const, st. e. g. W^ sleeping, const. ♦^♦j ^Dtf mourning, 
♦J75K; D* joyful/ ♦TOt? (but also *npk>) nit? forgetful, 

V2&> f§n delighting, ♦Van. 

Exercise 106. 

2 nnr toqinS DfiS jnj mnr :np# ninj ?p:ri l m m \ 
4 o^td :nn 3 '&}:rSj; rj^np nirv toriaft niK ^n? 



132 Pakt 1. Exercises. 

VT-nN* 7 pin Stdh : 6 N*£)nDnS 5 Dnt:o »n inwywish 

tt v | •• • : - •• : - •• • t : t *t t t - 

- 10 ^p dh •hjfeiN jvntS hirr 8 tid liiKrm Sdki 
13 wm 12 ry k 1 ? oy ubosn 11 D , D3no d«5'H nam p« 
:Drrs 15 ySp5 w*fe»l d^jtnS oy_ 14 D'3fi# :DDr/? ppj? 
19 b # arui dh3 "irgp^ nVs 17 p?n Nf^nyWs j>n ^q 
D'pprrna* rjSh fh^fy b^jpr 2 ni_rr :T]Sp 65*$3 K*ni 
j e dot ib irne^i p»n 21 :nrrSy ae* mrr rmrr 
2b hyhi >£x) DiW nn hy_ tt|Efl!l 24 nrr rape? 23 D>pv?n 
29 -j 1D ^ 28 p^^ 27 Dpn^p 26 Snp5 : D^^'nS oiW \m mgj? 

the summit 1 to break forth 2 wing 3 lightning 4 flesh, bod}' 5 quietness, soft- 
ness 6 to fold 7 counsel 8 four 9 little 10 (§ 83, 7.) Pual : to be made wise, hence: 
exceeding wise 11 strong 12 to prepare 13 the coney 14 rock 15 locust (£ 82, l.) 16 
division 17 (by bands) a spiderl 8 to catch 19 (§ 76, 2. d.) ornament 20 circle 21 
locust (a peculiar species, small and edible) 22 upright one 23 conjointly 24 
worthlessness, lowness 25 (§ 89, 4.) an assembly 26 to rejoice, to play, dance 
(Pi.) 27 to laugh, rejoice, dance 28 a circle, an assembly 29 - 

Exercise 107. 

The Word of our G-od shall standi forever. And 2 the 
Lord had rained down 3 manna 4 upon the Israelites to eat, 
and had given them (of) the corn^ of heaven. The Lord 
is far from the wicked. Two 6 (things) have I required? 
of Thee 8 , deny 9 me 10 (them) not before 11 I die 12 ! Remove 
far 15 from me vanity 13 and lies (transl. the word of lie)* 4 : 
give me not poverty 16 nor 17 riches 18 - Lest I be full 1 9, 
and deny (The&pio, and say, Who is the Lord? or lest I 
he poor 21 * and steal 22 * and take 23 the name of my God (in 
vain). Fear the Lord, (ye) his saints 24 : for there is no 25 
want 26 to them that fear 27 Him. If ye hearken 28 to 
these judgments and keep 29 and do 29 them, the Lord thy 
God shall keep 29 unto thee His covenant. And He will 
love 29 thee- and bless 29 thee and multiply 29 thee: lie will 
bless 29 thy corn, thy wine 39 , thine oil 31 , thy flocks 32 and 
thy herds 33 - Speak ye to 34 the heart of Jerusalem, and 



§ 66. Fifth Declension. 133 

call untoSo her, that her warfare 3 ^ is accomplished 3 ?, that 
her iniquity39 is pardonedss, for she hath received-**) of 
the hand of the Lord, double^ for^2 all her sins* 3 - 

transl. from 9^JO 8^X0 7^N# 6 Q*pff 5 m 4 |JJ 3 Hi. 1B0 2 C. 1 1 D'p 

19fut.j»3fr 17155TW 17 1 16fc*X1 15 Hi. pm 14 2T3 lS'Kltf 12fut. 11 D1B3 10me 

25 PX there is no : 24 #110 23pret. \&QP\ 22 pret. m.) 21 Ni. fut. tfT 20 Pi. pret. WT\D 
I •• |t -t -t - t 

31 IDtf" 30 ttfVTfi 29 pret. with C. 1 28 With ace. potf 27 to his fearers = XV 26 110 HO 
(generally masc. X3^ 35 with pi, suff. Si< 34 Sv 33(§ 82, 1.) 1p3 32 (§ 82, 1.) Vflt 

TT V l TT ' 

41 D'Sm 40ppS 39 (gen. masc., here fem.) MM 38 Ni. pret. HV1 37 xSd 36 Acre /em.) 

.43rrnx'Bn 423 



§ 66. FIFTH DECLENSION. 

1. In this are embraced the large class of nouns called 
Segholaies, which had originally three consonants, with 
hut one vowel, following the first one. In order to 
make them dissyllabic, a helping vowel has been added, 
regularly Seghol, hence the term : Segholate forms. The 
original vowel was : short a, i, ov (— , — , — ) : as T\7D > 
"19P» £Hp* By the addition of the helping Seghol under 
the second consonant, the short vowel being now in an 
open syllable is lengthened. The Chirek becomes Tsere, 
the Kamets-Chatuph, Cholem, the Patach, however, ir- 
regularly changes into Seghol, in pause only does it 
lengthen regularly into Kamets ; thus the original Tl/O » 
^p>gH£ become 7|Sb> in pause T]Sb> i&pi fcHp. 

2. The second vowel being only a helping vowel, all 
words of this declension are Milel. 

3. On the lengthening of the word the original form is 
resumed : as *p ?5 > 1^0 P > ^"IP • 

Note L Hence He local (§ 19, 6.) appended to a Segholate, 

> 
requires the original form : as n"if"l^ *° the land (T**1N » orig. 



134 Part I. Exercises, 

pN); nrv| to the house 0T?, orig. rVp) ♦ When the 
original vowel in the segholate form is o, H— is accented: as 

ir\ys> rhrix. 

t^-: t v: 

4. In the const, state sing, the forms H/D* ^5? j ^"tp 
remain unaltered. 

Note II. y"|? seed, *nH an apartment, room, IPfD g am , profit, 
J7J0J plantation, plant, 7217 a breath, a vain thing, in const, st. : 

rip tig* nf ^ ^' ^g* 

5. A kindred form of this class, embraces all those 
words of three consonants with but one vowel after the 
second one : as CO*"] honey ; "D-? anc ^ *Q3 man 5 ^3^ 
shoulder ; 7g>S moisture ; V7 ink ; D^ marsh, marshy 

place, and the infinitives of Kal, of the form 7£>p > /bp • 
They agree with the Segholates in inflection: as ^yij> 

6. From this form (5. vowel under the second consonant) 
are taken the plural absolute and the plural forms with 
light suffixes: as &2bn, 6nZD> DH5Hp» >2bl2> ?p£)D . 

<-> -.. T ..... T . . T | T . •- -r : | v t : 

7. From the regular (TJ/D etc -) are formed the plural con- 
struct state and the plural with grave suffixes : as *2?0 » 
H5P'. Wife, DTO^' pH5P' lO^lR* 

Note III. When the final radical is one of the J7iD7JQ> 
the aspirated pronunciation of the plural absolute is retained in 
the const, st. and before the grave suffixes; as *5*??? ' EfTp//5» 
hut in sing, vp^g, Dp? 1 ??. 

8. In the form of two Seghols, as 7^b> the first gene- 
rally stands for the original Patach (Tl/b) ♦ But a consid- 
erable number had Chirek originally: as 7JD garment, 
f7D2 trust, confidence, TpJ knee, DtJ^I rain, 7p? remem- 
brance etc., with suffixes: *7JQ> HJt . 

9. In the forms with two Seghols Ol^D) and Tsere with 
Seghol OtDD) > some (most of which are Pe gutt.) have 
Seghol as the original short vowel: as 72^ pinion, with 



§ 66. Fifth Declension. 135 

buff raK* D^fl fat, p^fl part, y&J delight, ^g calf, ^ 
help, tpj? valuation, "i^ before, over against, (itllD Gen. 
2, 18, 20. as over against him, i. e. the counterpart of him), 
")## ten etc. 

10. When the third radical is a guttural, the helping 
vowel under the second radical is Patach: as JHJ seed, 
Jfl2# salvation, rHN way. When the second radical is a 
guttural, both vowels of the forms ^COp and Sftp are Patach: 
as Ijy boy, lad, 1J£ wood, forest. 

12. The form ^L?p has in a few instances Kubbuts in 

the inflection before suffixes: as TJJD thicket, "D^p; TljH 

greatness, lS"U (also iVl|) ; f>Pp handful, liRDJ? . 

12. The form ^tOp with middle letter guttural takes 
Kamets before the suffixes Tj » D? > p •' as ^HN thy tent, 
rf?#3 thy deed, work (Inf. with suff. § 45). 

13. The form 7Dp vocalizes the plural absolute: 

1) D*V^5 actions, DHS3 cypress-flowers, D*nft") spears. 

2) with Pe gutt.: DH£)J£. gazelles, fiirVjN ways, but also 
without guttural: D*EHpH (thus always with the article). 

3) The two nouns EHb* root, and CHp holiness, have 
QWhtf and D*CHf) . The noun SllN* tent, has pi. ohtitt , 
whence V^liK, ^HN. but also 'SriN . DD*7T?Ki mi* 

T T J V t •• t: T v •• t: T - 

way, makes VfirVjX > DfirHK , 

14. With \y and v '^ the segholate form is only distin- 
guishable in the sing, absolute. With ) the form 7®\) 
lengthens the Patach before 1 into Kamets: as H)P death, 
before * the Patach remains unchanged: as JTf olive. In 
all the other forms the 1 and * lose their consonantal power 
and are contracted with the preceding vowel into a diph- 
thong: a + 1 = i ; a + * = — (§ 12,*7. b. 2.) ; hence fllfi* 
Dli p.N adversity, with suff. ^1K; Tpfi midst, const. 7]in> 
with suff. *5^ ; ^?3 house, const. fV?; with suff. VV5» 

15. I. The Segholates of the verb D" 1 ? > exhibit the 



136 Part I. Exercises. 

three original forms as follows: H$ fruit, (**13)> *VD half ? 
C?¥fj)s v£7 sickness, (vTDj hence H§ in pause H3> suff. 

T!$; >vn> nfty. suff. wylj, ^n in pause >Sn, suff. »Sn. 

II. From such nouns of H"7 * the third radical of which 
was originally V arise T\W > from T\W ', ^T\T\^ 1113 from 
inn, in? (§12, 7, b. 3.) 

Exercise 108. 

*pni vygs 3 rjr ^^jTrS^ : 2 m'^ m&q d^hv 1 rrjN 
6 ^n^" jqo p^REJ rtjrn t b m^ unry. n\n? trtfn? nirtn 
*3»o : 9 Si^-^S mSjn iny? jrv 8 ins nf j? d^" 7 ^-'^ 
i^'-]p T 3 Sn hhn :rf?o 10 h$&b nar»? nann-Stf S>p3 
vr*n : 12 dS^N"HK tdS ?rb mrr : u i*rrj sfts miSSn 

• t x : t v - I •• t : : v : ; — 

nin* »i?j/p b^i ^0"n2* in? ^p33 : 17 npn^ 16 vm 
21 p^nD nn^ irn^j nnoTiStf 2(M ra? : lg bys v?rn 18 nin 
113 Kite* ito3^ rj^in : 23 VDj;ip-7j; 22 arris n^n injrng 
cm nS ;i:m nyo itfjjy npitr :np^ 24 Vtt^' ftrjgi 
r 29 v^5 28 ^ nan rib : 27 hi$ 26 p T > wrtn tm ?/a$£p s 
D^'n nS o^Bh pa :infj# y&yrjy 30 inD?n3 ng^ cnn 
J^p.^n np? nip Nn;n Sk :^m obx w o*¥SF&o ^SB?* 
33 rrjr 1tt| vfrgp Sa Sjt mrr vjrn p SbS to ^5f? 
bixwz ^n^'p nana njso nry_ :f nan n^p inprnomrr 
-na #** ?n^-DN : 36 nTnnb^' #n wn B rr»fiBh rwap 

• I •• • • t : v v : - •• " : x v x : x :| • 

:iS Jiro; re njas? ing pn-S:> 

the path 1 brightness, splendor 2 purt 3 to weigh 4 shield 5 to plant 6 rill 7 
fruit 8 to wither 9 intelligence 10 greatness 11 food 12 wickedness 13 possessor, 
person given or addicted to a thing 14 the wall 15 stone 16 to break, pull 
down 17 (2 93, 7.) magnificence 18 the deed 19 sacrifice (§ 83, 4.) 20 to flatter 21 



§ 66. Fifth Declension 137 

to spread 22 step, footstep 23 to seek early, diligently 24 (g 93, 3. = seeks early 
it. the correction) to devise 25 to direct, prepare 26 step 27 peor, afflicted 28 
for. 'J.!', affliction, misery 29 wisdom 30 company 31 scorner, scoffer 32 to testify, 
bear witness 33 hard, vehement 34 flame, burning 35 the flame of Jah, i. e. 
kindled by God 36 - 



Exercise 109. 

Bless the Lord my soul 1 , and my innermost 2 (bless) 
His holy 3 name. I will lift up 4 mine eyes to the hills 5 * 
• from whence 6 cometli my help 7 - My help (cometh) froni 8 
the Lord, who made 9 heaven and earth. He will not 
suffer 10 thy footi2 to totter"- The earth is fulli 4 of the 
goodness 13 of the Lord. Say not, I will do so 16 to him 
as 15 he has done to me: I will render 17 to the man ac- 
cording to his work 18 - And 19 Hiram 20 sent to Solomon, 
saying, I have heard what 21 thou sentest to me for 21 : 
(and) I 22 will do all thy desire 23 concerning 24 cedar-trees 
(trees of cedars) 25 * and concerning flr 26 -trees. My servants 
shall bring 27 (them) down 27 from Lebanon 28 unto 29 the 
sea, and thou 30 shalt do my desire in 31 giving bread for 
my household (bread of my house). Saul 32 and Jona- 
than 33 ; lovely 34 ' and pleasant 35 in their lives, also 36 in 
their death were not parted 37 ? they were swifter 40 than 38 
eagles 39 ? they were stronger 42 than lions 41 - Arise, walk 
through 43 the land in 44 the length 45 of it and in the 
breadth 46 of it; for I will give it unto thee. My flesh 48 
and my heart 49 faileth 47 , (but) God (is) the strength 50 of 
my heart, and my portion 51 for ever. 

5 (with tbe art. mil ; in plur. § 17, 1) 1H 4 Kfr: 3 (§ S3, 6. b.) 2plur. 31p lfem. #£)J 

TT - TT VlV 

12(subst. with art.) DID H^JH 10 |fU 9 = the maker of (part. TW$) 8 D#D 7 "IfJ? 6 V^D 

20QTn 19Conv. 1 18Sj;3 17 Hi. 2W 16 }3 15"»#K3 14(§ 8§, 2.) tfSo 1310)1 

27 Hi. TV 26tfjl3 ^ilK 243 23"|»3J1 22 [§ 93, Note] »J£ 21 (§ 111, 2.) 1#SJ flK 

33rr\JV 32 L 7 5 ,H# 31 with inf. S 30 [§ 93, Note] HilK 29 [§ 19, 6.] 28 [§ 80, 3.J n'j^S 
Itt t t— It: 

391&'} 38.§ 91, 1. 2.] 37 Ni. 112 361 35 with art. QV^ 34Part. Ni. with art. 3HN 

~T 'T 

463111 45111K 44 1 ? 43 3 42 [5)13-1 — -VY3il pl-3 13J 41 pi, JV|", , '1K 40pret. Y7p 
l V A~r : r -t •-: - | T 

.51pSn SOIte* 49 33S 481^» 47nSj 
I v ■• t - •• : T t 

18 



138 Part I. Exercises. 

§ 67. THE FORMATION OF FEMININES, 

1. The feminine termination fl— is appended to the 
masc. noun,, affecting it in the same manner as the light 
suffixes. L DID, fern. pjtJlDi K¥iO> HN^D; H. Decl. 

T T T T 

Hp.tofeim rrijjio; trifc, nmi*; nrn.fem. niii. in. Deci. 
Sru, rhn)i D*pDi hd^?; iv. Deci. oarr, np;rp p.', 

mpN V. Decl. lf?Q, n&D; d|?I?.> ^^TSfj VjR, rtatf; 

2. The toneless fern, ending J"l— , modifies a) the ante- 
penult like Jl— : as fiTTjl wall, from TjJl; b) the penult 
like the SegjSol in Tj^DTfor Tj^Q, viz. by the Seghol of 
j"l— the preceding vowel, with a few exceptions, be- 
comes like it in sound: Patach and Kamets become 
Seghol: as fttl§> flnn$; ni^JN *"H3B?. ; Tsere becomes 
Seghol: TU , HTM J Chirek CM becomes Seghol: T3JU 

When H— is appended to the nouns in ^— and ) (Deriva- 
tives from h r,i 7)> i-et and u-et are contracted into JY— and 

in . W» ^3^' (for nptp), n*o^' (for hp#). 

§68. DECLENSION OF FEMININES. 

In inflection feminine nouns undergo less change than 
masculine ones, and are classed as follows : 

Class I. Nouns with immutable vowels before the fem- 
inine termination Jl— : as rniHil > tlblDT) > Hptl statute, law. 

t t : t : I |t \ J 

Class II. Nouns with mutable Kamets or Tsere before 
the fern, termination H— : as JT^# counsel, rQJJifl abomi- 
nation, HD"JV righteousness. 

Class III. Nouns derived from the segholate form of 
the masculine: as HDbft* from T|7p; 'TJJ7.3 a young wo- 
man, from -)J£J; rPpN word, saying, from TDK; ^|?0 
strength, from p?H ♦ 

Class IV. Nouns properly Segholates, terminating in 



§ 69. First Declension of Fem. Nouns. 139 

n— — (with gutturals fl— — ) fi— — • H- — : as fTO-? mis- 
tress: fiwW wife: nJj"D coat, 

§ 69. FIRST DECLENSION. 

lu this declension the ending only undergoes changes 
in the const, st. : jl— is commuted into fl— • as Hpf! const. 

st. npn* 

Before light suffixes the Patach of j"l— being in an open 

syllable becomes Kamets : as T1CHD > but DDHDID ♦ The 

plural fiiD'lD remains unchanged in all forms. 
> 
He local (p|— ) changes the fem. termination }"J— into 

> T > T 

j"|— : as PirnD* from H10 n. p. (bitter fountain). 
Exercise 110. 

np\\* : tip] rvgy. nMn 2 rbnsi :^S 1 ni3D J ?3;n jrt rtirr 

$t 'IOC 1 ? ^W^ :n i n ! m - 1n ? 4 ^3^D ^T 8( ©W 

9 iN¥to D'dVh 8 n¥pa :mx yrfo man 7 tr^ 6 in5no 

-Sg 13 ?jk t. M mao3 n nnpi78) 8 pn«jrb# 10 in^pini 
♦3 nirr? ninm dWk jtbJib* ^o >b>sj 14 rran b^s* 

*#ftl r^rryoi 18 D^np uhi wj; i#g 17 D'pirn iypty 
DtrH?? 20 ^p..lV 19 H^nn ^^ jinine*? fe^n rrirra bun 

^mm 24 ^S y^ M nirrinin5 :nini^T„}V3?VpHV 
26 npn j»x nin? oSiy tib# :?an wax rx ^ytpytf 

t : • 

secret 1 the beginning 2 perfect 3 (§ 83, 7:) (§ 96, 8.) 4 bridegroom 5 "bridal- 
chamber 6 to rejoice 7 the end, extremity 8 a going out, a rising 9 circuit 10 to 
hide, concealu the heat 12 only 13 silent resignation 14 (i. e. perfectly resigned) 
to deliver, rescue 15 path 16 far off, remote 17 near 18 to utter 19 righteousness 20 
praise 21 his mouth 22 push, thrust down 23 unless 24 delight 25 searching, 
yr\ p«, X' 1 ? unsearchable 26 - (§ 108, 1.)* 



140 Part I. Exercises. 

Exercise 111. 

My soul, waits thou only 1 upon2 God; for my hope* 
(is) from Him. He only (is) my rocks and my salva- 
vationS: He (is) my defence** I shall not totterS- As 9 
the man (is), (se is) his might 10 - Thou shatterest the 
ships 11 of Tarshish with 12 an east 14 wind 13 - According 
to Thy name God, so (is) Thy praise^ unto 16 the ends 1 * 
of the earth. The fearis of the Lord (is) clean 19 ; endur- 
ing20 forever. My son 21 > walk 22 not thou in the way of 
wicked; refrain 23 thy foot from their path 24 - And Re- 
chah 25 and Baanah 26 came into 2 * the midst 2 ^ of the house, 
and the king lay 29 on 39 his bed 31 i n his bed^chaniber 3 ^ 
(in the chamber of h. b.) and they smote him, and slew 34 
him. Behold, we (were) binding 35 sheaves 36 in the field, 
and, lo, my sheaf arose, and also 3 * stood upright 33 ; and 
behold, your sheaves surrounded 39 ? and prostrated them- 
selves 49 to my sheaf. Go and cry 41 unto the gods, which 
ye have chosen; let them save 42 you 43 in the time 44 of 
your distress 45 - And ye have this day scorned 46 your 
God, who himself 4 * saved 48 you out of all your evils 49 
and your troubles 50 - 

8Ni. DID 7[doubles the last cons.] ^VJD ^TlVV^' 5*1-^ 4mpil 3DJTT 2 1 ? 1^ 

t : • *t : t I : ■ - t I - 

isnxT in^p iehv isnbnn wanp 13 nn 123 iin 9 JK ion^3j 93 

x : * v I v - t • : -It ~ t- t: t : 

2n;» 26n:;*3 25 23^ 2&nyr\i 23 ^jn 22Kai sip 20 [part.] nay wni'no 
35 Pi. nbx 34 Hi. run 3333^2 32 -nn sin^a 30 St? 29 part. 33$ »sin 

t : • ■:■." t - - - t i-.'t 

40 Hith. with C. 1, nn# 39 tat. 33D 38 Ni. Pause! 3¥J 37 DJ 36 [plur. D'— and nfl, nsStf 

48 part. 47 >*Mn 46DK3 45 n*)¥ 44 n^ 43 dative 42 Hi. fut. pti/' 41 p^T 

.5onnv 4©n>n 



0. SECOND DECLENSION. 



1. The words of this declension drop the Kamets and 
Tsere in the inflection, excepting in the plural absolute: 
as TOt? year, fli#, VW* hut ffUtf; 

t t " - : • t : t 

2. When Sh'va precedes the termination Jl , T\ 

X T T T " 

(as in paradigm) a helping vowel is used: as DDT^* for 

r\rrv±, from np-i¥. 



§ 70. Second Declension or Fem. Nouns. 141 

3. In the following words Kamets and Tsere are 
immutable , hence all these words belong to the first 
declension: H&O* ( tne ferciinirie of ^D § 62, 2.) dry land; 
rDtr'n (for ny&n) darkness ; W]j}3 request ; riVM re- 
proach; HCHD (for tlt&IQ) exposition ; JlH^fN memorial; 
rfeil deliverance; 11^3(1 a knowing; PH^ (fr. T")¥> Karnets 
to comp. the Dagesh), J1JH evil, (fr. JfJH) ; F\*0 pure, (fr. 
112); mj rumination, (ill); ftlXfi curse, (11$); IYT#? 
a saw, (fr + 11$); mt strange, (fr. Tit); plM tight; mjj£ 
witness ; HN^p full ; HNpfc? unclean ; PH3K something 
lost; rfytj robbery; H^SK darkness; ftTU pool; TV2M 
something stolen ; HTip gall ; tl%1& burning ; PUKJl % ; 
rD§np overthrow; ilfiiP plague etc. 

4. Several nouns take in the const, st. and before suff. 
the Segholate form fi — — or D- — : as 

n^Spp kingdom, const. nsSpD* with suff. ♦flpSoD 



nr?|)^? family, 


" rinsfb. 


♦{lnsi^to 


POnSd work, 

t t : 7 


» ro^o, " 


^3xSp 


PQDHS chariot, 

t t : v ' 


" JW)<9' 


irqsnp 


Jl 7C*PP government, 


" rfo&QQ * 


ifi^pp 


TOIiSd war, 

t t : • 


a a a 


♦fUP079 


niKiDH ornament, 


" nnNsn . 


ttHKfln 



npnn cattle, with suff. rpprQ, uripn?; rntpj;. crown, 

const. n*1£?J?.j n^D^ mistress, const. D^DJ; i"Di77 flame, 
const. rQD 1 ? ♦ 

Exercise 112. 

rvd-o : 5 nnp 4 DnnDnt^n:rm : 3 Tiyn 2 n:^' i np'inft 

t : vj T T . T . ._ . . . .- * T -. J T 

:pn>* rrap *r£l jn 6 ^pio dtisc? yg>&? :pnx #tfr? 
"-nr^i mrr 8 tr-h niMS-Ss :nna 7 nipn^ hut p^¥ 

t : t : • t : t •• t J t : t : | 

" 14v "Hn-7D l3 trflnD-jN 12 np^ninn^ : n pnp 10 ni^'np 
jrra 17 ^N;Sp ta |Spnpn :raS- 16 nnr^? ni«T 15 n3j;iri :jeq 



142 Part 1. Exercises. 

: 23 rin 22 nrra 21 dkS ^D&aoi rhn ml9 rmn ajr 1B Yto 

It - • : v v : |vv - : - w t T : 

D^nin^n? ^niD^'n? kS :^nw 29 DnrT iin? ^k nirr 
•3 aab i«o 31ta iD^'D 30 Sd2 :nirr djo on M*:rn kSi 

:m^Sd:t 34 p5rr D#g ^niD^intoyDnw'tojrq :^JW : 9 
niaipfc© rnri : 38 jjp B*ta 37 JfioriDi 36 ^**o 35 rj^np? aqi 

: 39 Dipn N>n ffin* rajri ^"^? 

sweet 1 sleep 2 laborer 3 to be exalted 4 a city 5 snare, gin 6 righteous acts 7 
to search 8 form, imagination 9 thought 10 to understand 11 the breath, spirit 12 
to search 13 chamber, inward part 14 abomination 15 high, proud (§ 83, 7.) 16 
messenger 17 the multitude 18 the honor 19 the want 20 people 21 destruction, 
ruin 22 prince 23 to know, regard 24 the life 25 beast 26 ground 27 to be satisfied 28 
throughout all ages (§ 91, 3. b.) 29 above., more than all 30 a watching, guard- 
ing 31 issue, result 32 slumber 33 folding 34 one that travels 35 poverty 36 want 37 
a man of a shield = armed with a shield 38 to stand 39 * 

Exercise 113. 

The Lord will render 1 to every 2 roan 2 his righteousness 3 
and his faithfulness-*- The lips 5 of a fool enter 6 into 7 con- 
tention 8 - How 9 shall we sing 10 the Lord's song 11 in a 
strange 13 land 12 (in the land of a. si § 83, 6. b.). My 
sighs 15 (are) many 14 - And 16 ifl6 there he (fut.) in a man 
a sin 17 (deserving) the judgment of death, and he be put 18 
to death 18 , and thou hang 19 him 01120 a tree; his body 22 
shall not remain 21 all night 21 upon the tree, for he that 
is hanged 24 is a curse 23 of God, that 25 thou defile 26 not 
the land, which the Lord thy God giveth thee (for) an 
inheritance 27 - And he said, Thy brother came with 28 
subtlety 29 and hath taken 30 thy blessing 31 - Whoso stop- 
peth 32 his ear at 33 the cry 34 of (the) poor, he also shall 
cry 35 (himself) . but 36 shall not be answered. Jealousy 37 
(is) the rage 33 of a man 39 ) therefore 40 he will not spare 41 
in the day of vengeance 42 - The sacrifice of wicked ones 
(is) an abomination to the Lord: but.36 the prayer of up- 
right ones (is) His delight 43 - My rigteousness I hold 



§ 71. Third Declension of Fem. Nouns. 143 

fastH and will not let it go-*5 all-*6 the while 4 ^ my breath*? 
(is) in me. 

10 Hi. TUP 9TX 8 3") 7 3 6fut. k X)3 5 n3'Z> 4m>*3K 3Hp"lV 2^K 1 Hi. 3-]# 
I ■■ tt t v: Itt: 

18Hophalprct. HID 17K£3n 16*31 ISnmX 14pret. 331 13 T3J 12 HOIK UTB> 

... . . T T-: - T T •■ T T-; 

26 M. XOQ 251 24 part. pass. 23nSSp 22JT73J 21 Hi. j^ 20*7^ 19pret. hSjI 

34Hprr 330 32part. DDK 31H313 30Conv. 1, np*7 29m**0 28 3 27r6m 
Itt: -t tt: I T : • t -:- 

43n'n 42-zDpj 4i* — 7rDn 40 1 39-13J 36 nan si map 36 1 35 ^ip 

It Itt - t •-•; t •• t :| • t|t 

.47m#J 46 IK'- 1 ? 3 45 Hi. n3"*i 44IIi. pret. with 3, pm 

T T ; * T T T I 

§ 71. THIRD DECLENSION. 

The nouns of this class, having already been changed 

in form by the addition of the feminine ending, remain 

unaltered, with the exception of the plural absolute, 

which is formed like that of the masculine Segholates in 

• asrVD^S queens, from TObO > like D^D, from hSe 

t_ : t : x 7 . t : - • r : Jv v 

king, but const, st. fTD/p* and so with suffixes VTiD/D • 
Exercise 114. 

r\±> D5ITDN *£) :±>) 1 rfihi rwn pnv Jfp niKSy wnj 

• t I v t : •• - : t • t : w —. — : • t • • - : ■ 

7 p^ 6 ^23 H^V H?? rni-intp wiog rrin; 5 nnpK 
Dgn "n^bnrr^ om jvv rxin; 10 on^ : 9 D>njnt? 8 pp T ?p 
frtrjra 14 »Sj;#? :nin! j» 13 nronjr; m jtje? rra-rp 

• - t : ■ - ^:|T : - t t •• t : • | •. • : 

xzr\r\ 22 o%2 21 Spjn pian nsj; : M tfW:3 19 ^?l 18 ;5n 
innn nftS roonon nirrnimN-Sa jdwkm ^rt^ 

• : •• : : v v: •;•;-: r : : t t • t : : ^ t ; 

ni^ni 25 ^.^ onnn :>rW? nin^^irnN ; 24 v;v-iiri 

: riirp-D*o 

t : \ : 

reins, kidneys 1 (§ 94, 2,) 2 to exult 3 right things 4 the saying 5 furnace 6 
(§ 83, 10.) 7 to refine* seven-fold (§ 92, 4.) 9 to comfort™ ru i n ii Eden 12 the 
plaini 3 a fox 14 to measure 15 the palm of his hand 16 the span 17 1o meteout 1 ^ 
to comprehend 19 a measure (prob. a third part of an Ephah) 20 to weigh 2 ! 
the scales 22 the hill 23 testimony 21 to give way., to depart 25 - 



144 Part 1. Exercises. 

Exercise 115. 
The land of Canaan (is) a land of mountains and val- 
leys 1 ; (and) drinketh 4 water of 2 the rain 3 of heaven. And 
the inhabitants of Gibeon 5 took worn? shoes 6 upon their feet 
and worn outer 8 garments 8 upon them. My beloved 16 " is like^ 
to a gazelle 11 ; behold, he 12 cometh leaping 13 over 14 the 
mountains, bounding 15 over the hills 16 - Ye, mountains of 
Israel, ye shall shoot forth 18 your branches 1 ^ and bear20 
your fruiti9 for 21 my people of Israel. For, behold, I 22 
(am) for 23 you, and 24 I will turn 25 unto you, and 24 the cities 26 
shall be inhabited 2 ^ and the ruins 28 shall be built, and 24 I 
will settle^ you after 36 your former 31 state 3 1- Thou hast 
said in thy heart I will go up 33 into 32 the heaven ; I will 
sit upon the mount of appointment 34 , in* the two sides 35 
(the remotest parts) of the north 36 , yet 3 ? thou shalt be 
brought down 39 to the grave 38 , to the two sides of the pit. 
They went up the ascent 40 to the city and found damsels 41 , 
going out to draw water. 
srwSfr 7nSaftm. nS^ efem. bin 5moi *rw 3 -lion 2S rnppi 

t : - XT V t — I : • T T T T t I : • 

17 sing. Spy 16 H^ 15 Pi. ypp 14 Sj; 13 Pi- :S*7 12 H? ll'tt 10 Tfa 9 part. fit) -J 
27 Ni.^ 26Qny 25rU3 2iConv.l 23 btf 22 (§ 75, 3.) 21 S 20 $&) 19 ^3 18 ?nj 

-T • *T TT V TT ■:'■•■ I - T 

713T 34-Iin'D 33nSv 32 (§ 85, 4) 31 plur. HDlp 303 29 Hi. y^ 28 plain 
t -.- •■ tt t :J- ~T T :t 

. 41 rn^J 40 c. st. (g 83, 4) nS^D 39 Ho. TV 38bl'Ktf 371JX 36 p'fljf 35 Dual. est. 

§ 72. FOURTH DECLENSION. 
1. The nouns of this class generally agree with the mas- 
culine Segholates. The const, st. sing, remains unchanged, 
and before suffixes the original short vowel (— , — , — ) re- 
appears: as rntiVfft, with suff. VT}D#p. In the pi. ab- 
solute the following is peculiar to nouns of this class, that 
the vowel preceding the plural termination (which in the 
masc. Segholates, is Kamets: DO^D) drops: as JThpL^p; 

in the form H a trace of the (o) is preserved in — : . 

as T^Stf* plur. t$T0i r\ift2> plur. ntiflj, const, state 

rruro's but n^^-pi. nbhi> np 1 )^, pi. nipSnft* 



§ 72. Fourth Declension of Fem. Nouns. 145 

Note. There are several nouns of this class in whose plural 
absolute, Kamets and Tsere appear in the penult : rnrQ chapi- 
ter, pi. nnni3; rh^o knife > p l niS^o; nnsin reproof, 
pi. nihDiifi nj/523 ring, P i. niyge 5 nj?^|?P • pi- rni^pP 

carved work, hp^O nurse, pl. flip^'D (as if from Tl!pWti)> 
ITB^TTJO plowshare, plur. niCnnO; HTl&'j; Astarte, plur. 

nhfi&tyj n%3 draught, pi. ni^s. 

2. As ^59 r} in general, the form in fi— — takes before 
suffixes either Patach or Chirek : Patach, if the masc. 
terminates in A (— or — ) ; Chirek, if the masc. termin- 
ates in Tsere or Chirek: m?^' witn suff - WTBBto. 
from the masc. Hy&Di fQ# (infinite) TO£% from the 
masc. X' ; HW*9 nurse, ifip^D, from the masc. p'TD , 

3. Before the suffix 71, Seghol occasionally occurs : as 
SjfMpfcj thy wife, otherwise WK . flD 1 ? (Inf. from *pft) 
has' Seghol with all the suffixes ^.^ 5pdb> 1ft?^* 

4. The form fi- — is inflected in certain words (espe- 
cially when the masculine has }) with Kubbuts : as 
npm (masc. 8rtnj). with suff. ^tf'm; 1 iTPt?5 wages, 
HpTO measure, fip.^TO division. 

5. In many words the two forms Jl — and H — exist, 
either by the use of both in the absolute, or of the form 
Pl— in the absolute only. In both cases the form in fV— 
is most frequently used in the const, state: as mVJf as- 
sembly and rrajN const, ITIJflb iTj?'# and J"H^ HD^TO 
thought and TOtim, HDnSo work, fD^&D kingdom- do- 
minion. 

Exercise 116. 

•hn 3 vnip^ fc>V ^rr'D 2 m^ Sant^S Sbj rrriN 
:Dni^D^? 7 nb^5ni ovd >35 D^prnnDy. : 5 iiin 4 n^o 
♦yg3 rr-n :in^q n n^e> S'p? 10 iKp-S# 9 ^' 8 ^3 

19 



146 Part I. Exercises, 

20 nDn n 1 ? wot mrr ion rts :S*ribr vd-Sn -inn 
nK7. 23 DnS??3 tfprijfl y^na")! d^&h 

to blossom 1 the lily 2 sucker, sprout 3 the olive tree 4 beauty 5 the crown 6 
glory, honor 7 the dog 8 to return 9 the vomit 10 to repeat 11 master, lord 12 fe- 
male servant, handmaid 13 mistress 14 dominion 15 vain 16 profit 17 the charge, 
law 18 a kingdom 19 kindness 20 boyhood 21 to increase 22 fall, ruin 23 - 

Exercise 117. 

Beforetime 1 in Israel, when a man went *(transl. in his 
going) to inquire 2 (of) God, thus he spake, come 3 , let us 
go to the seer 4 - The hope 5 of righteous ones (shall be) 
gladness 6 * hut the expectation 1 ? of wicked ones shall perish. 
And 8 Hezekiahs wrote letters*© to 1 * all Israel, that^ they 
should come to the House of the Lord at Jerusalem. Ands 
the Lord made garments 13 for the skin 14 (of the skin 
§ 82, 4.) to Adam 15 and his wife 16 and clothed them. And 
ye shall keep mine ordinance 1 ^- Ands he took the crownis 
of their king from off 19 his head. Though 20 thou should- 
est bray 21 the fool 22 in the mortar 23 among 24 the grouncl- 
corn25 with the pestle 26 ? (yet) will not his foolishness 28 de- 
part 27 from him 19 - Thy kingdom 2 ^ (is) an everlasting 36 
kingdom, and Thy dominion 31 (endureth) throughout 32 all 33 
generations. And 8 a certain 34 woman cast 35 an upper 3 * 7 
millstone 36 upon Abimelech's 38 head, and shivered 39 his 
skuil 46 - And it shall be, when 41 he sitteth (about (the 
time of) his sitting) upon the throne 42 of his kingdom 43 ? 
that 44 he shall write him a copy 45 of this law in 46 a book. 
8'6. i 7mpn 6 nnnfr snSm'n *tixi 3 imp. P i. irbn 2witn ace.' #*n l&ish 

t I : • x : • v v v I - t —t • x : 

16 w« i5Diij uity isrtfftt 12 with .'inf. S n Sj? lo r>^ ? ,n *p?tt? 
25 man znpns 23tfrgp 22 Via 21 tni.tr\3 2 °dk 19 Syp 19 ^pv. iVrnntfp 



§ 71. Irregular Nouns. 147 

& nWpO SO (of all eternity g 83, 6.) Wtihiy-h'S 29 TO^D 28 nSlK 27 l-ID 26 1^£ 
36 Q31 lit. the rider, hence : the upper) nSsJ 37 3lp 35 Hi. "hu> 34nnX 33 (§ 88, c.) 32 3 
.46"7^_45nj^p 44Conv.1 ttfipSpD 42^03 41 with inf. 3 40 nSjSj 39 |>2p 38 7jSp^N 

§ 73. * IRREGULAR NOUNS. 

A. Derivatives of 71" / * 

1. 3K father, const, st. *5{$ (like a Segholate form from 
n"^)> with light suffixes: *JN;, ?|'3N> with grave suffixes 
03^NS DHOS' P lur - nttN /const! st. niDN*- 

2. flN, brother, const TTN , with suff. :,TTK> but DD^HJSt, 
plural b*nX > const. TTK> with suff.: TIK, VfTN* ^DN* ♦ 

3. nillK sister, const. MlK. witn sllff - : VTinN. (pi. abs. 
and const, does not occur), plur. with suff.: *JTiT?Nj a ^ so 
TniflN* (The ending Hi in the singular fiintf is not the 
plural ending, but contracted from fiTTN* cf. fiiQ » c. st. 
from rftO) ♦ 

4. Dfl stepfather, with suff. Tprj> Wfitl. 

5. nion stepmother, with suff. rjnittn . nniorj. 

6. ?5 son (f° r <"Q3> from HJ3 to build), const, st. JJ, 
before Makkeph "pis seldom p; once *J3 an( l 1^3 Num. 24, 
3, Gen. 49, 11. With suffixes *£), M;* plural D\?5> const, 
st. qg, with suff. ^^ etc. 

7. fQ daughter (for flD> fern. fr° m f?) > const, st. H3 » 
with suff: \PD (for W?) i plur. HID* const, st. rf\}%. 

8. JVJ house (supposed to be derived from POS to build), 
const, st. rV3> with suff. TTJ; plur. DTO> const, st, ^3, 
with suff'. V13. 

9. iTOK maid-servant, const, st. fO* 9 with suff. T)ON; 

piur. nirtag* const, st. ninpx. 

10. >Sd vessel, plur. D^5". 

11. Hip mouth (prop, for HKS^' const, st. ">Q, with suff. 
>£? my mouth, V? and ^$ i plural D^? (from &*$) » W5 
(Prov. 5, 4.) and nVfl (Jud. 3, 16.). 

B. Derivatives from Verbs }"]} ♦ 

' 1. &'\S* man (from tr'^N) . const, st. &*\S* , with suff *#!&'♦ 



148 Part I. Exercises. 

In plur. the original form reappears, D^J'3^ (probably at 
first D^'iJN* Jr. the sing, £*tiK) (seldom oV'N), const - st. 
TO, with suff.: TO, DJMWN . 

2. Hg'K woman (for J10lt), const. *st. rig>N, with suff.: 

C. -Derivatives from V'Jf and *"J7, 

1. Di* day, with suff.: *tSV> dual DW. plur. DW c st. 

w, with local (n-) nmD\ 

•■ : T T • T 

2. "Ytf city, pi. DHJJ (once DH'tfJu. 10, 4.) c. st. nj£. 
D.. A derivative from K"J/ is C>0 head, (for £/>h 

Segholate form) plur. D*8PJO (for D'B>iO (§14, Rising III.) 
const, st. *fcftn, with suff. ^O, once" with suff. WK1 . 

T - T T 

E. D*D water, c. st. *p and 'D'O.w. stiff. W?, ^#0 . 
Exercise J.18. 

d& idid : 2 nWa n#N mrrai rf&K x nSm rim rva 

t - v t : - t ■ t :•■ t — :- I t 

:^?p # n : tn rninrr n£p b*id>-nS :d^? awt 1 ? 4 jn 3 rrf? 
rjij; aSp 6 ^S?5 rnbry 5 pSrr diin ^m? S^e :»3£ 
nijpS$ 7 |H) D'Pifi! »38 sno'io pwbp D'jflp : to j? 
9 nSpt^ -©4 p'S 1 ?! *6i nt#|rbj; nni-^Sp nw-tih :&rb$ 

12 DT5 iN 11 D > ni , i5^ pKn-W itf fj?"^?5 TTI3 ?f^ 

^ ^fp> p^8! t#p*? ^P^-n^i spsarng 135 :o^n Sy_ 
^ iftf^t niir ^k :rjS jro ^ijS» nifij n?>i« nongn 

:o^m b# mx fig ipa 14 K|p 

the inheritance 1 prudent 2 wreath 3 grace (§ 89, 2-) 4 divide, have part» 
bird-cage 6 judge, defender 7 apparel 8 garment 9 chance to be 10 the young of 
birds, a brood 11 egg 12 to crouch 13 jealous 14 - (§ 83, 9.)* 

Exercise 119. 
Who can 2 find a virtuous i woman "(a. w. of virtue 1 ) ? 
her price 5 (is) fai'S above4 rubies. The heart of her hus- 



§ 74. The Numerals, 



149 



band does trusts in her. Her children arise up? and call 
her blessed 8 - Many daughters have clone virtuously 1 ) but 9 
thou 10 excellest 11 them all 12 - And 13 Isaacs abode 14 in 1 ^ 
Gerar 1 ?- And 13 the men of the place asked (him) of 18 
his wife ; and he said, She is 19 my sister: for he feared 
to say, She is my wife ; lest (said he), the men of the 
place should slay 20 me for 21 Kebekah2 2 - These (are) the 
words of the letter 23 * that Jeremiah 24 ? the prophet, sent 
from Jerusalem to the children of Israel, whom Nebuchad- 
nezzar 26 had carried into exile 25 to Babylon : Thus saith 
the Lord: Build ye houses and abide (in them); and plant 2 ? 
gardens 28 ? and eat the fruit of them; Take 29 ye wives, and 
beget 30 sons and daughters ; and take wives for your sons 
and give your daughters to husbands 31 , that they may 
bear 32 sons and daughters. And seek 33 the peace of the 
cities, whither 34 I have caused you to be carried into exile 35 - 

7pret. D^p 6pret. with 2, r\lD2 5*\DV 4(§ 91) 3 3 pin") 2fut. [§ 101 III, a)] 1 V)"l 



11 pret. with following ^jp, nS^ 10 (g 93 Note.) 91 8 to call blessed : I^X Pi., with Conv. ) 
19 (§77, 3) 18 S 17-l-U 16 3 15 pm 1 lOtfi 13 Conv. 1 12(with suff. ftj) f «Si etc.) S*3 

T : It:' - t t . ' 

25 to carry into exile nSj Hi. 24JTDT 23 -|£)D 22npm 21 ^p 20 fut. (g 108, 2) J^PI 
tt t : ; • v " It : • - — r 

31 S^N 30 Hi. *Vr 29 npS 28 com. (doubles the last cons.) n 27yBJ 26 ""^NJ-OOJ 

_ T I ~T I - - T -._.._. 

.35 to cause to be c. j. e. nSj Hi. 34 713'^ — lt#X 33j£/-n 32 lV 



§ 74. THE NUMERALS. 

1. The numerals are either cardinal or ordinal. The 
cardinals must be considered as nouns, having two gen- 
ders and the const, state. 



2. 


CABDINALS. 






Feminine. Masculine. 




Const. 


Absol. Const. 


Absol. 




nm 


nrot im 


"^n^ 


l- K 


*$& 


&r\p ^ 


Witt* 


2. 2 


vhtf 


t v : 


Twhvt 

t : 


3- 1 


R318 


yy\$ nysy*. 


ny?"iN 


4. 1 



150 



Part I. Exercises. 



Feminine. 


Masculine. 






Const. Absol. 


Const. Absol. 






won vzn 

.. _. .. T 


n^'pp n^'prr 


5. 


n 


WW wg 


V " T • 


6. 


i 


yyy yiv 


r$3# nintf 


7. 


? 


iip& nfiv 


: t : 


8. 


n 


y&n v&n 


nj^'n nj/tfn 


9. 


D 


^py. y?y. 


'." v -: i t ■—. 


10. 


* 


rxi&v. nm ) 


ivy nm ) 

T "t ~ ~ f 


il- 


K> 


ni&y *>npy ^ 


ivy y *n^ $ 






nr)\py v wnp ) 


-iky d v ^' > 


ls. 


!T 


rrwpi?. >r&. ^ 








n*s&y uhp 


T *T T 


13. 


r 


n-\wy VT$ 


nfc>j/ rrjjrjK 


14. 


t 


n^p^vnn 


T *T t • -: 


15. 


10 


n^py wy 


i&y ntr^ 


16. 


V 


n^y yy& 


ntrj; rrjja^ . 


17.- 


r 


n'wy npv 


T .T T 


18. 


it 


rrwFtf ywn 


i^ t njnstti 


19. 


£D» 



»nrn#j Dn^, ,d^. nrat 21. *o ,dh^ 20. ^ 

.D^Ot^so. £ ,0^3^70. y £W 60 - D 'D^'pn 50. JJ 

c st. ,J-JXD 10 °- p : Hundreds and Thousands , D*#£tfl 90 - V 

t?V 300. £> ,[(§ 13, 6. B. 3.) D?fttt0 for] DVlNft 20 °- n ;nND 

etc. niKD tr'pp 500. pn ,niNp id-jn 400. ri jtikp 
>d>$Sk ftt?>W 3000. 1 ,d?§Sn 200 °- 5 ^Sk 1000. x <* $ 
(myriads nttDi piir.) tin ,nnnn 10000. ,d*dSn nyntf 4000. "1 
,(E Z . 45, 1) ^ j-H&rj; and D$^rnfr# s >d*£)Sn rr$>2 >*» 



§ 74. The Numerals. J51 

,(Neh. 7, 72. tfilFl >£# Ps. 68, 18. DTniTl) ^8 OnJTJ?. 20000. 

.D^SnJ]Sn 1000000. ^KilND 100000. etc. ^ND^tf 30000. 

Note 1. From 13 to 19 incl. the units with the masculine, 
stand in the absolute state ; with the feminine in the const, st. 

Note II. The numerals are denoted by letters. The Units : 
from K to 10 ; the Tens : from * to "** 5 the Hundreds: from p to fi 
and the final letters If , ^ , J ', D > T] : t| = 500, Q = 600, | = 700, 
ft = 800, Y = 900; but more usually pH= 500; 1]!= 000 etc. 
The connection of a decimal and a unit is seen in the table above. 
For 15 is employed V'LD and not H"* » this last being the abbre- 
viation for ni<*T (§ 18. Note). For the thousands and the higher 
numbers the dotted alphabet is used: as X (or ltf) = 1000 ; 
5 = 2000, 3 =3000 etc. 

Note III. The termination (H — ) of the numerals with masc. 
nouns is the adverbial-ending (§ 75, 1. Note). Before fern, nouns 
(H — ) is dropped, lest it be considered as the fern, ending (p| — ) 
(§ 57, 6, I). 



3. 


■ ORDINALS. 




Fem. 


Masc. Fem. 


Masc. 


JW*E> 


new 6th ruicr'ao 

T 


pBfon 1st 


TWP& 


♦yv?ts> 7th ft}& 


$# 2d 


rvftx? 


*mtf 8th rmtrfyttf . 


♦B*W 3d 


nyyn 


♦jreto 9 th -fvpT] 


yyi 4th 


rvnftpji 


n;jj>& 10th W90 


V9D 5th 



From the eleventh, the cardinals with the article are 
used instead of the ordinals, and follow the noun; when 
without the article, they are found hoth before and after it, 
especially in the numbering of years, months and clays: as 
Di* 1$% niD^5 den. 8, 4. and ni^HNl DHfrj? DV3 Hag. 1, 15. 

4. Syntactical rules see § 92. 

Exercise 120. 

"in£ np\ nw Ntfjn ov? 'pxyhi Sj; rf??? 1 ? rriir rvjn*\ 



152 Part I. Exercises. 

*un ib) b? 1 ? fifti! nn^ a^'pi nnx rnin : "ina io#* 
nS^ jrorn »'iD*y p?jtj# tf$t im fifty. 1 rqwt :o?m 
jiBtenn &-im :n|n? 8 Hjria n^ r^g in*6 rpio 

t • -: - t - •* v ■ t : - t I ■• v - t t t t : - : 

m«Q d^ runt?" mirf? 6 ni^n jn nrn trinS ov iw 
9 npp5 8 B>onp 7DD5 ^?Pfi 7 niW^ njntf nS?Kn 
trinS inN3 TDt^n trim wrhx^nhnfyzwinw'^ 

- t v : • • : - v - ) v v: t - \ T ~ 4 T ' t : 

14 t|{j :^'"lp- 13 ^npp i2 nj/nii u jm 10 pn^' a^? nvr 

^"inS n^n? DSW^rru* 17 DJ?#fl :d:?t^ rnrr *>>£> 
dv n^j; ntfpra :D?ra?>* 18? in^'n 3n#ng. r#o rnjn 
t]Di» : riin»S dw nj£«tf l9 ntopn jn r? ; t«n T?^'n trinS 
,rryp >n brnrjj* sriirij ^S bnpj;? rw r s rug^i S irn 
jnp prrfci D"p n#b rp ^pv ,r H Dp ipjg. >£"p pro*. 
PoSipn M n*na?) uiapo 1 ? rw" rrap« rwfr ;m# 
: 2 nbnn nnnry nswro newi nnw Tbyn : orroN nSu 

v • • ■*-; t " t : t •• t • • -: v t t t : - - 

how 1 put to flight 2 appointed festival 3 between the two evenings, twilight 4 
the passover 5 unleavened bread 6 week 7 the sickle 8 standing corn 9 strict rest 10 
a memorial 11 a sound of a trumpet 12 a convocation 13 only, but 14 expiation 15 
to make an expiation 16 to afflict, humble 17 to celebrate, to keep 18 booth, tab- 
ernacle 19 creation 20 world 21 a measure for dry goods 22 - 

Exercise 121. 
We (are) all one man's sons. We (are) twelve breth- 
ren, sons of our i'ather, one (is) not*, and the little one is 
this day with 2 our father in the land of Canaan. The 
whole congregation together 3 (was) forty and two thousand 
three hundred and three score,, beside 4 their man-servants 
and their maid-servants, of whom^ (there were) seven thou- 
sand three hundred thirty and seven: and they hacIG two 
hundred forty and five singing-men 7 and singing- women 7 - 
Their horses, seven hundred thirty and six: their mules 8 * 
two hundred forty and five: (Their) camels 9 * four hundred 



§ 75. In General. 153 

thirty and five: six thousand seven hundred and twenty- 
asses. Two women went out. Ifio thou buy 11 a He- 
brew^ servant, six years 1 ^ he shall serve: and in the sev- 
enth he shall go out free 14 * for nothing**- Seven abomina- 
tions (are) in ilie heart of the wicked. When 1 ** I break 17 
the staff 18 of your bread, ten women shall bake 19 your 
bread in one oven20 and 21 ye shall eat, and not be satis- 
fied 22 - Eve 23 was the first woman. And the Lord spake 
to Moses on 24 the first 25 (day) of 26 the second month, in 27 
the second year after 28 they were come 29 out of the land 
of Egypt. 

6 to them (were) 5 of whom n^X ^ID^D 3111X2 2 fitf 1 (§ 75, 3.) with suff. ftf 
.... - . . T .. ... I .. 

llHJp 10\3 9 (doubles the last cons.) ^Dil 8~n3 7part. Pi. masc. and fern. pi. of "N# 

T|T • TT VV 

17 (in my breaking) ~\2$ 16 with inf. 3 15 DJ11 l^'^TI 13 (§ 58, 10.) mttf 12^131? 
-t t • • : T TT ■// 

25*inK 24 3 23n 5 ,n 22 #3!^ 21 Conv. ) 20 "lyjl 19pret. with Conv. ) 18 Ht3D 
.29 XV 28 with inf. and suff. (after their coming out) ^ 273 26(§ 83, 10.) S 



CHAPTER XL 

PARTICLES. 
§ 75. IN GENERAL. 

1. The particles which comprise adverbs, prepositions, 
conjunctions and interjections are divided into inseparable 
and separable. The inseparable are prefixed or postfixed 
syllables, of the most of them we have already treated, as 
D^M § § 18, 19, local H T § 19, 6. 

2. The separable consisting of entire words are partly 
I. primitive: as (a) the negations ^K* \$1 and the poetic 

73 not ; (b) local and temporal terms : as Dt£ tlfa& (with 

local Jl) there, Ji3 here, ^ where? ?N then; (c) expressing 

the manner and mode of actions: as H3 thus, JO a par- 

20 



154 Part I. Exercises. 

tide of entreaty ; partly II derivative : as JY3P within, 
VlfT together, DOD circuit, \X3"\T\ (Inf. Hi.) much, the in- 
terrogative adverbs tl%fr why, J^lID (compounded of the in- 
terrog. HO and JftT (p. pass, perceived, seen) why = what 
hast thou seen? cf. G-en. 20, 10. 

Note. Fern, forms are frequently converted into adverbs, e. g. 
n$Eftn9 sooner, ml'TTlS? later .' ^THD quickly, Tlty now 
(fr. ny time, prop, at the time), J173 wholly, completely, H^DK 
truly. On adverbs in D — > see (§ 56 3, 2. e ) Nouns in the 
accus. are often adverbs, e.g. JlDi^ haughtily, (IDS safely, JlND 
a hundred-fold, a hundred-times Prov. 17, 10. Cf. (§ 85, 4.). 
On Adverbs formed by S (see § 84, 3). 

3. Some of the derivative adverbs, which include the 
signification of the verb or noun from which they are de- 
rived, are connected with suffixes: as Hiin behold ! lo! 
with suffixes: *1}D' ^H and ^H behold I, (properly: be- 
hold me) ?Un> n'|n behold thou, ^<7 behold he, etc. 
T# yet, as yet, still, w.suff.: ♦rTtyi Htf. SpM?> W$V» ^W 
I am, thou art, he, she is as yet or still ; iiJD' "fy? while, 
while yet : HJD while yet I am ; "TtyD since : HtyD since 
I am. 

f^, const, st. pK not; with stiff. *}¥$ I am or was not, 

B* T# there is, there are, with suif.: ZZ» thou art, \}& 
he is, DJti^. ye are. 

W, const, st. >K where, H3^ where art thou? i\V where 
is he? D*N where are they? The force of the substantive 
verb to be is conveyed by all these adverbs. 

4. Prepositions. The greater number of prepositions are 
nouns in the accusative or const, st.: as ^5fK (subst. the 
side) by, near, n (fJ3 separation, interval) between, and 
they can be connected with other prepositions: as ilflil/P from 
under, from beneath, DNft from with, i. e. from, or they 
appear abbreviated as prefixes: thus D"7"D"D ♦ 

5. The prepositions being nouns can take suffixes' (the 



§ 75. In General. 155 

nominal stiff., seldom the verbal suff.): as Dflft under, with 
suff.: *iinri; DN with, is distinguished from HN the accu- 
sative particle, that the former with suffixes is commuted 
into DX, the latter into riX (fiiiO : as ^N with me; TIN me, 

6. Several prepositions were originally plural nouns, ac- 
cordingly they receive only plural suffixes. To these be- 
long: T?N> nm behind, after, nn$ behind me, ^ntlX 
behind thee, IHflN behind him etc. 

y t-: - 

^8 (h$ P° et towards, to: ^N to me, ^$, yh#> GjP*?K . 
7*5 between, with suff. \}*5' W3> Dn * also with pi. masc. 
and plur. fern. suff. JjVpg, DD^WnW?. DfYtya. 
1J^ as far as, unto, (H#. poet.) with suffixes: *"TJf, t"JHJ7* 

^ upon, over oS# poet.) w. sum »^J£ ^J£ vVj^ DH^/ 

nnn under, below, beneath, ♦JFlplfl, ^ATO' Wpp, l^nfin, 

DH^nn (with the sing, only, *JJT?J1 (verb, suff.) Dfjnf)> 

7. Conjunctions. The conjunctions are unchangeable. 
On the conjunction *) and its vocalization, see (§ 12, 7. b.). 

8. Interjections. HH, MilK, HN, *ttN> IfTi »T1K. IN, >N 

. , ° t t -: t -: t 

ah ! * 77N woe • a ^ as • 

Other parts of speech used as interjections: ^ (it is sup- 
posed to be contracted from *J£l entreaty) I pray: always 
with tfttj , \HN my Lord. 

JIDH and iQH (Imp. of 2JT to give) come! come on! go to! 

DPI hist! hush! pi. )Btl (Imp. Piel of HDH to be silent.) 

TV7wfl (fr. 7?H to violate, break a covenant) profane! fie ! 
far be it ! followed by ^ of the person and inf. with JQ : 
as nlfeflffi T\h n>b(l far be it from thee to do. 

N3 I pray ; used: I. with the imp. opt. and fut. II. with 
particles : JO HDN say, I pray thee, ^"il^N 1^ me g°> 
I pray the, &0"*?N nay, or .not so, I pray thee ; SO"*iN woe 
now ! alas ! At the beginning of a sentence : &ON (written 
also H3N) contracted from SOTTN on now! I pray. 



156 Part I. Exercises. 

Exercise 122. 

nS trpy\ rrSyn) rjax 8 to^p r6^'? ritf? 2 »n?^r?nn 
nyoni nvft nrriW? npr-u? ^n 6ta vDtr 5 n^$ 4 pSn 

-m ^0 $DW1 : ^'o v ^ I3S 9 ^1 ^ n ? ni ^ '^l 3 
♦ ^ ^SSn lb *npBht3K :d^hSk ink npS-^ mw o^riS^n 

- : - ■ . •: ~ ij •••.■: I -t ■ v •■ : v: t 

Nbji n-tfw iDipjp-Sj? 12 n^i2nn) y&ri part toy? u Tiy 
^pvj; ^n ^'dkS n?>h ft^op TT^ ^H^? ^3^? 

nSo nana nrm : 16 *W^n 14 ni^S n»rr era nWi 
16 pTI^ ^"^H ^pns-n?? fy-hgi ^nvh ninrS^ pit?® 
^99 17 :rto d^ ynpn ^ ntttto tt? Sxn ^R- N?in '3 
nigj S$h :nj 19 Tn;p 18 £]p;> ^V" n ^ T^3 n1t0 D ^ 
:n^ tqk nSro-na wid ffirro ^ rhhn nana ^ 

| t - -: - -: - v • • • t : •• • t • t t : - 

to turn one's self 1 to walk, live 2 angel 3 to remain over night 4 wages 5 hire- 
ling, hired laborer 6 supplication, prayer 7 to, unto 8 to roll 9 to act wickedly, 
to be guilty 10 yet* 1 diligently consider 12 (§ 97, 2.) 13 p. n. m. 14 the Jezreelite 15 
herbs 16 " (§ 91, l.) 17 money 18 the price 19 - 

Exercise 123. 

Inquire 1 (after) good, and not 2 evil, that 3 ye may 4 live: 
and& so 6 the Lord, the God of Hosts, shall be with 7 you, 
as 8 ye have said. How 9 do ye say 10 ; we (are) wise, and 
the law of the Lord (is) with 7 us ? Lo, certainly 11 in 12 
vain 13 made he (it), the pen 14 of the Scribes 1 ^ (is) in 
vain. Deborah 16 abode under 17 the palm-tree 18 of De- 
borah, between 19 Kamah 20 and between Beth-el 20 in mount 
Ephraim 21 ; and 22 the children of Israel came up to her 
for 12 judgment. Hezekiah trusted in the Lord God of 
Israel; so that 2 * after 24 him was none25 iike26 him among'-* 7 



§ 75. The Subject. 15T 

all the kings of Juclah. To the hired servant, at his day 
thou shalt give his hire 28 ) neither shall the sun go down29 
upon 30 it; for he is poor 31 * and setteth his heart upon it, 
(and to it he beareth.32 his soul) lest 33 he call 34 against 
thee unto the Lord, and it he 35 sin unto 36 thee. 

8*11^X3 7 f)X 6|3 5 to connect with the verb 4fut. Bl^-Q 1 } 2 i 7K 1 with ace. J£h*1 
15 nab 14 B£ 13 np*^ 12 with the art. (§ 84, 3.) ^ 11 ptf lOfut. 1DK 9T\D'X 

22Conv. i aonfl« 20 Sx-rra 20 (§ so, 3.) non i9p3 isnpn nnnn lernm 

281312/ 27 3 26 before light surT. 1D3, 1D3 25 X'S 24 plur. const. npX , ")HX 231 
.36 3 35 pret. with Conv. ) 34fut. 33 ^Sl 32 part. Nfrj 31 ""J V 30 h> tf 29X13 

TT ■ T 



PART II. 

SYNTAX. 

CHAPTER I. 

THE ESSENTIAL PAKTS OF A SENTENCE. 

§ 76. THE SUBJECT 

1. The subject of a proposition appears either in the 
form of a substantive or in that of an adjective, const, in- 
finitive or pronoun, supplying the place of the substantive. 

2. When the sentence is without a definite subject, the 
impersonal construction is employed. The subject is then 
indicated : 

a. By the third person of the passive conjugations (Ni. Pu. 
Ho.), e. g. TW$ frnfj! TWh it is called to this woman = 
she is called woman. Gen. 2. 23. 

b. By the third person of the sing, active, e. g. ifit# ^TfJ 
he (some one) called his name. Gen. 11, 9. 

c. By the third person of the plural active : as jfftJ!! an( ^ 
they told, i.e. certain men told* 1. Sam. 19, 21. 

d. By the second person of the future: as tl&W tfiDJVJO 



158 Part II. Syntax. 

there shall no one go thither. Isa. 7, 25, or by the in- 
fin. with the sutT. of the second person ; with regard to 
the latter a phrase of frequent occurrence is: HK3 1]?_ 
till thy coming = till one comes. 

3. The third pers. sing, often has for a subject it under- 
stood: as VT1 and it happened ; '*? DH it was warm to me. 

4. The impersonal construction expressed by the 3. pers. 
passive, is often found with a following accusative: as 
nt^OTlN Dt^Vl it was brought back Moses (ace.) == some 
one brought back Moses. 

Note. A noun often is made prominent as subject at the be- 
ginning of a sentence or clause by riK> T\$> or fiX is used for the 
purpose of emphasizing the subject in a passive or intransitive 
connection, e. g! Gen. 4, 18. Ex. 10, 8, 21, 28. Nu. 32, 5. 

5. When the active subject can be conjectured from the 
action itself, the participle of the same verb is used as sub- 
ject: as Tp/in Tp"}? N^ the treacler (some one) shall not 
tread. 

§ 77. THE COPULA. 

1. The copula is generally not expressed, the relation of 
the subject and predicate being shown by placing them to- 
gether : as fc^Nn b)1} the man is great ; Hi IT 2ift God is 
good. 

2. The verb iTH to be, is used to exactly define the time: 
as Dnjf ITn #hlfi the serpent was crafty; ^JNOl n?JT pi]$ 
Aaron shall be thy prophet, or to convey the proper con- 
ception of the verb : the existence or non-existence of the 
subject, which may be still more forcibly rendered by £^ 
or pX (§ 75, 3.) : as JVDK ?]3 {TiT? N^ no needy shall be 
among you, Deut. 15, "4. |?*rD$ USTjip Tip* fi^JQ Is the 
Lord among us or not, Ex. 17, 7. 

3. The third person of the pers. pron. frOil » NTT> DH > 
ilfti> jn^n|n,idropping the pronominal idea entirely and 
expressing only the verb to be, is employed to avoid 
ambiguity " and to distinctly point out the noun or 
adjective standing in the predicate : as Tfifoil Wfl 11*1 Da- 



§ 78. The Predicate and its Agreement &c. 159 

vid is the king, whereas 7p2pn 1H could he taken as : 
the king David ; or it is used, when the preceding 
subject is more remote from the predicate than usual : as 
Vrhni Ntfl b$yP. *rt l ? i N fTjiT ITOfc the fire-offerings (col- 
lectively) of the Lord, the God of Israel, are their inherit- 
ance, Jos. 13, 14. Even when the subject is of the first or 
second person, Kill can be used as the copula: as HDK 
D*rf?N tflH Thou art God; flftH DflN ye are. Zeph. 2, 12. 

4. This use of the 3. pers. pron. as copula, particularly 
comes forth in union with the demonstr. pronoun, e. g. 
DH nS\* these are, Gen. 25, 16. ft^K rutt H£ what are 
these? Gen. 21, 29. fit *ttn ^ who is "this? Esth. 7. 5. 

§ 78. THE PREDICATE AND ITS AGREEMENT WITH 
THE SUBJECT. 

1. The predicate appears either in the form of a verb, sub- 
stantive, adjective, adj. pron., or even in that of a derivative 
adverb: as piyirj much, &J#p little, 1KD rEPMl ^"D^ 
thy reward (shall be) very great, Gen. 15, 1. PD D'£Otf 
DJ^5 ^ ne men within it (were) few. Eccl. 9, 14. 

2. When the predicate is an adjective, adj. pronoun, 
participle or noun, it has no article (excepting the adject- 
ive in superlative [§ 91, 3.]), and by this it is distinguished 
from the subject, in case the latter is defined by the arti- 
cle or otherwise : iT£]}jl PQiD bib the counsel is not good, 
2. Sam. 17, 7 ^pK TiirO for thy father is a hero, ibi. 10. 

3. The predicate generally agrees with the subject, when 
a verb, in gender, number and person : njflJlD ^ipj tl^bl 
my soul melteth for sadness, Ps. 119, 28., when an ad- 
jective, participle or adj. pronoun, in gender and number: 
HiiT nrn 1&l the word of the Lord is upright, Ps. 33, 4. 
rU^T'in n^NJl UK? this (is) the woman, and this (is) her 
son, II. Kings 8, 5. Nevertheless the Hebrew allows more 
freedom in this respect than other languages, using a 
construction correspondent to the sense more than to the 
external form. 



160 Part. II. Syntax. 

4. Exceptions. 

a. When the predicate commences the sentence, the third 
person masc. sing, is occasionally used impersonally : as 
D^5 UWftVt Sb *rn and he had thirty sons. 

b. Nouns of multitude frequently take a plural verb : as 
DJ^n Wy\ and the people saw, and vice versa substan- 
tives used in the plural form (§ 82, 4.) are often joined 
with a verb singular: as D^ii^N £02 Grod created. 

° • v: tt 

c. The predicate does not agree with the subject, but with 
the genitive belonging to it, in case the genitive is the 
more important word: as D*pl?y TpfTN *5*1 vip the voice 
of thy brothers blood cries (Gen. 4, 10.), the predicate 
is governed by *D*1 the drops of blood. tfi^J DHpH fTTH 
nj^Nn'D^ and the east wind brought the locusts, 
Ex.' 10, 13. (TH feminine, but ftfeft refers to DHfJ. In 
the same manner with nh I PlDpijJ ^H1' DW' ^ tn e 
multitude of years teach wisdom, Job 32, 7. and nearly 
always with bb » D*JK W^!D ViTJ and all the days of 
Adam were. 

c?. A verb singular joined with the subject in plural and 
vice versa, often has a distributive signification : as 
3l"ffi0 rnb' Hi^n? the beasts (i. e. each of the beasts) 
of the" field "shall cry, Joel 1, 20. yen JpTJW J|DJ the 
wicked (every wicked man) flee, although no one pur- 
sueth. Prov. 25, 1. 

5. When the predicate belongs to several nouns or pro- 
nouns, the following rules must be observed: a) It gen- 
erally takes the plural: as DWDll JlbV' *¥& WJ and 
my son Solomon are sinners, I. Kings I, 21. b) When they 
are of different genders, the masculine is preferred to the 
feminine : as D^3N VrVKG 1 ! VJ3 his sons and his daughters 
(were) eating, Job 1, 13. c) When they are of different 
persons, the predicate follows the most important, i. e. the 
first person rather than the second, and the second in pref- 
erence to the third j tlfttt) *JN SV72 fiJVDJ let us make a 



§ 79. Verbal Arrangement. 161 

covenant, I and thou, Gen. 31, 44.: as rp7J ^JlH f jfi$ 
liD"*iy I and the lad will go yonder, Gen. 22, 5. d) Some- 
times, especially when the predicate precedes the subject, 
it agrees only with one of the nouns, most frequently with 
the nearest, being understood for the others : as (73 JO*1 
ifit£W Vyy\ and Noah came in, and his sons and his wife 
(came in); pHNI DHQ ^31^1 and Miriam spoke and Aaron 
(spoke) . 

§ 79. VERBAL ARRANGEMENT. 

1. As a leading principle, the word upon which the 
most stress is to be laid, always begins the sentence: as 
D'ii^K JOS n*t#n| In the beginning God created, TWiVX^ 
as the most important word taking the lead; hence every 
word to be emphatic, precedes the rest. 

2. In a simple and independent normal sentence, the 
words are in the natural succession of Subject, Predicate 
and Object: as P* D*flfcfl D^??N STJ3 thy sons were eating 
and drinking wine, Job 1, 18. 

3. The predicate precedes the subject: 

a. When it is an adjective: as *yij£ # 7i"lil my iniquity is 
great; Gen. 4, 13. f^m DJ? HMnnDltD wisdom is 

<-> j j T _._r-. T . TT 

good with an inheritance, Eccl. 7, 11. 

b. When it is a verb connected with Conversive Vav ; with- 
out this connection with *) the succession is regular: as 
pr?V? liy\ and Isaac came, but JO pHV!^ an( i I- came, 
C\Xn TH and the man was, but PPi! fc^NiT) ♦ 

c. When IL^'N. an adverb of negation K7 etc., an inter- 
rogative pronoun or prefix, and particles like ^, tytf 
stand before the predicate : as N"D nt^'N IJlDN^D ^5 

.r . x tt v -: : - : t 

D^H7K all his work which God had created, Gen, 2, 3. 
p*V"73" "into K7 there was not left any green thing ; 
pik T?K ^OfcTj am I my brother's keeper? toN bbt2# >3 
for 1 languish ) n^'OPT D*pH¥D D^PB J^PD- '^Nt 
peradventure there shall lack five of the fifty righteous. 

d. When a verb stands in jussive or the construction is 

21 



162 Part II. Syntax. 

impersonal: as D©fJ ^P? the waters shall be drawn to- 
gether, rn&p *ii\ let there be luminaries. 

4. When the subject follows the predicate, the object 
takes its place after the subject: as D^H^K &03 JW&013 

5. The object connected with an interrogative pronoun 
or prefix, stands before the verb: as TJHp^ *£? ^iCfiK 
^nf5*7 *P ^fiOfVJ whose ox have I taken? or whose ass have 
I taken? 1. Sam" 12, 3. 

6. Of two accusatives, the one of a person, the other of 
a thing, the former precedes; and the same rule obtains 
when besides the accusative of a thing the person stands 
in indirect relation to the verb : as DWPJ1N TfWl HDK *3 

W 1 T v • : - t - - ■ 

r^HTl^ T\\7\ for unto this people shalt thou divide for 
an inheritance the land Jos. 1, 6. HinrrnN ^ HtW Wil 

[ ' ,T .T T V T T F T 

TSWT\ TvTT\^T\ he has done us this great evil, I. Sam, 6, 9. 

DTiSitf TprMfc# WVW tnat i ma y do tne merc y of God 

unto him, 2. Sam, 9, 3. 

Note. Many exceptions are to he found to the foregoing rules, 
but as by giving them, we would only confuse the mind of the 
student, they are omitted. 



CHAPTER IL 

SYNTAX OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH.* 

- § 80 THE ARTICLE. 

1. The article is omitted, when the noun is defined by 
a suffix, or a following genitive, or if it is a proper name: 
as Tfell J"V5 the house of the king; T)>3 my house; OPTON 
Abraham. 

# The dependence of the several parts of compound sentences cannot 
be understood, until the student has become acquainted with the syntax of 
the parts of speech and the influence which they mutually exert in a 
proposition. 



§ 80. The Article. 163 

2. The adjective or the demonstrative pronoun attribu- 
tively employed requires the article, when they belong to a 
determined substantive : as *7n jin VT3 m J large house ; 
7Hjn TI^D j"V3 the large house of the king. 

3. Proper names originally appellative, take the article: 
as p^D?^ tne Lebanon (the white mountain), Jl/p^H Kamah 
(the Hight, the high city). 

4. The article has occasionally demonstrative power: as 
Di*rT this day ; DJ£5D ^ s ^ me '•> HT^* H this year. 

5. The vocative case often takes the article: as Tp£Di7 
king ! 

Note. Except when the article could not have been joined to 
the nominative : not IIIH^ David ! 

6. The indefinite article is indicated by the omission of 
the H : as JT.3 a bouse, JJJ*N a man ; though sometimes ex- 
pressed by the numeral "111^ : as 1HK K'DJ a prophet, or 
VX in the sense of person indefinitely used, standing before 
nouns or adjectives, particularly before gentile names: 
pHJ t?>tf a just (man), Til} t^K a hero, HUT Wit a Jew, 
•"Gft WX a Hebrew. 

'f. ^?n H§K. D'raiDH lb* "Oft nH1i/^P may mean 
f7ie baker, or a baker of the king; the servant, or a servant 
of the officer of the executioners; the song, or a song of 
David ; to avoid t ambiguity a circumlocution CltfW > 7) is 
used : as ^ ^h^ <"f£)N I am a baker of the king ; n£)Kn 
^t?f^7 Ht^the baker' of the king ; TH 1 ? 110?? a song of 
David; b^TOiSn *\&h "731?. a servant of the officer of the 
executioners. 

8. The article must be repeated before several nouns follow- 
ing one another, even when of the same gender or number: as 

nprnn -vrn DTiabm rim<i) x>yy »n im riVn-in niDsn 

( tt-:- t- : • : - : t : | v '■■ t v -: : - - - 

♦ n^tO^il IHfni the great trials which thine eyes saw, and 
the signs, and the wonders, and the strong hand, and the 
stretched-out arm. 

9. On the article used as a relative pronoun, see (§96, 8,). 



164 Part II. Syntax. 

THE NOUN. 
§ 81, GENDER. 

1. For the neuter the masculine is sometimes used : as 
DH^rrSl? naiyrrS? tip*, nt this (hoc) they shall give 
every one that passeth among them that are mustered, 
the feminine, however, most frequently : as D^D I?DC# *p 
who has heard such a thing ? C^DI res, negotium, a thing, 
must be considered here as omitted, and the part of speech 
agreeing with it, is employed most commonly in the fem- 
inine, as in German : biefe$, for btefe ©ad)e, and in Latin: 
factum, for res facta). Hence a verb being the predicate 
of an antecedent sentence either ' expressed or understood, 
takes the feminine form : as 7N*")^!3 pb *i7fl} and it was 
a custom in Israel, Jud. 11, 39. (pfl masc.) for *JT1 

pn ntn wn; nsit ny$ rnrr n*p from God was this, 
for nrn n^n rvrr; » mo ♦nfW nnx one (thing) have 

V - T t- TT t: : - t - - \ . <_ • 

I desired of the Lord, for TTTNB' 1ft>* "tH ♦ Comp. 

nar jwy o i. Mos. 3, i4. and rttri Taw-nit h^j? ^ 

1. Mos. 20, 10. | 

Adjectives with the feminine ending either in singular or 
plural, are often considered as abstract nouns, conveying a 
neuter sense: tlflbH righteousness; rfotfil DiK^hl "t)r?13h 

t : ' v •• t t - : : - 

the great and fearful things (magna et timenda). 

2. When the abstract stands for the concrete, the signi- 
fication often determines the gender : as }&*V ♦ ♦ . rfl/JH and 
the exile == the exiles shall possess. Obad. 1, 20. 

§ 82. NUMBER. 

1. The singular is often used in a collective sense: as 
ID? cattle; JNtf small cattle, flock; £jp3 silver; HDH wheat. 

2. When these collectives occur in plural, their meaning 
is modified : as D^fT grains of wheat, D*$DD money pieces. 



§ 82. Number, -265 

3. The singular of patronymics with the article, very 
often has a plural signification : as ^D^H the Jebusites. 

4. The plural in some instances is employed to express 
dignity or majesty, hence it is called : Plural of Majesty. 

To this belong: 

a. D^fl^N God, when meaning the true God most frequent- 
ly takes a singular verb: as D^il^N K~^ fWJOS In 
the beginning God created. Sometimes the verb stands 
in plural : D^N *fTiK 1JWT "KJttO when God caused 
me to wander, Gen. 20, 13. At a later period, how- 
ever, the construction with the plural was avoided as 
polytheistic. 

b. *j1K (antiquated form of plural), the regular 'form is 
D\ilK> const, st. ^TTtts from the sing. filN master, lord. 
In addressing the Supreme Deity the form *}fN is em- 
ployed ; in accosting a person of rank \5"TK (with Patach) 
Gentlemen ! instead of * JIN? Sir ! 

c. *[& the Almighty, ancient plural of "W (Arab. Tit? 
strong, vehement). 

d. DH^Dp the Holiest, plur. of tTHp holy. 

e. ^3 Lord, master, superior, when connected with sum 
the plural commonly occurs: as V^3> tV^?V% hi s > ner 
master, but ^J/3 m 7 husband. 

With the plural of majesty the verbs stand in the 
singular, the adjectives and appositions either in the 
singular or plural. 

5. Words with a plural form and singular signification 
occasionally occur: as filDM = DM or HOW vengeance. 
The poets frequently take advantage of this license, to add 
power to their language, or to give a period a more musical 
termination, § 58, 9. 

6. The plural of a compound expression conveying one 
idea (a noun in the const, state followed by a genitive) is 
formed by giving the first noun the plural termination : 
as *?N*W* \3D Israelites, the children of Israel. 



I- 66 Part II. Syntax. 

THE CASES. 
§ 83. CONSTRUCT STATE AND THE GENITIVE. 

1. The genitive having no proper form is only recog- 
nised by the preceding construct state: as f]pi> '23 Joseph's 
sons. 

2. Nouns in the const, state cannot be connected by ); 
the cattle and horses of the king cannot be translated 

rj^n o)D) ip>but ionon r^n npj; not rpn n£x) nptro 
onyp, but nbfcrn on?p ^o nptfo Gen. 40/ 1. : r 

DHVP 7J7P7 I^K hSKHI hpl^'Srr. ib. 5. Nouns in the 
genitive may be connected: as pKJ.DDlf' HJp possessor 
of heaven and earth, or more usually the word in the con- 
struct state is repeated : as pKH >tibx\ D W"H 'fi^J* ♦ 

3 . Several words in construction may follow each other : 
as pNiTDtf. W*F) ^h the heart of the chiefs of the people 
of a land, OPTON ?*frt# ♦&♦ nWo and these (are) the 
days of the years of the life of Abraham. The predicate must 
agree with the first as the principal noun; in case the first is 
of less importance, the predicate is governed by the follow- 
ing noun: as in connection with 73 all, 2h multitude, 7f"7D£? 
choice, best, especially with ^D and following participle: as 
wSp T|!p_Dj;. "TfJO thy choicest valleys are full, prop, the 
choice of thy valleys is full. 

4. The genitive is sometimes to be understood objectively: 
as fiirr my the fear of the Lord; DH$? ^P\ tne w ^y to 
Egypt; Di*n il^DD the ruler of the day == which rules the 
day; DID fipl?.t the cry of Sodom == against Sodom. 

5. The const, st. is often used when nouns are in appo- 
sition, especially when the genus is to be defined by the 
species: rT\$ *")(!} the river Euphrates: fii^n fTHp the city 
Chutzoth; PniiT h? H^rO the virgin, the daughter Judah. 

6. The Hebrew being deficient in adjectives a) the ma- 
terial is expressed by a substantive in genitive: as FjpD fnjjp 



§ 83. Construct State and tub Genitive. 167 

♦ » 

a dish of silver, i. e. a silver dish; ^PD b% vessels of iron, 
i. e. iron vessels; b) other adjective conceptions: as^^Hp^n 
the mountain of thy holiness, for thy holy mountain ; 
np.t? Ttob* lips of a lie, for lying lips; ■xjjj? £>\V a man of 
understanding, for a prudent man. 

7. Participles or adjectives to be more nearly limited or 
defined by a following substantive stand in the const, st.: 
as n¥J?n ^i"7J? great in counsel: "ltffi flfi* masc, *")NT) T&. 
fern, beautiful of form; p"l¥ '£3*1*1 the pursuers of right- 
eousness; 2b ^yOtff the broken of heart = the broken-heart- 
ed^. Infinitives being considered as substantives and even 
adverbs with a subtantive meaning can stand in the const, 
st.: D*flN rDt?> the dwelling of brethren; *]p3 COJ^D a little 
silver, literally : the smallness or fewness of silver. 

8. The word in the genitive may be any word capable 
of defining the preceding const, st.: a pronoun, interro- 
gative or demonstrative: *p J13 whose daughter? H^tf tltyi? 
who does these (prop, doing of these); an adjective: DitDJl f 1 * 
(Song of Sol. 7, 10.) good wine ; a numeral: 1HN lDB&'D 
one judgment, iT#'3'"lO rOt^'3 * n tne rourtn year ; a noun 
preceded by a preposition: *i'VM flnptj'? as j°7 of in har- 
vest = as joy of (a man) in h. ; JD^JQ HO mountains of 
the Gilboa; a whole sentence: TtyT kS n§£> (cf. 9.). 

9. The noun following the const, st. is sometimes omit- 
ted and must be supplied. Often the relative ,g? follows: 
'flip* ^ ^ty a l an guage (°f a man) which I know not, 

Ps. : si, 6. nS^'n-T? Krrw Ex. 4, 13. rf?&^*#neft* 

Ps. 137 8. cfr. § 96; 45 T . 

10. No third word can be interposed between the const, 
st. and its genitive : hence the adjective or demonstrative 
qualifying the const. 5 st. must follow the genitive: the 
good hand of God ("Dlt^H D^il^K T; this book of the law, 
rrtn ITTifln ngp ; the little children of the king t]Sp V© 
D^DpH ♦ Occasionally intervene: a) prepositions (8) : 

b) the local H : as TDM H/n^H into the tent of Sarah; 

' T T T V T ' 

JJttD ny*"!N into the land of Canaan. 



168 Part II. Syntax. 

c) Tip yet, still, after Sb t ^ T^J liJ^Ss all the while 

my breath is in me. 

11. The genitive is also indicated by 7 *ltj^ (which be- 
long to): as ^0 p#N D'JpH the herdsmen of Saul, or 
by 7* alone : as TTJ 7 ""Vi^tE a psalm of David ; the latter 
especially occurring (a) in enumerations: as DHbty*} njDtJO 
CHH^ DV on the twenty-seventh day of the-month, (b) when 
many genitives follow one another : as *2ht2h D*P*ll HD*! 
^N*"}^! the books of the Chronicles (literally : the words 
of the days) of the kings of Israel, (c£ § 80, 7*); (c) when 
the governing noun is separated from the governed by 
•words inserted: D^fi^Ny Jl^HJl *VJ? a great city of God, 
Jon. 1, 3. Tj^pS DW'n^in the second year of the 
king, (d) to avoid ambiguity, cf. § 80, 7. 

§ 84. DATIVE. 

1. The common sign for the dative is 7K or ;, its abbre- 
viation. The verb JTH to be, when followed by b has the 
meaning of to become: as 1(1K ^t^D^ Vtl) and they be- 

t v t t : t : " 

come one flesh. 

2. 7 with a suffix of the same person as that of the verb 
is often used pleonastically after verbs of motion, rest, 
going, coming, sending etc. especially with imp. and fu- 
ture: as tf?"rfi go; >yrjVK I will go ; ii£) Davos? abide 
ye here. It is a dativus commodi, indicating that the action 
is done for the benefit of the subject performing it. 

3. By 7 are formed adverbs, which express a becoming 
of what the noun says, e. g. ]]]£} (Ez. 12, 12.) to the eye, 
i. e. plainly; PlpJ? (Job 11, 18.) to safety, i. e. safe; y~h 
(2. Chr. 20, 25.) to a multitude, i. e. much. 



4 



§ 85. ACCUSATIVE. 

1. The accusative is employed for the nearer object (with 
or without fiK § 19, 4.) after transitive verbs. 

2. The accusative stands to indicate the remoter object: 
a) After verbs denoting abundance or want : ttlft to be 



§ 85. Accusative. 169 

full, to fill; JDt£* to be satiated; V^0 to swarm with; 
WD^l to creep; ^jtOJ and F|JH to drop, distill. Kindred 
conceptions are: T1S5 to bless; Tpil in tlie sense of over- 
flow: n^n mr^n myn^n the hiris siiaiinow withmiik; 

^pH to want; /1J1 to cease, leave off (with 7p, rarely 
with an ace); 7b C to lose (children). 

J) After verbs which signify to cover, in which are em- 
braced all those denoting : to clothe or unclothe, to 
gird, to crown, to plant, to sow: J1D3 to cover; V/^J 
and t^3 / to put on a garment, WZhil Hi. with two 
accus.; rpj? to cover, to clothe; £D&'£D to strip or put off 
a garment; Hltf to put on, sc. an ornament; 7J/0 to tie 
or latch the sandals for any one; H^H to gird; *)£?# to 
crown; J?Q3 to plant; JHf to sow. 

c) After the verbs of teaching, commanding, questioning 
and answering : ID 1 !? to learn ; ID 7 to teach ; TiltH to 
enlighten, to teach, to warn; H^V to command; ^NC to 
. ask, question ; H3J? to answer. 

(f) After the verbs to do good or evil to any one, to reward 
or to punish : 7Q| to retribute, to recompense ; tfoz* to 
requite, recompense; f^H to be gracious, merciful, com- 
passionate to any one ; $$)} to punish. 

3. The accusative stands in apposition with the nearer 
object after the verbs which signify to make, to form, to 
build : as TOtD ffiJJNPrjTg HftM and with the stones he 
built an altar; TPBTin T'h'h OV he makes the day dark with 
night. The verbs D^ to set, constitute, JfO to give, con- 
stitute, make, Jlt^J^ to make, are more usually constructed 
with ^), to express the making or converting of an object in- 
to any special thing. 

4. The accusative is also used adverbially and then an- 
swers : a) the questions of place: Whither? after the verbs 
of motion : as nj£ljin t£W") *b)J they went up to the top of 
the hill ; HT^H DJ/H &WJ tlieT people went out into the 
field. WhereYhmT}-r\r\£ IWV NlfT) and he sat in the 
entrance of the tent, b) the questions of time: Hoiolong? 

22 



170 Part. II. Syntax. 

H?]/ tiytf nij&g DW' twelve years they served. When? 
?| 7 riHinS mpN nS^TIiVn at midnight I will rise to give 
thanks unto Thee; DJAJfTI SijJ Ex. 16, 6. c) the questions 
of mood: How? DJJflJ* Bhj! 85^ H^D Ex. 11, 1. he shall 
thrust you out entirely (J"V?3 completion). DD'fi&'Sy ^3QP 
Ex. 16, 16. according to the number of your persons. 

Note I. The above questions are more frequently answered by pre- 
' positions: as D^HJO Stt£fa1 and we abode in tents. 03 ?>V !TW3 

• t t: t ••- •■•„•'] -t v'vt 

Ps. 30, 6. 

Note II. How old? is commonly expressed by 73 or H? w *th 
the addition of the year: as H^' D^D^'l D^' ^bfl"f3 2*)?K 
J f^nD iHN^3 Abram was seventy and five years old, when be 
went out from Haran. 

d) To define the extent of the action expressed by the 
verb, or to indicate the part to which this action applies 
(concerning, in relation to, as to): V^JnVlN H^ll he was 
diseased (concerning) his feet; ^[.?D THJK NP5D (as to) the 
throne will I be greater than thou. 

Note IIL This is the Greek ace. synecdochical. 

5. The accusative sometimes expresses the means or in- 
struments : as pN ifiiX V2T\ they overwhelmed him with 
stones; I^DNF) !}"T? ye shall be devoured with the sword. 

§ 86. THE ABSOLUTE CASE. 

1. A noun beginning a proposition, which forming a 
clause by itself is not connected with what follows, is said 
to be in the absolute case, and is usually explained by sup- 
plying: as to, concerning, etc. 

2. This case is used to give emphasis or prominence to 
a word. 

3. It stands a) for the nominative : as JltDHM ^i^Jl t^'v 
a lion, the strongest among the beasts; b) for the dative: 
as fl^O 1*? VT^. &W tne man °f power, to him belongs 
the earth; c) for the accusative: as DJTW WIN fp'tT) P*p 
as to summer and winter, thou hast made .them ; d) for 
the ablative: f|n TjirO *WN piflrnSDI -but of the fruit 
of the tree which is in the midst of the garden, Grod hath 
said, ye shall not eat of it. 



§ 87. Apposition. 171 

§ 87. APPOSITION. 

1. Nouns are often found in apposition in Hebrew, where 
m other languages, an adjective or another noun in the 
genitive would be employed, especially in the determina- 
tion of number, measure, weight and time: as DHiJ^t^ ili^N 
an ephah of barley, n&flStl "Ip-JH the oxen, the brass, i. e. 
the brazen oxen. 

2. When the first noun in accus. has HK> the second 
noun can 'take or omit it : as ^DrTHitf VHN"DK his brother 
Abel, D>S* DK S^DpTlN Kemuel,' the father of Aram. 
Thus it is with the prepositions : as TPI1N ^TIIm? to thy 
brother Nahor. The repetition takes place, when the sec- 
ond noun is not only an attribute to the first, but is employed 
to give a more complete and correct idea than the first : 
as JDl^3 IS^JO r 11V5''!l anc ^ they pressed sore upon the man, 
upon Lot; l^jS 'jl**!? to my Lord, Esau; 731122 niWZ 
in the field, in the desert. Jos. 8, 24. 

3. The noun which limits or qualifies the other, takes 
the second place, except T|7?n> which stands regularly be- 
fore: Jib 72^ T?3H the king Solomon. 

§ 88. DUPLICATION OF NOUNS. 
The immediate repetition of the same noun indicates : 
a) a strengthening of the original meaning, or an empha- 
sis: as V1K Y*\$ Y~)& earth, earth, earth, hear the word 
of the Lord ! ^*1")f) p"}¥ T)l¥ justice, justice thou shalt 
follow; b) a great number : as lf2H flYnfcjD WllO the vale 
of Shiddim was pits, pits of slime i. e. full of slime pits ; 
c) a distributive sense, expressed in English by: each, by: 
as *lp33 "lp'"& in the morning, in the morning i. e. every 
morning, DV Dl* day by day; d) a diversity or variety, in 
which case they are connected by V as pKJ J3& thou shalt 
not have stone and stone, i. e. diverse weights; ^3"]* ^7) 2/3 
with heart and heart they speak, i. e. with different hearts, 
with duplicity. 

$ 89. SUBSTANTIVES USED IN THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 
1. A deficiency in adjectives is partially supplied by 



172 Part II. Syntax. 

verbs: as 7IJ to be great; tfr)D to be full, partially by sub- 
stantives in the genitive or in apposition. 

2. Abstract nouns in the relation of a genitive, take the 
place of adjectives: as 73 the whole of expressive of total- 
ity, stands for the whole (adj.) : as THXH" 1 ^ the whole 
earth, or for all: D^iiirr 1 ?^ all nations; TDfi continuance, 
])errnanence, for continual : as "TOD 73 a continual light, 
lamp ; TDftil Fhfy continual, i. e. daily burnt-offering, 
tlf'lp holiness, for holy: as tJHpH *"U? the holy garments; 
D 7i# eternity, for eternal : as oViJ? h^l generations for 
ever (prop, generations of eternity). 

3. Substantives are used for adjectives of material (§ 83, 
6.) : n?Tfi KTO a serpent of copper. 

4. Personal qualities are expressed by a circumlocution 
with the nouns £"K , *7J?3 lord, possessor, |3 : as TXy\ff fc^N 
an old man (a man of gray hair); fii£J7nn 7]£3 the dream- 
er ; 7*fT|3 a warrior (son of strength) ; hVB£"{3 a perverse 
man (son of perverseness). 

Note. A kind of adjectives are formed poetically by rN> */3 
^/3 before the noun, corresponding to the English in, less: as 
*?*K J>N strengthless, 7pH pK unsearchable, tTQ 1 ? **?3 un- 
clothed. 

§ 90. ADJECTIVES. 

1. The adjectives agree with their substantives in gender, 
number and definition by the article (§ 80, 2.). 

2. When following the noun, they represent the attribute: 
as rfTiljn "i*l?n the great city; when preceding, the predi- 
cate: TJ?n JlbilJI the city is great. 

Note I Sometimes the adjective as predicate follows the noun, 
viz: when several words follow, which limit more nearly the sig- 
nification of the adjective : as HW D^ tl^lD DNtil T^H 
this city is near to flee unto; f]pKJ7 Jltf lh Vh| DVil Ity [H 
njD^n Lo 3 it is yet high day, it is not yet time for the cattle 
to be gathered. 

§ 91. COMPARISON. 
1. The comparative having no proper form is expressed 



.§ 92. Numerals. 173 

by the simple adjective with jp of, from, which precedes 
the object compared: as t^3*lp plHO sweeter than honey. 

2. Hence this form of the comparative is also employed 
after verbs and nouns of quality: as D?p TWT? *18$K "Dipt 
the cause that is too hard for you ; *Hpp jIM NDDil p*1 
only in the throne will I be greater than thou. Before 
the infinitive, this fp is translated: than that : as *jty ^HJ 
Nit^P my iniquity is greater than that it can be forgiven, 

3. Superlative. The superlative also possessing no proper 
form is indicated: a) by the article before the adjective: 
as iiOpn K 1 )!! 1V\ David was the youngest. 

-- - vt- tt-:t ■•"-: | tt — 

; fl .iarurfw nyi ^nwrm >&r\-r\t2 ; 4 S?arii?pimrTno 

: v v - - V | t - T - - | T T 

•onrof r y.li n^^pjl wrrnp 

precious 1 bitter 2 poverty 3 good fortune 4 (modern! 'Hebrew) hard, 
difficult 5 value 6 blemish, defect 7 - 

b) By doubling the adjective or noun, so that the latter 
stands in the genitive plural: as DHD)£.*DJ?. servant of 
servants, i. e. the lowest servant ; D*KHD.n t^"1p holy of 
holies, i. e. the most holy place. 

c) In poetry the words D^rHtf, 7tf> WiT* HID convey a 
superlative meaning : as ^K ^THfj mountains of G-od, i. e. 
the highest mountains; DNT?K N*tW a prince of God,, i. e. 
an eminent prince ; TfiiT fip'Tin a deep sleep from the 
Lord -= the deepest sleep; h*ip fOlHP a tumult of death, L e. 
a most fearful tumult. 

§ 92. NUMERALS. 

1. The numerals can either follow or precede the sub- 
stantive, with the exception of !tl$ which invariably fol- 
lows it. 

2. In combinations of higher numbers either the higher 
or the lower takes the lead connected by 1 : as PH^ "H V+T3 

&)&y2itf) niyf onfc>jn n& nm Gen. 23, 1. nn&y) yiy 



174 Part II. Syntax. 

rurro mkoi Esth. 1, 1. m& D>yxn dob> Btorrp d-dn 
:p x nb iriNV? &<*• 12 > 4 - T 

3. The nouns to which are joined the cardinals 2 — 10 
are invariably plural. In higher numbers the singular is 
frequently found, as with DV day, DV "ib^ ilW 16 days, 
riyj night, Gen. 7, 4. H^' year, ^K man," F|Sk thou- 
sand, H&K a cubit (prop.: the fore-arm), etc. but the plur. 
is used, when they precede the numeral: as ")&>]? nit2& D*P! 
18 days, tlJW?) D'tfTjK DHJ£ forty-eight cities, Jos. 21, 40., 
biitl^njb^ D'JEriK Num". 35, 6, 7. 

4. To the numerals suffixes may be appended: as OHOST 
they two, or both of them; ttTSVhp you three. With the 
dual ending, they indicate multiplication: as DTIJDB' sev ~ 
en-folcl ; for which purpose ^T) ., D#§ time (properly foot, 
tread or step) are often employed: as DpJH V?JW > Vlhtif 
D^?J?£> three jjxaes. 

5. The feminine of the ordinals also signifies a part of 
a unit, hence it expresses the fractional numbers: as tVI&V? 
the sixth part of = I, fVjrin the fourth part of — J. 

6. The distributive numerals are expressed by the doub- 
ling of the cardinals: as DOt^' DOt^' two by two. 

7. When something is summed up, 2 before numbers is 
used, in which case it is to be translated consisting of: 
#SJ 0'1?3^3 consisting of seventy, Dent, 10, 22. Job 23, 13. 

PRONOUNS. 
§ 92. PERSONAL PRONOUN. 

1 . In the separate personal pronoun may be contained both 
the subject and substantive verb: as UrUK HO^? BfiK H^? 
whence are ye? of Haran we are. 

2. To give emphasis to a noun or a suffix (verbal or 
nominal), a separate pronoun of the same gender, number 
and person is added pleonastically: TjJlK TIHD HJin OK 
Gen. 17, 4.; the separate pronoun being often preceded by 
DJ! : as >DK OK D3 OD"D bless me, even me (Hebr. even I), 



§ 94. Demonstrative. 175 

Gen. 27, 38. |3 1*?> NV7 DJ n#^ and to Seth 7 to him also 
(Hebr. he) there was born a son, Gen. 4, 26. 

3. Vice versa, the noun sometimes occurs, after it has been 
indicated by a verbal or nominal suffix: as "J^TrfiN ^ISOrn 
she saw it— the child, Exod. 2, 6. ftp] ntintrhx htfty 
he shall bring her (it), the offering of the Lord, Exod, 35, 5. 
trWH 1>&3 when he came, the man, Ex. 10. 3. 

4. The verbal suffix conveys the meaning of an accusa- 
tive, in rare instances, as with |fO to give, of a dative: 
*JJVti thou hast given to me (Josh. 15, 19.); ^IplJPI and 
they cried to Thee (Neh. 9, 28.). 

5. When the verb has a double pronominal accusative, 
the former is connected with the verb, the latter with flN - 
as ^inirriKI. ifiN ^£Orn and he will show me both it and 
his abode, 2. Sam. 15, 25. 

y 6. The nominal suffix is often objective in sense : as 
inNT fear before Him ; DDpni DpKniDI and the fear of 
you and the dread of you. Gen, 9, 2. 

7. When a noun in the const, st. conveys with its fol- 
lowing genitive one conception, the suffix is attached to 
the genitive: as iUDfYpp ^5 his instruments of war (prop- 
erly: the instrument of his war); *2£Hp 1ft my holy mount- 
ain (prop.: the mountain of my holiness). 

Note I. The personal pronouns are implied in the preforma- 
tives and afformatives of the verb, and are expressed only, when 
they denote emphasis or opposition: as Tp!D? ^HP^ ftftR thou, 
thou hast said in thy heart, Isa. 14, 13. wSj/il >3 jtf HliT "IDtf HD 

o;r;i^T^ OflpgQ Dpio .... onybp ^n^"n^ T thus 

saith the Lord : I, I brought up Israel out of Egypt and ye, ye 
have scorned your God; Mftft E^NS 'JSTUK ^K *f)IDg> , l ^ 
I will set my face against that man. 

§ 94. DEMONSTRATIVE. 

1. The personal pronoun of the third person is used de- 
monstratively: as Wftft Di s 3 in that day, pointing out the 
more remote object. § 22, 2. 



176 § Part II. Syntax. 

2. The demonstrative when standing before the noun must 
be considered as the predicate of a clause: as ^L^N TlPH iff 
H£DJ? ^*Vr\ this, is thy kindness,, which thou shalt do unto 
me; ,♦♦. DPI ^prf? Pl.t this is our bread, we took it hot for 
our provision; n^NH jINf this is the woman; CKil N^H 
that is the man. 

3. The demonstrative when following the noun is consid- 
ered an attribute, and usually has the article: as HTH JV3D 
this house; n^NH D't^Kil these men. 

' v • T ■ T -: T 

Note L JO?! is used to make the subject very prominent and 
distinguish it from other things, and so it may be rendered self: 
as Num, 18, 22., hence J^H may be joined to the first or sec- 
ond pers. pronoun, e.g. K^lil *3QN I m yself, Isa.43, 55. fcPin JinN 
thou thyself, Jer. 49, 12. 

Note II. $On> N^il before a noun with a following demon- 
strative makes the meaning stronger: HTH il/^ytl N^H this 
same night, Ex. 12, 42. 

Note III. tljit in connection with numbers is always placed 
after them: Gen." 9, 19; 22, 23; Ex. 21, 11. 

4. When a demonstrative and an adjective are both at- 
tributes, the adjective is second in order, the demonstrative 
third: as HtH THiin "Hil this high mountain. If the ad- 
jective follows the demonstrative, the sense will be altered: 
as V)"Un Htn Snh this mountain (which is) the high. 

5. The feminine DX? when separate has a neuter mean- 
ing: as W% flKT Gren. 45. 17. HND1 fiND thus and thus, 
so and so ; " hNT JWJj -]?? 1 ? QTJ3 in the integrity of thy 
heart thou didst this "(thing). Gen. 20, 6. § 81, 1. 

6. nj is occasionally used relatively: as TpO\ Hf Dip9 
Drf? the place which thou hast founded. 

Note. J"tt in connection with interrogative particles or appended 
to words of exclamation makes the question more animated and gives 
emphasis: fit >D who there? ilMN who? HpTO what then? 
Ht i"Gn -see there ! Relating to time it is . equivalent to the 
German fcfyon, English now: D'£J£3 Hf now twice, cf. Gren, 31 
38, 43, 10. 



§ 95. Interrogative. 177 

§ 95. INTERROGATIVE. 

1. The interrog. ^p relates to both genders and numbers, 
usually it refers to persons, rarely to things: as TV2&" f !2 
what is thy name? Jud. 13, 17. HD> "TO what? of things, 
in questions either direct or indirect, Num. 13, 18. 

Note I, Sometimes *>f2 and esp. JlD are used in a prohibitory, 
denying, blaming sense: 7^0^*10 why tempt ye? Ex. 17, 2 # 
p^irrnQ w hat do ye strive about? ib. so that it forms the 
transition to a negation; sometimes it is quite negative: 1. Kings, 
12, 16. Job 6, 25. Num. 23, 10. Is. 53, 1. 

2. H in a direct interrogation : 31*K HDjH?K ^7 AP^D 
hast thou considered my servant Job ? In an indirect inter- 
rogation, ivhether : niiTTUV D^DJJK DDt^n "to know— wheth- 
er ye love the Lord. 

3. In disjunctive questions H is used in the first, DN in 
the second clause: ^HV^ DK HnK Mbtl art thou for us or 

•t : • t - t -: 

for our adversaries? 

Note II. *p and JlD followed by a relative, become also rela- 
tive in signification: HD^ 1W8 *0 he who learned; H W TV2 

" -TV-:- T T V T 

that which was. 

§ 96. RELATIVE. 

1. The particle *)&PNt gives to pronouns, substantives, ad- 
verbs and even to a whole sentence a relative signification. 

Kelating to a preceding noun that expresses place, time 
and manner, it can denote with respect to place where, with 
respect to time then, when, with respect to manner that, 
xoherefore. 

2. The verb or other part of speech that governs the 
word belonging to *)^X (which as relative begins the clause), 
is interposed between' them: as iflfc *fttt?W "$& *$j&l. 
the messenger (angel) whom I have sent, not ^'K *]N7'?D 

*>rvhv ink 

3. *\V?ii often appears with prefixes, in which case that, 
the personal pronoun, or another antecedent, that has been 
omitted must be supplied: as ♦£££[£ "UPN3 &Wpft 6 H^g 

23 " 






178 Part II. Syntax. 

make unto me savory meat, as which I love (i. e. such — 
as that); D^' Wtl ^H2 for God has heard the voice of 
the lad — in which he is there, (i. e. in the place in which): 

"It^K/ to that person or thing, who or which; 
*1C% flN him who, that which; 

^fi^'ND fr° m or °*' ^at which; 

*")J2^0 as that, according to etc. 

4. *W{$ is often omitted, not only as the relative in 
English, when governed by the verb or by a particle, but 
also when governing the verb itself: as (Isa. 42, 16.) I 
will cause the blind to go in a way 1J?T $7 (which) they 
know not, (Exocl. 6, 28.). And it was in the day ft) IT iyi 
(in which) the Lord spake to Moses. 

5. When an entire sentence is the object of the princi- 
pal sentence, "tt^K DK precedes the sentence in the objective: 
as tyiD-D? V"F1# ni<T : &y\fir\&# riX UJW' we have 
heard how the Lord dried up the water of the Eed Sea. 

6. 7 *"MSW another form of the genitive, see § 83, 10. 

7. Sometimes, especially before participles, the article Jl 
(Hi H) stands for the relative: as WVPilD that are found, 
1: Chron. 29, 17. IlliT JYYirD D^Shn who walk in the 
law of the Lord, Ps" Il9, 1. ' 

§ 97. REFLEXIVE AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS. 

1. The reflexive pronoun signifying the accusative, is ex- 
pressed by the reflexive conjugations Niphal and Hithpael 
or in case these cannot be employed, by iJ~l&, HJIK etc.: 
Do they provoke Me to anger? Dflk Nl^tl (d° they) not 
(provoke) themselves to the confusion of their own faces? 
Jer. 7, 19. Woe be to the shepherds of Israel VJ7 ^EW 
DfiiN D'JP that do feed themselves! Ez. 34, 2, 8, 10. 

2. Denoting the remoter object i. e. the dative or the 
case governed by a preposition, it is expressed by the sufF. 
of the third person: as (Jud. 8. 33.) and made Baal-berith 
God DH 1 ? to them (themselves) (Gen. 46,. 7.). His sons, 
his daughters and all his seed 1DN N*5D brought he with 
himself (him) into Egypt. 



§ 98. Other Pronouns. 179 

nfitw 4 n^rb 3 o>Dii D>93n wsn : 2 pSp T h typh f S x id* 

* :orrS kSi onn^S on 5L ?3b> 

to chastise, to instruct 1 disgrace 2 to be like 3 physician 4 (§ 83, 6.) 5 - 

3. By certain substantives with suffixes, conveying simi- 
lar ideas to the following: t^'Qj soul. 3*? heart, 1133 honor, 
31D inward part, D}f]/ bone, pj^ eye, OTJ? I myself, Job 
19, 27. »?K I^P before me, Isa. 1, 16.), or: my flesh, my 
name, etc.: as 1373 1?K he hath said in his heart = to 
himself, Ps. 10, 6. And Sarah laughed 131p3 within her- 
self, Gen. 18, 12. DVT. commonly used in this sense in 
modern Hebrew (Mishna): 1DV1£/ to himself. Comp. Job 
2, 5. iftVtf he himself; »pvy I myself, Job 30, 30. 

4. The reciprocals: the one, the other, one another, are 
expressed by VflN £"K the man — his brother; rhliHK TWtil 
the woman— his sister; MJH t5>*JK the man — his neighbor; 
nrVtJH nt^ f N the woman — her companion. 

§ 98. OTHER PRONOUNS. 

1. V^ or D1K used indefinitely, signify some one, any 
one. 131> *?3> 131"^3 without the article, something, any- 
thing. $h or |*JK connected with the foregoing: ^3 PS> 
131 PN> ilOW-J K/ 1 , (HBWD for ,101 ID i. e. whatever) 

"I T I ■• T : ■■ T ; T T 

not anything ±= nothing. 

2. For eac/i, eve?*?/ when substantive, t^*N> iltTN are em- 
ployed, sometimes in repetition: as £"K t£"N> £"$0 fc'*K 

To convey the sense of an adjective, the noun is either 
doubled, or 73 is used : as 1D33 1D33 every morning ; 
01N"73 (without the article) every man. 73 with the ar- 
ticle after it, expresses all, the whole: D1N1 73 all men, 
1-HT73 the whole nation, D^iT^S all nations. Thus 73 
with suffixes: 03*73 ye all, Q^3 they all. 

3. The same, himself, with persons &in> K*1 (Num. 18. 
23. Ps. 50, 6.); the meaning appears stronger, when K11 
or KM precedes the noun, and Iffl » fiN?Pl follows it: 
ntn nVSl Nil this same night, Ex. 12, 42.; § 94, Note II. 



180 Part II. Syntax. 

with things by DVT. same, selfsame : HTJl Di*il D¥#3 ^ n 
the selfsame day. 1 

4. No, nobody, no one is expressed by |*K following : 
f?N DT[K»andf»K preceding or following: D'ffetf my. J'N 
the fear of God is not ; by tfb, or by D£)tf J DipO D£K Tjj 
till (there was) no place. 

5. WJwever: *D; whosoever: 1Bft$ *£)> whatever, anything, 

something: Jijp., J1D or HD^P following the const, st. in 

the genitive:" HID "OT Num 23, 3. HOWO nN&D Deut. 

24, 10. Z%atf ii- St^N fift> 'ttf no' 
/ .. ... T .. T 

6. Some, several of, by 7pJ DJ^H fp several of the people, 
Ex. 16, 27. DID some of the blood, Ex. 12, 7. 

THE VERB. 
§ 99. IN GENERAL. 

1. The Preterite and the Future, properly the only 
tenses, convey in different ways almost all the conceptions 
of time. 

2. Their primary inherent meanings are however: Pre- 
terite — what is past or completed; Future — what is in- 
complete, what still continues, and what is to come. 

§ 100. THE PRETERITE. 
The preterite denotes: 
L The Past. 

a) The absolutely past: as TO 1UH *P who told thee? 

b) The historical tense (Aorist) : as nNlrnS* nrVil SfTI 
Rachel was of beautiful form. 

c. The Pluperfect: as Sb5 DrrpJTftt* TfJ} JTiiTl and the 
Lord had blessed Abraham in all things, 1. Mos. 24, 1., 
especially 1) in relative or dependent sentences and clauses, 
which define the principal action and in the point of time 

precede it: as HilT 1JTJV Ktf$ Sb? fli pj^i and Noah 
did according- to all that the Lord had commanded him; 
2) when it is connected in the same sentence with an- 
other past tense : as HK3 WfiWti Wl and the sun had 
gone down. 



§ 100. The Preterite. 181 

II. The Present: 

a) In verbs of quality, as D^H to be or become wise, yij 
to be or become great, J£3p to be little, small: TOlDD 
DHDnn 73p I am unworthy (prop, little) of all the 
mercies, 

b) In verbs of habit or frequency: Jlt^N"^ WILD T]3 'liStf 
my God I trust in Thee, let me not be ashamed, Ps* 25, 2, 

c) In verbs of state or condition: Wfo fo& fifth) tlS mn HdS 

' | V T : T T T : J T T T T T 

wherefore art thou wrath? and wherefore is thy face 
fallen ? 

d) Of a state or condition commenced in the past, and yet 
continuing: HHDJ? Vfl JlJJpP *t?{HS> tn y servants are cat- 
tle-keepers (men of cattle). 

11/. The Future: 
a) In predictions, prophesies and assurances, which are re- 
garded as certain, as though already fulfilled: Isa. 9, 1, 
11, 8. 

b*) When indicating the consequence of an action in the 
present or past, or when , connected with a sentence ex- 
pressing a result : JX-tfiT^ VTOI "Til** OV Dlp£-p and 
if (men) should overdrive them one day, all the flocks 
will die, 1. Mos. 33, 13. 

c) Connected with a sentence standing in the future, when 
it has conversive Vav: nDNI rimS 0^1 WW »3 ITHI 

- t : • w : - v x t| : • t t : 

OywyjQ'tlfi and it shall come to pass, when Pharaoh 
shall call you and say, what is your occupation ? 

d) Or with a sentence containing a future condition, when 
it is either itself conditional or expresses the result of 

the condition: DfTO^ ♦bjfl tyQ&ft Ifi»fc>"DN pfijft 
DJT*rn TP^O"*"^ Now, therefore, if ye will obey " my 
voice indeed and keep my covenant, then ye shall be 

IV. The Subjunctive: 
When joined to such a sentence: as *J1QJ MI^H *3p!inFrjip 
lest some evil cleave unto me, and I die, 1. Mos. 19. 19. 



182 Part II. Syntax. 

V. The Imperative and Optative : 

1) By connection with a similar sentence : JnOpNI. ^W 
QiT^ tT\m\ StflBP ^.pH™ g° and gather tn ^ elders of 
Israel together and say unto them. 

2) After a conditional sentence: as iHK Jfipni N^lJl |3 OK 
?TITl N*J7 n? D£0 if it be a son ? then ye shall put him to 
death, but if it be a daughter, then she shall live, 2. Mos. 
1, 16. 

VI. The Future perfect: as Tpjpn "ICAH fltfJD from the 
time that the continual (sacrifice) will be taken away, 
Dan. 12, 11. {WTftl^ DK¥ DK tfig ffn OK when the 
Lord shall have washed away the filth of the daughters 
of Zion, Isa. 4, 4.' 

§ 101. THE FUTURE. 

The Future expresses: 
I. a) The future absolute: as D"TKrriHK HTOK I will blot 
out the man, 1. Mos. 6, 7. 

b) The future perfect: as lifyb JTTP IAN WR?* "HP** lie 
with whom it shall have been found, shall be my 
servant, 1, Mos. 44, 10. 

c) The present, especially when conveying the ideas of 
quality, permanence, iteration or frequency, or in gen- 
eral and moral truths: VjIK "DJft DK 132> f? a son 
honoreth (his) father, and a servant his lord, Mai. 1, 6, 

II The Past. 

ft) In all states or actions continuing in the past, and in 
those, which were often repeated in the past : Miy 1t£W 
which (often) came; |JT !"D thus Solomon gave to Hiram 
year by year, or 2) when the past is expressly indicated 
by an external sign. Such are 1) adverbs of time ftf then, 
DHt? not yet; 2) conversive Vav. 
III. The following Moods : 

a) The subjunctive and the auxiliaries may, can, might, 
would, should etc.: hlXD Sbtt \$\ J># Sbp Gen, 2, 16. 

♦mrr wd-Sd rmji ib. 4, 14. 



§ 102. The Conversive Vav. 183 

b) The imperative, a) in prohibitions, the imp. never being 

used negatively: &$ np&Tl tOT) tftfp3Jr*fr) ftW tih 
iiTDJQ Lev. 19, 11.; h) after a preceding imperative: 

tfn Tajh Wnfc» ^3 ^ 131 Ex. 14, 2. 

Note. The third person of the imperative, which is wanting, is 
always expressed by the future (Jussive): ^Vjtf *JT be there light. 

c) For the optative, especially with the particle JO : JO 1Di\ 
Oh, let come to an end, Ps. 7, 10. 

§ 102. THE CONVERSIVE VAV. 

1. The conception of time, contained in the principal sen- 
tence of an argument or narration, affects the following 
sentences, determining their respective tenses. 

2. This influence, however, is only exerted when the 
verb begins the sentence, but is entirely neutralized when 
the sentence commences with any other word. 

3. The converted tenses (preterite and future with conv. 
Vav) substituted for the simple tenses, are the same in sig- 
nification. 

4. The preterite with convers. *) must be preceded by a 
future, an imperative, or by some word or phrase expressing 
futurity: as DiTK^I ")M tomorrow, and you will see; *TiJ? 
^l/ppi tOj^? yet a little, and they would stone me. Vice 
versa the future with convers. *| must follow a preterite 
with its original signification or another word or phrase re- 
ferring to past time : n$jni*J ^iTJJ? Tj^n rfiQ'DMfZ In 
the year of the death of the ldng Uzziah. I saw... Isa. 6, 1. 

5. The converted tenses are only employed when the verb 
commences the clause, so that the copulative force con- 
veyed by the convers. 1 relates also to the time of the 
preceding sentence (which may be either expressed or under- 
stood). But if any other word commences the clause, the 
simple tense must be used: as "DiO TD^ni. ^£?# ^^JTDN 
Tj^K K^ *9tf rD^n K 1 ? If thou wilt go with me, then I 
will go, but if thou wilt not go with me, then I will not go. 



184 Part II. Syntax. 

(The converted tense ^fDST is used, because it commences 
the clause, the simple TJ^N, because N7 precedes). 

6. The converted future, following a preterite with the 
pluperfect signification, must often be translated as pluper- 
fect : as >b*? r&n yfx o®n nljerns isi$i pny 3s*5 

D*JFlt^?3 DIDnpn'rDK OPnDN And' Isaac digged again the 
wells of water, which they had digged in the days of 
Abraham, his father; and the Philistines had stopped them. 

7. The connecting influence of the convers. 1 is not con- 
fined to the time, but also extends to the mood, so that a 
preterite with convers. 1 takes the meaning of the subjunc- 
tive or imperative, if the preceding verb is used in either 
signification: )b iT&JJ) • •• 1Tttt HH S« fear him not ... and 
thou shalt do him ... 4. Mos. 21, 34.; QJ Hp^l IT rf?B*j jg 
0**1117 j'JJO lest he put forth his hand, and take also of the 
tree of life; D>£rty_ OK ^Hl KtPffi lest he will come 
and smite me, the mother with the children. 

Note. Books and chapters commence with a converted future, 
(7DK*% W1 frequently occur) past time being presumed and the 
books being considered as continuations of m preceding narration. 

§ 103. PARAGOGIC AND APOCOPATED FUTURE. 
1. The future lengthened by H— usually occurs in the 
first person (§ 32). It has the signification of exciting or 
urging one's self to action. It also expresses wish or pur- 
pose, when connected by 1 with the antecedent, which *) 
may be translated in order that: n^DKl *h fiN'SiT bring 
it to me in order that I may eat, Gen. 27, 4. 

Note. The apocopated future, in Hiphil only possesses a proper 
distinctive form, ,with the exception of |7"S hi which it is found 
in all conjugations. It supplies the third person in the imperative 
(wanting), and in the second person, when expressing a command 
has a less forcible signification. 

§ 104. THE IMPERATIVE. 

1. The imperative commands or encourages. In the 
latter sense the particle JO> denoting respectful entreaty or 
exhortation is added: as JO HDN say, I pray thee. 



§ 105. Infinitive Absolute. 185 

2. Prohibition and dissuasion is expressed by the future 
(jussive) with ^N* or K*7 : B*N XV *?8 let no man g° out. 
K^ chiefly precedes the preterite,, and if the future, it de- 
notes a distinct command : n^fT^N kill not ! IT^fi K 1 ? 
thou shalt not hill! 

3. The imperative following the future, is sometimes trans- 
lated by the future : as t?2X) 0^ \$$ * w *^ S* ve to 3 r ° u 
and ye shall eat. 

4. Two imperatives following each other, stand in the 
relation of cause and effect: VPtt V&V_. HNt this do, that ye 
may live, (prop, and live) ffl NR^"*^ ryh ^ EW? 
write them upon the table of thy heart, so shalt thou 
find favor, (prop, and find favor) Prov. 3, 3. 

§ 105. INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE. 

1. The infinitive absolute being for the most part used 
adverbially, and either preceding or following the finite 
verb, denotes increased intensity of action, certainty or con- 
firmation : as Tp*"DN n*}.5"*5 I w ^ greatly bless thee ; 
^J£TAN n ^>^ n ?1™ ai ^ d l wiil exceedingly multiply 
thy seed. 

2. The inf. abs. is employed for the finite verb, when 
several actions of the same person are spoken of success- 
ively. The first verb is then found in the requisite finite 
form, the following verbs taking the form of abstract nouns in 
the infin. abs.: as Gen. 41, 43.; 1. Sam. 2, 28.; Jer. 14, 5. 

3. The infin. abs. occasionally begins the sentence in 
an animated style, which resembles the case absolute of 
nouns. The context determines the translation: as JOJl 

raw -no £ VM) Si3N r riintrl ntrs SbK \&t bhtsft TO3 

ttt- t : t I — t .: tt tI t:|tt 

slaying oxen and slaughtering sheep, eating flesh and 
drinking wine, let us eat and drink, for to-morrow we 
shall die, Isa. 22, 13. 

4. Most frequently, the infin. absolute has the sense of 
a very emphatic imperative : as fi&ODI Tjl^Jl Gro and call 
Jer. 2, 2. Xtflpb r»3t?'n DV'fttt nttf/Remember the sab- 
bath day to sanctify it, 2. Mos, 20, 9. 

24 



186 ' Part II. Syntax. 

5. To give more emphasis, the infin. absol. is often used 
in expressions, where we would expect the inf. construct: 
as SMI Mf2b learn to do well, Isa. 1, 17. V3TO >QK ^ 

....... J 7 T T . . T 

T]Hn they would not walk in His ways, Isa. 42, 24. 

6. The infinitive absolute is sometimes employed as a 
mere adverb : as pin HU^D fiplld and thou shalt rub 

| •• t t v • t I : - t : 

(some) of it very small, (from ppl Inf. Hi. to beat small, 
break in pieces). 

7. An inf. absol. immediately following the same verb, 
and appearing to convey one idea, adds to its signification 
completeness and duration. This infinitive is translated 
by: always, further, continually, totally, utterly etc.: as 
rji^H rjVl he is quite gone; 1K1 #TI JflDtf typ^' hear ye 
indeed, and see ye indeed. When two infinitives of this 
kind (one of the same, the other of another verb) follow 
the verb, the expression receives additional force : as N¥*l 
DiCl NW it went out to and fro (going and returning), 
l?li DD^'n DD^?N 131tf!j. and I spake unto you, rising 
up early and speaking, Jer. 7. 13. iSl is most fre- 
quently used in this manner. By its infinitive -Hl/H the 
continuance or the gradual progress of an action is indi- 
cated: as liDfll Til 7)1 VJ1 D^Dill and the waters decreased 
continually (were going and decreasing). Sometimes by 
the participle: DiDl ^X) ifitl fiTr IjyDl and the lad 
became greater and better (went and grew and was good). 

§ 106. INFINITIVE CONSTRUCT. 

1 . The infinitive constructs are considered as verbal nouns 
(the English: ing) and occur in all cases, with suffixes 
and prepositions: as DO^JN DV? in the day of your eating. 

2. The abbreviated D"Sm (§ 30, 1.) are joined with the 
infin. — constituting gerunds — : as iD i#JiD in his light- 
ening upon him, i. e. when he alighted. Subordinate 
clauses conveying the idea of time, are most frequently 
denoted by the infinitive with 3 and D ♦ When the action 
is understood as of prior occurrence D is used (most gener- 



§ 106, Infinitive Construct. 187 

©rally, giving the infinitive the meaning of the pluperfect), 
but 3 when taking place at the same time: fr**N IDJ^N^I 
VIIN'^N flDV yTl/TTl^ IfW and there stood no man with 
him, while Joseph made himself known unto his brethren, 

i. Mos. 45, 2. w*7N iynrra 1#§J my Wl "¥£ that 

we saw the distress of his soul, when he implored us, 

i. Mos. 42, 2i. in*njA y^XSpJllVQtt'^ I? 1 ? K9#3 $P1 

when Lahan had heard the report of Jacob, he ran to- 
wards him, 1. Mos. 29, 13. DJW3 pn^TtO ***? Spl?"^ 
and the sons of Jacob came from the field, when they had 
heard... 1. Mos. 43, 7. ^ maybe variously rendered: to, till, 
thai, so that, because, when, about: IHyft *"*?? ne finished 
to speak. When a noun as regens precedes, it expresses 
the genitive of the infinitive noun or the Latin gerund, 

e - g. nn^S n# Eccies. 3, 2. 

The infinit. with is used as a noun in the ablative: 
V")K»1 ^fiflp ! DE ? *! and they returned from searching of the 
land. Often it includes negation: *Tip2p from visiting, i. e. 
that he may not visit; "DIP that thou speakest not, Gen. 
31, 29.; injft? that they not pass over, Num. 32, 7. 

Note. 3 before the inf. const, denotes comparison of the two 
actions with one another. *2 must be considered as the shortened 
nj?.3* DV3' which sometimes is still retained: as [ft^H DfT il]£3 
Gen.' 31, 10., for DfTnrO; ft T^H HJD Chro. II. 28,' 22., for 

ft nvra. Thus Jiiab'M^ bi*3 g*. 3, 5,. for 0:^3*0 

" t : v - v : x -: : v : t -: - 

^(tDD (it cannot be taken literally: at the day, because Adam lived 
after having eaten of the forbidden fruit 900 years). 

3. The inf. const, can be (a) the subject of a sentence: 
y\& *\ft DlkO better (were it) for us to return, Num. 14, 3.; 

nirv-nk rjnrjr ny\ m_ Jer. 2, 19.; (b) the object: j$p 

vSpV. tf?H DJjJ?3 4* Mos. 22, 14.; (c) the attribute of a 
noun: lip"! njft "IISD njj Eccl. 3, 4. 

4. The infinitive of a transit, verb takes the accusative 
of the object and the genitive of the subject; the genitive 
immediately succeeding the infin., and the accus. taking 
the third place: UHfc TtVV. H**^ Deut - *> 2 ^ • 



188 Part. II. Syntax. ; 

5. The infinitive partaking of the properties of both noun 
and verb, uses a verbal suffix, if the suffix denotes an ob- 
ject, a nominal suffix, if it expresses a subject: as *^nn*7 
to slay me, 2. Mos. 2, 14. h)p 'PHil? as I lifted up my 
voice (prop, my lifting up). 

6. The infinitive, when representing a finite verb, 
commences the sentence : as D*3 7^H' 73 ]/bt?0 *i"W Jos. 
9, 1. As subject it takes its proper place: riVH 3i£3 2^? 
i'lD 1 ? 0""Wn it is n °t good, that man should be alone (prop, 
the being of man). As object it follows the verb: as 

irran tetem 2. mob. 4, 24. rmb nna* m* dn Jud. 7, 10. 

• -: I- - :- 7 :• vt t - -t • ' 

7. The verb JIT! to be, the particles ^ and |>K (inclu- 
ding the verb to be), with 7 and the inf. const, express: 

1) to be about to do something, to be on the point of 
doing: as NiD^ J^p^rViTI and the sun was about to go down; 

2) it is to be done, must be accomplished: as T] 1 ? Hi WVh Hp 
what is to be done unto thee? IpfeR *7K l&ltft? t^H 
wouldst thou be spoken for to the king, 2. Ki. 4, 13. 

8. The verb jrU to give, with 7 and the inf. const, and 
the accusative of person, expresses to alloiv, to permit: as 
TjSnS OJJfltf |JT ttS he will not let you go, 2. Mos. 3. 19. 

9. A peculiar construction is, that the inf. with or with- 
out 7, following the finite form of the verbs : w]D*> Jl^lD* 
inp» y\& V^iil etc. expresses the principal idea, the 
finite verb being rendered adverbially: as Rh^b DfrOrU tlfefr 

: • t ■• : - t t 

wherefore didst thou flee secretly f (prop.: wherefore hast 
thou hidden thyself to flee?); 1)V V*7N y\& HtDD^^I and 
it returned not again (prop.: it added not again to return), 
itfp 1 ? Zp& DXp n^?]l ttS thou shalt not wholly reap the 
corner of thy field (prop.: thou shalt not complete to reap 
the...). 

Sometimes the verbs are both finite, either connected 
by lor without V rf?B*l D^l 2. Kings 1, 11. ^DiK 
Titf ti^JpjjS Prov. 23, 35. ^SK W)H he walked willingly 
(he was willing, walked), Hos. ,5, 11. 



§ 107. The Participle. 189 

§ 107. THE PARTICIPLE. 

1. The participle associating in itself the nature of both 
the verb and noun (substant, and adject.), as substantive 
represents either the subject , the object, or stands in ap- 
position, being inflected precisely as a noun: as subject: 
DnSy?£?Mnp>X litfProv, 12, 11. as object: m$.0 
ftyrh "nrta'DnpK Gen. 37. 17., in apposition: illil 
n|4? ?I*5N"nN *W0^ Gen - 2 ^ 6 - As adjective it agrees 
with the noun in gender, number and definition by the 
article. 

2. The participle of a trans, verb, when substantively 
employed, is followed by the genitive, as object: TlD^ *2D^ 
they that love thy name ; t]Dtl Hpfcf they that keep the 
door. 

3. The participle as verb but faintly conveys the notion 
of time: the part. act. most frequently expressing present 
time, especially when connected with the pers. pronoun: 

^btl *5^£ I &°; tne part, passive past time: ^HlOP killed = 
who has been killed. Sometimes the latter is used for the 
partic. pass. fut. (in Latin : ndus): as "l^iO to be born 
(nascendus), Ps. 22, 23. N133 to be created (creandus), 
Ps. 102, 19. V?nft to be praised (laudandus), Ps. 48, 2., 
or if formed from an intrans. verb it represents the Latin 
deponens: (11203 nixus, confidens. 

Note. The pers, prom regularly precedes the partic, to convey 
the notion of present, seldom following: Tfoftb tyVfi W "PiK 
Ps. 45, 2. OON IlKil Gen. 31, 5. In later Hebrew this con- 

7 

struction is the most common ; *0X JMV I know ; *0N PHID I 

confess; >0N J^^'D I adjure. 

4. The participle without pronoun and without copula, 
is very frequently used for the present, in sentences con- 
veying truths of a practical or moral nature. This present 
generally includes the subject and relative or the conjunc- 
tions: he who — whosoever, or : as he — when he, so that 
we would render in Hebrew : he who kills by : ^tOp ♦ 

.ini? 1 ? irgyp -nrip m njjj© V£5]>n *j wnnn w There 



190 Part II. Syntax. 

is (one that) keepeth silence, because he hath no answer 
in his mouth, and there is (one that) holcleth back his an- 
swer for his time. D'Dp PtjhO DHSH r»3Tjp (He that) 
useth many words, useth many lies. 

5. The participle standing in the place of a finite verb, 
of the past, present or future, always adds the idea of 
permanence or duration: DTHtf IT!* Q°& knows ; XV* *irU 
a river goes out; fViSOn DJU'I?. y° ur eves have seen. Often 
the copula is expressed: fTlfiPD iTH "U^H and the lad min- 
istered (was ministering), ti^h'ty Fn.3"lp Wtl nXH and 
Hannah spake in her heart, 1. Sam. 1, 13. 

6. The participle according to its verbal or nominal 
meaning, is connected with either the verbal or nominal 
suffix (§ 47.). 

7. Sometimes one participle is added to another, object- 
ively, (instead of an infinitive) to complete its meaning : 
as ^1133? JiGD ]?T CN a man knowing to play on a harp. 

Note. The participle in a few instances is connected with iTi! 
to express the perfect: T# mfe.Wi DWT^JD Jfltt TW 
In later Hebrew, this construction frequently occurs: X^ W*H 
rj^3 I came on the way (JYfi N"S ntTO); H^ fifTH $ 
she did not drink ("f"D f'fii tltD)0) HOiK fijh ?|5 thus he 

spoke o"d ts XDV) 

The future of j"PH » being also employed to express future time: 

pfDM vm (TD T n"£i rronn) 

PAKTICLES. 
§ 108. PARTICLES OF NEGATIVE SENTENCES. 

1. &?> 7# : K^ expressing the direct and real negation, 
is used before verbs in the preterite and future, ^X the 
desired, intended or supposed negation is used only before 
verbs in the future; both regularly precede the verb. N tL >, 
H*> ^3> VI 1 ?? : tib and ^3 ( the latter chie % used in*po- 
etry) deny the predicate, j*NS f*N the subject: *ftoft K^ 
I have not eaten; pK )&y) 10p> ^3 they dV not 
rise nor possess the land; D'ff?*? PsTlS 1 ?? *??} ">£N the 



§ 108. Particles of Negative Sentences. 191 

base man saith in his heart, there is no God. THO chiefly 
found before an infinitive (where K7 never stands): aDN/ 
to eat, Sb^f T1W7 = bb{$S 'nSl? not to eat. 

pjtf (absol. st.) closes a member of the sentence: V# D"W1 
Gen. 2, 5. pt> (const, st.) appears before the noun, inf. or 
partic. ^iDDD pN without number, Gen. 41, 49. 

Note I. The partic. mostly representing the noun is preceded 
by ptf, more rarely by tf?J TWI ^ W*^ Ze l )h ' 8 ' 5 ' 
In the Mishna ^7 is often used, when standing immediately before 
the participle, pjtf when a pronoun intervenes: ^J) P*?DiK ^7 

torm? tiro N M fi dtids), pan *6 q"d n f, fi rwa) 
npwn >jin pN ot» rvm) . 

Note II. K7 and 7^ may be best compared with the Latin 
non and ne » 

2. J3 £es£, indicating a prevention of what follows, is with 
but few exceptions, connected with the future: prpfl [£) 
lest ye die. 

3. The preposition |Q> »5 conveying the notion of away 
from, is occasionally used as a negation: TJ7PP ^IDND ^HK 
DiT^l?. Sam. 8, 7. ...that I should not reign over them; 
■VJbOPTb ?Tl¥K OWn *?% Isa. 5, 6. ...that they reign not. 
§ 106,2. 

4. The conjunction D& in swearing is properly condi- 
tional: if, provided: as in Sam. 3, 17. God do so to thee, 
and more so, "D"t V15J9 ^D^ OK if thou hide anything 
from me; but when the form of imprecation is omitted, 
it is best rendered by a negative: not, and the phrase 
K 4 ? DK by an affirmative: pNH fl$ INT DK if they shall 
see the land = they shall not see, 4. Mos. 14, 23. N7 DN 
D57 nt^J^K p if I will not do so unto you = I will do, 
4.' Mos.' 14, 28. 

5. Two negations in the same sentence do not affirm, as 
in English, but give more emphasis to the negation: as 
DJ2TTJ K 7 ^1P5 P^ silver was nothing accounted of (in the 
days of Solomon), 1. Ki. 10", 21. 



192 § Pakt II. Syntax. 

§ 109. PARTICLES OF INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 

1. ft, K^D (§ 24, 4.). kSl! is also used elliptically for a 
whole sentence: D*£?f) OK K^H is it not so? Gen. 4, 7. 

2 DK */j is an interrogative particle in indirect questions; 
as fi?5H niT]£rDN fiNTtt let us see if the vine nourish; or 
in indirect disjunctive questions before the second member: 
as K^-DK 'S0L % Hf TVlXn whether thou be my son 
Esau or not. 

Note. The second member is but seldom introduced by itf : 

SlDD itf ITiT DDnn JHV >D Eccl.2,19. or by n repeated : as 

t t v : ■ t t v ■ - " ■ -: 

H^nil N^in Dtnn whether they are strong or weak, 4. Mos. 13, 18. 

v t -: | T T v 

3. Sometimes the interrogative particle is wanting, and 
the question indicated by the collocation of the words, or 
by the tone of the voice: Jit HAN art thou? D2 p'tHD ?pi]/ 
wilt thou hold them still? 

4. The answer ,,yes" is regularly expressed by a repeti- 
tion of the word to be affirmed or denied : as "D1 {J^jl 
0\ HDK*! ni«T DKD is there any word from the Lord? 
And he said, There is, Je*\ 37, IT. 

§ 110, PARTICLES OF OPTATIVE SENTENCES. 

1. h (negatively vhb or hh) -0 if! that! utinam ! 
It is coupled with the future : as PTfT* SnJ?0^ }S 
L Mos. 17, 18., with the jussive: ^ITD W V^O that 
it might be according to thy word, 1. Mos. 30, 34., with 
the imperative : *$£& & n<hN"DK T|K if thou wouldst 
only hear me! 1. Mos. 23, 18., with the elliptic participle: 
**7 l^ftt^ *£?!£ *ft that my people would hearken unto me, 
Ps. 81, 13. if the wish refer to the future. If referring to 
the past, to what should have happened, but has not, the 
perfect is employed, where we would use the pluperfect: 
as ^HD t? that we had been dead ! si mortui essemus ! 
Sometimes DN is used as an optative particle : as ^Nlfc^ 
^ yty&T\ DK Israel, if thou wilt hearken unto me, Ps.81, 9 + 

2. A wish is often expressed in the form of a question: 
as DiD ttfrTPP DHDK &T\ many say, who will show us 



§ 111. Particles of Objective Sentences. 193 

any good, Ps. 4, 7. A peculiar formula of wishing, for 
that! is: \tV *D who will give, with following accusative: 
yitf fiT ♦£ would it were even! 5. Mos. 28, 67.; with fol- 
lowing • infinitive : as 11*TO jFV"**/? would that we had died, 
2. Mos. 16, 3.; with following finite verb with or without 
1= as Qtil nt D!D*? tVJl) ffV *D that there were such an 
heart in them! 5. Mos' 5,' 26.; TltfT \&. V ° that l knew ! 
Job 23, 3. 

§ 111. PARTICLES OF OBJECTIVE SENTENCES. 

1. After the verbs of seeing, knowing, saying, hearing, 
believing etc. the sentence employed as the, object is in- 
troduced by *3 or less frequently by *"|& v & : "D 1 ? *5 ^T. ^key 
saw that they had conquered, Jos. 8, 21.; 'D 7j7 1UH 1 D 
HJlN D1^ J? who told thee that thou wast naked? Gen. 3, 11. 
After verbs denoting the operations of the senses, the sub- 
ject of the dependent clause . becomes the object of the 
principal sentence, and is followed by the dependent clause 
with its introductory particle: Dltt *p TiNiTnN D'if?K NT) 
instead of: TiKil DID ♦? I D'H^N SOn (almost the "Latin 
Accusat. before the Infin.) 

2. y&X'. HliT Fib® 1WK that ye may know, that the 
Lord distinguishes,' Ex. 11, 7. or n^'K HN cf. (§ 96, 5.) 

§ 112. PARTICLES OF FINAL SENTENCES. 
Dependent sentences in which intention or purpose is 
expressed, take the particle: (a) 1^N : Th ^5" ""^"fc? tnat 
it may be well with thee, Deut. 6. 3., or the more precise 
W-> \y£h' ^1^3 w * tn or without *1&'K; as prepositions, 
they are connected with the infinitive, as conjunctions 
with the future: H&TV K 1 ? 1#tf f^ that he may not see. 
Ez. 12, 12.; T1W : n#g fj;DVGen."l8, 19.; NOil \yd*> Ik; 

rnyS >S"iTnn td#3 (Jen. 22. 30.; tcrrus ^J>\nn tq^ 

Ex. 9. 16." (b) S with the infinitive: Hi^n 1 ? ID Ex. 
3, 4. Ez. 12, 2. (c) V : and bring your youngest brother unto 
me njntf] that I know, Gen. 42, 34. Tjb 1^'n HlH^ Hip 
Prov 20, 22 (d) |£, T)W? lest: IT r6®\ J3 Gen. 3, 22. 
^90"7?X mt> ib. 3, il. 

25 



194 Part II , Syntax. 

§ 113. PARTICLES OF INFERENTIAL SENTENCES. 

Inferential sentences are usually introduced in English 
by that. In Hebrew that is expressed by : a) V as God 
is not a man iD*1 that he lies, b) ^ with infinitive: 
^^TT^ fiVnn 1 ? (thou hast magnified Thy mercy) in keep- 
ing alive my : soul, 1. Mos. 19, 19. c) *\tf$ ffilT HD3! 
&$yf? ^mib *0$ the Lord will smite' thee, that thou 
canst not be healed, Deut. 28, 27. d) >3 after interroga- 
tives: as ^(Tltf *5 TDTTD what is my strength, that I should 
hope. Job 6, 11. 

§ 114. PARTICLES OF TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 
a) The introductory *JT1 is of especial importance, as it 
occurs with the greatest frequency in adverbial sentences 
relating to time; b) the prefixes 3 and 3 with the infini- 
tive (§ 106, 2.); c) 1 connected with the finite verb or par- 
ticiple: as, the angel came to the woman T\2$V ^ TH while 
she was sitting; d) the conjunctions: *5 : ^&HDD *3 when 
I kept silence, my bones withered, Ps. 32, 3. *|^"N3 ; 
y~i\l ^#83 *njl 2. Mos. 32, 19. DN: TV? t&$ DK when 
the "vintage is finished, Isa. 24, 13. D")D > D*)D3 J D"}©3 
^T }D33 ?j%8 Jer. 1, 5. tNO: TW?%9 since I came 
to Pharaoh, Ex.' T 5, 23. Tg, >? !#, n#N "iVj J°s. 2, 16. 
2. Sam. 23, 10. Deut. 2, 14. 

Note. Sometimes conjunctions denoting time are omitted : 

nigi »9 toiSi p>^n-Sj; *w ^'p^'n aen. 19, 23. 

§ 115. PARTICLES OF CAUSAL SENTENCES. 
a) >5 because: flKt JT?>IJ >? Gen. 3, 14, 17. b) \y_\ be- 
cause, ififtjj |jK *? ftf^ Num. 20, 12. Gen. 22, 16. Num. 

11, 20. ifcTN alone: &*y\T\ ig% for the Lord dried up the 
waters of the Jordan, Jos. 2, 23. c) Dpfr *5 3p& *)#K 3p#. 
because, because that: Num. 14, 24.; Gen. 22, 18.; 2. Sam. 

12, 10. d) prijl ♦$•" Gen. 38, 26. e) V RVTj DV7 ft n#fc 
111^ Whose is the sea, for He made it, Ps. 95, 5. 

§ 116. PARTICLES OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES, 
1 . a) For conditional sentences the two particles DN and 



§ 116, PARTICLES OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 195 

V? are used, or their negations: tfj DN and N^l^ 0717). 
□N in case the condition and consequence are real, 17 when 
they are only presumed : Mt *fijj( ^JTTDN m.-^JTI N*^ DN7 
if thou wilt go with me, then I will go, but if thou wilt not 
go with me, (then) I will not go, Jud. 4, 8. HilT ^§(7 *fr 
♦.♦. UiTpn^ if the Lord were pleased to put us to death... 
Jud. 13, 23. Frequently the expression is elliptical, the 
subordinate sentence, expressing the consequence, being 
omitted, whereby V? gives an optative signification to the 
verb: UH$Q j*7JO tiflD"^ would that we had died in tlie 
land of Egypt, Num. 14, 2. 5p|ft r?W Wj??>! ^ that 
Ishmael might live before Thee/ Gen. 17, 18. 

OX with the preterite immediately following gives to the 
latter the signification of the future 'perfect: 7D1 TlH^iTDN 
Tib *35P ^ I shall have been shaven, then my strength 
will depart from me, Jud. 16, 17. 

b) >? if, supposed that: n^tf 73tf rqpH *3 Ex. 21, 2. 

Note I. QX is purely conditional, in *5 the conditional idea is 
often incorporated with the clause of time. Compare Ex. 21, 2, 
3, 5, 14, 18. 

c) 7C\\*: ♦„ WftCTI 7iTK the blessing, if ye obey ... Dent. 
11, 27.' " 

d) |D or n^H'- >S WJX'-kS jHI if they will not believe 
me, Ex. 4, 1. 17)37*?. Hkty Hw H-H if the Lord make 
windows in the heaven, 2. Ki. 7, 2. 

e) V VDK HK DUJI = 3IJ& DN7 Gen. 44, 22. ^77DN7 

iDsrnB = np& dVi Ex. 3, is. ifV?#*? jxprii = |N»n bio 

Ex. 4, 23. 

f) 3 with the inf. const,: Gen. 44, 30, 31. \%b3> iniOD 
Note II. The conditional particle is frequently omitted : ^3* 

«•• ffrtf 77VP ( if ) a thousand shall fall at thy side ... Ps. 91, 7, 

2. The second member most frequently commences 1) with- 
out any particle: JO VQ7 ♦.. TINVD *O"0K if now I have 
found favor in your eyes, speak, I pray you, in the ears of 
Pharaoh, Gen. 50. 4.; 2) with V TO^HI »£# ^fi DN 



196 Part II. Syntax. 

3) with stronger particles: as ftf, %V^/&*1^ Tplin ^ 
»ty2 Wj» m Fs. 119, 92. If it had not been the Lord, 
who' was' for us ,U Mltf 1 ?? D w n Wt Ps. 124, 2, 3. 

§ 117. PARTICLES OF DISJUNCTIVE SENTENCES. 

As well-as ) V-V P™) HptP!? DJHDJ : KiSDD-DJI fSfTDJ 
both-and. J Qen. 24, 25. OJV-DJ: EMI nii"p-Dj;"DJ 

10.; Gen. 19, 11.; Gen. 9—10. Neither— nor: N*7.„D*-CM: 

n*n* *6 rp-m ^"Di 1. kl 3, 26. Either or: in-sk.- ex. 

21,'3L; DN-DK: Ex. 19, 13.; DKWM*: i13>TDNl tO^TDN* 
*?3N* Eccl. 5, 11. 

§ 118. PARTICLES OF ADVERSATIVE SENTENCES. 

The most frequent adversative particle is V TO1 but 
from the tree, Gen. 2, 17. All this is come upon us 
I^PD^ HI) yet have we not forgotten Thee, Ps. 44, 18. 
Stronger: 0%t> D^ttO but: Gen. 28, 19. DK ^ but: thy 
name shall be called no more Jacob ^K1CJ^"DN *? but Israel, 
Gen. 32, 29. TIN but, pN but, limiting what precedes: 
Hbl]H but not, Gen. 20, 12. Ps. 31, 23. 

*3"Dj although, usually at the beginning of a sentence : 
Jl^Oil ^ftirP? D^ although you multiply prayers, Isa. 1, 15. 
DN although: come now and let us argue QJ^Dn ^!T"DK 
Wy&'D though your sins be as scarlet, Isa. 1. 18. \ although: 
thou shalt die for the woman, whom thou hast taken 
*7JD rV?J?3 Xini although she is a man's wife, Gen. 20. 3. 

§ 119. INTERJECTIONS. 

IK, *1iT, fi1> r?N> iTiN* 'SStf exclamations of grief, com- 

T - T t - : - _ O 7 

plaint: ah ! woe ! alas ! for the most part with following *? : 
3WO ^"IN Num. 21, 29/: DV*? HI Ez. 30, 2. Ez. 6, 11. 
^^X'Micha. 7, 1. HilJ? with b Jo. 1, 15., for the most 
part with DTl^N 111* Josh. 7, 7. ff&l exclamation of joy, 
aha! Ps. 35, 25., of terror or mockery: Ps. 40. 16, Isa. 44, 16. 
*3 an exclamation of pressing entreaty: O that! in addressing 
God with "*3ltf Jos. 7, 8., with *JlK in addressing superiors; 
1. Ki. 3, 17. 



PARADIGMS 



A. PARTICLES WITH SUFFIXES. 


7 to, sign of the dative. 


-Jin. 


3 as, for which 


♦ ft, JD 


Sing. 




• also 1D3, TD3, 

T 




I.e. *7 to me 


*3 in me 


♦3i£b as : 


♦359, Poet- '3D, 


Cm. rp in p. fj 
9 ' to thee. 






'ilD from me 


7]$ in P- 1| 


^103 as thou 


^UDft> in pause 


in thee 




■^DDj from thee 


1? 





?JS? 


Jm. "17 to him 


•j^l in him 


VTiDp as he 


UlgD. poeMrnp, 


3. [ ^\ P^t. 
Jf. H7 to her 

( r 






)n|Difrqm him 


H^ *n her 

T 


HiDD as she 

T T 


T V - 


PZwr. 








1, c ^7 to us 


J)^ i" " S 


ttiDD as we 


^£0 fr0m US 


2. J » to you 


Dp3 in you 


T 

DOS as y e > 


D?P 




seldom D31"D3 


from you 








|3? 


3 J to them 


on 

T 


V T " T 


QHp, poet. 


in them 


DHl'M as they 


DHJD, from them 


m- m 





109 



DN s i^ n of the accusative. f)tf at, with. 
Sing. Plur, Sing. Plur. 

i' c - tuv, tun me ^nk us tin at > with me ttfiN with us 



fm. 



in p. 



%\ ^fiK thee 

fm. "ink him 



D.?riK you ^ilN , i n P- ^RK DJflK 

with thee with you 



S:i 



dhk .in« at, with him dan 

x them T with them 



If. HHK her |fltf nm at, with her jfltf 



t 

D# with. 

w. me w . thee 



w. him w. her w. us w. you 



w. them 



w.>.s\qv.' in p- wv' ^y.' ^w> ^w.' s?w - °W-> D ^^ 



198 








B. REGULAR 






Kal 


Niphal. 


Piel. 






Transitive. 


Intransitive. 






Pret. 


3. m. 


4}$ , 


# i3? f^y 


*^®\>) 


*^?p 




3. f. 


nbqp T 


irrta rfca* 


nSpp : 3 


nSt?p 




2. m. 


%%$ 


t : |t .t : n 


n%pj 


n^p 




2. f. 


$%p T 


T : — T T ; T T 


$&p3 


flj?@p 




1. c. 


$?ej> 


♦rr»33 ^^t 


♦nj?0j33 


T^ftp 


Plur. 


3. 


^?ii 


H3D 2 6^ 


&&p} 


^p 




2. m. 


onS&p 


DOT©? — ■ 


Qfl^fP 


Dfl^p 




2. f. 


wSej? 


jrH33 — 


l^topl 


J#%p 




1. c. 


^?Dp T 


: - t 


wS©j?j 


tf?9p 


Inf. ( 


3onst . 


*S'dd abso1 - ^p *b&pr 


1 6b p j) **i 
(Vaj5h) 


£?p (l % } 


Imp. 


m. 


%p m 


*^3? 


^pn 


%p_ 




f. 


^p. 


H33 


^Dpn 


,l ?Dp_ 


Plur. 


m. 


iSbp. 


naa 


•ibcapn 


^£3p_ 




f. 


ruSbp 


HH33 

t : - : 


t : - It ■ 


*})*?- 


Fut. 


3. m. 


fe|2 


"13?! 


^ 


^P-: 




3. f. 


Sbpn 


133H 


^topn 


^pf? 




2. m. 


Sopn 


n33n 


^p^ 


tapfl 




2. f. 


^#pji 


H93P 


>Sc?pn 


'^pi? 




1. c. 


StofJK 


^33** 


^pN 


%pM 


Plur 


3. m. 


^tpp! 


nag* 


itap' 


^W: 




3. f. 


n^bpn 


rnisbri nj^Dpri 


ft^apti 




2. m. 


^tppn 


rapfl 


JiSppn 


&epfl 




2. f. 


n$b|?n 


rm33n n^Dpyi 


nj^epfl 




1. c. 


T '^M 


T "i33; 


^pj 


T ^p4 


The 


length. Fut 


. rhvpx 


hSddn 


nScopK 




k Optative) 


t : 1 : V 




t : | t • 


t : |--: 


Fut. 


apoc. (Jussive) 











Part. act. 7£jp P ass - TltDp 
1 »i ! to' >n P 2 *Sf3' in p. 



S^PJ StDpft 



VERB, § § 29—39. , 

Pucd. Hipliil. 



Hophal. 



199 

Hithpael. 



nSop 
n%p 

1 $©F? 
V?t?p 

jrtep 



*S*apn 

nS'tppn 
n>jpn 

fl?Dpn 

*n%pn 

6nppn 

enVapn 



^po 

nStopn 

iSppn 
DJ^tppn 
jn^pn 



•Seprin 

riSfcpnn 

n%pnn 
WBpnn 



DnV^pnn 
©pjin 
^fcpjv? 



bap (^PfVppn ftop Siopn 


^R?>*SDpnn 




baprr 




bepnn 


wanting. 


^Vtppn \ 


wanting. 


'tepnn 




•iS^ppn 




iSopnn 




nAopn 




: 1 - : • 

mbttpnn 

t: ••!-: • 


^P: 


Vtop! - 


^ 


^P-0! 


J?©pn 


b*ppn 


%J3J? 


Sgjjijn 


Vopri 


^£?pn 


%\}$ 


jropnri 


*bppn 


^ppn 


htoph 


^eprjn 


7tip* 


TDpN 


%p$ 


it$p_m 


&©$ 


fctjp!. 


&Wl 


*%pty m 


n^pn 


n^topn 


rubtopn 


nb&ppin 


iStppn 


^Opp 


tappri 


frejjw 


mS^pii 


n^topn 


n^epri 


m^prtri 


T ^R«5 


^DpJ 


T ^PA 


b&prw 




n^JDpN 




rtepriK 




' ^fp- 




t : | - ; v 



hwn h'wn 



hwo tei»> hwm 



200 



C. VERB PE GUTTURAL. (§ 40) 
Kal. Niphal. Hiphil. Hoplial. 



Pret. 3. in. 


*n?y T 


Higjtt. 


. *^J#7 


- t:t 


3. f. 


»M 


rnpitt 


fiTpyn 


nnoyn 

T : "V T 


2. m. 


FPQVr 


fi"!?l& 


^*P£) 


mEyn 

t : - *t:t 


2. f. 


P"|OI! 


mow. 


iT!5I?n 


• ^19^0 


1. c. 


♦JT78J7 


vnoiS 


woj?n 


• : - ^t:t 


Plur. 3. 


nag 


n&ift 


n^7 


n?yn 


2. m. 


ocn5£ 


Dirjajy. 


DniDi?n 


DfllOJft 


2. f. 


ICH9£ 


fii"!9M 


I^l^n 


!*3"W 


1. c. 


tfroy 


unoiy 


inDyn 


WiOtt.0 



Inf. const. *-|£j; abs. ninjn *-iJgl?TT W?i> *TDJfi7 ni ^? ) "fOJfil 



Imp. rn. 


iDg 


p?n 

'pi? 


"WSJtfl 


"©]#? 




f. 
Plur. m. 




• : it-- 
: |t-- 




wanting. 


f. 


njioJL 


nj)?!" 


t : ••'t" 


ftjTOD 




Fut. 3. m. 


"tQg!. 


ptt£ 


^>. 


TPJ£ 


1D^ 


3. f. 


1OJ?.0 


prtjn 


*»91£i 


"»WO 


nojNi 


2, m. 


"tola? 


prnfl 


iD^ri 


Tpy_0 


nojrn 


2. f. 


npyn 


♦pttw 


HPl^ 


H^ri 


HDyn 


1. c. 


•toft* 


prro* 


^Sltt* 


TOJS 


T5«f? 


Plur. 3. m. 


iiiW. 


nprw. 


nor 


itpj;*- 


np^ 


3. f. 


.nyioj?0 


mprtfo 


n^siy? 


rtt-jojtt) 


runoyri 


2. m. 


npj;n 


^PIW? 


ripj/n 


n^jyi 


noijn 


2. f. 


nrjoyp 


njptttf? 


nnojjri 


runpyri 


ninpj/n 


1. c. 


najja 


prm 


"19JJ3 


TBJN 


now 

_ t: t 



Fut. apoc. (Jussive) 



i&tf! 



Part. act. ^ pass. -flO]; ID^ TOJ/D ID^D 



D. VERB AYIN GUTTURAL. (§ 41). 201 

Kal. Niphal. . Pitl. Pual. Sithpael. 



Pret 


. 3. m. 
3. f. 
2. m. 


— T 

t _ : t 
t : - x 




n TO 
#3*53 


T-3 

1-0-13 
rirha 

t : 


TO*? 1 " 7 

nrrann 

t : - t : • 




2.f. 


nam? 

*" T 


wprnMi 


P?T3 


fl!rb 


Wlapn 




1. c. 


view 

: - t 


»fiWf3 


WS 


Wia 


'ftpisnn 


Plur 


.3. c. 


—. T 


IlDO^'J 


^13 


bia 


toianr? 

: |t : • 




2. m. 


aptpnv 


D^BO^J 


0^313 


ocoia 


v : ~ t : ■ 




2. f. 
1. c. 


~ T 




J$3i3 


jr>TO 




Inf. 
Inf. 


absol. 


titt& 

T 


town 

.. T . 


TO 
1*9 


TO 


TO** 


Imp 
Plur 


m. 

f. 

. m. 


vrytf 


•• T 

. — . T . 


to 

• :it 


TOW 

wanting. ,-'— 

:ix : • 




f. 


t : - : 


x : - t • 


t : - t 




t : -t : • 


Fut. 


3. m. 
3. f. 
2. m. 
2. f. 




tow* 

" T * 
•• T 

town 

" T 


TO! 


to: 

TO* 1 
'TO? 


TO 1 ?' 
TOW 
TOW 

♦31?W 


Plur 


I.e. 
. 3. m. 




" T V 


TO$ 


TO$ 
Din; 


maro 

: |t : • 




3. f. 


Tumtin rnantwi rordn 

T : - : • t : - t ■ t:~t: 


t : - : 


t : - t : 




2. m. 


iDiitrp 


^n^'n 


onan 

: It : 


ttinri 


: |t : • 




2. f. 


n^n^'n itMsntWi rrinSri 
T ._. . . _ T . T ._ T . 


t : - 


itbianh 

t : - t : • 




I.e. 


mm 


" T • 


TW 


TO^ 


VPV 




Part. 


tow 


t : • 


TO 


TO? 


p#p 


. 


pass. 


TO 











26 



202 




E. 


VERB 




Kal. 


• 

Niplial. 


Piel. 


Pret. 3. m. 


*ypf 


•yo#5 


* *ya# 


3. f. 


n#w" 


ro??#i 


njw" 


2. m. 


nypt? 


Q}fe0 


j$5e# 


2. f. 


*$&# 


njjD^3 


. r\ym 


Plur. 2. m. 


D#1W" 


DJ$D^ 


nr\y0 


Inf. 


tfo# 


*yowri 


*y$& 


Inf. absol. 


yt>& 


JfeiW 


VM 


Imp. ra. 


yb& 


y?^n 


VW 




ynf 


^p^n 


yBi£ 




tyntf 


^nis?ri 


tyiptf 




ruynp 


ru;OTn , 


n*#?3tf 


Fut. 3. m. 


W3& 


VP&. 


y©#* 


3. f. 


ynpr\ 


VQ0t\ 


yfcyt} 


2. m. 


ymr\ 


ytyzn 


ymr\ 


2. f. 


yMft 


ymr\ 


♦J?SMl 


1. c. 


vow$ 


VQ&$ 


l^'K 


Plur. 3. m, 


tyM\ 


Vfa& 


Jiypg* 


3. f. 


mymn 


mymr\ 


riJEfircfo 


2. m. 


WVft 


w$$ 


W9^n 


2. f. 


myfiufft 


t*: - t 


rui?®t#i 


1, c. 


VW) 


I^-) 


y&?^ 


Fut. with. Suff. 


'#»# 







Part. act. 



#&# pass. j;^ yo^ 



VJSPQ 



LAMED GUTTURAL. (§ 42) 


203 


PuaL 


lb' pi 1 11. 


Hophal, 


Hithpael. 


ym 


*#W'n 


*$Wti 


*ysr\pn 


nysv 


tvpyitn 


r\yn&r\ 


njjprit^ri 


riypg? 


rffio^n 


t .• - : t 


rwen^n 


W&& 


SWP^n 


WP'^'n 


ijjsatTB^n 


D0Rg# 


orwp^n 


dto^'h 


D^ypn^n 


y&v 


*y.W"n 


yptp'n 


ppntj>rr 


— 


29#f! 


KP^n 


jse^n 




yp^n 




ypn^'n 




'jrotfn 







wanting. 


yrpi^n 


wanting. 


— 




t : - : -^ 




— 


vw\ 


#W! 


IW* 


ypr^ 


y&vr\ 


g»D#fi 


rp^n 


y&ris>n 


p&#r\ 


l?pt?n 


ypt^n 


PQ&Pfl 


y&pp 


>ira#ri 


*#P#h 


>#pfi&tfi 


vw$ 


I?pt#< 


1W"n 


yprit?^ 


WQtf) 


WP?>- 


Wpg* 


^90^ 


njBss'p 


mjfptfn 


n^p^n 


njjjantfp 


Wpt^i 


iro^e 


WP#h 


Wp£H#i 


rnj^'n 


rujfpt?>n 


ruyptpri 


n:j;pr^*n 


P9#J 


ft?W?3 


yp^'j 


vsnvi 


Fut. apoc. 


1?P?>! 







ymv 



WW® 



ymn 



ypr^'p 



204 




F. VERB 


LAMEDH 




Kal. 


Niphal. 


Piel 


Pret, 3. m. 


T T 


t : • 


**&$ 


3. f. 


mvn 


HNV03 


tlWO 

t : • 


2. m. 


T T T 


x •• : ■ 


nN3flD 

T •• ' 


2. f. 


T T 


nwfaj 


n»¥5 


1, c. 


T X 


♦flKSPM 


wsp 


Plur. 3. c. 


: it 


tttil&j 


W2» 


2. m. 


DilKXP 


DHNVW 


DfiKVD 


2. f. 


P*¥9 


RWPM 


J£»**5?D 


I. c, 


T T 


NKVJW 


mvn 


Inf. 


jjfefjjj abs. (KttB) 


■Kjan «m) 


*WO <**?> 


Imp. m. 


t : 


" T - 


Wftj 


f. 


'K^D 


f -K3TSi1 


»i«g 


Plur. m. 


?kvd 


»«i3n 


wxg 


f. 


t v : 


T V T • 




Fut. 3. m. 


WW 




K2?9! 


3. f. 


won 

t : 


" T 


ttafQp 


2. m. 


t : • 


•• T • 


tf¥9fl 


2. f. 


Wfnn 


^M 


w?Dii 


1. c. 


t : V 


••x V 


RSfDg 


Plur. 3. m. 


«*yp? 


*mw 

: /t • 


3N2©*. 


3. f. 


rtwsnn 

t v : 


T V T • 


ruKvon 

t v ~ : 


2. m. 


wypn 


IKySfl 


WVOP 


2. f. 


ruNVDn 

t v : • 


T V T • 


narasi 


1. c. 


KSttM 


mm 


n^dj 



Fut. apoc. (Jussive) 



Fut. with Suff. 



^wo' 



Tart. act. 



N¥D P ass - NtfO NTO3 



M¥D& 



ALEPH (JO), (§ 49) 




205 


Pual 


Iliphil. 


Iloplml. 


Hiihpad. 


T "• 


*K*vpn 


*mor\ 

t : t 


*x^nn 


t : ". 


n*Wpn 


t : : t 


t : - 


my® 


nNvpn 


r»«on 

t •• : t 


nNVEnn 

T .. - ; . 


mVQ 


ttKSpn 


" : T 


nfcajDJKJ 


WlfO 


♦pwpbn 


•• : t 


WSOW 


««0 


wvpn 


: : t 


aq»Efi 


Dj^vp 


oriNtfpn 


•• : t 


DO»¥OW 


£W¥P 


IO»¥?n 


jpKVpn 


jnN-sfDnn 


tiK¥£ 


m m *w 


ttNVpri 


wsopri 




*i*'¥pn abs ' 


^ (kvdh) NVDH ooron) NVOHn 

" : - t : t •• : t ..-_.. 




K*PD 




KS9W 


wanting. 




wanting. 






mason 

t v : - 




njasonn 


t ■. : 


K>¥p! 


t : t 


KS5C* 


t ■• : 


N*ypn 


mm 

t : t 


MS9W 


N*pn 


arypn 


t : t 


N^pnn 


>Ni*pji 


wvpn 


• : : t 


vsot© 




&rw?8 


t : t 


WSQfl^ 


**¥£>? 


wvp! 


wspy 


«V5P! 


WKSPP 


raatypn 


t v : t 


njKifapp 


wypp 


Hnrari 


«wpn 


w^nn 


t v ". : 


t v : — 


t v : t 


ruNsronn 

t v - : 


WW 

T •. : 


tfVW 


^vpp 


Nvpn: 


NVP! 


* 


$*'¥P! 







N¥ft£ 



anrob 



NVOD 



«3tona 



206 G. VERB PE ALEPH (N"&). § 48. 

Kal. Niphal. Hiphil. Hoplial. 

Pret. 3. m. S?K S^NJ S^Ni! SdNH 



Like the Verb Pe Guttural, in Paradigm C. 



Inf. 



SbK abs. (Stjw Vrwrr ^?d> Srpfcii ^«n 



Imp. m. 


feN 


Srwn 


baan 




f. 


,l 7DN 








Plur. m. 


•iSdk 


etc. 


etc. 


wanting. 


f. 


t : — : 








Fut. 3. m. 
3. f. 




;)fc*i 


S»3B! 


- t: t 


2. m. 


Sskji 








2. f. 


♦Sarin 


etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


1. c. 


•»* 








Plur. 3. m. 


tari* 








3. f. 


nibim 








2. m. 


. torn 








2. f. 


n&sxn 








1. c. 


Sari: 






• 



Fut. Vav Conv. tytft, TBkft 



Part. act. ^N pass. SlDN S*DHJ S^NO SdND 





H. VEKB f'fi (§ 50). 


207 




Kcd: 


Niphal. 


Hiphil. 


Hophal. 


Pret. 3. m. 


•Btt} 


ncftj 


*£»-in 


;mr\ 


3. f. 




t : • 


n^-in 

T " • 


nwn 


2. m. 


etc. 


t : - • 


n^'jin 

t : - • 


win 

t : — •. 


2. f. 




£N?U 


p^in 


^ii^rr 


1. c. 


regular. 


♦£#£ 


>n#an 


w'irr 


Plur. 3. 




Itfa 


iBfyn 


^n 


2. m. 




Dtiettj 


pfl#jn 


bfi^n 


2. f. 




twu 


Jjj^in 


fc^n 


1. c. 




w#p 


ration 


^in 


Inf. constr. 


nw abs - ^^ 


•w an #jp) 


^n #an> 


Bfsn ^ 


Imp. m. 


to 


c'^n 

•• T • 


wn 




f. 

Plur. m. 




■:|t- 

:|t- 




wanting. 


f. 


t : ~ 


t : -t • 


t : •• - 




Fut. 3. m. 


wx 


"T • 


B*4! 


BfJ? 


3. f. 


&m 


B^jiri 


B*in 


&yn 


2. m. 


mn 


•• T * 


b*#i 


wfi 


2. f. 


*#$* 


♦Eton 

■ :|t • 


T*^n 


>b>#i 


1. c. 


wm 


" T V 


t^K 


^ 


Plur. 3. m. 


pk 


: it • 


WW 


u^p 


3. f. 


t : - • 


njtston 

t : - t ■ 


t : •• - 


t : — •. 


2. m. 


W$ft 


: |t • 


Wp$F\ 


itfiui 


2. f. 


t : , - • 


t : - t • 


t : •• - 


n^'jin 

t : - -. 


1. c. 


P£ 


•• T • 


B^ 


tfii 


The length. 


Fut. nwftt 

t : v 


t : t • 


T - - 




Fut. apoc 






^ 





Part. acU 



Wtt p*»- Wtt t^u 



C»«JD 



WO 



208 




I. VEKB PE YODH 




Kal. 




Niphal. 


Pret. 3. m. 


_ T 




*3tfti 


3. f. 


rats* 

t : |t 




ratr'i: 

t : 


2. m. 


rots* 

t : - t 




ra^'i: 


2. f. 


w?ej 




pjtfU 


1. c. 


• : - t 




$6^0 


Plur. 3. c. 


CMS* 

: |T 




o#ia 


2. m. 


D^ 




Di^^'i: 


2. f. 


1^5^: 




fJEffifto 


1. c. 


: - T 




^3^'ii 


Inf. 


fjggf, abs. 


Dr^) -jq> 


*3#*fr 

•• T-" 


Imp. m. 


*3^' 


BTJJ 


3^1 


f. 


'3tf - 


• : • 


■ : |T" 


Plur. m. 


*3# 


H0T 


: t * 


f. 


t : •• 


rutfr 


t : •• t • 


Fut. 3. m. 


1W 


tfv. 


3gW 


3. f. 


2pF) 


vyr\ 


2$fi 


2. m. 


l&ft 


tfyn 


Sig^j 


2. f. 


Wfr 


wyr\ 


♦3B*in 

• : |t • 


L c. 


30% 


Wyt/t 


3B*IN 


Plur. 3. m. 


: |" 


: r 


: |t. 


3. f. 


t : - 


t : - • 


t : •• t • 


2. m. 


!Qt^p 


: r 


totp-tn 


2. f. 


t : ~ 


t : - 1 


rmenn 

t : •• t • 


1. c. 


3sft 


vh?) 


DCTJJ 


Fut. apoc. (Jussive) 




♦ 




Fut. with Vav Conv. 


30. 







Tart. act. 



DC" 



pass. 3^1 



DtTO 



V 'S (orig. V'fl) (§ 51.) 



J. Verb prop. Pe Yodh (*"£) 209 



Hipliil. 



Hoplial. 



*ypsn 


*D^in 


r\yp\n 


t : 


raehn 


rotrtn 


nntrin 


ra^n 


♦rntrirr 


Tncnn 


tt^in 


tt?*in 


D£0g>'in 


omgnn 


pjOtfin 


jmenn 


Mjgfin 


Wip'vi 


3^"in abs - (T ^ n 


^n) 3^n 



Kal. 


Hipliil. 


~ T 


•sn5«3 




T 




rotovr 

t : — 


regular. 


Wl} 




♦JJQJPn 




awj 




WfiOT 




FG99T? 




veerj 



3ft> DID;) ^^jf OD'H) 



awn 



wanting. 









aw 


y&v 


rrcnn 


y&m 


win 


3t?*in 


Win 


qtwi 


w'iN 


DB*IN 


iwv 


mV 


mrrtf'in 


t : - 


Win 


mm 


nuatfin 

f : ■■ 


matron 


ywti 


y&v 



y&: 
yyn 

y&r\ 
ronton 



wn 
wn 

TO? 

mm 

n:n&»n 

t : •■ 




WB 



210 K. VEftB AYIN DOU- 

Kal. Niphal. 



Pret. 3. m. 




*Dp 




- T 


3. f. 




HDD 

, T — 




T _ T 


2. m„ 


nup 




rraoj 

t ~ : 


2. f. 


rrtod 




nap} 


1. c. 


tfVteD 




V31S&J 


Plur. 3. c. 




top 




— T 


2. m. 


nwap 




DI113P3 


2. f. 


fW* 




fSttilM 


1. c. 


utop 




W13DJ 


Inf. constr. 




*±) 


abs. (3UD) 

T 


*Dpn D1D ™ 


Imp. m. 




Db 




3pn 


f. 


- 


'3D 




'3sn 


Plur. m. 




do 




?3Dn 


f. 




nr3D 

T V "• 




nraon 

T V — " 


Fut. 3. m. . 


3D' 

T 




DO? 


3D* 


3. F. 


rion 

T 




3bn 


3pn 


2. m. 


riDn 

T 




ion 


3pn 


2. f. 


^Dfi 




>3pn 


?5Dfl 


1. c. 


Dbx 




3DS? 


• 3DK 


Plur. 3. m. 


T 




OP! 


ttp^ 


3. f. 


nraon 

t v *. : 


rttiDn 

t : 


T V - • 


2. m. 


tion 




ttpn 


ttpfl 


2. f. 


W3DPI 

t v . : 


rmon 

t : 


TV -- 


1. c. 


T 




3pi 


3D} 


Fut. with Vav Conv. 


np*i 








Fut. with Suff. 


'•330* 








Part. act. 


3510 


pass. 


DOD 


DDJ 



BLED (JTJ?) 


■ (§ 52). 




211 


Hiphil. 


Hophal. 


i>iV7. 


JPdaZ. 


■apB 


*npin 


*33iD 


*33iD 


n?pn 


nabin 

T *• 


n?5iD 


nmio 

t : 


QWO 


T "" 


rmiD 

t : - 


mrno 

t : — 


wapn ■ 


rnapm 


05310 


033iD 


Wapn 


Wapirt 


TD5iD 


^33iD 


^PD 


toptfi 


OJ1D 


13310 


oe»i3prj 


Drriapin 


D$331b 


DW31D 


jtjiapn 


jjrapvi 


!0??io 


JS331D 


wapci 


iisDin 


tt331D 


U331P 


*3DH 

" T 


npin 


n?iD 


33io 


2pn 




agio 




S 2DH 
• •• t 

•• * 


wanting. 




wanting. 


nrson 




t : •• 






30* 


33^ 


33iD> 


son 

•• T 


spin 


rnion 


33ion 


Don 

•• T 


spin 


Miori 


D3ion 


'3Dfl 
. .. T 


♦aoin 


WDlj 


>33ion 


DDK 

'• T 


3D1X 


23iD^ 


33iDK 


130' 

•■ T 


npv 


13310* 


•)33iP> 


nygpn 


wawi 

T V ~ 


taWion 


n:33iDn 

T ; — ; 


•■ T 


toDlfi 


i33io^ 


•Qrnon 


rfepri 


nygpvi 


rrrnion 

t : •- 


rmrnon 

t : - ; 


3DJ 

•• T 


3py 


33iD;j 


33iDJ 


Don 

VT - 








'J3P^ < 


:o33p>) 


^3310? 





3D£ 



3D1D 



331DE 



33iD£ 



212 



L. VERB A YIN VAV 



Kal 



Niplial. 



Hiphil. 



Hoplial. 



Pret. 3. m. 


*°p 


*Dipj 


*D*pn 


*Dpnn 


3. f. 


nop 


npipi 


np'pn 


nftpin 


2. m. 


™?p- 


niErtp; 


nto'pn 


wppin 


2. f. 


rw?p_ 


niDip: 


mo'pn 


jippm 


1, c. 


'flop. 


Tnoip} 


♦nto*prj 


>nrppm 


Plur. 3. g. 


»j3 


iDip: 


iD'pn 


iapm 


2. m. 


oriop- 


bWo^p3 


Dpiopn 


Dpppjin 


2. f. 


tf>?P- 


fO 1 ^ 


fWD^pn 


fpppjin 


1. c. 


^P 


wioipj 


ui^prr 


ttOpjirr 


Inf. const. 


*Q1p abs. 


( Q1 P ) *oipn 


# opn »pn; 


Q, P? Dpm 


Imp. m. 


Dip 


Dipn 


Dp.0 




f. 
Plur. m. 




'Dipn 

iiaipn 


^pn 

•in'pn 


wanting. 


f. 


nip 


njopn 


njrspn 

t : |-T 




Fut. 3. m. 


Dip* 


Dip* 


dp: 


DpV 


3. f. 


Dipn 


Dipn 


O'l™ 


Dpjin 


2. m. 


Dipn 


Dipn 


opn 


Dpm 


2. f; 


•onpri 


>pipn 


wpn 


>£pin 


1. c. 


DIpK 


DlpK 


D 'p** 


Dp_1K 


Plur. 3. m. 


1£ip x > 


1Dlp* 


^p. 


iopi> 


3. f. 


rnvpipn 


mvpF) 


ruopn 

T : | •• t 


nippin 


2. m. 


isipn 


iDipn . 


iD'pn 


iDpm 


2. f. 


n^ipfi 


njippn 


T : j •• T 


rczppjin 


1. c. 


Dip: 


T Dipi 


D*p: 


DpIJJ 


Fut. apoc. 


op: 




Dp: 




conv. 


■ D P T xl' 


Dpi! 


bpn 




Fut. with suff. 


>}ffp\ 




99*1?! 





Part. act. 



Dp pass, nip Dip] 



D'PD 



DP1D 



^T). (§ 53). 



M. Verb Ayin Yodh (*»y) § 53. 213 



Piel. 


Pual. 




Kal. 


Niplial. 


*Dpip 


*opip 


*?? 


?3 


to? 


ropoip 


nppip 


™? 


m;? 


rcnm 

T T 


nppip 


nppip 


n;5 


nw? 


t : 


nppip 


nppip 


n:? 


nira 


nitty 


mqnp 


>nppip 


»nb 


♦nira 


'nitty 


lopip 


ibpip 


=oa 


IT? 


wtti 


Dpppip 


onppip 


Dnja 


onir? 


oni^y 


jrn.tppip 


jnppip 


J$© 


Ifiw? 


I£»«nj 


uppip 


^ppip 


'liD 


uw? 


tittOJ 


opip 


spip 


T5 


(|3) 


*p3H 


Dpip 


■ 




r? 


pan 


'DDTp 


wanting. 




^2 


as Dl'pH 


rUDDfp 

t : •• l 


j 










DDip^ 


Dpip] 




pa; 


113' 


opipn 


apipn 




f*5fi 


as Dip' 


DEipn ' 


npipn 




m 




'PPipn 


♦ppipn 


• T 




Dpipfr* 


DpipN* 




m 




^opip* 


^Dpip? 




U'3' 

' T 




rnppipn 


mppipn 


t ■.• ■ : 




lopipn 


lopipji 


T 




njopipp 


n^ppipn 


nrran 

Tv - : 




Dpipj 


Dpip4 




v?i 










131 

pp. 








^ 





oaiDo 



DOiDO 



p. JO 



J13J 



214 N. VERB LAMEDH 





Kal. 


Niphal. 


Pieh 


Pret. 3. m. 


# nS| 


*rf?# 


*rh* 


3. f. 


nriS 


nrh# 


n 0?4 


2. ra. 


T . |T 

T ' T 


o4« 


w ,? ?4> n^4 


2. f. 


why 


JV&4 


jtVj 


' 1. c. 


wSj 


W*?44 


wa 


Plur. 3. c. 


"** 


&44 


& 


2. m. 


Ptr^ 


00^244 


ttf?^ 


2. f. 


i'?^ 


Ji7?i : 4 


\ri% 


1. c. 


wS| 


^44 


wb) 


Inf. constr. JTi^JI abs - (r|l? ? (P oet - ty 


T • 


'hfoi*h* 


Imp. m. 


*rfa 


•nSiin 


■nW 


f. 


^ 


,j ? T ?n 


^ 


Plur. m. 


^ 


•i^n 


^ 


f. 


t v : 


nrSan 

T VT • 


T V* 


Fut. 3. in. 


n !?4? 


n 1 ?^ 


nW : 


3. f. 


n^n 


n^n 


n ^W 


2. m. 


r&n 


n^n 


n^fl 


2. f. 


^ 


%i 


,l ?4J? 


1. c. 


nbitf 


nSiiN 


nW 


Plur. 3. m. 


&« 


'& 


&i 


3. f. 


ny^fi 


nyjwn 


ny^in 


2. m. 


T ^40 


T ^in 


$4fl 


2. f. 


n y*?4fl 


m^|ih 


rn^n 


1. c. 


n ^ 


V T ' 


^44 


Fut. apoc. 


^ 


T • 


^ 


Fut. with Suff. 


•4^?4! 




^4! 


Part, act. 




n^44 


nSjp 



HE IffY'hh (§ 54). 215 

Pual. Hiphil. Hophal. Hiihpad. 

nrf?y ^0^ n 0^0 tv&lPft 

$ti ufi?* rfhxn rvSjn n^inri 

»n»9i ?*T^W w!?in T^ITO 

& nSin Ajn &jih 

op^i DtT^in Dp^io od^iw 



nfrj <*? 


niS^n ff^s* 


niSri <**£» j 


li^nn <n^nr» 




TfSjft 




nWin 




,l ?jn 




'•Sinn 


wanting. 


fciri 


wanting. 


sbjnn 




t v : " 




r V , !?4^.»? 


rhv 


rtfa* 


nSr 


nWv 


nVjri 


rtari 


nSVn 


nWin 


nWn 


n^n 


n^n 


n^nn 


4iii 


6an 


♦bjn 


«?arin 


rfrie 


n^N 


n^K 


PninN 


fti 


?w 


3» 


ifeirv 


rwWi 


rwSjn 


n^ri 


rttWiii 


&n 


&h 


tan 


reinn 


n^Wn 


nrS^n 


nySin 


m\Wtfj 


n% 


n ^ 


#?ij 


T rf?ir>3 




*»« 




S#V 


'hil 



n^jo rfao rfaa rtano 



216 0. REGULAR VERB 

Suffixes for 1 Sing. 2 Sing. m. 2. Sing, f. 3. Sing. m. 

Pret. Kal. 3. m. ^StOp ^StDp ?\hw '' ^ ,: > 

•^i= 1 = 1-1: |tt|i i^tohC 

s. f . ^ ^ ^ ™M 

- t j: } 

^n^top ) ^innStop ) 

2. m. • -{■ ~ i: \ T ? : "' : ( 

W?9p ) 1r V^ ) 

i. c. — ^fl^i? T^H ^^ 

piur. s. c. >^Spp ^Dp rpbap ^rrtapp 

2. m. tynSbp — — ironSep 

i. c. — ' ^Stop ^uS&p nnn^Sep 






Inf. Kal 

suff. 



L :!t > 'l :,t > H7Dp HtDp 

ff.verb. >J7tDp$ ^p$ '" :|T :JT 



Imp. Kal. ^SliPp ^?p T 

Fut. Kal. 3. m. t^g^ ^ttp? ^p> ^StOp' 

3. m. *jWi* iS^p^ ttS&p* 

with Nun epenthetic »■ : » : " T '-' : '•" j '•' : • : ' 

Plur; 3. m. *jfoCjj2 ^*?p? ^7^ ^Bj?? 



Pret. Piel. qjpgjfj ^j} TjSt?)p lSt?p 



WITH SUFFIXES. § 42—47. 217 
3. Sing.f. 1 Plur. 2 Plur. m. 2 Plur. f. 3 Plur. m 3 Plur.f. 

rhgp : tehtgfi D^ep, pV^R Qt ?9p figfe 

rmhufi vthf^ D3rfe?FJ R^&p D ^9p I^R 

p*r&ep wr^ep — — &the$ P^P 

irnV^P — D^nS^ p^ep D'fi%p pfl^p 

mSa^ wtef) o;nbt?p p^!?p D! ^£P pNpj? 

mii%f3 wn^top — — ain^cop) pritap 

nu^jfj — D 5^p JS^P B^/bp P*Vejj 

nStpp. wSep wStpp f^ef? D^t?p T i^ep 



5**} vhap — — thw — 

nbtops " :|t " :,t 

^xjy\ ^W- D ?V t ?^ feV^P' D ^?j? I^)?- 

ngfcipjg? u 1 ?^ — — — — 

nra?j? ^7&p! M&bj? p^9p> o^tpp* p%p. 

nStpp i:St?p w^Bp R&Qp o^?p i^t?p 

28 



218- 



P. MASCULINE 



1. Declension. 


s 


E 


c o : 


1ST D 




i 


i- 




ii- 


iii„ 


Sing, absol. 


hero Tjajj 


hand -p 

T 


star 


M13 

y 


name 'Qty 


— constr. 


liiti 


T 




^DiD 


Q& 


Light Suffixes. 


*T&3 


• T 




■ T 


V& 




?pia5 


^ 


t 


w* 


^W 


Grave Suffixes. 


Bsniaj 


D ?T 


033313 


&2W 


Plur. absol. 


dni^ti? 


P Du. QV-p 


• T 


n\i2p 


— constr. 


rtijj 


t 




>?3to 


rrtoi?> 


Light Suffixes. 


niaa 


-T 




- T 


♦niDt? 


Grave Suffixes. 


bM3i 


D3HV 


D5'55i3 


D3»niD^' 




Fourth Declension 




F I 
King T|7P 


F T H 


Sing, absoh word ta ")^ ta 7 grape *JW old 


TPX 


book *")£D 


— constr. 


^3*7 


m 


m 


$? 


^5P 


Light Suffixes 


* t : 


vyy. ^p! 


wo 


H9P 




w 


TO W: 


^&9 


T)3D 


Grave Suffixes 


* 0713*1 D?53J? : DMp.t 


D 33 1 ?^ 


03^0 


Plar. absol. 


onyi D^y. O'iptt 


do^D 


onsp 


— constr. 


H31 


>3# ' 


m 


^O 


HSP 


Light Suffixes 


— r : 


'3^ : * 


m 


'3 1 ?? 


- t : 


Grave Suffixes 


Dpnyr 03*341? bs^pt 


D3^9 


D3H3P 










FE3VEinNri3NTE 


1. Declension. 


SECOND 


DECLENSION. 


Sing, absol. 
' — constr. 


law npn 
nprj 


year ftjj^ 

T T 


sleep rUtr right- npH5f 
T eousness ,T T : 


Light Suffixes 


row 


• t : 




■ t : 


♦np-?¥ 




w* 


^nx>" 




w 


Wif 


Grave Suffixes 


D3npn 


Dairotf 


D3ru^' 


D30P1V 


Plur. absol. 


nipr? 






nii# 


nipny 


— constr. 


mpn 


nug* 




■ — 


nipiy 


Light Suffixes 


♦nipri 


♦watf 




■ — - 


>rvmy 


Grave Suffixes 


D3*nipn 


nyt)W 




— DD?fllhnv 



NOUNS. § 61—66, 



219 



DEC 

ctaff Spp 

i?m 

D37R9 

nVSpp 

♦rrfcpD 

orrnibps 



L E N S I O N . 

V. VI. VII. 

g DT)P enemy ^ ««* n?h 



3. Declension. 



DT 1P 






>3*N 

9!** 
9?N 



nrn 
nh 

D3?n 

Drwh 



D33H^ 

9ni 



I 1™ 



r r|j3 



T'7p 



D E 

lad ^ 

TO 

Tig 



C L 

power n^ 

ma 
•TOM 

- t : 



E N S I. O N . 
worker) fruit ^3 dealh^Q, olive fyf 






'1? 
coma) 



^JJfi pl f 



only in mod 
era Hebrew 



mo. n7 

*mo. TM 

yjniD. ?jmr 

— dtp? 

•mp. >m 

♦nio- w 

DDTTO- D3TT? 



HNTOTJISrS- § 69-72. 

Third Declension. 

queen nsSs word mOX desert H^n 

t : • t : t 



FOURTH DECLENSION, 



fo?e 
^n?So 



tton* 



■nmrr 






D3n?nr? 
mrjn 

vtfmn 



r>p;iv 
♦flpji* 



runs 



oDTnrte oDTrhoN opwann 



o?np:v 
nipiv 
nipiv 

♦mpji* 



DDfUTO 

v : : x -. 

nuro 
Dentins 



CHRESTOMATHY 



I. Abraham is commanded to offer up his child as a 
burnt sacrifice. (Genesis 22). 

Tjn^nj- 1 ]-)^ Jpnng rcmp np>n :^n ratf! Drr^e vSn 2 
D^nSyro nn'^np^-^ 2 ?f?~i?) pOVrntf Wtf?"^*? 
if?.a3 orroN d?^i : rf?# noa nigftj pnnri -ina Sjr nSy 1 ? 3 
133 pny? rtJi 3 intf vjin >&-&$ np_n tjbfirtty &5r}5 
: D'rtWi ifnpangw Dipsn-^ ^ibpjn nS'y n?g : yp;n 
: prno Dipan-nx *m wjrriN DiTdn aim >£»S^n 01*34 

I t •• I t - v :-- 1 w » :■ t t : - t • ~ • • : - 

-n# prraN np*i ♦*D? ,t ??* nrnpr) niqntpty rts-nj; n^e 

-n*n ^rt-jiN 1T3 np*i 11a prop-by c*?*i nSyn w 

V3N Dirarbtf pw T&Sh :nn! 4 dd>3#> fi^i »^oni r 

nw D^Kni w$n mn np*n »ja >5)|n npjn >:dn npiw 

nbyS ntrn 2 iWisrT o^rtS^ p»t$3K nprin jnS'y 1 ? ntrn § 

D^^niSnpKn^DipJQiT^waji r^fTD?^O^v33 ? 

-njj ipjn D*vjjrrr^ Tjhjgj mrprrn^ orrnN dp jgg 

oh-on nbw : dw Sped n3r&n-Sy ink ote$ in pny 10 

rj^p rbx anp?i : i j;rn# bnpS nj?pgpprn£ n0 iT-n# 1 1 

iQifa :^n roan ornat Dnn3N -0**1 own-p mm 12 
.... .. _ T T . „ T r . _ .. _ . _ T _ j . T . 

^T T nny? nowp iS i?pjrht& s ^yxrh$ rff r thpfrk$ 

r-ipp ^Trrrjs fjjsrns n?^n *6i nn$ pft^j* B: «bp9 

vripsrpcn rn^ nn** b?$Tijrn **!!! ^JTfltf onn?** wjjjj 13 

w$$ : ttji; nnn nS'yS vh^H ^^0" n ^ nj25 Erra^ ^79 l * 

nngovn 6 ipN> T#g njo! wn? Ninn Dipsn-D^' ornjN 



Chrestomathw 221 

is : DWn'p my? ornzvrbx Prin? tjnSd inpn : 7 rwr nin* 

Djn novrh& ^'$ b\try\ dw'h '531:33 sprirflfi! nyjK 
wfsjri via Sb T]03 ciaprn :v ?>^ TJSS^ n» *j£lt b*TS 
i.9»^i«Dj3n vnjtt-S# D0T38 ^1 •■..%? njf^^' "i#g 3p# 

:jdb>" -ttoa orroK 2^1 m&> -wrS** hit 

*- _ T .. . . T T . - ._..._ * _ T ... T . _ 

1 § 87, 2. 2 § 84, 2 3 § 97, 2. 4 § 92, 4. 5 § 83, 7. 
.6 § 76, 2, a. 7 ji-iy the south-western hill of Jerusalem to which 
iT*to» with Solomo's temple on it, belonged, was called Hi IT *VT» 
il^n nn or fuller HIIT n^5 "in (Isa. 2, 2.) the templS-mount- 
ain. About this mountain the proverbial adage was current: 
HNT niJT 1H5 on the mountain of God one is seen, i.e. is pro- 
vided for. 8 with 3 °f the person or thing by whom one swears; 
here God swears by Himself. 9 § 111, 1. 



II. Birth of Moses. His flight to Midian. (Exodus 2.) 

Vhfti n#&0 T©1 J^-nrniX np_*i nS n^p b*n rjS^n 
sh^-kSi :ottv n#W wjSmti ron mb*o ink *nm p 

npft) nor© 2 rnpnni rqj nan irnprn l w&sn nij; 
» 8 33fOni nwn n&ip-bj; ^D3 Dg>rn n^n-n^ ns D^ni 
5 prnS rinrn? nnni :h n^;;np 4 nj?iS p'nnp inro* 

rpra nnnn-nN *qni n'tf*n T-bj^rto^h ?r,nhj;ji iMT^K 
e i^n-n^ 5 in$o : ni nnorn : nnpni nnofrrng nS^'ni tjion 
T^p^ni : njonapn n^p npKni vSjj Sbnn\n;p njyvuni 

rinagn jo nprp n#N rjb Tftnjjj ^Kn rljns-ni^N inns 
8 np^n rjSni ^h riinrns nV^Nni : nl^riig rjS prrn 
9"ax 6 ^7H rijrnrn? nS np^ni :n^n osjtng anRfli 

"tej n^'Nn npni ?p??rfis \nx r m*k wpyr\) run n^r? 



222 Chrestomathy. 

Nnpni pb rh-w\ rijnrn? 1 ? fa«3fll n^n S^i : inp.^rn 10 
onn ovpra wi nnrwrp Dt?n-fp >3 sprint ntro W11 
rt|d nvp eft* #*1 onS^p? »tq 1^ xsci ntpto Sn;n 
tb* ^rp tr"^ jw >? kth n^J riD (£** tvngs n3jnrj*i2 
pt^jfw' n-ini >#n Dig *fi£i :Sin3 irop^n nvpb 13 
sjp'fr >p npK-n r^i ngo rvph y&j% np*n d^i on3iM4 
-rus* jrann n#$? 19k nrw ^nSn wSj; DBfcft^ s^k 1 ? 
rfttj rijn? jbg^ : nann jrna pa no^ingte KT*tn¥pn 15 
rtjna ^3D hlto mart rntfffTK rinb tr'pnn nrn nmn 
niBfo^ jnp |rp7i nK3n-7j? 3^?i pnp-f^p acnie 
jjnqs 1 ^ nip^'nS o>prnrrri$ mK^i^n^w nmym_ 
9 ;D T ^rn^ p#n jj^'n wa dj^j 9 Ditrw o>jnn mwn 
:dttt ^ 10 jjr;np 2115 np^v})?3^ bwjrrS*? n^arms 
«^ nSn rtTjtui D'jnn to uWn nyp #>Kjnp&mi9 
m ry$ jiJag? n H:t nob »*t) vrqr^ np*n :|*&n-Ji# ps^ao 
B^trms r©B>S n#o ^ii :orrS S^^n 1S fsop b*$j?i 
Dfe^j i&trn# tfij^j |3 n^ni tn^b 1 ? in3 rrisrw (Wl 22 
ftb*i onn own bwa >nn j'n^M paa >n»n ti tdk ^23 

tt- ■• t • -t • t- • ;- t ■ : T J v V : ' ,'-T " ~ T 

bnj;w Sjjni ^pi niDgn-p Sn^-^.3 inborn© rfjp 
nan anp^rn?< D'rtS$ yn0 :nnn#rjp h^$n%# 
nti :^jjrn*n pnyrn?? Dnmnj? innrn^ dtiSn^ 

so»riSK..in3 ^fc? qst^ D^rrSj* 

1 The sibilants ¥, £> and the letters 7, pO sometimes are doub- 
led for the sake of euphony (Dagesh euphonic). 2 The third f. s= 
sufF. often without Mappik : H— instead of H - ♦ 3 f° r DVTlFn 
cf. § 12, 6, B. 3. and § 14, II. 1. T 4 inf. of JTT § 51, 4. 5 § 93, 3, 
« Hi. II. of rbl (only in imp. fern.) regul. ^litypl . 7 § 55 > b- 

s ro^nm ="n^iiii fr. nVi. 9 Di£h:n for n^'n^i, the 

t v : ' - t v : • - t x : t : 7 I : t : ~ 

masc. suffix sometimes used irregularly for the fern, thus DJJ^ for 
PN*¥ . 10 § 106, 9. 11 § 94, 6. Note. 



CflRESTOMATHY. 223 

III. The Appointment of Moses. (Exodus III.) 

ms* Kffn jno frts Ufin inpp \m m m -ti^ njC? woi 
arp^g jqg train D\i^n in- 1 ?*? ion ranpn ina p«fr» 
efts iW miDn mm arm mon mno twrefaj vSk mm 
s n^iprrn** nan^i K|-rnpK n^D ■npwi 2 : 73» raya njpm 
4niNiS iD »a mm ao-i :mon iynnvS jmb 3 nrn Siiin 

: • t x : : y . - : ■ - y - t - 

: mn igKi n#b ngto ip#i rrjpn rpng miS^ 178 kin*i 
5-)^ Dipsn >? ^n byn ^bsQ'^W bSn sipm^N ioa-i 
6?jon »cng »3JK ipKi :»w 5 tr'ip-npiK vh% npiy nm 

9 V33 neb inpi. ripr. »r6**i pnv> >nS# omfttf t^ 
7»CT Wl mn mm ip*n jjwl^err 1 ^ emtio am 

'fipm >p v^jj ^pp >njw* Qpj5jnrn8i onvp? ig^K b# 
8p>stn-p iri^rfa arsfo mp fowfo ii.Ni :vpKpp-n^ 

-Sk com sSn 6 npr per 1 * nnrfri n ?^ YH^f xvn 
gnnyi j'wajrri wn *nwn 'I^CH wm ^jypn Dipp 

i#8 rrrVn-n^ W8TM1 ^n* h»3 W*>TJ3 npyy_ mn 

Kjnm Hsie^ ^#1 n^ nnjri :nnx d>vdS onyp 
u«p DSiSjfir^ ntpto iptfi J.onvpP S^^P ♦gjffiK 

tonygp Sang? yp-aNJ m*M *p] ripp-S^ rjSx >p »±k 
i2^^in? ^nnSt^' »a» >p wan ^frnn r^y mn^->p ipK'n 
iz*\mi : njn inn S# wrhgnrrift ppim onvgp bijnvK* 

dhS 'mow S«i^ ^-Sn to »±n mn D'nWrStf rteb 

v t • ; - t : •• t : * *■ : v t • t •• • • v: t 

-vdk no io^-ng >Vrigio o^Sg *jrbp> Dy#E38 ♦riSx 
ui£Nvmn8i#8 mn^ ngb-Stf btfSs ipxn :d?iSk 
15 my np^i :sp>S*? ^nW 8 mrr^ ^jn^ ^pb ng>vn rto 

djton 'rtSx mm S^is?! 03"bK ng^n ra rr^g-^ b^k 



10 



224 Chrestomathy. 

W-m nyhtf unbtr apy> niWi pnr ^nba Dmaa Tiba 

• : V v " -: • - t : | •>;- •• •• | t : • •• v: t t : - •• v: 

nn nnb nar nn obyb 

1 § 107, 7. Note. 2 § 37, Note I. 3 § 94, 4. 4 In the East a 
mark of respect and reverence. 5 § 83, 6. 6 const, st. part. fern, of 
y\\ , 7 1 remain always the same, I am unchangeable. 8 With this 
name the tetragrammaton HiiT in the following verse is identical. 
(See § 18, I. Note.) The correct pronunciation of the latter was 
Jahaveh or Jahveh, according to the Samaritans Jake, 



IV. The Proclamation of the Decalogue on- Mount 
Sinai. (Exodus 19. 20, 1—18.) 

2 njn ova onvp p$? ban^ia nay 1 ? *t^Vf 9 * ^'"ira 1 
*>anba orm wo nana Wan dhw won : »yb id-id was 
anpn oTibarrbK nby ruwsi : 3 nnn na bantr OKrfrm 3 

t| : • - • v: t v t w t v t t v v •• t : • t I - •- 

♦id*? Tiim apy n>ab idnd ria iD**b nrrrrjb rotr vba 
-by Dana w&n onrab wy ntrfc omn ona :b*nfe» 4 

r- v : v x v t ■ t : • : • ■ ^t v r: v • : v - •• t : • 

♦b'pa iiwn y w"-dk nrffii : »ba v$m K3*n D*n«$ HM§ 5 
-ba *b-*a Dwrrbaa nb^D >b Dn»m *rma-ntf bmbe*i 
onann nbs #inp m tnrta nabbb ♦b-vrrn dani : p^n e 
oyn »jpn *npn n^o *an :bNnt^ ua-w nann nt5>N7 
«pn irftrv vr« ntfa nb^n onanrrba rw Dir^b Dt?ns 

*—, — t : t ■ :• —. v •• t • t : - t " v " : * v t- 

npD as?"n nfefltt njrr ngTni^N b'a nban Tjjtj D^rrba 
♦aii* run n#b-bg ninj np«n jnin;-b# djjh n3n-n$9 
?pa-bii *\®y. H3i3 dj;h yoGf. Tiaya $£j ajn ^W *a 
nm* ntitfn : mn^ oyn nanmN n#'b nan obiyb wdk* 10 

t : - t : v "t t •• : • v v t w : • -:- 

: Dnbbt^ 1D331 ^O?* 1 D1 ^ Dr ?^pl D #T^ ^ n^'b-b k x 
-ba *a»sb nin^ nn^. »^b^"»n Dig *3 vh^n avh D^bJ vni : 11 
oab nbwi ib^b a^o oyn-riN nba^ni : wo nn-by D^n 12 

V t t •• • t "t i t : - : • : t • - ^- "t t 

wn-«b jhov nib nna j;^n-ba mvpa w^ ina ruby 13 



Chrestomathy. 225 

tfS Bftr 4 DK nonar*DH m» rfr-iN bpo' Sipo-o t ta 
frEDjjrrn^ frato twin nro fovi nsn 5 7?ti tpa? nw 
is u'p nn) : nnn nw?fl fc?*Wl niq&rrjp Dti^KO fttnp 4 ? 

J##5 tiBty s 5g& ^? niH! ^ TV n#g >$?p iS:> jfcty 

196 ptni rpin nafrnVip w) ntfp rvnirty Tssv^gari 

irw dt?Sk n5i!i :Sip5 ^J£ b^SCn ^? ngto nap 

, -: I v y: x : • T - v •• x • t : - r 

s-by onrttf DTng rf? ivrr-*6 jdhdj; mao onyp p#5 

4 ntftfL^o orasfr "^ ^oitSdi Sp9 ^nirj/n *& : 'yg 

5 dh t ' nxjp^n *6 :pxS nrrpD o?P3 ngto nnrippaa 

ra$ jtg nps »|p *?» ^c&g rrin? >±k 9 8 &"!?)# *6l 

eo^a*!? npfi nt#n i 9 *x&?? d^t^d^'W'"^. d%^# 

7jKit£^ ^rlS^ ninr"D^-n» Kfrn n 1 ? pivp npfe^ '3DN 1 ? 

s-jik lo nirjr jjotf*? tot^n*? K»H^8f W ^np^K^5 

9 : ^npN^p-b? 12 rr^jn -op n avi fy£& • iP'lp*? fiawi Di> 

wrtD^Sp- 14 ^ rr^yn 14 kS ^.^nimpfd^ jsa^o "Din 

:Tjnr^'?n^'N* ^:Y^pny sjOQKl ?pQ2 ^51 ^ fin*? 

iit^rrng ptfrrnw D^otrn-nx nirr n^ D»pfn#tf © 

Dims nin; rp3 p-Sj; WXV ovg ran Di-n^-^-n^i 

12 ?p9j fo-w jyp 1 ? ^©ntha ^?N*"n^ 13? : ^^pn_ ri|^n 

is kS : 15 nrui kS :rjS jro ^friSg njrrptftf rrp-wnr Sy_ 

n nann kS :np.s> n# ^jr.3 n^n-aS jnijn kS :*]&jji 

T-torji iniBn inD*n nrun ^p. n#K iDnn- k sS ?pp n>s> 

isDn^^n-n^) nViprrrust ono Dj^n-S^t) :?pr& n#g Sbi : 

: p'rnp npjffl. wjn qj;n aqn \z% inn-nx) n$j#r? Sip rwj 

17TDJ5S ? wTn-bN Dp-S k H ntrD npNh jniDrjg) D^sf 

29 



226 Chrestomathy, 

Ija55jfi^g ttflfe w#Jn nnjni D^K.n N3 ojnx nioj 

1 t^*ir? the new moon, the first day on which the new moon is 
visible. ' 2 On the same (the first) day. 3 The Sinai. 4 § 117. 
5 -jjWi 1W12 or fuller ^fi pp3 tjjPtt (Jos. 6, 5.) to Wow 
the trumpet in protracted sounds, i. e. continually. 6 § 105, 7. 
7 pt^fl face, thenperso?* generally, ^±3 my person, myself. 8 0^31^ 
not Ho. but Kal = D"73I^ ♦ 9 7 denotes here: as to, «ra£/i. respect 
to. io § 105, 4. ii § 85, T 4. b. 12 § 102. 7. 13 § 118. 14 § 98, 1. 
15 § 104, 2. 



V. Moral Laws. (Leviticus 19, 1—4, 9—18.) 

Santera mrSs-^N naa : ioN 1 ? Wo-Sn ww 13-n A 
:d^sSk ww w rhp »a win owip duSk wdjo 
: D?^rt 7^ w t W *J» rioi^n ♦oni^-injji w^yn ?3$ i£N 2 v% 3 
WW ^ D3S *QSn kS npDD >Hbft DVb^w^ u^r^su 
^w m$ 4 wbn *b Dp^>x ■vyjrn# a D3")Vp3^ : 05?Ei^ 9 
tanfi SSirn K7 gsnsi roj^n *6 ?|7Vp : top^y^p^io 
: Dp^rlS^ mw ^ an** nr #P ^1 ^ B^? ^ ?jjjh5 

hwyrriih rWw^ ?pf?if d^tb» fibril lj^6 W'313 
-*& nprn^^nK^wn^i }fev*6 ^jv*6i ^jn;n#u 
>$t ^tp$n nxy) Str'39 jrin *6 tj# ♦jgfrj tshn S^pn 

kS?|W_3 Spn^n-^S :^m?# bst^n pi¥3 'flii ye'.ij 
^33*73 ^nN-n^ *wsir&b Iriiw ♦& ijiri 5 dt^_ ibjgrj 17 
N^bpn-^ i»WJ vfy T xwrrx 1 ?) ^Wpimsi w3in 03ini8 
:ww qgt ?p&3 6 ?]07 n3nN , i Tj£?l! *i3"fi$ ^n 

1 § 100, V. 1). 2 § 98, 1. 3 The inf. with suff. like the Seghol- 
ato ^?L?p sometimes has Kubbuts. cf. § 45, 1. and § 66, 11. 4 § 106, 9. 



Chrestomathy. 227 

5 /J? TtDjf to stand up against, Q*7 the blood, i. e. the life, the 
slandererer standing up against the life of the slandered (Ibn Esra) . 

6 D/1N with accus. : to love in the widest sense, with 7 of the person: 
to bestow love upon one, to be devoted to. (Fuerst. L3x.). 

VI. The Priests Benediction. (Num. 6, 22—27.) 

II HbjeS vsHao phn-Sn -di : ioxS n^o -Sn rrifp "firm 
24 : xpp^n njrr rp-n> : diiS * tidk brw! y?-f^ tetdii rra 
26rj7 Dgn ?$w 105 nirr **&♦ : 2 ^rn ^fW vjfi rflrr; ■*£ 

• -: t -: • ~: - •• t : • •• : ^- • : v t : t 

1 § 105, §. 2 § 52, 8. 



VII. Exhortation to love the One God. (Dent. 6, 
4—9.) 

O t : • t : - t : TV t : v: t : •• t : • ^ - ; 

can^n vrri jjjiKtrtjM ^'or^ ^35^53 ^$»t 

^a 1 ? ^jwi :^3.?Hk d1 ^ *P? '3JN "«?& n^xn 

:^p^ ^33^31 HT13 2 ^3^ ^J?33 ^3^'3 bb W^T) 

9 -S3? nrqrpi : ?pyg pg rifl&b 1 ? vro ^ip# r»wk D£ng>pi 

1 Refers to DnTtil ♦ 2 § 51, 7. 



VIII. Exhortation to revere God and to observe His 
commandments. (Deut. 10, 12 — 22.) 

l21 nNn^-DN»3T]^p bm s$h& rrirr no hvrp\ nnjri 

*-:- : t ~: ~ : t t : t : v v t | v v: t : 

i3rnrr rviyp-n$ invh :^t? : ^?^"^?T^3 rpjjSg mrr 

14 ^rtS^ npS jn : rjS did 1 ? Di*n rpyp ??j$ i^v rnprrnw 

1 5 p&n ^rpx® p^ : nrnt^-S:^ yim ow'n *gj$ d w'n 



.228 ClIRESTOMATHY. 

owh-Sdo dm mnm nyn® toi dtvik i-QrW? nirr* 

• w — t t • v t v •' -: - r T :-;• - : • - t t -: - : t : 

DTi^rt tfug DSi^r? ♦iiSsj wn oyrtbx nin? >3 my 17 
nnw nja> *&) ef$ m\-kh !#$ anuro i^n b"-urr Skh 

:nSpgn on^ iS n;ib -u nriNi mo^i Din* tog^p ntr'jMs • 
njiifns? tpnvp p^3 djttt onro n-n-ni? Dron*^ 
^n :#3ffi ip^n prin im i?^n inK *ryn ^0^21 

^rpfc m tfaj 4 fl^ai^a : ?pyg 1*0 n#£ n^n 3 nini an 22 
: 5 :nb own o?iM ^D%* nin) ?jpfc> nnjn npnyp 

1 Inf. of ^ cf. § 30, 4. 2 as it is this day, just now, h § 81, V 
4 § 92, 7. 5 § 84, 8. 



IX. Appointment of Joshua to succeed Moses. (Joshua 
1, 1-9.) 

- 2 }? ##in;-S# nin* -m?n*i nin* -q# ngto nio nro? 1 vtji 1 
-n# -b); : Dip nnjn no ^31; n#o nW? ngto nn^'p pj2 

run ttoWn ^aisnb j-n^nrW wdi ietoo mm hsk^ 

. . ~ 1 T . .. . T . . _ .. ., .. . . _ . .. _. _ . _ . . . T 

*hft*ti D*n-njri 5 ow?n p# bs ivjsnn^ Smn. nmn njrj 

wS'3 t rp£ L > #w 3^w"kS :d:dVd*i iW #»#n Ninas 
q5$#"K'b} rj5>st hi rjpy rrritf 'ngto-Dj; wn ng*p ^0 
n#g p>s*rrn^ njn D^rrntf b>mri nrj« >3 p?o pin 6 
ipfipS lap pp. prp pi tads nnS on^ 1 ? ♦Jiwastyr 
mt? mon-Sx *^3K ng>b ^y mg*? m T inn-^ nwb 
n£pp b*id»-nS :rjSn ngte b33 ^?^n |j;pS batofcn pp»8 
m^j;S iora jroS nS^Si 7 ddv 13 mm^iDD nrn minn 

J"-.- T'-T T T'T:|- •.- T 



Chrestomathy. 229 

-. . . _ t : J v t : .•-•:- t t - r : 

^tp$ rrttv ?]$# *3 nnn-SN 1 ! f^n"S?< jmi prp ^ww 

1 § 102 Note. 2 § 73, 6. 3 § 86. 4 § 96, 2. 5 All tlie in- 
terior of the Phenician inland. 6 The Mediterranean Sea. 7 § 56, 
I, 2. e. and§ 85, 4. b. 



X. David slayeth the giant Goliath. (1. Sam. 17, 1 — 54.) 

2-bhk) bwv) :ow Dg{£> np.nrj>:ri rtaiferps urn n-nrpS 

naopb nppbp ttpjw rhxn pptf? wrjj tepao Ssoi^ 

3-Sk anby S*ntrn rra nnrrSN DHby owSm : dwSs 

5 i^rrbj; n^m intoi : rnn ni&N ww irru nap w" ni!?| 

D^XTijrbn jin^'n bp^'pi t^aS win D^pj^p jinjri 

e w$sp pg n#rq pTpi vW^J? fi#nj nnyoi : n^ra b^pjp' 

7 S.n? D^i?^' niNp w" in\?p repSi d'Jhn -vti»p irvjp p fji 

b *?#■*» rb^p-Stt anp-n ip#n :v^? T]Sn mvn KW1 

toe^sr? >:ok KiSp n^pSp rpj;S wyn nsS DpS ip#i 

9 on^rf? Sdvdk : h$ Tn e*n DpVn? Sw^'S D*p%ripNl 

owm vnam iS-Sdik ^n-djo o>-nyS ddS ii»rn usm tin 

V • : • • • • : - • -: ■ : • t"-:~ v t • t : ■ t • : 

loTtt* WTO ^8 W^D 1pK»i JttpK Dpp^lDHDJ^uS 

f«rsTt 8 «irp a nWo ^e6#D h?tp# ^p^ai Sik^* 

fet?^'ib^ rT'Tinj cnS rv?p n?n won* ^-[3 iTil Hns 

: ••- • t -: - t l|-T t • t : :t t : : 

otfi npp^p 1 ? bw^-npN ttbp 6 d^P >^r*3| fi?>V 
run** imtytoi niMn nwb*t noi-ibsa *obn -i^n y» ntrbtr 



230 Chrestomathy, 

nm lata ohi^n n0w japn wn th 1 ! : ruptr >^Wrn 14 
vra vax i&rn^ nynS Swtr' Sy_p 7 acn $H n vyi : Swb> J 5 
.♦ovo^aiN a^pvan^rn 03077 W?9<n tstyi : 8 onS 16 
ft^2l n?n K>Sp T n ngw ?f jjk 1 ? arnp ti? irb W npa*3 17 
Sfrrtrr Tip n-i^ : nN*| j^rrxV n^iqsn prn njn Dp 1 ? 18 
tko oiS^'S npfin rrnK-nso fi^rr nt^S wan rh\xn 
irwi b&ya *wife» tf**n?ai nam Vikb>1 :npn io Dnany 19 

t •• t | v •■ : •■ t : • • t : t •• : t : | t ■ t t ■-_ -: 

•hy. jK^n-n^ ete-n h^aa nHDat^i :owS$roi? cranio 
12 awn brim n^nysn *on # ftttf n^'Kar^n n ^^ ^^ 

-Sj; v*?jjd tfVirrfitf Iti aton :nanj/p nNnpS n|ng"fr 22 
: DiWS vn^ Wn Kan nany&n pn o*San noitf t 

T : tv: - : • ~ t- t t -: - - I tt- ... - .. _ 

iD^*n^?3n rrba rr^jr Dyarr ^ n|ni osy 1310 Nm : 23 
: *hM yo^n n^ri enana nann ewSs manyaia ruo 

• T ^ - : •- v • t -t : - ■• -:- • : ■ : : -~ — 

tixn wi¥\ vten W) t^RfrjiR onima bmtr* b*k 73124 

: • - t t • T- ■ t v t : • •• t : • • : 

tin tnrh *a ntn rfti/H pwi 14 Dmnn ^nb» b*n nDtfn 25 
Sina n??>'y rjSjpn 15 in^r^3rn0? ^n HJ01 ^ *?&$! 
ipm titHpo T'pn pt0£V3n rva jik) i^-ji* ifia-aN^e 
"ij^g #♦$? n^irno naab iDy DHjpyn o»e^irH?« nn 
*j *3 Sanb" tyD nann yori) l6 h>n 'mbBrrm na> 
npK-n :D»n dw# ntt^o t]in ♦? rrtn Sn^rr W75ri27 
yo^i :^?n^ v$h rife??. r?3 iDN 1 ? hjij ^3 Dijn 1S 28 
ins a^Sx tixnm d^nitSx nana Smun vnx aa^a 

• T : t ■ v: f - _ • _ • t -:. t v : : t • t t • v: 

T : • - t •• t I ' "" : t : _ t - : t : -t v t t v - 

nnrhw niKn jj^p 1 ? d ^3?"? IP n^ti ^Tn{< ?ingi> qg 
abn :Nin 17 nan Ki^n nnr wy no nn id^i :m^29 

T T ~: T T • • T •. -TV ~ T ; TT 30 

nana nanoyn ma^n run nana no»vn nnx ^d-Sn iS^ND 

n T - T T . T. I" ..._.._ t T - V " v '.• " 



ClIRESTOMATHY. 231 

si b)m-^ 18 nw in njn n#$ Dnrirt wm^ tfimW$ 

33 ^5in *6 nft^K ^n^" ngKn : ntn ^g^f 0^ qq^i ^ 
b^ w$\ row ngrs i£tf wW? ™p >n#hm^$ rgV? 

• t : | : : - t t v t v • t v - T '•. •' ' t t : • 

35 vnnK »i^rn : TjRnp n^ Ktpu si^n-. 21 j^n n^rr Nrn [2*^5 

: 22 vn^ni vrartt tip?? ^piroi 1 ! ^ Dp^ivso vfrun) vn?rn 

36^nj;n ^S$n frit] ?f$jg n^n 3*irr^e| n^n-riN 23 dji 

37 -rn ns*i jd^d d^iI^ K#a» rpn ♦? 0179 nrrrcp rot? 

38 ^if sr'5 1 ?^ s W. TO nirrnr|S nyr^tf *Vikb> •■©»»* nrrr 
:pn£MnK #3*75 i^Kvb]/ ngt?;i nip Jflfl vro nyrriN 

• T •• • : - ■ v " t v v t T .. . x 

40 -j p B»ja^ 2M p.^n n^DO iVnn??l vr? ^pD up jv^d 
mo ij^p! m$yy\ t?^m cri^r? >*??3 onk Dip ^m,i 

42-^in?yn)T n ^ 25 ^J^^h^ vm wgh n|vn ^ 

43-117^ wS$>n npKq :rosn9 nsroi? ^b-jNi nj/j n*n 

w» tf?09& ty$i mSj®3 ^-^5 roriir? ^ rtorr 

otto ?rS*na ♦djw rvram nana mrm hx xz nm 

... 1 v •• t t : 1 • : • —. - :••: : - •• ^ -r - 

46 run Di*n :n?nn n^ ^n^; ntingo \iS^ niNjy nin» 
f^n nW?*! Dipfn ^i^ 1 ? fijn Di-^n &r\ybp njqo rug 



232 Ch'restomathy. 

jrm nonSsn rfirvh *? nm? M jw*in? n^rai :rra k^s 
n*npS anp)-?! ^1 w^n Dp- 27 *? rwn nrva d;?^ 48 
in nStfi : W^sn n^ipS nmyon pi in inoi in 49 
-Sn W79'Tn** ^A J^Tptl I3?> % Q^'9 lijgj 73n-7^ n*n# 
in 28 prm jn^iK viirbi? Vai itods pan jntoro itodso 

iywrna rrpj'.i w^pn-Sa* iojn in pi iiyrrasi 
i-Nii WNi-nK na-rroi iinnn'Di niyno n&Wi 
mini S*nfc» mx mi non ansa no-^ DwS*3n52- 

T • •• t : • " : _ |\t -T- t • •• ■ • : • : - 

\f\0ny& iin »)3 29 ^inj; ow^Tfltf toYW^rn 
©#1 :inpjjnyAnrijn : Dnj;f?Tjii3 ow 1 ?? ^n ^9153 
npi JDn^nD-n^ idc>i dw^ nrjK ph^ bxrp! ^354 
mw vSdtini BbtsttT MK-11 Turban pktj-ik in 

riSrod 

t: t : 

i§ 85, 4. 2§ 83, 10. 3§ 52, Note II. 4 k \*y fat. ^1", ex- 
ceptionally W$ cf. v. 24. 5 the oZd men; some read DU^5= K3 
D*D*3 to advance in days, years. 6 § 91, 3. 7 § 105, 7.. 8 § 85, 
4. 9 § 105, 6, 7. 10 and thou shalt take a pledge in return from 
them, i. e. a token of their happiness. (Fuerst. Lex.) 11 so. V^jl 
cf. Gen. 29, 1. 12 § 96, 7. 13 fr. Jftl i 14 1 was in this word 
doubly pronounced. l? = ^Tp>l£ . 16 § 22, Note. 17 an en- 
quiry. 18 § 76, 2, c, 19 27 *?£b to lose heart, courage. 20 y^y 
refers either to Goliath, or to QINk cf. Ps. 42, 7. 142, "V 
21 § 76, 4. Note or HN = with, § 75, 5. 22 j-fjpg, Hi. DflOn 
§ 53, 7. 23 § 117. 24 § 83, 7. 25 regular tflV, 7 26 for #>W! 
27 § 114, d. 28 § 91, 2. 29 § 76, 2, d. 



XI. , Solomo's Wisdom. (1. Kings 3, 5—28.) 

&rhx ipxi n^n DiSri? ribW"^ nin; n«ij pynD 
in^jroj? rwj; nm ribV' ipki :t]V"jriK no *W 



CtfRESTOMATIIY. 233 

tneftn np-reni nora msh rhn ntpao Sinn ion nx 

- : • : It t : ■ v v, ■• | , t : |- t V -: - T v v • t 

2& p irftrn n?n Vi-un npprrns i^np^ni rj$y d?7 
7 tin raSon nm >mSk rtin* nnyi :ntn bid i&tap% 

t : - : • t - t v: t : t - : v - - *^- 

wfaiiwtjf yyt kS }b[5 ^ >3^ ^ nrj nr?n ^31; 
skSi naarw ntr>f avoir nnra ngw rpj; rjing ?ppin 
9paj6 ^?#"fi$ tDStpS !#?# aS ^ayj? nrw :nhjp i?p> 
»eaa?l :n#j 1350 ^jrrus* to3^ bav ^ >a ynS aitrpa 
nwi :nm vnn-nK rbV W" >a 'rut wya vnn 

v- t t- v - t t -:••"• : T T - 

rh rhm-xh) n?D vnn-na nS*w n#N ?r v^k D'iiStf 

I : t : - t : v* t t - v t : - t v -:. J^ — t •■ • v: 

n^i xp'k e>*u n W kSi wy ^^ n^^'-^Si D*n b«>* 

t : - t : ) v : v v t : - T : v w | : t : - t : • - • T 

12^7 wu mn ^.ana 8 wjj n-jn itoQvnyfcun pan Sj? 
:^3 oip^N'S ?fTD»i ^aS n>n-Nb ^isa n0f f ttfj Dan aS 

lODt^? *5V|3 r^n dni J^r^? Q'3^3 ^ ^a n£? 
isfp'l J^?r n $ W^W^T?** "iTT H^C 1 nt ^3 W *j3CT 
nin^n^fin^^O^^^lP 1 ?^ Nian Di^rr mrn nbW 
len^an-nj* jrnajr^a 1 ? np#p fe>in D'pStf fc>in mfy *?tfg 
i7nt£'"NnnjDKni :vjsS nrtoyfli nSs.vbtf mi? dw ow 

t • t v - t t : t : ~—. — I v V • V • t • - : 

TW "i^ni -?nK noa ria&* ntfjn h^khi uk tfiK >a nfjtfn 

t *^ ■• ■■ t TV • - : : - t • t :•-:•-: - — t 

is nktn ntsfttn-DJ nSni M nnSS n^St^'n 01*3 >n?l :n*aa 

:n?aa wn3N"D?e^ 6 T^ rfaa una v-[»k Tirr wpjNi 

^rnna BP^ ♦vSr n»t^ n^K nS^S nmn nts^rrp non 

2(J I : I t t - . t 't t : t . -: t : t - t • t I v T t- 

n^n? JinMttfnt nxf\ ^myhwn ♦i?rn» np_ni nS^n 
21^3'nist p^n*7 npi3 BpNi j^n? nysfin ran nja-n^ 

^n*!^ "it?« *» n;n-^s n^ni np33 vSk pi^j rtsr^ni 
22nnp^ n^i : nan rprn ^nn ^3 '3 »S nir^n ^mti mtim 
2s rjS^ri -vpsn : rj^gn ^b ni^n^ ^nrr ^ nDn ^3 ^3 1& 

30 



234 ClIRESTOMATHY. 

rpD ^ kS iTipK mi] n??n rprn >nn *j5T?'hf itjgS nw 
♦39S npn wo^nnn-»S np : if?$n n^i : °'nn *x& nan 24 

mrn^'N* n#NP nptfrn : 9 nrW? 'ypn-n^nn^^on 26 
-up tfig r? npxn . PErStf rarn ^5?r3 ^h-Sj* 'pn 
-D3 ^S-dj nnok nan inp'op-^N nam r?n niS*n;n**«hS 
'PP yhrrr\$ nS-wp ip^i r^p jin. : io ri?;i irpi k^ 7]^ 27 
DSBterrriK ^n^S^ tyDri : i&n n*p won *ft noro 28 

t : • - v •• t : • t ^ : : • - • • "-. - : ■• t : 

p^NnDjn »5 i*q >i??jWT ^5p ^. rj^p coa^" n^ 

ras^o rrt^ 13P1J33 

1 Inexperienced. 2 ^*j £$\ft to go out and in, denotes me- 
taphorically the actions and conduct of a man. (Fuerst Lex.) 
3 § 100, III. a) 4 § 101, II. 3). 5 § 83, 11, (c). 6 >— para; 
gogic = ffrlN 7 An expression of humility for L 8 § 94, 2. 
9 In pause. 10 § 34, 6. 



XII. The happiness of the godly, the misery of the 
wicked (Ps. 1.) 

&mti iffp\ tiyWn rt# : 5 rjSrr xh n#fc #*kp *ntfK i 

wan mm mira dn ^ jdb* kS d^ iwoy\ ioy kS 2 

: v t : - : • t t ...... T ^ T 

vgrnh&hz h\r&Y%2 rv_$) :rMi d?v njp» imimis 
: p'Syi n^ienife'S Vdi : Var*6 inSjn inj?3 jig* in? -i#k 
-kS p-S# :pn "we^p-n^jj prDN >? D^nn p-*6s 
nip* mr^a jmrrc mya Dwtsm tDSBtea d^ nop^e 

t : - - • - | • - -:- • t - : t : • • - ' ■ t ; | .t 

1 1C^ happiness; only in plur. construct in the character of 
an interjection : O the happiness of the man ! 2 § 44, 5. 



XIII. The character of a godly man. (Ps. 15.) 

>S|#7j3 nrn p&*n? ^J?** ^bnp njn? ^n 1 ? iiorp * 



ClIRESTOMATIlY. 235 

s- 4 ^ hrnih 'rtsh? nsej *tiy\ pnjc bjtei 3 D>pfi 2 rjSin 

nrp'ribi 6 jrn-? ya# 120? "tin; ^td^i 5 dn?m wi?a 
5xS nV?rn^? npS rib *prb# nnfei : ^3 fnr^ 1S?3 

: obiyb toi&> 

1 §83, 11, 2 §107, 4/3 Accusative, §85, 4. c) and §75, 2, 
Note. 4 '^ ^ Sjp to bear slander upon his tongue, i. e. to slan- 
der. 5 The subject of the clause. 6 Inf. fr. jty*-) , supply y} to 
do evil to himself, i. e. to his own hurt, cf. 3 Mos. 5, 4.: 

y$rf? in inrf? ; 

XIV. Confidence in God's grace. (Ps. 23.) 

2-Sr_^37-^^.ni^? nixuNi rib >jn wn» nnb TiBjo 
s : tptf fj/pb pir'b$53 *1W! * M1^ s ^$i : rjSnj; rirrop vb 
4rp3P> H§# WfiT*3 in arwrK 1 ? 2 f»)DbS xu? Tjbfcpg m 

?0?b^! n*ji TM JO 1 ? 5 ? '3$>b ^20 s'JOtffi n £^ ^WP 1 ' 
e*p >p>-b;j wtt ipm did rjK : 3 rryi >pi3 *bwi jogfr 

1 To lead back, refresh (the soul). 2 Shadow of death = the 
thickest darkness, cf. §91, c). 3 Abundance; in poetry often an 
abstract noun takes the place of an adjective, = my cup is abun- 
dant, overflowing. 4 = >fO^V|, as "H (Jud. 19, 11.) for IT , 



XV. God's excellency and providence. (Ps. 113.) 

I nirv dp w : nirr otrntf ibbn nirr nny iV?n rv iSSn 

£ -r -. • : t •■ v : - t : •■ : ^- : - r : - 

3 dp' bbrp iNtio-nj; pp&rrn?pp JobirTO nfB?9 rpbp 
nirr? ♦& :rn:p own by_ nirv Dnrbrby. dS :nin; 



sD'nnroj? 2 a^'inb :|Vdk on* ristr'Np b-r *toj;p wpp 



236 Chrestoamtiiy. 

5 r?0Df D^rr 4 o?* win 3 rnj-$ W#1Q ftagj ora dj?9 

:nnSSn 

t : - 

, l § 106, 9 and page 17 Note L 2 Inf. with paragogic *>— in 
poetry not unfrequent. 3 Barreness was considered among the He- 
brews a great ignominy, cf. 1. Sam. c. 1. 4 Accusative, answer- 
ing the question where ? § 85, 4. or apposition to. 3 = as a. 5 § 83, 10. 



XVI. Israels' exodus from Egypt. (Ps. 114.) 

^■TiiT nrrn ttyb o#p ipvirvz onypp Ww? rwwg I 
: TinN^ dd> prvn tftn r?*n d*b : 2 vnfrtraD Siofe» iEHps 3 

t : • I •• : — t - t t t - t : : - •• t : • : J t : 

Dttfi ^3 D^n rfrnp :>*r>:p3 nty?| o'Vn:? 3 npn onnri * 
:|xr^3 niy?4 d^&3 n^n Dnnri : nirW? nbn pf$i 6 
.n^n o^HD rrjpjr rnSs ^Vp p.^ ^' in I 1n *>* 50 Wl 

• t .:' : • t - • t : 

1 § 57, Note. 2 The plural poetically, § 82, 5. 3 Cf. Exodus 19, 
18, 4 Cf. Exod 17, 6. 5 § 59 Note II. 



XVII. Feelings of an exile in captivity. (Ps. 137.) 

^. | • v •• : t : • -r - : - t t v t ~: - - O 

...... .. . T . .. . T T . T ^ : « 

v%w; tjw i\v$ 2 Wp vb rv& nnpi? w^Tinj w'4 

D^irvr 6 dv ntt bi"iN* ^nS run* -far :Tirafe> 5 tr*o by 7 

•t t : v: • : • t- : : • t : • ■- t 

nm rnntsfr? SD*r 8 m :m nibtfi ny my 7 my onoicns 

- : - t : - • ■ v t ~ t : - ^- w y *t t 

1 Refers to Babel, 2 Of the song — one of the songs. 3 Let my 
right forget to. do its duty, or play on an instrument 



Ohrestomathy. 237 

(Kimchi) 4 poeitieally *= TDtfc'. 5 The summit = the highest 
joy. 6 The day of downfall, misfortune. 7 I n f. Pi; to lay hare 
the ground "TiD* i- e. to destroy to the ground. 8 In poetry very 
common, either for the city or the inhabitants. 9 Cf. 2 Kings 8, 
12. 



XVIII. The preciousness and true character of wis- 
dom. (Job 28, 12 — 28.) 

\l&ft$ vyffi :nya Dipp \nt ^ wm yxn n9?rtni 
14 on wrrj *6 npx Dinn :D»nn p*a wpsn ^ ngntf 
isrrvynp qp| *?j3^ ribi nvswj imp jrr>6 :ns# j>k nfifc 
J^nnr n^yrnn :iW! np; T Dritr'3 t»oim 0:133 n'ppn io 
is hmh n^i ^r ^ Bfajn riiDNn : rsrts) 2 nrmorvi noon 

t : t | -.- -.- ■• t • • t : t t • : t t 

. . . T ■/■.•: - : • t v : - - ■ • : ■ 

20-^ t^Q na'psai :nr? oipp n.j w tf&n pjKg ptoso??! 

H »rirr»3 : npipp-n^ jrv 4 rc»rn : porrr pn D'iib# : 3 hijptf 
'25 nn) nitr^S :n*o> D>p#rH%? nnn wy p.Kn-nivp 1 ? 
26 : nWp rnnS tjtji pn Sbfe 1 ? ink>i?3 : 11*153 fan pybi ^ppp 
giiarp :n dinS no*n :nnpn-D^ nxm mson nan ?k 

^O -.••!•• ttt v - t|t~: -: t • v: t : - : - t T t 

:m*a jno -wbi roan ntt *r?K 

l §94, 6 Note. 2 Supply the antecedent tfV. 3 §93, G. 
4 § 93, Note. 



XIX. Judah is threatened for her ingratitude and 
rebellion. (Isa. 1, 1 — 21.) 

i >pra tiwfrw nyinfiii run -\m f ioins -in^ jirrj 
2^mm dw wotf trrnm obb vratr rnx onv my 
ijTJi :*3 w#s or?) ♦jiodiii ♦n^ du? *eh nir?> o pa 
i Ijiaon *6 'p# yr nS *7jn# vVjd Date niorn nnip *w 



^38 Chkestgmatht. 

"." t t •• t : • ! : v - : • t : 

- : v v I - • t - t •• t : • t: t t tt • w 

osn&HK b>n nisntr tonj? na£&? D*n» : p^ n^sn nVi 7 

V : - : - •• .. : v -"t t t : v : .:. - I v f - t : : 

rnnttt :onr roanos hdo^ nnk d>S:jk on? Drti^s 

t : . : • t -■•:-: t t : t • : -t : : v : 

iim* hb : rra: tjd ntrpM m&m d-dd pods rvrra^ 

t : •• T "■: t | : • : t : • v t : x .. : ! • 

iwni nioj^'irn onra oyos -mfc> ^ n>nin rriNM 

t t -;- • t : ' ^x : • ■ t x • t : 

inio^Dy.-irnS^ mm m$r\ Dip \rvp : ninpsi wpp 10 
r^m d^n mSy $ijni? mrr noN> DDTOrrn h n&Sn 
»tan »3 rn^n nS DHinjn d'bo^ ona dti owns 12 

t • • : t x *- : • r : • t - : • : 

toWi-riS :n^n 7 ddi mtq nxr tron-'D 6 ^ 5 manS 13 

t ••-: :v:y j ... . T T T .. 

*rip n?gn 8 enn ^ N\n rnym rnpp NW-nniD N M nn 
^S9 r?R}fr DjHjrtoi Dyenn :nn$n pa 9l 73 j iN-KV*npp u 
ahyx dd*92 12 o:jfcns;n i n x&) w^ 10 nitoS ^-vnis 
:W?o dw d^t ynw or& nWi Ehrro dj dm \ry 
npS :jnn iSin wg im oy7?V£ 1H wpn 13, \2y? rarn $ 
imp 4 ?** 15 iDn Dirr ro$^' pon np*t tos^'p ^'tt *i&n 
hsfe d^3 D^^ton vn»"DN mn» n^ 16 nnDi^ N*roSis 

... v - • t - v " t -: : • • t •■: ■ - x : x • : t : 

... T . 

1 § 65, 5. 2 Upon what ? 3 Supply (TH / with following *? to 
become, § 84, 1 : to become sick. 4 -^f (Kal in the form *it) 
5 = HiXinS ♦ 6 ^4|) ■== 'J? 1 ? before me. 7 Apposition to fiNf , 
8 Cf. 2 Kings," 4, 23. T 9 Supply fiN^ to bear. 10 On the Ka- 
mets of ^ see §18, II. 3, 11 Inf. const, of NC^anore frequently 
n^ and i1M^ a 12 = D3t?*l3 »^ pi ^ TserVbecoming Chirek. 
13 For !p||T|f| § 39, 3, 14 §105, 5. 15 Supply m . I 6 Niphal 
here reciprocal § 26, 1. 17 § 85, 5. 



Chrestomathy. 239 

XX. Description of the Messianic time. (Isa. 11. 
1 — 10. 



10 



2 cm vty"nmi :m£r vch^D T^n w ywo Ton Nvn 

x*x t t: . v : • x xx ■ •.•••: t • ~ - ;• • y tt ; 

nam nyn nn nni^i nyy nn nrm no^n nn mm 
3-nSi spi^ vr# rano^Sl mm nam? Mnnm :mm 

4 *i$h mt^os rrawj d*Vi pijpp £05^) : nw vjw yoipflpS 

5 mm :y&n rvo» vnak> nrni vs amr'a pN-nsm pa* 

t t : *x x • t t -r : - : v • : | v v T • : | y t 

6 fearpp nxr "ui :v^n mra nmvm vino nim pm>> 

v v • •• : t; t t -: i v: t : t : x "I •/ v 

: D3 ttfo |bj5 njtti nm angg T$31 Satl f ?7. HfW TS$l 
7 -fto# np3D rinso jnnb* rcam nn* rwjnn arn min 

) x x - " : — : I V ■• : - : : • t • - t *y : • x x x 

siTSi^ W3V fnwp 7jfiit?s TrSy pji* a j;g^gh :pn 
9 pKn nvhy?3 nrip nn"^D pn^ kSi 8 yrv-Nb : mn 

|vxx t : t • • :|t - x: • : - . : w - t xx 

en# Ninn Dva mm :d>d:dd 5 d>S d*m mm-n** 4 nn 

x x : • - : x- • x : y *x •• 

: tim inmn nmm itPT on *i vSn* o^y djS -iby now us* 

1 His delight, HHil with 3 to smell with pleasure, hence gene- 
rally to enjoy, delight in. 2 Pilpel of JT^'. 3 §76, 2. c. 
4 Inf. of JTV § 30, 4, hence with following fltf . 5 HDD com- 
monly with ^JN here with ^ , 6 § 86, 3 b. 

XXI. Jeremiah's letter to the captives in Babylon. 
(Jer. 29, 4 — 14.) 

5 taw niy ^31 ng^i nrn? U3 ^rtaa qSgrra w**?#i 

6 duj>j Dp*nS nnpn nuyi d^? rrSim d^ ^np :jn£rn# 

-Sao DBnirvi nixa d^? n^Sn) d'pjnS ^n DS^nuyas*! 

7n&tf ddi-ik Tpbjr? -rfc Tyn otarnK i&rm nayon 

xx ■.•:■-•••••:■ v ~: ' t : v : • : x : • 

8^3 :-oiW' D3S n. 1 :^ noiwn *3 r\\rvp^ xr\y^ ^h^tp\ 
P5W33 DpS ik^-Sn* Sn^^ ttS^ niNOV nin» idn nri 



X 



240 Chrestomathy. 

tjKJ dwW xh w? D^q^ on ip#3 >3 :d^TO9 

t t • ; • v t : : ■ : • t : - t t : 

d3;>n* y#nS rsitan H?Tn8 03^ •ijoprji D?n?« ip9*< 

• t v ~: t -: - - v ■ ": — r • . t • v - | t - 

ddS nrb njnS nVi oiStf ntttrra nirr dm D^Sy atari 

v t •■ x *t t: : t : : - t : \ : v •■ -: 

^n o^Vgj-irn D^oSrn ™ Ktt^p : ™p^ rnnp^fe 
-S33 ♦Jen-in >3 DiTKMa tin ni^jsyi : nphx ♦asgtfi 13 

wS#Ct#s oiparrStf Dpfij* Tbtr'rn hwiMjj p# 03n** 

t • v : v 

1 § 49, 4, Note. 2 To be found by one i. e* to show himself 
inclined toward one. (Fuerst Lex.) 



51 



XXII. The new convenant. (Jer, 31, 31—34.) 

rva-nN! %*p.\ nrr^ w?l njnrpja o*k? dw nan 
DV3 DniDN;-n^ w:> np« nnap nS : n^nn nn? rrnrr 3! 
-na nan n^n- 1 ^^ orjVP H$9 o^Vin^ dtp >pnnn 
n#a nnpn nw ^3 :nirrD#i d? W?#| 2, pJ*f! vnSss 
wo rnnro83 dhh own npN Vj^ n^grw ffPS 
d^hSnS dhS >n»m "marat oaS-byi orra wln-nat 

v t •- • t : t v t: : v t • - : .t .| . t 

trw ^njrrriK *#♦$ -iiy nsS* *6i :di£» *W?? nsrrja 
d^pdS »niN wt dSd >3 nirrn*? iari ioa 1 ? Mii$rn» 
: TBnsw nS DmtonSi DJiyS r6ox *>p nin^j oSi-unm 

* t : v t t - : t ^- : - ~ : V t . •. . t 

1 § 96, 2. 2 •) although, § 118. 3 For n^SPJJS • 4 § 97 ' 4 " 



Chrestomathy. 241 

XXIII. Kesurrection of Israel by the reviving Spirit 
of God. (Ezek. 37, 1—14.) 

1 nyp?n rprp ^n^n mm rrrp ^awi fiinT" 1 - ^ n ^0 

2 nan rum Dpp spp DmS# Tlpym :movy nxSp &t*rn 
3D7N-j3^x^p^ nitp nieP? nam nyj-pn ^§-S;g nto 
4 notf i :nym nna mm tf-us noki nWn mown niwin 

- t T tt t - • v: t -: t v " t t ^-: t TV.:" - 

•■ : - t -: t v •• -; t : - t : v •• t r-:r « •• t • - ■■ 

6 run rbxn mow 1 ? mm tfw noa rfa :nww iyotf 

•■ t t -: t • : t - t t : - : w : • 

6t mSym d*tj d?'!?J? 'WVl iom?W Pn D55 Kpp >jn 

on»m mn dm wui my o:>>by >nonpi nfco s^Sy 

....... „ T • - T : ^ v •• « • : -It : t t v •• *: 

7 ♦Span? ?ijr*nn ws ngtop w*ij} :r?in? *:»jrp o#:jnn 
8 ~mim warn :iovy"S>v oyy ftib£J£ Minj^i ^jn-n|Hi 

mm nSyoSo my omSy Dip^ nSy ntoaa dhu omSy 

9 fi-ioso DiN-prcurr rnnn-SN Kail >Sn norin :dh3 pat 

^n^ a rmn ♦*& mnn yrwo mm tfnc noarrte rmn-ta 

t ^ -:-•••: t -: - t t 

ioCdh^ Ktorn 8 *m> nates ♦nx^m :vm nWi owna 

v t t- -T- v -: - • ••- • : : •: v " t ■ -: - 

niQuh :nkp ntop Ttnj S?n Df^rr^ v-tpyn wpa rrnrt 
ran 4 nan Sxnb» rvsr^a n^n mown on«-p *Sk 

... T .. .. T . . .. T •,• " T T ^: T T T I V - '• 

12 aoan pS jnab unuj urnpn n-ow wmow ^ DnD ** 
D^mnnp-n^nh-DOxmnmmu'i^noN-ilDDmSxnnoNi 
'nertgrTg d 5fl$ ♦W35J 6 *oy oytrtnjjap D3r^ 'wyrn 

13 vrfjjnjH D^m^np-n^ ntftipmm \?N-p DJiy-n : Saoi^ 

t^^n wsn mnj •&* P DpyTl C33inD-|N-Sy d?^?< 

: mm-DNJ 

f i \ t 

1 ^orH 1 J5npl1. 2 §80, 5. 8 sc. Him. 4 §77,3. 5 Dat. Commod. 
?|^7 '} we are so entirely cut of (Fuerst Lex.). 6 Apposition to D^jlX. 

T • V J V 

31 



VOCABULARY. 



I. HEBREW AND ENGLISH. 



2X fatter: see §73, 1. 
"OK (§ 48, 1) to be 

~ T 

lost, to perish ; Pi. 
and Si. to destroy, 
to let perish. 

destruction, 



i"Q£^ to wish, to be 
[willing. 
*i^N misery, woe « 

DiDK crib - 

3*3^ ear of grain, 
[time of ears, spring. 
JiON needy, poor. 

^938 P r - n - m - 
ITWDK P^ n. m. 

tt • -: 

*V3N nrighty, chief. 

*"72N -2". and ##. to 
. [mourn. 

/3K mourning. 

™?DN trul 7> but > y et - 

t — : 

pj$/' stone, wheight. 

^ J Abraham. 
DiStfOK Absalom* 

D3N 7 cD^pool. 

t t — : 

*UN to gather. 
DVlN Edom. 
J1-l k XLord. 



1HN mighty. 

Q*1K to be red; Si. 

- T 

[to shew a red hue. 
Q"T$s$ man; col. men. 

T T 

nDHK ground, soil, 

T T_: [land. 

igyffi Edomite, Idu- 

" : [mean. 

*30*ftj reddish. 

p]£sj socket, funda- 

' v v [ment. 

\D"lX Lord, the divine 

T *"• [majesty. 

p.riTT^ P-n-m. 
*V1X mantle, tunic. 
SIlK a. 3Jl£ to love. 



inia r iend * 



nniN 

nSris * love - 
nn^ohi 

7 UK tent, tabernacle, 
pnx Aaron - 
18 or. 

vj^ woe! 
3*iX enemy. 
^Vjtf silly, fool. 
*7iN perhaps. 
oSiK tat 

T 

j"piK silliness, folly. 



P$s{ iniquity, misery, 
' '■ T [vanity. 

y&X Ophir. 

mx (§ 63» ?) to be or 

become light, bright; 
J5K. to make bright, 
to illuminate, to en- 
lighten; yj£3 TKH 

L T T . * " 

7X to look gracious. 

flight. 

DIN sign- 
ftf then. 

ni?N belt, girdle, 
tttf -Ki. to listen. 
$*/■ ear. 
*)f tf -^ a. Pi. to gird ; 

~ T 

Sit. to gird oneself. 
UN brother (§ 73, 2.) 
3NnKP-n.nl. 

t : - 

"UlN °ne, first. 

T V 

^linNt behind, back, 

T [backward. 

HillN sister (§ 73, 3.) 

T 

JFlNS to seize, hold, 
T [catch. 

rnx P. n. m. 



S^imx 



p. n. m. 



nil^ -P*. t( > dela y, to 
T [tarry. 

yj$ other. 

*ir?K after, afterwards, 
[behind. 



244 fTTttN 

pnilN the last. 
Hll^ after ; w. suff. 

nm, § 75, e. 

mnnN end, future, 

[eternity. 

nflN/. of intone. 

- - T V 

D£3N to close, to stop. 

*X woe ! 

*£$ where ? 

*}*& enemy. 

JT& where ? 

31*8 Job. 

r-o^ss n ° w? n ° w! 

? T " [where ? 

7>K ram. 

?i7^ Ajalon, name of 
1 T ' [a city. 

J^cp^not; 

pj<3 without ; 

w.^.^K, §75, 3. 

n5*£N$ Ephah, a dry 
[measure. 
ff£)*N where ? 

|^>X ma n, see § 73, B - 
•[1. and § 98, 1. 2. 

*!# only, but, surely. 
DVItDN fierceness. 

SDK (§ 48 ) to eat, Pu. 
~ T [to be consumed. 
73 N eater. 
S^ hSdN food. 

t : t 

?3$$ surely, truly. 

7N not - 

SN to; w.mff.'hftt, 

, ' [§76,6. 

7J< a mighty one. 2) 

strength, power. 3) 
God, the Almighty. 



Vocabulary. 

J! 7^/- oak, terebinth. 

T " 

T\t>& D'riStf God. 
3N7£ p. n. m. 
TO p. n. m. 
7 ,4 ?N idol. 
'S^tfalas ! »^j 'tf alas! 

» [for me. 

Q7X dumb, 

rr^DSx widow. 

n /i*^ to learn, -P*- to 
V T [teach. 

£"|7jtf thousand. 

Q^ mother. 

DK if; DK >3 except 

that; f)^ QX oh if! 

J1DN maid -servant, 

T§ 73, 9. 

n&K ell > cubit - 

pm P- n. m. 

•tt^DN faith, faithful- 
T """ [ness. 

TDN to be firm, faith- 
ful ; Hi. to hold firm- 
ly, to believe, w. 3* 

H^^ depended on, 
1 " [faithful 

ra$N$ K. Hi. to be 

firm ; Pi. to fortify, 
to strenghten. 

IftX (§48)*to say, to 

- T 

think, either follow- 
ed by 3^3, 3^ or 
not. 
^EK .PHON speech- 

t : 

HON Amorite. 
DDK truth. 
H^X whither. ? 



Cl^tf man, mortal. 
f"l3N -^'- to lament, to 



WTO*™. 



[mourn. 



C]^ #". a. Hit. to be 
'" T [angry. 

men,'§ 73, B. 1. 

fetter, 'fr*jl rvi 
_. T 

[prison. 

r|0^ to gather, to 

gather in; Ni. to 
gather oneself, to 
be gathered, taken 
away. 

^DN to bind, to har- 
[ness. 

£"|X nose, anger, wrath; 

D*£3N f ace » an g er ' 

£-|X adv. also ; >3 fitf 

how much more, how 
[much less. 
|"7£)5<$ to bake. 

Ni£)k then. 

H75N darkness. 

t •• — ; 

D§^ end ; 2) adv. 
not, nothing, 'J<3 
[without 
[*3 'N except that. 

DWD^p^n. of a 
[place in Judah. 
rn$tf the young of 
: '•' [birds, brood. 
QHiDN Ephraim. 
WISH Ephrathite. 
7^N near, by, at. 
Hi™ locust. 



T31N /• 



four. 



JH^ to weave. 

- T 

fHX cedar. 

IT"))* /• Path, way. 

***** 1 

lion. 



ftrj*r 



7HN to be long. 

Hi. to prolong, e. g. life, 

to lengthen, to tarry 

[long, to delay. 

rpfr< a putting off, 

delay, ^ T|nj>^, 

D?5*S 'N W 'of 
temper, long-suffer- 
ing- 
TjiK length, D>£> $ 
[length of life. 
CH^s} Aramea, Syria. 

flkSif. earth, land. 

*Y"W to curse. 

"" T 

ft£f. fire. 

PltSfts* woman, § 73, 
T ' [B. 2. 

*WK /• Assyria^ an 
[Assyrian. 

DtJf X and D£?tf to be 

- T " T 

guilty, to transgress, 

to be condemned ; 

Hi. to condemn, to 

[punish. 

ftjbg'tf dunghill. 

Jl^J^fe* p- n - of a 

city of the Philist- 
[ines. 

1V/X Pi- to guide, di- 

- T 

rect aright, to make 
or call happy. 

"W'^$ who, which, 
[when, as. 



Vocabulary. 

H.$8 tf r - Wfit for - 

tune-Twtf used-) hail ! 

[happy ! 

fiNTlitf l)signofacc. 

w. suff. ifitf 2) with; 

w, suff. *jnx e *c. 

HfiN to come. 

T T 

nnN thou. 



5 in, with; w.suff. *jj, 

^N5 /• well. 

JD&Ski p.n. of a 

[city. 
D5SO without. 

^2 Babylon. 

V T 

""JJQ to be faithless, to 
[transgress. 
TQ garment. 

/a!Q on account of. 
"T12 separate, alone, 
'D7 apart, separate, 
7*1*j J5K. to divide, to 

- T 

separate, show dif- 
ference. 
tV2TlZ heast. 

frb/. thumb. 

$s£i^ to come , to set 

(of the sun); HI. to 

[bring. 

f!Q to disdain, with 

7 to show contempt 
: [for somebody. 
f!Q s. contempt. 

PS see ^ 

*T)3 well, pit, cistern. 

t^i2 to be disappoin- 
ted, to be ashamed, 



"VD!* 245 

to come to shame; 
Hi. to put to shame, 
to disgrace. 

Dp««.ofna. 

T 

nta to despise , dis- 
[dain. 
ft*} to spoil. 

- T 

pn? without. 

^fiPD youth, young 

T [man, chosen. 

fniD to examine, try, 

" T [search, tempt. 

*")I"7!D to choose, to se- 

lit,w.3;nrOJde- 

t : • 

sirable. 

f7£03 to trust, to be 

T [confident, w. ^}, 

fltO!} security, safety ; 

'^7 in safety,securely. 

V T 

/. belly, heart, 
[womb. 
*3 inter}. O that ! 

p3 to understand; Hi. 

to discern ; iZii£. dil- 
igently consider, to 
[fathom. 

p3 interval (space be- 
tween two things), 
du. £3*3*3i hence 
CD^n^^the 

man between the two 

hosts. 
J*3 between ; w. swj^T. 
1 - [§ 75, 6. 

fl3**3 understanding. 

nva house, ri*gp 

. [within. 

on? n*3p- n -9 facit y- 

i"OS to weep. 

T T 

*)iD2 firstborn. 



246 7 3 

Sj not. 
*^3 without. 

/]^73 worthlessness, 
"7 : [lowness. 

01^*79 Balaam - 

>n^T?79 (w^a p-^/. 

JD,Hj;S3D)with- 
out,besides, except. 

^^without^n^S 

[that not. 
HS3 ™ what? 

|3, "f| son, §W, 6. 

H^ to build. 

T T 

*1-QJ>3 in oirter that. 

HiJ/3 within yet. 

7^3 *° De l° r( l °ver. 

^7J/3 man > l° ro % nus " 
band, person given or 
addicted to a thing ; 
§ 89, 4. II. Baal, god 
of the Phenicians. 

*)J^3 & and Pi. intr. 

to burn, tr. to con- 
[sume. 
1^20 P r ofit, unjust 

[gain. 
P5f3 dough. 

JfpS **. to split 
nyp3 valley. 
*1M n erd, oxen. 
*|p3 morning. 
3*lp3 within. 

t^h^ Pi. to seek, de- 
[mand. 
fcO*3 to create. 



Vocabulary. 

JT12 to choose, to 
. TT [select. 

7H? iron. 

fT)3 to flee. 

- T 

KH3 fat, full. 

• T 

HKH^ creation. 

t • : 

/V13 covenant, 
to kneel 

blessed, Pi. to bless. 
J knee. 

175*13 blessin g. 
p*)3 lightening. 
*) j^3 meat, flesh, body. 

T T 

J-Q daughter, § 73, 7. 

T]ln3 m the m idst of, 
' : [within. 

D^3^-ofn^§73,8. 



}— nfcsjjl naughtiness, 
, T ** " [pride. 

/Nil to redeem. 

nrjjjto be high; m. 

— T 

to raise up, make 

[high. 

/"^Oil {only in const.) 

T T 

rDJI nigh, haughty 
' : [of, tall of. 

ft3J| high, lofly, tall. 

- r 

^height. 

/^Qil boundary, dis- 
trict, territory. 
"713^ strong, hero. 

n^ttJJ strength, 

T : [might. 

yi) lord. 

t^>3^ crystal. 



^73il -S*. to enclose 

- T 

around, to set bound- 
[aries. 
yjjhill. 

nWJtI.nill,ILp.n. 
T • [of a city. 

JtyJJlP-mofacity. 

^DJI to be strong,to pre- 
vail ; Pi. to strength- 
en. 
*Oil man, hero. 

JY73;I mistress, 
j J roof. 

/11JI great, old, loud. 
nj id. 
7*| JJ to be great; Pi. to 

— T 

make great, to make 
I [grow; Hi.id. 



rfeia ^d nSnj 

[greatness, majesty. 
*n| (ww. ^J wall, 

[fence. 
1J back. 

vj jj nation, people. 

SU see ^V| 

^ , Hi see %j. 

n /U a company of 

[exiles. 

ym p^. 

"^jj to sojourn, abide, 
Jf J| to shear. 

- T 

Su to rob. 

-T 

M^J a stem. 

•■tfj} to cut, to cut off, 

— T 

divide; M. to be 

[cut off. 
W valley. 



*J*J- sinew. 
7*J| to rejoice, exult. 
J-jSjl to reveal ; Pi. id ; 
HL to lead into exile. 
tfyji p. n. m. 

^ to roll; with ^ 

to throw upon; with 
[jp, to remove. 

QJ also, yea, even. 
NDJI pi ' to swallow. 

T T 

K/pi bulrush. 

^7} Oil an y ac t done, 

good or evil, behav- 
. [ior, desert. 

TlQJl a weaned child. 

the recompense,pun- 

[ishment. 

7DJI to recompense, to 

[do. 

M garden. 

D^Jl to steal. 

3|j thief. 

i^JI to reprove. 

[buke. 
HJJ stranger. 

mi^jl ^./.throat, 
[neck, 
an axe. 



£>i j| Pi. to drive away, 

—T 

[to exile, cast out, 

T see ^*j|i. 
Dfc>JI rain. 



VOCABULARY. 

f^JI *) P- n - of a region 

in Egypt; 2) p. n. of 
[a city in Judah. 

fijl p- n « °f a c ^y« 



3i or !}ii ^ ear - 

t : t : 

bee. 2) Deborah, p. 

n. of the prophetess, 

[Judge. 4, 4. 

pyi to cleave, to cling 

*^yi K. usually Pz\ to 

[sp 
tm \'y r \ word, r thing. 

T T 

Vfyi honey. 



fishes. 



l^corn. 

iW T H David - 

V\*!\ languor, illness. 
t!)f faint, sick. 
D'liDVlBeeDtn 

- T 

n*j^*l silence, resig- 

T * [nation, 

|?H or p*?| to judge, to 

rule, to contend 
Ti*! generation, age, 
lini ntlS to all 

t : 

[generations. 
ntTl to drive away, 

T T [to thrust down, 
p^ judgment, strife, 
* [contention, 

pf judge, defender. 

7^ poor. 
ilTl poverty. 

T ~ 

J— 1 7*7 to draw, as 

T T 

[water from a well. 



WH 247 

»7*T| bucket. 

*■■ 7*"pT| to totter, to be 

"" T 

slack, weak, to lan- 

{_ [guisti. 

D/1 to pursue hotly, 

HL to kindle, in- 
♦ [flame. 

Jl 7*1 door, gate. 

?"H*1 blood, the ^?. 

D^?*1 blood-guilti- 
[ness. 

T T 

j"V)D1 likeness, image. 
DDi to be dnmb, si- 

_ T 

lent, to rest) to stand 
[still. 
n^PT tear. 

p&QI Damascus. 

Jn»nj?1seejr3j 

ny* 1 ? knowledge. 

J— Ijn knowledge, in- 
telligence. 

i^| see in 

TH^ with 3 , to tread, 

e. g, a way j Hi. to 
[lead. 
TflE way. 

£H1 to require, to 

" T [seek. 

f t^l P*. to make fat, 
' " T [to anoint. 

n 

*— 7^11 vanity, empti- 

[ness. 

p^ff to meditate, to 

think, with 5 of the 

[object, to utter. 

Hull thought. 

y>yr m J meditation; 
' T [prayer. 



248 m n 

JTlil to stretch out. 

T T 

Tir*l to honor ; 

- T 

w. Q* j£), to favor one's 

cause ; Hit, to decor- 
ate oneself, to boast 
[oneself. 
*yXT\ ornament. 

1 T 

nn*in,c. rrnn ton- 

t t~: — : - 

or, ornament, glory. 
K1H he. 

Tin beauty, majesty. 
^pf woe! ho ! 
J1n wealth, riches. 

6fi see ftfejj 

t T 

KVl she. 

tVjl to be;w..7,tobe- 
[ T : [come. 

zD*n palace, sanctu- 

T . t ar y- 

pn Hin, a liquid mea- 

.{ [sure. 

J^7tf not ? indeed ! see 

' [tf S and § 25, 5. 
D17J1 hither. 

7|7i1 *° walk, to go, 

to live; Hi. to lead. 

"?7il jP*. to sing, to 

praise; Hit. to glory, 
;j* [to boast. 

07 Jf hither. 

tDSDr™? to confound, 

[to scatter. 
mil I- they (f.); II. 

[hither. 

flan lo ! see ! behold! 

'"[w. suff. see §75, 3. 

Tl&n to turn; w. 7 or 

w. two accus., to change 

[into. 

nn mountain, § 17, 5. 



Vocabulary. 
ti'$it\ much - 

j|7n to slay, kill. 

- T 

n*in to conceive, to 

T T [be pregnant. 
D*ir™T to tear, to pull 

_ T 

down, to destroy. 

D5&T'n ™f- Hi. of 

Dbt^ use ^ as udV'' 
" T [early. 



3$f wolf. 

nxr (f.) this. 

n^i K. a. Pi. to 

— T 

slaughter, to sacri- 
[fice. 
\ I *7t wa ntonness ■ P r id e , 

nt this. 



[haughtiness. 



nnt Ni" t° he taught, 

-T 

to take heed; Hi. to 
shine ; Jig. to teach. 

*ini brightness. 

If which, that. 

3^ to flow. 

nit to boil up; Hit. to 
act insolently, wick- 

• T 

prep, besides, except. 

771 f squanderer, prod- 
[igal. 

nit-*- tf-TiD to go 

away, ifa'. to turn 

[aside, 
n^ or ^f to bind, to 
. [bandage. 
f)*i\ olive 

"T|t pure. 



"an 

nDJ to be pure ; Pi. to 

cleanse; 2Z&. to cleanse 

[oneself. 

JTDlOt glass, crystal. 

IDf to remember; Hi. 

-t r 

to bring to remem- 
[brance, to praise. 
1!?.? a * *Dt memory. 

P^Dt remembrance. 

i "lDt -P*. to sing, to 

[praise. 

nfi a - rr^ir hanot. 

T T 

pPJ to cry out. 
.njjjjr-theciy. 
n£? pitch, 
Jpt ^T. and Hi. to be 

[old, to grow old. 
|pt old man, an elder, 

chief of a family, 

[tribe or city. 
7p* beard. 

D\Jpf old age. . 

£"|pf to raise, to com- 
,,_T [fort, 

ppt to refine. 

n? stranger. 

T 

j^t arm, strength. 

n*lf to break forth, to 
[shine. 
: ynt to sow. 

J/n? seed, children, 
" v . [sowing. 

nnt s P an - 
n 

X^n •#• •#*• to hide, 

T T 

shield ; Ni. to hide 
[oneself. 
nn^tT stripe. 

7^3 n rope, company. 



pnrr 

D^n to embrace. 

p3H folding. 

^DH to bind, to unite; 

- T 

Hit. to ally oneself, 

[with (Djfl, 

*"^}f7 companion. 

_ " T 

|i"DI"7 Hebron, p. n. 
' : v [of a city. 

t^'Dn to bind up, to 

- T 

gird, to saddle ; Pu. 
[to be bound uj>. 
Jjn festival. 

^j|7 locust. 

T T 

jJjf7«to celebrate a 

[festival. 

— T 

Jinn to gladden. 

T T 

mill joy. 

t : v 

Snn and Sin to 

- T " T 

cease, to leave off, 
[to be wanting. 
p-Jflr and p"jn (a 

[species of) thorn. 
"Yin chamber, inward 
[part. 
jy'in ^- to renew. 

^'"tll new. 

T T 

J^'*in the new moon, 
[month. 
;W1 circle - 
J^ff thread. 
*!)pj Hivite, a Canaan- 

S[ite tribe. 
}|f K. to move in a 
circle, to dance, to 
writhe in pain; Hi. 
to make tremble; 
Hit. w. ^,to wait for. 
7"jpj sand. 

k ofpl^fljtobe 

T T 

[sick. 



Vocabulary. 
HDlnwaiL 

T 

t^Jf exterior, abroad, 
[f V13 without. 

» ni^n^treet. 

JltH to see, especially 

T T 

a vision, hence to 

[prophesy, 
fitn vision. 

fWfl vision. 

T 

fj'f f7 intuity, vision. 
L 

Ptn arrow, npip^rr 

[thunder-flash, 
pf |f to be strong; with 
JJ3 to be stronger 

than, i. e. to con- 
quer; Pi. to give 
strength, to strength- 
en ; Hi. to lay hold 
of, to seize; Hit. 
to strengthen oneself. 

pJH and pfH strong, 
[violent. 

^tOtl to sin ; Hi. cause 

T T 

to sin, lead into sin. 
£$23 |f sinner. 

T _ 

2) the punishment of 
[sin. 
JlC^n wheat. 

T " 

*1t?n a shoot, twig. 
>jf living. 
ITTb riddle. 

T • 

J— PU to live ; Pi. to 

TT 

make alive; Hi. to 

[let live. 

If *ff living being, an- 

T " [imal, beast. 

D^n life - 

^n see Sin 



p^n 249 

7^(7 strength, force for 

war, army, wealth ; 
4 h nt^j) to make 
i. e. put forth power, 
do mightily, *$%& 

^^(7 mighty men, 
[heroes. 
*T|f7 palate. 

fOfl to wait for ; Pi. 
T T [id., to hope. 

ill 7 V?D darkening. 

D2Df7 to be, or become 

wise ; Pu. to be made 
wise ; Hit. to think 
[oneself wise. 
DDH wise - 

T T 

JlMPl wisdom. 

t : t 

7Jf profane; common. 
dS(1 milk. 

T T 

3^0 &t. 

ilSn to be ill; Hit. to 
T T [become sick. 
Q*J7f7 dream. 

7*7(1 nu te, pipe. 

rh^hh § 75, s. 

T • T 

~>7n -P** to profane ; 

. ~ T [Hi. to begin. 

Q7fj to dream ; Hi. to 

"J T , [cause to dream. 

flyf! to change ; Si', id. 

I " T [to renew. 

^7f7 to draw out; ifo". 

to be extricated, de- 
livered;Pi. to deliver, 
set free. 

D^O loins - 

|^7(7 to divide, have 

part, w. ^}; Hi. to make 

[smooth, flatter. 



din 



250 

p7f"j part, share, lot. 
pyf"T a dj- smooth. 
$ 'ytl weak. 

T _ 

Dp| warmth, heat, 
Qf7 P- n - m. 

T 

10H to coyet. 

- T 

i"?Df7 wrath, fury. 

tlfefl warmth, heat. 

TiOn a violent man, 
T [robber. 

"liDH ass. 

niftf? mother-in-law. 

TDf7 to have pity, 

T [compassion. 

D.tDfl to ^ e warm ; Pi. 

T [to make warm. 

Yfotl to be leavened. 

POP? leavened. 
fDJ7 vinegar. 
If^tl bitumen. 
IDH to daub, to pitch. 

- T 

iOfl clay, mortar, ce- 
ment. 2) Homer, a 
[dry measure. 
n^DHfive. 

T • -; 

jfl favor. 

f"T3f7 to encamp, be- 
[siege. 

Tjijrr p* n. m. 

TV^H lance* 

Q!ltl gratuitously, 

T ' [without cause. 
p|7 to be merciful, 

gracious to; Ho. to 

[find pity. 

*| D |f mercy ,lo ve,k ind- 

[ness. 

*J*D!lPio u s>goodman. 



Vocabulary. 

iDfl t° suffer want, to 

be without, to de- 
crease ; Pi. to lessen, 
[to make inferior. 
IDfl ad 3> lacking, 

[void. 
riBn bridal-chamber. 

T \ 

r$H to wish, to de- 
sire, to have delight. 

Y*Dtl delight, precious 
v '" . [thing. 

"l^ft to dig. 

- T 

&£tl to search. 

- T 

*£^5f7 tidj- free, ex- 

: t 

[empt from taxes. 

3^(7 to dig out, to 

[hew. 

;— li^n the middle, 

T [midst. 

f^ff the half, the mid- 

[dle. 

y)ftl g^ss. 

Y^tl to cut, divide, 
' " T [hence 

Y*$h dividing into 
' " [swarms. 

Y*£fl gravel-stones. 

I^n court, yard. 

•■ T 

ptl bosom. 
pf| statute, law. 

rrj>>D law - 

ppll to engrave, to in- 
scribe laws, to rule; 
[Pi. to decree. 
Ipr? to search, ex- 
' " T [plore. 

*"lpf7 a searching out; 

'pj JtJ£ unsearcheable. 
Iff a hole. 
31(1 sword. 

yjfl P* n «°f a top of 

[Sinai. 



nnrr 

MDin dry land. 

T T T 

fl^ni! wasteness,p£wr. 

waste places, ruins. 

lljl to quake, to 

[tremble. 

nilltobe kindled; 

T T 

w. £"jj^ the anger was 

' " [kindled. 

f*f)J7 diligent ; 2- fine 

1 T [gold. 

J*H(1 a P^ce, a slice. 

W13"\tl sickle. 

£"|1I"T PI to upbraid, to 

' ~ T [scorn, reproach. 

tV^ft autumn, harvest. 

n^in reproach, 

T : v [shame. 

t^'lff to work, to de- 

- T 

vise, imagine ; Hi. 
[to be silent, 
t^lfl artificer. 

TT 

B^)|l deaf. 

!H££TT to think, to bo 

about; with '—7, to 

count as, to regard ; 

[Pi. to devise. 

nt^rr-^^-tobesii- 

[ent. 
darkness. 



T]^rT to withhold, 
' " T [restrain. 

pfc^n to have delight 
in one, to love, w. 3. 

mti /. rvnrr Hit- 

tite, a race of people 
dwelling in the reg- 
ion of Hebron. 
liltl bridegroom, son- 
' T T [in-law. 

nnn (futnw to bG 

afraid, terrified ; Ni. 
to be confounded. 



S^D 



Vocabulary. 



m* 25i 



D 
^3£ to dip. 

- T 

1*3 £3 to sink, to pene- 
trate; Ho. to be sunk, 
to be laid deep, to 
[fasten in. 

T 

*")i"7^ to be or become 

- T 

clean, pure ; Pi. to 

cleanse, to purify; 

Hit.to purify oneself. 

3i£D good, fair? beau- 

ftiful. 

TOi^ /• of 3i£ ; 
[2. prosperity. 

3}ft the good, best 
[things. 
fflD to grind. 

^^ mire, mud* 

^ft dew. 

?ft£p to hide. 

DJ*D to taste* 

fi#& see yfcj 

ni'tO burden, trouble. 

HD/- MHtO fresh. 

• t t • : 

D")D> D*t£3 before, 
v v : [not yet. 



;W E*" to be willing, 
~ T content, to con- 
sent. 
7K* a river, esp. the 
[Nile. 

/'O* produce of the 
[land. 
*D13* Jebusite. 

^5'^ or *!-72Ji a he- 

goat, hence 'J>j7 |7p 

[rams'horn. 



£^'3* to be dry, to with- 
'" T [er; Hi. to dry up. 
$y adj. dry. 

|7fc^3* dry land. 

T T ~ 

WJ|* to be weary, 

fatigued ; Pi. Hi. to 
fatigue, to weary. 
7>hand,side,7^n T 

t : - 

a side, i. e. bank of 
[the Nile. 

J77* Hi. to confess, to 
TT [praise, thank. 

J>7* to know, to re- 
gard, to have respect; 
Hi. to let know, to 
inform, to teach. 

J7* abbreviated from 

curr 

3J-J1 lot, fate. T : 

mw J* dan - 

t : 

i—iirp tne L ° r ^ § is, 

T : [Note. 

ygP'in? Joshua. 

rnrirr, jrw Jona- 

I T T : > T T [than* 
3K1* Joab. 

T • 

m)?V mother. 
pj» ^wr. CD*©?; day, 
Q^jl to-day. 
D/^i^byday, 2) daily. 
JV Greek. 
TIN dove, 

T 

*JV Ionian, Greek. 

• t: 

p<Ji* a suckling child, 
• [2) a young twig. 
ttDV Joseph. 

YtfV counsellor* 

^V potter. 

fc^pi* fowler. 



DJ7V P. n. m. 
vJHt' Jezreelite. 
7 IT conjointly, at one 
[time. 
*)7|7* together. 

t : ~ 

!)JTDtfV Hezekiah. 

li*iW ( tne ° nl y or,e ) 

T ' : [child, girl. 
3ftt to be good, merry, 

- T 

to please ; Hi. to do 
[well, to do good. 
|W wine. 

?in see roi 

(73* ^V»* to dispute 

- T 

with one another ; 
Hi. to determine, to 
reprove, to rebuke. 

73* to be able, to pre- 
vail over, to over- 
S[come. 
* to bring forth, to 

bear ; Hi. to beget. 
7^1 child. 

717* born, i. e. a boy, 
. ♦ [a child. 

rf2\ see t^n 

0* sea, the west. 

T 

7*/J* right hand," the 
' * T . [south. 

J7J* iZ£ to oppress. 

TT 

p J* to suck; iZ2. to give 

' ~ T [suck* 

7D* to found, to ap- 

~ T [point. 

7*JD* ground, found- 
: [ation. 

f]D* K> a. Si. to add, 

' ~ T [increase. 

7p* to instruct; Pi. to 

-T 

correct, to punish; Ni. 
to receive correction. 



252 m> 

PC? ^5?*V |J? 'because. 

wW to be fatigued, 
, "' ' [faint. 

£Vp* faint, wearied. 

J*p* to advise ; JV*. to 
' " T [deliberate. 

3SJjP Jacob. 
ft\jjP ( non ey) twig, 
n^/- lib* beautiful. 

V T T T 

*£» in jp. *£)"i beauty. 

• t: 

J")£> Japhet. 

N¥> to g° °ut ; J5B. to 

T T 

lead out, to carry 

[out. 

3 V Hit. to set or place 

oneself, to stand firm. 
y£*> to set, place. 

JfJfOKj to make a bed. 

*")¥* to create, form, 

[make. 

*■)¥♦ form, imagination. 

")5f) former. 

*JJ2* to burn ; Ho. id. 

i"Tl7D* obedience. 
Yp*> to awake. 

"■^ to be precious ; 

|-_ T 

Si. to make pre- 
vious. 
"tfV precious, dear. 

$n$^ to fear, to be 

"T 

afraid ; Pi. to terrify. 
J^-j* fearing. 

p»rV fear. 

^J£3*V Jerubbaal. 

DJJ^JT^ Jeroboam. 



Vocabulary. 

TV to go down, de- 

scend ; Hi. to bring 

[down. 

tW to cast, to shoot 

TT 

arrows ; Hi. to teach, 
[instruct. 

D'Wrv or nb&w 

• - t : — t : 

[Jerusalem. 
(TV month. 

TV moon. 

- T 

iTV"ifVT Jericho. 

Tl^T curtain. 

T 

p*V herbs, greens. 
J#T* to inherit, possess, 

to dispossess ; Ni. to 

be dispossessed ; Hi. 

to ta.ke possession, 

[to make poor. 

t£?>-£?> there is, it is. 

Jltgf* to sit , inhabit, 

- T 

dwell ; Hi. to cause 
to sit, to make dwell. 

3t#* inhabitant. 

>£?> Jesse. 

njW* help, deliver- 
T : [ance. 

jg^gft old, aged man. 

• T 

T$) to sleep. 

y$* M. to be saved ; 
Hi. to help, to save. 

]?&?, y&* belp, as- 
sistance, salvation. 

JirVytS* Isaiah. 

*155^ upright, right. 

T T 

(11C honesty, piety. 
7*OfcP Israel. 

•• t: • 

Oil")* orphan. 



33D 

*W &i» to remain. 

- T 

■)")#* Jethro. 

fl^inj preeminence, 
: ' [superiority. 



5 as, like ; w. guff. 

3K5 to grieve, to ache; 
[Hi. to cause pain. 

I7N3 •#*• to be rebuk- 
T T [ed; Hi. to afflict. 
^^? as. 

HM*. "OS to be 

" T - T 

heavy, weighty ; Ni. 
to be honored, part. 

& /• nm;g as 

sub. glorious things : 

Pi. to honor ; Hit. to 

make or to show one- 

[self honorable. 

*"D3 ( const - TDD an( l 

*0?) heavy, num- 

v '*' [erous, rich. 

f733 to go out, to be 

T T [extinguished. 
TQG) honor, majesty. 

T 

DD3 -P** *° cleanse, 
" T [to wash clothes. 

*"£J3 5*. to multiply. 

- T 

bOD a y oun g sheep. 
JJ^'33 an oven. 

rta thus, rt^ rts 

rr 

[hither and thither. 
[ PD priest. 

njjT?3 priesthood. 

}?y\3 helmet. 

M13 star. 



Vd 



7*1*3 Pi. to contain, to 

sustain , Hi. to hold, 

[to contain. 

J!)3 to stand or exist ; 

1 Ni. and Bit. to be 
set up, to be estab- 
lished, prepared, 
ready; Pi. and Hi. 
to place or set up, to 
establish, fix, pre- 
pare. 

DID/, cup. 

£*13/- Ethiopia. 
*d3 Ethiopian. 
*}f*3 lie, falsehood. 

T T 

|f *3 strength, 

*1PD -P*- to ni( * e » to 
" T [conceal. 

CTD to conceal > <*e- 
ceive; Pi. to deny, 
to lie, speak false- 
hood. 

»*3 because, for, when, 
[that, but. 

{i"T3J avelin - 

**?**3 m i ser J avaricious. 
HDD thus. 
Sb^DalU^we 

*^3 dog. 

*"|7*3 to be complete, 

finished ; Pi. to com- 
plete, to finish, to 
[destroy utterly. 

J! /3 daughter-in-law. 

T _ 

^7p bird-cage. 

* 73 vessel, instrument. 

apparel, |?for. D*73 

vessels, arms, 

[weapons. 



Vocabulary. 

[reins. 
^/•nVSDcom- 

' T T ' : 

[plete, perfect. 

Q7*3 -Hi', to reproach, 

put to shame ; JTi. to 
[be ashamed. 

n&H?? re P roach > 
shame, ignominy. 

iDD as > like * 

- T 

led (of compassion.) 
jp thus, so, right, 

[D /J^ therefore. 
Ty^3 Canaan. 
^^J33 a Canaanite. 

£l3"D wing, the skirt of 
' T T [an upper garment. 

KD-D throne. 

j"f 0*3 to cover, to con- 

[ceal \Pi. id, 

^*D3 *°°1> foolish, 

. [silly- 

*^P3 strength, sup- 
port, folly. 
nn*D to long after; 

ft [jy». *& 

rt-33 silver, money. 

DJ75 an g er > g^ 
Cp dual D*jD3» tne 
hollow hand , palm 
[of the hand. 

*-7«n ftn the sole of 
vv 1- [the foot, 

*Y£TO young lion. 
q£)3 to bend. 

15D -P*' to atone, ex- 
" T [piate, to forgive. 



}35 253 

atonement, expia- 
tions. 
JTDtodig. 

T T 

01 3 vineyard. 
JVD to cut off, to hew 

do T wn, nn? rrg 

to make a covenant ; 
Ni. to be destroyed. 

7*^*3 JBT- JTi. to totter, 

— r 

to stumble; 5?. to 
cause to stumble. 

DilD to w^e. 

- T 

or?? g° id - 

shirt or tunic, coat. 
r™li"D to Deat > ^ash > 

— T 

iZb. to be smashed, 
[to be destroyed. 

h 

^ rarely X^-? not, 
[KSn§24,5. 

UN 7 -^ to be weai 7> 

T T 

[to dislike, loathe. 

*3X7 to wrap around, 
" T [to muffle. 

titfb people. 

*27 i"*j v heart, under- 
standing. 
3*27 heart. 

^*j*""7 alone, HjS 

' [I alone. 

|"]*37 flame. 

T _ 

1*37 Si*, to be white, 

to make white ; Nit. 
to purge oneself, 
[cleanse onesel£ 



254 plj 
J2}7 Laban. 

CO*"? to P ut on . to 

— T 

clothe oneself; Hi. to 
[dress, to clothe. 

T T V V V ~ 

flame, the glittering 
f"J!)7 tablet. [point. 

* *"P Levite. 

7T17 wreatQ j garland. 

N^i ^S if not, 

. . " [unless. 

ft 7 or p*~7 to stay, to 

abide ; Hi. to keep 
overnight, to harbor. 

Vy) Pi- to scorn ; Hi: 
[to interpret. 

tX\V) /• perverseness. 

0(17 bread. 

Qf77 JVt. to make war, 

"7 [to fight. 

YTjl to afflict, to 

T [oppress. 

t*pJ7 oppression. 

rhh night 

t : - 

pSseepS 
rjS see TjSn 
"ID 7 t° capture. 

- T 

"1^7 capture, noose. 
Jp7 therefore. 

n$h see ^n 

*"JD*-7 to le arn; Pi. to 

— T 

. [teach. 

DH^Db training, in- 

. . [struction. 



Vocabulary. 

\yEh for the sake of, 
, [in order that, 

J|V / to mock, to de- 
. [ride. 

fj^7 to speak unintell- 
igibly, in a foreign 
[language. 

*f]7 according to. 

-|*37 torch. 

*«3&7 before; w. *wjp. 

7 ' 'J* 1 ? 

J*7 scorner. 

t7p ~7 to take, capti- 

[vate, to accept. 

DD7 Pi- to gather up, 

[to collect* 

DD*? a gleaning. 

P&P7 tongue, 

ift. to slander. 



w? 



D 



"T&O might, power; 2) 

adfo. much ; 

^IND"*^ exceed- 
ingly, very. 
nBfflfrO anything, 

t : 

[whatever. 
JTVlND opening,hole. 

t : 

OWiiD scales - 

rb?W3 knife * 

?ND -P^ to refuse, be 

[unwilling. 

DNO (w. 5) to disdain, 



^0 

reject ; Ni. to be de- 
spised, rejected. 

KiDtD the going down, 

setting of the sun, 
[hence the west. 
htO^D trust. 
I^DD fortress, forti- 

t : • 

[fication. 

[shield. 
*"|£3 an upper garment. 

131D dtssert. 

T ; • 

Tift to measure. 

- T 

HID a measure. 

T * 

Ji*Jft c °ntention,strife. 
J#HD why? wherefore? 
P*ID strife, only ^?for. 
[contentions. 
yTO knowledge. 

no, r?o,nq, 

what? how? (§24, 1). 

Tl7nD one that travels. 

*")HD to be quick, to 

[hasten, Pi. id. 

*")!"TD adv. hastily. 

ITTTTfi quickly. 
SNlDMoab. 

T I 

*3ttlQ Moabite. 

• T 

£3?)0 to move, totter ; 

iVi. to be moved, to 

' [tremble, totter. 

7^ to circumcise. 
7)tJP re P' before, 
'D /N over against* 
[towards. 



1D\B 

")D1D instruction, cor- 
T ' [rection. 

"U?iD appointed time, 
hence festival; ap- 
pointed place for 
gathering together, 
hence '£ 7 ilk the 
tent of the congrega- 
tion, the tabernacle. 

N^iD utterance, a go- 

T 

ing out, depart. 
CpiD snare, gin. 

*V|£ Hi. to change, ex- 
change ; intrans. to 
alter, change one's 
[mind. 

HTiD teacher. 

fcr'^D to s* ve wa y » move 

[away, depart. 
DCHD a sitting, a so- 
[cial circle. 
)W'iD savior. 

|~^|D to die 5 -P*« and 

"JK. to kill, to slay. 
iTlD death. 

VT 

Ht'ltD a door-post. 

t : 

*11DtD a song, psalm. 

flTD rising of the sun, 
. T: ' [east. 

TlIlD dance. 

T 

nrilD vision. 

Til? P rice - 

Pi 7f7D sickness, dis- 
[ease. 
njOP camp. 

HD (ID refuge, shelter. 
DiDPTD a muzzle. 
*"llDriD want, defici- 
ency, poverty. 
? lip to strike. 



Vocabulary. 

ppb/p lawgiver. 
^lPTD to morrow ; 

T T 

D D"K5 aftertime, 
hereafter. 

roBTro thought. 

t t -: - 

J™innD destruction, 

t • : 

ruin. 

HDD «*. {pi niDD) 

staff, rod, tribe. 
HDD bed. 

T " 

^)DD -EK* to rain. 

— T 

^DD iain - 

T T 

*£ who ? 

0*D '.water. 

TtJ^P P lain 5 justice, 

equity, impartiality. 

*W**D evenness ; pZwr. 

T 

right things. 
DiOD pain, sorrow. 
j"OD a stroke, wound. 

T - 

p3ftfoundation,basis. 
*OD to sell. 

- T 

/fc^DD a stumbling 

block. 
K7D to be full; Pi. to 

fill. 
KSp «# full. 

KSp a ^d K«6d Al- 
ness, multitude. 
T|£s£^D messenger, 



PON^D work. 



-tfDD 255 
n^D/.(^-D^D or 

r^D( word. 

nD^/D ru le, domi- 
nion. 

tiyhfi a night-hut 

t : 

JIDIiSd war. 

t t : • 

D^D ^ to deliver: 

Ni. to escape, to be 

delivered. 
t]^D to rule, to be 

king;: Hi. to make. 

king. 

rpn tnig. 

HdSd queen. 
JVD7D kingdom. 
ilSj/pSp a oove/ 

roSao * j-oSdd 

t t : - .' / ; - 

kingdom, dominion. 
Sppp see Syp 
PlWDD dominion, 

t t : v 

rule. 
1f2 of, from ; w. sujf. 
'^PP 
jf^D to number. 

T T 

nn^UD stillness, rest. 
ease;'nrttlD *D still 

t : 

waters. 
*TJ]Jft a weaver's beam. 

T 

t : • 

DUD refuge. 

T 

1?J)D to withhold. 
"tip5J smith. 



256 



"[DD 



TlDD to m ^ x * 

rDDO a pouring out, 

T " - 

fu sion of metal, 

V *tih$ s° ds of 

fusion, i. e. molten 
gods, idols, 
"75 DD lamentation. 

*75DD number. 

/S]?t2 a tr ack, way. 

nS^D a round 
rampart, wagon-bar- 
ricade. 

"1^0 to waver, totter. 

D^D to be sma ll or 
few, to grow small ; 
Pi', to become few, 
little. 

DJ^£D subst. and a*fo. 
little; b^D3 but 
little, nearly, almost. 

^ft robe. 

Jjjtt? a spring. 

/J/£0 from above,from, 
see ^p # 

S#D (fr. nSy) what 
is above, ^""ty^ft 

above, nSy^Vp 
from above, upon. 
f—ptfiO degree on a 

T—. ~ 

dial-plate. 

hh%D w ° rk - 

V$t2 onl y wit h 7> as 
Wu? because of; 



Vocabulary. 

2 ) conj. w. inf. In 

order that ; T£>N 'S 

so that. 
tlS?ft answer. 
*1¥#0 controlL 
^U?5 west. 
np'lJJP array, an 

army generally. 
ng>$3 work - 

nSgO (/•) fall, ruin, 

carcass. 
^§/p before. 

fb> fiB cnaff. 
NVft to find - 

T T 

j-j^£unleavened &rajo* 

T - 

rni^p ^t. 

ni^D commandment. 

t : • 

^i¥D fortress. 

T 

n^£D forehead. 

JlH^D a greave. 

*))?)£& small. 

DnV? Egypt. 

Dipp Place. 

7pD staff, stick. 

jT!)pQ property ,cattle. 

X1DD a convocation. 
■»): • 

ilt^pp a cucumber- 
field.' 
*")ft bitter; 2) a drop. 

nx"!5 a si s ht » a P- 



pearance ; D^*Jf '0 
the view. 
ni^Snp (only in pL 

head. 
HID to be bitter, to 

T T 

be rebellious. 
OnS height; '£Qon 

T T - 

high. 
1*1^)0 a running, race. 
N*TO a fatling, esp. a 

fatted calf. 
JT^i/D p. n. of a hill in 

T * 

Jerusalem. 
flEDD cunning, de- 
ceit, fraud. 

jnp(l^.M.ofyjn) 
evi 1-doer. 

jhq L *• in friend » 

companion. 
NS*1D dealing, cure; 

quietness, softness. 
"HD to be bitter , to 

- T 

be in grief; Hi. to 

embitter } to make 

Nt^E burden. [sad. 

T — 
T T - 

^fefJO safety. 

t : \ 

n^D to draw out. 

t r 

rWD Moses. 

n^t^o a hed S e > 

t : 

fence. 
|f^0 to anoint. 

- T 

rVn&TD destruction, 
corruption. 



fTC-0 ■*$■ anointed ; 

- • T 

2) s. anointed one. 
Tlu^D *° d ra w j *° ex- 

tend, to defer. 
T]^5 possession. 

!33£^'0 coucn 5 °ed. 

7*3^0 wise,prudent. 

pty'O dwelling, tab- 
ernacle. 
^£>£ to rule ; Hi. to 

- T 

cause to rule. 
/&£ a ruler. 
;&*2 proverb. 

T T 

IftD&'O a faring. 

t : • 

*YtDu'0 a watching, 
guarding, custody. 

fHDtfp a charge, 

n^ty'O second, [law. 

rOJf L^'p support,stafT. 

D3p'P justice, judg- 
ment. 
7pfc#3 weight. 

rH^'lD servant. 

•• i : 

nn^'P drink, a feast 
generally. 

A!D dead, a dead per- 
3i"l*0 bridle, [son. 

DjID uninjured. 

D^jHD loins - 

• - : t 

Dins sweet > 



Vocabulary. 

♦n^ when? '0 iy 

- T T *- 

how long ? 
!"}JTt3 to ^ e sweet ; 
jffi. to make sweet. 



$$3 n6w ! pray ! I pray. 

T 

a dwelling, Ng^/j 
grassy pastures. 
fpfcO Peasant, becom- 

T 

ing, suitable. 
DX3 speech,utterance, 

declaration. 
|DN3 faithful. 

I tv: v 

£"1^3 to commit ad- 
ultery. 

Y$} to slight, reject ; 
Pi. to despise, con- 
temn; excite to con- 
tempt. 

ilpft) a complaining, 
outcry. 

J03 ^** to prophesy. 

T T 

nf^-jSty Nebu- 
chadnezzar. 
f\^2 intelligent. 

rtaa P- n - m - 

T 

£^j .Hi*, to look, to 

behold, see. 
W^Z prophet. 

• r 

7D3 *° wither, to fade 
or pass away ; Pi. id. 
to lightly esteem, to 
disgrace. 



rro 257 

' T T T T : 

foolish, impious. 
rt73d s - f°Uy> wicked- 

ness. 
J^J Hi. to pour forth, 

to utter, to publish 

abroad. 
1^ Hi. to declare, to 

tell. 
"llji 'J)/ 1 before, over, 

against, opposite to. 
HJI J splendor, bright- 
ness. 
yy } ^. a. ITi. to touch, 

reach, 
in y J to smite , strike, 

dash. 
&%} to oppress, to ex- 

-T 

act a task from any 
one. 
{jgA^ to approach, to 

- T 

touch. 
*n3 to wander, flee. 

-T 

|-f"l J to thrust, expel. 

— T 

y^} a noble, prince. . 
tV*]} to drive, to drive 



1*0 *° "vow. 



[away. 



3i"0 *° lead, to drive 
~ T [(beasts.) 

"PjlJ to lead. 

— T 

a'ninn^rive^esp. 
the Euphrates. 
|f!Q to rest; Hi. to 
cause to rest, to set,, 
put down, place. 



258 



P3 



J!fl p. n. m. 

p!|j to flee ; .HY. put to 

flight. 
J^ to move to and 

fro, be shaken. 
N*V)3 fearful, terrible. 

T 

Hi Noah. 

HITS JT- a - Hi. to lead, 

T T 

conduct. 
^H^ brook , river, 

valley. 
1*17(13 inheritance. 

t — : - 

Dftj M to pity; 2) to 

_ T 

comfort oneself; 3) to 
avenge oneself; Pi. 
to comfort, console ; 
Hit. to console one- 
B>TO serpent. [self. 

T T 

]"" )t£TO brass; $ua£ 

DT^'CU otters. 
i"7D3 to stretchout, to 

T T 

incline ; JK. to turn 
away ; to incline, 
pervert. 

J^LM to- plant. 

*1D3 to retain, keep 

- T 

sc. anger, to bear a 
grudge. 
KPfDJ to leave (in 

- T 

charge of any one), 
to forsake. 
PO^ -Hi', to strike, Jo 

T T 

jidj j^t, right. [sla y- 

""O^ -^* to De recog- 
nised, to dissimul- 



VoCABULARY. 

ate ; Hi. to discern, 

to recognise; Hit. be 

recpgnised. 
15} strangeness; x yt% 

a stranger, foreigner. 
4 *"03 foreign. 

• : t 
t t : 

112} panther. 

•• T 

D3 a standard, banner. 
JIDJJ to recoil, shrink 

- T 

back ; Hi. to remove, 

carry away ; Ho. to 

turn away, pervert. 

HD3 -P*- to try, tempt, 

T T 

prove. 

J/DJ to move on , ad- 
vance, depart; Hi. to 
lead forth, remove. 

pD3 to ascend. 

hyj c/.)shoe. 

*fti^ Naomi. 

' t: t 

1J^ to shake. 

1^ boy, child, youth. 

i""nj^ g^ 1 * young 
woman. 

DHJttt youth. 

fl5<3 to breathe. 
7£,3 to fall, to turn 

~ T 

out; Hi. to cast down. 
T*tD3 to be overspread; 

Pi. to dash in pieces. 
CD 3 (ww., mostly /.) 

soul, person, life. 
nVJ $i" *° quarrel. 



fl^' nVi? brightness, 
victory, 2) eternity ; 

H¥J 7 f° r ever. 
7^ Hi. to deliver; 

Ni. to be delivered. 
1^ to watch, guard, 

- T 

to besiege, to keep, 
^yj branch. 

DD3 to bore, pierce. 

*p 1 pure, innocent. 
I T 

Dp3 to avenge, take 
vengeance, Ni. to be 
avenged or punished. 

*")pj to bore, prick out, 
Pi. to pick out, to 
pierce. 

*lj light, lamp. 

?jn<3 whisperer, tatt- 
ler, tale-bearer. 

l"7iD*"l3 i°^ e {vwt.Ni. of 
j-Jf)*") to be slack). 

T T 

NbO to lift up, to take, 

T T 

D^5 '3 to accept 

• T T 

the person, i. e. to 
take the part of 
somebody, w. *7£$, to 
be gracious; w. or 
without following 
vip» to lift up the 
voice, to utter, to 
speak. 
ffly% to lead astray, 

T T 

to deceive. 
D*£' 3 women, plur. of 
ntP'N § 73, B. 2. 



*pj 



»\ to bite. 



Hlr*^ usury, interest. 
7^ to take off. 

- T 

ilOKtt breath, spirit, 

t t : 

wind, 
ngrj) to kiss. 

~)0 eagle. 

yn* rn. a. nnw /• 

• t t • : 

path. 
|rU to give, with 7, to 
make. 

D 

X50 to drink. 

T T 

£OD drunkard. 
3!3D to surround, to 

- T 

turn ; Ni. to turn, 
^iPHp ba ck, to go 
back. 
D*DD a circuit; a<fo. 

• T 

a. prep, round about, 
around, 
•■pp thicket. 

H/DD burden, task. 

t : • 

Ttop P OTe gow. 

1I7JIP peculiar prop- 
erty ; treasure. 
TUD -P*« to deliver up. 

y\0 Ni. to draw back. 

TID an assembly, circle 

2) secret, counsel. 

D^D horse. 
fpD flags- 
HfilD tempest. 



Vocabulary. 

*y\0 to depart, to turn 
aside, to draw near; 
Hi. to remove, to re- 
call. 

|f 3D booth, taber- 
. T • [nacle. 

73D silly. 

T T 

n^JD folly. 
H7D P^ to weigh. 

T T 

n*7D to pardon. 

- T 

H7D forgiving. 

T ~ 

TV? 7D rampart. 

t : 

y?0 rock, support. 
wl7D Pi- to overthrow. 

7]DD to support, up- 
hold. 

1i?D *° support, sus- 
tain. 

"f^D* mourn, lament. 

- T 

fWflD shi P- 

t : 

T0D a sapphire. 

f »3Q to count; Pi. to 

tell. 
*"! £D book. 

/DD to stone. 
m \Opret.of*WO. 

T 

JT")D a turning away, 

TT 

(from the law, from 
God.) 
pp) to hang over. 

- T 

tV^D c °at of mail. 
*)HD *° hide ; Ni. to 

m —-y 

hide oneself, to be 



W 



259 



hidden ; Hit. to hide 
oneself. 



3Jf cloud, thick cloud, 
darkness. 

*OJ^ *° serve. 

"OJ7 laborer. 

*037 servant, slave. 

H*fiy work, labor. 

TG$ witn 5 W- be- 
cause of, ^131^57 

for the purpose that. 
""D]7 to pass over or 
away, to tresspass ; 
Hi. to lead over, to 
cause to pass; Kit* 
to be careless. 

mj^a. H^cake. 

*"\y witness. 

*"]J^ 1) s. duration, 
eternity; ^y? fo r " 
ever; -]p Q^S 

"•t t ^ : 

forever a. ever. 2) 
prep, as for as, to, (of 
space and time) "|^ 
*nD how long ? 

- T 

n*Jtf testimony, wit- 
ness ; assembly, con- 
gregation. 

njj Eden. 

ffj; flock. 

*\\y Hi. to testify, to 
bear witness. 



260 Tltf 

*j*jp still, yet, since, 

while. 
t^ strength. 

7*P ) unrighteous- 
.■'i T > ness, iniquity, 
H /Ijf ; unjustice. 

!"T7ll? burnt-offering. 

suckling , hence an 
infant or child. 
C^iJ? eternity , age ; 

bVipS or Q^V 

^pl for ever; 2) 
world. 
ftp iniquity, sin. 

IJjjj see ij^ 

*||y to fly. 

ftip fowl, birds. 

t*?l p p. n. of a place. 

*TJp skin. 

•yty Pi. to blind. 

^^ adj. blind. 

fp «$. (jrfw. &$) 

strong, imprudent. 
\y strength, *fp my s. 

^ft p to leave , desert, 

forsake. 
H!p Gaza - 
np?y p. n. of a city. 

"ftp to help, deliver. 

HOP to cover, wrap. 
"IJ^P to surround ; Pi. 
to crown. 



Vocabulary. 

crown. 
J*P eye, fountain ; <Zw* 

£"|tp a^j. weary. 

^(jP?.Dn^)/.city, 

town. 
7P upon , on , over, 

against; w.suff. >7p. 

Sp w. swif- i%£ joke. 

Jl 7p to go up, ascend; 
iZi. to bring up, to 
offer up ; Hit. to lift 
oneself up. 

j"77y burnt-offering. 

JlSp leaf. 

fSp to exult. 

TY^JV highest, the 

Most High. 
7*7p furnace. 
*? 7p Pi- to glean. 

Hi. to hide, conceal. 

qS# youth. 

jf07p a maiden. 

to rejoice, exult. 



r^ 



h]^ with ; w. sw^. 

f1p or pp people, 
nation. 

"10$ to stand, to end- 
ure , continue ; w. 
0£37i to withstand, 



resist; w. Jp, to stop 

from, desist. 
H&P iw«p. with, but 

only w. mff. HEP 

with me. 
1?|3y pillar. 

[i^P Ammon. 

^i^/.noi^Am- 

monite. 
j— VJOp neighbour, 

fellow-man. 
*?&P to toil, labor. 

7Dp toil, trouble. 
pDp Hi. to deepen. 

pQ# valle y> field - 

*Tp^ sheaf; 2) Omer, 

a dry measure. 
H^DJ^P- 11 - of a city. 
$ty Hit. to delight 

oneself. 
iXyf} to answer, to tell; 

w. ^ testify against; 

Pi. to oppress, to 

humble; Bit. to be 

afflicted. 
*)3p humble, meek. 

HUp humility, meek- 
ness. 

Op in p. Op, misery, 
affliction. 

Op poor. 

np cloud. 

£Op to punish, fine. 

^£p dust, sand, earth. 



Vty tree, wood ; plur. 
sticks for fuel. 

DVJ^ ^*- t° De grieved; 
iZft. to grieve one- 
self, to be angry. 

JiDVif sorrow, pain. 

nVJ/ counsel, advice. 

Q)ty strong. 

*?yjf lazy, sluggard. 

" T 

ovy/- bone > bod y- 

D"lVi? /* festive as- 
sembly, a feast-day. 

]3p^ reward ; for the 
sake of, because. 

*7py to bind. 

*lpP to tear out » to 

uproot. 
^PJ?a<Zj.barren,sterile. 

)p^ p. n. of a city. 



2*TV to become dark ; 
Hi. yV$jT\ «^- at 
evening; 2) to pledge 
or pawn, to be or 
give security. 

y\V t° De sweet. 

y\ty adj. sweet. 

y$ evening; BtSPSg 
the two evenings, 
twilight. 

2*1)f raven. 

D*^y (onlyj??.) willows. 
i"Q1 J? plain , wilder- 



VOCABULARY. 

PTSTfiP* security, 

pledge. 
fOJf Pi. to make bare, 

uncover. 

naked. 
D^njf prudent. 

TT\tf to set in order, 
to array (a battle), 
to equal. 

j"77*)17 foreskin. 

t :*t 

trijjj neck. 

flj? to fear, tremble. 

tin)?'/, bed, 

Db*J/ herb, grass. 
Ht^y to aiake, to do. 
SN Hfefg P- n. m. 
nitT^> nt^j; ten; 

tr'-jnS *fie^| on 

the thenth (day) of 

the month. 
Ttfty rich. 
jVTCty the tenth 
\&y to smoke, 
jgtyc. f^J? smoke. 
l&tf smoking. 
p£ty to oppress 
*)^ten. 

*|gty to be rich, Hi. to 
make rich, to become 
rich ; Hit. to feign 
oneself rich. 



bb* 261 

Itfty wealth, riches. 

J")Jf com. time, 1X1J/3 

in its time , in due 

Hil^ now. [season. 

*ttfiy he-goat. 



*"W£) -P*' to adorn , to 

•• T 

beautify ; Hit. to 
glorify oneself, to 
boast oneself. 

yy& to urge , press, 

reach unto. 
y^lD chance. 
*"U£) corps, carcass. 
B^Q to meet. 

- T 

Hgc. iQ (§73) mouth, 
edge; " t^ *|-*># 

in proportion , ac- 
cording to. 

|-J£ here. 

1Q refined gold. 

T 

f"J5 snare. 
*]pf5 to fear. 

— T 

mtO£) topaz. 

t : • 

y}Q rill, brook. 

n^B/. apiece. 

£375 to escape; Pi.id t , 
to set free, to de- 
liver ; HI. to rescue. 

t •■ : t •• : 

escape, deliverance. 
77£ Hit. to pray. 



262 dSs 

0/13 scales. 

*i?\2h$ Philistine. 

-?E) lest, that not, for 
fear that. 

JT^} to turn, w. Stf> 
to or towards. 

CD*J2 countenance, 
face, surface; )}Q ^ty 
upon; \J£7 before; 
*10jjj before , be- 
cause of. 

D^JS pearls. 

flD 5 a passover , the 
passover-feast (prop. 
an over-leaping). 

("fDiD lame. 

^D£3 carved image, 

idol 
7^5 to do, to work. 

7^5 the worker. 

b^b deed, act, work. 

i\?]?Q labor, deed, 

wages. 
Qy^ a step, trace, 

tread or beat, fig. a 

time, rinx dj/§ 

one time ; ffi**}$ 

&D¥$ thrice. 
y VJD wound. 
"ID 5 to remember 

think, visit, number; 

with *""7, to look 

after ; Pi. to muster; 

Hi. to appoint , to 

charge. 



Vocabulary. 

~np9 (only ^.) pre- 

UpS) ^ °P en - P * 

FIDS open-eyed, 

seeing. 
"13 (w. the art. T\STJ) 

a young bull,bullock. 
"HS -K -ER. to se- 

- T 

parate. 
JTliD to ^ear (fruit) ; 

TT 

Hi. to make fruitful. 
ITlg young cow. 

TT 

>np p- n - ° f a Ca_ 

naanitish tribe. 
n*l5 to sprout, to 

- T 

blossom. 

lO^jD collect- single ber- 
ries which fall off in 
the vintage , stray 
fruits. 

H3 fruit. 

D15 to sever, to break 

- T 

assunder. 
y")£D to reject, avoid. 

lijHB a title of the 
Egyptian kings. 

t**)£) to break down, 
to destroy. 

"H5 K. Hi. to make 

-T 

void, to violate; 
Ho. to be brought to 
nonght or nullified. 

'W)Q to stretch out. 
$"*)£ to spread out, 

- T 

to extend, specify. 
£^*"1JD horseman, rider, 

T T 

horse. 



y&£ to transgress, to 

sin, with 3 
y$Q sin. 

n£ morsel. 

DKH5 suddenly. 

Iir)5 to open ; Pi. to 

- T 

loosen, untie. 
nn| door. 

♦JT& (m |). >f)g , pi. 
D^n$, D^and 
D^ri3) foolish- 

T 

ness ; 2) concr. a fool, 
simpleton. 
'jlQ an adder. 



JKV flock, sheep, small 
cattle. 

rare *»/•<***¥♦. 

T T 

jov^ost,^?. ni«nv- 

T T T : 

^}1£ roebuck, gazelle. 
iy£ to heap up. 

— T 

p**n¥ righteous, just. 

T • 

donian. 
D1V to be right or 
just ; Hi. to pro- 
nounce right or in- 
nocent , to acquit ; 
Hit. to justify or 
clear oneself. 

p*l¥ ) righteousness, 
Jk.1'^ > justice ; plur. 
1 |t t: ) righteous acts. 



jfiy Pi> to institute, 

TT 

to command, charge. 

ni&iy/Tyre. 

^!)\f rock. 

DHV to laugh ; Pi. to 
laugh heartily, hence 
to sport, to be joyful. 

JV^ Zion. 

")*\f messenger, 2) 

hinge. 
*"7^ shadow, shade, 

shelter. 
n^\f to go on well, to 

- T 

succeed, to prosper ; 
Si, to cause to pro- 
sper , to make suc- 
ceed, and intrans. to 
be successful. 
Q 7^ image. 

fHlD /}£ shadow of 

v t : - 

death or death-shade. 
NDV to be thirsty. 

" T 

1D¥ wool. 

J13¥ cold, 2) shield. 
1^0 ¥ humble, modest. 
]}y£ to be low, modest. 
-fjjflC step. 

young. 
HpJ^y cry for help. 

JlD"^ north, northern. 

*TJ5^ bird. 



Vocabulary. 

|£\f to nide ; witn S> 
to lie in wait for 
somebody ; 2) to lay 
up , to treasure or 
hoard. 

*3iy£¥ a basilisk. 

n£¥ Zephath, p. n. of 

a Canaanitish city. 
*1V (IV w - destict. ac- 

- T 

cent or w. art. , as 
T^H) enemy. 

ni¥ trouble, distress, 

T T 

adversity. 

fVl!fc to smelt, esp. of 
gold and silver, to 
refine, to purify. 

*"nV to bind up, to be 

~ T 

hostile to; Hi. to 
T^ ba S- [afflict. 

"H^ adversary. 



J$p vomit. 

n^^Dp grave, se- 
pulchre. 

*75p J ^*- to receive, to 
admit ; Hi. to be 
opposite or over 
against. 

j>5p PL to gather; 
Hit. to assemble. 

"Dp t0 burv - 

"Op grave. 

^'i-Ip holy. 

|"Hp to kindle. 

-It 



£HD ^"- -H*. to sanct- 

-JT 

ify , to keep holy ; 

Ni. to be sanctified. 
&*"fp holiness , holy 

thing ; 2) holy place, 

sanctuary. 
wfp congregation. 

JDip helmet. 

HID K - pi - to hope ; 

t|t 

Ni. to assemble. 

^P I niSp voice, 
7p ) sound, thunder. 

Q)T) to rise up , arise, 
come forth, to stand 
firm, endure; Pi. 
perform , confirm ; 
Hi. to raise up , to 
establish ; No. to be 
raised up, erected. 

n P im n of npS. 

|Dp to be small , -fig. 

unworthy. 
f9P /• n|Dj3, small, 

young. 

*1DD -P*- to burn in ' 

- I T 

cense ; No. to be of- 
fered as incense. 

rntOp/- incense. 

Y^T) summer. 

fi^p P- n ' of a stream. 

Sp (p*. D^Vp) li S ht ' 

Ji^p disgrace. '• 

*/D a * N*7D roasted 
grain. 



264 



b% 



77p to be light, to 

-It 

abate ; Pi. to curse, 
to revile. 

«"V7p curse - 

y?p Pi. to sling, 
^p a sling. 

DpF^. of Dip. 

HOD landing corn. 

T J T 

IP c - Ip nest * 

SOD -^ to eny y \ -S»« 

to make envious. 
X3p jealous. 

Hip JT. IB. to buy, 

acquire, possess. 
Tiyp stalk, cane. 

j"j jp possessor, master. 

DDD to divine, spoken 
esp. of false prophets. 
H^p end. 

nvp end - 

*V£[) harvest. 

• It 

Fj^p to be angry, 

wroth. 
Wp Pi. to cut off. 

*")^P to cut , to reap ; 
-|t . 
*J¥p reaper. 

"ip cold. 

N1D to name, to call, 

t|t 

invite. 

jsnp or mp * 

t|i t|t 

to happen or chance. 



VOCABULAEY. 

fttHp 1 ? to meet; 2) 

over against. 
*}*")p to approach, to 

"It 

come together; Pi. 

bring near; Si. to 

offer. 
^}*^P inward part ; 

^*ip3 in the midst 

of, within; S*"lpS 

from admidst,among. 
^"Ip near, he who is 

near, neighbour. 
j"Hp 2T. Ni. to meet ; 

t|t 

Hi. to cause to meet. 
(Tip ice. 

nnp city. 

Qlp to cover, to lay 

"It 

on (skin). 
'. horn. 



rnp city. 

2£>'p Si. to listen, to 

- |t 

hearken. 
ilt^D to be hard ; Si. 

T |T 

to harden. 
nt2?p hard, vehement; 

bbp Htfp nard- 

faced, impudent. 
rSWp&T) the scale of 

a fish, of an armor. 
!")$P to bind. 



j—JJO to see, to look 

T T 

out, choose ; Ni. to 
be seen, to appear ; 
Hi. to show ; Hit. to 
look at one another. 



corals. . 

jtfifa (^ o^ao) 

head, top, summit, 
E^'T I poverty, [chief. 

WX*) see ^n, 
{ifi^n first. 

jVt^jn beginning. 

J} 5 ! abundance, multi- 
tude. 

much, great, many. 
D*l or JJV^ quarrel. 

XT) to be numerous, 

many. 
flXD myriad. 

t t : 

fty\ to become many; 

T T 

Hi. to multiply. 

nton^.-Kofnan. 

riffiya great grand- 
children, man of the 
fourth generation. 

Y^T\ to lie down ; Hi. 

to cause to lie down. 
"~7JH to tread down, 

i. e. to slander. 
7^*") com. ^7i<f. foot. 

ci*n -^ •***• to p ursue , 

to follow. 
tl*l*n persecutor. 

tOJTI a watering- 
trough. 

^j*) multitude o£ 
much, many. 



nn 
nvr nn ^.to smeii, 

«?. 3 j to en j°y the 

odor of. 
fJJp e. ^ wind, spirit. 

|"VV) abundance. 

tt : 

CH to he high, lifted 
up; Pi. Hi. to raise, 
lift up high. 

Jf."n Pi. Hi- to cry 

aloud, to shout. 

Vy~\ to run, to hasten ; 
' Hi. to bring quickly. 

£'}*1 to be poor or in 
want; Hit, to feign 
oneself poor. 

J-fl"! p. n. f. Ruth. 

Tif"l Prince. 

^H*") a<?j. wide, broad. 

T T 

3fn 3im./ street - 
D*n*l a ^J- merciful. 
P'jpy'n adj. distant, far; 

DlrriO far off, from 

afar. 
Cm to love; Pi. to 

- T 

have pity ; Pu. to 
obtain mercy. 

D*DfT"l mercy, affec- 
tion. 

VfH to wash, to bathe. 



2 If 1 ") to be or remain 



far; Pi. to put far 
away; Hi. to remove. 

^n» D"H to contend, 
to conduct a cause. 

^'") contention, quar- 
rel. 

^(^Z.QVpnWi.soft. 



Vocabulary. 

2^*") chariot; 2) upper 

millstone. 
u'O") property, 

wealth. 
S^l slander. 
TOT to be tender, 

timid, faint. 
QT high , lofty {part. 

of on). 

«1£n worm. 

T ' 

DOT to be ni g^ ; ■#*• 

to lift up oneself. 
D0*1 to tread. 

- T 

nFS a shouting, joy, 

T 

outcry for help. 
P"J to shout. 

J^T companion, friend. 

^T (w. distinct, ac- 
cent y-) , with art. 

inn or^\r\) bad, 

evil, wicked, dis- 
pleasing. 
J/T badness , wicked- 



3J/T to be hungry ; 
Hi. to cause to hun- 
ger, to let famish. 

DJH ad j- hungry. 

nyi to feed ; Pi. Hit. 
to be a companion, 
to associate oneself. 

f7j/T shepherd. 

n^"1 badness, wicked- 
ness, evil, adversity. 



QJ^ IT.iZ*. to thunder. 

W^\ to be evil ; ffl. 
to become evil or 
worse ; Hi. to do ill, 
to act badly ; £) to 
break, to crush; intr. 
to be broken. 

£•' VT earth-quake. 

ft^T .£". Pi. to heal. 

T T 

,T£3T to be loose, weak; 

T ▼ 

iV7. to be languid, 
idle ; Hi. to slacken, 
leave off, to abandon. 

D'TvH P- n - of a 

station. 
P"|V*1 to accept, to 

T T 

cherish, to be de- 
lighted, pleased; JVi. 
to be graciously ac- 
cepted. 

p^H fiWi tleligH 

favor. 
n^l to murder, kill, 

slay. 
^HT to decay, perish. 

^n*l rottenness. 

It t 

TD*1 to leap, dance. 

I- T 

V*pT expanse, firma- 
ment. 

\£f") P oor (prop- V art " 
of B*pfc also Bljn, 

T 

1?&*T to act wickedly ; 

Hi. to condemn. 
Vt^"l unrighteousness, 

wickedness. 



266 yen 

$&?*) wicked, guilty, 

a guilty one. 
J7J^"1 wickedness. 

W*t a name. 



fishnet. 

b)X& Saul. 

/i^C^ c - £• lower 
world, hell. 
/8ttff° ask, demand ; 

t : - t 

ask after the wel- 
fare, to salute. 

nN^tobeleft;JT*.id.; 

Si. to leave, to 

remain. 
2ty 'imp. af2MJf>-, 

- T 

3^V^« Of %!\&\ 

77X2$ to carry away 

T T 

captive. 
TXgfofi oath. 
n^Qtr week. 

iTD^ /• captivity; 
t))i$yi& to bring 
back the captives. 

\S2W stick, staff, 
sceptre, tribe. 

W^yf seventh. 

V • T • 

ear of corn. 
yyp K.m. to swear; 
J5Ti- to bind by an 
oath, to adjure.' 



Vocabulary, 

^ ? ^ J seven. 

D^D^' seventy. 
D?fBD$ sevenfold. 
^!3^ *o buy corn ; 

- T 

2) to break, to de- 
stroy ; M. to be 
broken, contrite. 
^Ot^' destruction. 

tyytf to res t. 

- T 

D2Vf Sabbath. 

T — 

Jirn^^' a sabbath- 
keeping or sabbatism. 
TTJ^ to destroy. 

- T 

Tlt^ a destroyer. 
V^' Almighty. 
DHtr onyx. 

Js^l^' vanity, false- 

: t 

hood, in vain. 
3\$ to return, turn 
away ; Si. to cause 
to return, to restore, 
to bring home; with 
^Ol to answer ; Pi. 

T T 

CjDJ to refresh. 
%X)Ht? to be equal; Hi. 

T T 

to compare. 
tO"}^ whip, scourge, 
ni^l^ a cry for help. 
I^it^ trumpet. 

T 

'"fytff an ox. 

"Vlt^ or "jfgf.BS.tb sing. 



ranW 
n-^Wi*. ^ 

T - 

*||7gj a bribe. 

Df"W to slaughter. 

~>nt^' roarer, lion. 

pfft^ small dust, a 

cloud. 
^H^ to pierce, break 

- T 

open; PL to seek 

early, to search for. 

ntl& Hi- t° become 

- T 

corrupt, act wickedly. 

rsftpf' pit. 

flood. 



n ^.jasong. 

J— }>£? to put, place, 

direct. 
*yyy to lie down; Ifi. 

- T 

to xause to lie , to 

lay down. 
*T)3C intoxicated, 

drunk. 
F\y& to forget ; Pi. to 

- T 

cause to forget, to 
neglect. 

hbj^ ^3# to be 
bereaved ; Pi. to de- 
stroy,make childless. 

DD£* Hi* to rise early. 

- T 

V2^ to dwell, to rest. 
*)DgJ strong drink. 

T •* 

y)$ snow. 

rfcifovf flame - 



DlSfc> 

Dl 7ty r peace, welfare. 
Ty)Vf to send , to put 

— T 

forth , stretch out, 
PL to send away, to 
cast out, forth. 
\rh& table. 

?jh& to throw; Mi. 
to cast. 

ti~)\& Pi- 1° P a y> P er - 

- T 

form, recompense. 
Q vtf adj. perlect, 

•* T 

honest, peaceable. 
ulVf peace-offering. 

JibSt^ Solomon. 
ty)$ to draw. 

nyhy\ ihiee - 

CyVTHiP grand- 
children. 

or, natf tnere ; 

T T T 

OL^'O from there. 

T • 

D^(^-niDg>)name; 

2) Sem. 
n^^' P- n. m. 

T _ 

"Iftfc^ to destroy, cut 

- T 

TV2W' thither. t off - 

T T 

7^/9 {?' Samuel. 

^fob# re P ort - 

0*0 fcP heaven. 

• - T 

DD 2^ to be astonished, 

" T 

confounded. 
J— lOOfc^' desolation, 

t t : 

waste. 



Vocabulary. 

\D$ oil. 

)?D$ to hear,- listen, 
obey, to understand. 
ybtj^ report. 
T))ft?f& Simeon. 
^Ot*?' to keep, guard ; 

- T 

ifo*. to beware of ; 
Pi. to regard. 

jyHOfc^ Samaria. 

t^'Dt^ <*> gr. sun. 

TWOt^' Samson. 

rUtT" to repeat. £ tooth - 

T T 

nMf year. 

T T 

njfc^ sleep. 

ttg^ fPJttf/- second. 

VJJ^ scarlet color 

• T 

0^' two - 

p5^ Pi. to sharpen, 

inculcate, teach dili- 
gently. 

DD£* to plunder. 

- T 

*-7#$ hollow of the 
hand. 



y$y$ to amuse one- 
self, to play, to caress. 
W>y$yW delight. 

n fli") ^ female servant. 
tO£j^' to judge. 
D£)^' judge. 



ft? 26 * 

fjfrjt^ to shed, to cast. 

7t}t^' to be low; Si*, to 
make low, to humble. 
f£3C2P coney or rabbit. 

"1D&* 1 ' *° watch, to 

I- T 

wake. 
npt^ to drink; ZS. 

It t 

give to drink. 

DDC' to rest; Si. give 
l _T 

/Dti^ *° we ig n « 

. '" T 

^7p g* a weight, shekel. 

IdUS pi - to lie. 

I- T 

*npt^ li e > falsehood. 
JV'W a coat of mail. 
Jint^ to dr^k. 

T T 

DW(c.^^)/.two. 
7ilt^ to plant. 

- T 

pntT to settle down, 
to cease. 

satisfied , to have ab- 
undance ; Hi. to sat- 
isfy. 
3£&' -^ *° ra i se > ex- 

- T 

alt ; Ni. to be ex- 
alted or sublime. 

nUb* to £> row > increase. 

T T 

mb* field - 

V T 

tlitf c ' 9- lamb, sheep. 



268 TQW 

Ji^it^ P- n. of a city. 

D?J^ and Q>£? to put, 
make, give; iZi'. with 
^), to give, bestow. 

JOiS^ enemy. 

pn& to lau g h ; pi - to 

rejoice, play, dance. 
pYl& laughter. 

D^^ltohate, to be 
]&& | an adversary. 

11D& an adversary. 

I r t 

r™ID^ grayness or 

T 

hoarinessof hair, old 

age. 
W& to meditate, to 

speak, talk. 
ppfe' sorrow. 
'W>& to rejoice. 
**Db^ insight, mind. 
TOfc? hireling. 

• T 

/!2& Hi* to be wise, 

- T 

to act wisely,to cause 
to prosper. 

h^p or ^ty intel- 
ligence, understand- 
ing. 

*\i"$ M to be hired ; 

_ T 

Sit. to hire oneself 

out , to earn wages. 

*Dfc? a. "Ot^ reward, 

T T 

wages. 
iV^hty garment. 

t : - 

ft® pret. ofQ^ 
^KOJT !eft hand. 



Vocabulary. 

nob* and n,t:e> to 

- T - •• T 

rejoice; Pi. to cheer, 
to gladden. 

tlfi&adj- joyful, glad. 

- " T 

Hf!?^ j°y, rejoicing. 
(Hr*?D& garment, 

T ; • 

raiment. 
n^99^/. spider. 

KJtP #• IF* to hate, 

TT • ~ T : 

lip, bank (of a river). 
T)]tf sack-cloth. 

l^(^Dn^) prince, 

• T 

chief. 
j— Ot^ princess; 2) 

TT 

Sarah. 
Tl£^ a left, fugitive 

' T 

one, remnant. 
£]*)& to burn. 



rtf &H %-tree. 

t •• : 

n^n ehest, vessel or 

ark. 
n3 ! Qn intelligence. 

t : 

fjil straw. 
Dinjl c - ff- depth. 
n^Jin praise, object 

t • : 

of praise, 
min thanks, thanks- 

T 

giving. 



t) 7tlin h °pe, expect- 
ation. 

Tj)ric. , -[i^ the middle, 
between, in. 

nriDin a pleading ; 
2) correction, reproof, 
i^ /ill ) a w orm, esp. 

k-t'tiL,-* C the cock* 

^7^ ) worm. 

'R'ytf'SyS abomination. 

nj|xyin(° nl yp^o 

goings out, issues, 
fountains, 
mifl law. 

T 

fi/Wl beginning. 

D^rtfl (only^r.) 
entreaties, supplica- 
tions. 

iinn under, instead ; 
MflflD "nder 

Dn>«.ofn^ > 

TT 

{^'^jT) must, wine. 
pH X. Pi. to weigh, 

prove, measure ; JSTi. 

to be even, right. 
H 7ft to hang, to hang 

T T 

Oj?) plain, perfect. ^ up * 

T 

Jl^DD a form, image. 

t : 

H^^Dil exchange. 

t : 

*l^n continually, al- 

• T 

ways. 
D*£fl righteous , up- 

• T 

right. 
TlDfi to hold, support, 
obtain. 



pi, m \n, rofi *>p- of 

Hpl^fl slumber. 
DJ^fl to abhor. 

npS^n hidden 
thing,' a secret. 

JflATri g°°d cheer, de- 
light. 

"U^il sheath of a 
sword. 



Vocabulary. 

t t : • v v : • 

glory, beauty. 
i"1 73fi prayer. 
CJ^j-H to seize, to 

- T 

capture, catch. 
nipH hope. 

n&lpri circuit or 

round. 
J^pfi *° strike (hands 



Apparel 209 

in rejoicing, in pled- 
ging ; 2) to blow. 

n^)^\y\ shouting, 
clang of trumpets. 

r\)?Wft help, victory, 

salvation. 
ny^'n nine. 

of]ru. 



II. ENGLISH AND HEBREW. 



A 

Abei Sjrr. 

Abide, to ytf\ 

- T 

Able, to be ^'y. 
Abomination royjJH 
Abraham Di"TOK. 

t t : - 

Absalom DiScOX* 

t : - 

Abuse, to ^7^ Sit. 

with 3, 
Accomplished , to be 

"• T 

According to 3, *£■}, 

Acquire, to HtJ^. 
Adam Q-iK. 

T T 

Add, to ftp* J5B. 
Adversary yjtf, •)¥. 



Afflict, to J— tfj? Pi ; 
After, afterwards 1 ") f7^, 

§75,6. ^g) ? 

After (= like) p. 
After (= when) 3> 3 
w. inf. const. § 106, 2. 
Again -j*jjf, 
Against 7J/, 

AH Sb,-S3; we all, 

T 

ye all, see § 98, 2. 
Almighty Htr 4 
Also QjJ, fjtf. 
Always tyjjftf 

Among ?pn§; f>a 
anjga; 

AmoriteHD^* 



And — see § 18 ;§ 33; 
§ 102. 

Angel T^D, 
Anger rjtf (>£jtf my 

anger.) 
Animal H*!"?* 

T - 

Anoint, to 7p D -ST* a « 
J3i*. / to anoint for 
consecration pf^'O* 

Anointed |-pfc^D. 

T 

Another (= different) 
*TlN> {One Another 
see § 97, 4). 
Answer, to fMV, 
Answer, s. ilij£D# 
Ant nS^J /• (pfar. 

Any "^, ^\X. 
Apparel $$7, 



2*70 Appointment 

Appointment "iyto» 
Arise, to fj^p, 
Armjpr/- 
Array, to f£07» 
Arrogancy pfttf* 

As 5, ng\N?. 

Ascent, s. H/J^D* 
Ashamed, to be f^l^. 
Ashes *"|§K» 
Ask, to SnJ^ (rarely 
7tft^') ; to T ask for 

- T 

Ass liJ^n > a she-ass 

At (—to) ^ 
At (=through) I3/3, 
At (-from) |£, 
Athalia }n*7i"ltf. 

t : -*■: 

Avenge, to Qp^ ; to 
be avenged on QpJ 

B 

Baal ^3 # 
Babylon fttS^ 

V T 

Back, s. y. 
Backbite, to 7J% 

™ T 

Bad y-j (w. distinct. 

accent y*)). 
Bake, to jl^tf. 

Battle nDnSo^ip- 

t t : • t|: 

Be (=to exist) J"pn; as 



Vocabulary. 

copula, see § 77, 1, 

2, 3. 
T^re is $\ -$\ 
There is not ?*tf § 75, 3. 

Bear, to (= carry) 
X&Z 5 ^7 t0 brin S 
forth/ -jS* 

Bear 2\1 

Beard jpf 

Beast rrn. nona 

t - t •• : 

Beat,top5*lfi&. 

Beauty ■flPl*^^ 
p. >£h 

Beautiful J-|£)», H5' /• 

V T T T 

Because |£*_, *5,7# 
Bed Ht9D 

T 

Bed-chamber """nn 

t : 

Before, cwfo. ClD > 
Before, prepos. *3£) j* ? 
Beg, to SKtr 

— T 

Beget, to *lS> - H *- 

- T 

Begin, to 77H J2*. 

- T 

Beginning fV0&tf. 
Behold, to ^J^ ^i*., 

nrrr 

T T 

Behold ! inter j. ?*— | , 
njJPl^ behold I 

see § 75, 3. 



Bound 
Beloved iffi , f^f 
Beseech, to H^H -?**•» 

Besides *"07D 
Beside (=at, near) 

Between M 
Belteshazzar 

Bind,to^"p,npN; 
to bind up or 'to- 
gether TW » D^N 

-T ~ T 

Pi. 

Birth-right miM 

t : 

Bitter ^ft. 
Bless, to rjl3 Pi. 
Blessed ^Q 
Blessed, to call *)£*>* 

Pi. 
Blessing HD^S 

t t : 

Blind, adj. "^jy. 

Blood 0*1, 

Boast, «. of 7 /Jl fit*. 

- T 

w. ]J) of the theme. 
Body-)j^2, (=corpse) 

Bone Qtf j/, 

Book gg D 

Born, to be H*-?* 2V*. 

-T 

and Pu. 
Bosom p>H , pfl. 
Bound, to (=* to leap) 



Bow- 
Bow (v.) down wl$D» 
Boy -\y_:_. 
Branch ftjjf, 
Bray, to, to smash 

B>ro. t 

Bread DtV?* 
Breadth ^ph. 
Break, to -\5&, 
Breath HDB^. 

t t : 

Breathe, to n?|£ -Hz. 

Brethren CD^flX, 
§ 73, A. 2. 

Bribe ^33* 
Bride H73i 

T ~ 

Bring, to tf -ft Hi. 
Bring back ^£> JK. 
Bring down "|*V -2*' 
Bring forth J-fe^» 

- T T T 

Bring good news*^j£^ 

Pi. 
Brother HN> § 73, A 2. 

T 

Build, to HJ3. 

T T 

Builder, s.Jfip* 
Burnt-offering ,1 vjf 

Bury, to fjjjjQ, 

But), »5,a^^3, 

Buy, to |-Up T * 
By— prep. 3,*1J£3» 



Vocabulary. 
C 

can, to Knn, toe. 

upon fcOD to. ace. 

S T I T 
DJ ( P^ r - 

rT D^). 

camp rqqa 

Can, to be able 73* « 

T 

Canaan m^J , fully 



Captain t»JJ , #j£) # 
Carmel Sd~D. 
Carry, to $'&). 

T T 

Cast, to TT^V ^f» t0 

be cast down (of the 
soul)nn^' -S** 

- T 

castie j— nyp and 
rrtraa T 

t : 

Catch, to '&£$\i to be 

— T 

caught, id. Ni, 

Cattle n^.pP* 

Cedar ptf # 

Certain (=one or our 
indef. article) TUN/- 

nrnt. 

Certainly ptf, 
Chaldean HCO. 
Chamber ^1*1(1 (<»»**• 

TSJJ 

Champion *Vi3JU 

child ibsnyj. 

Children QhS» 

t : 

children of Israel 

S*n&? pa. 



Complaint 271 
Choose, to *\f|3 to. ^. 

- t : 

Circumspect, to be 

Cistern 1*0/- 
Oity^/-,'§74, 2. 

Clean, adj. TintO* 
Clear, to, ofstones7pD 
Pi. 

cloth -jjg. 

Clothe, to ^'3^ Hi. 
Cloud |W, 
Cloud, thick b£H#. 
Coat rnjriD a 11 * 1 

Cold,s.rj*TT. 

Come, to Nl3» 
Come forth, out N¥\ 

T T 

Come over ji}^ 
Come up H/V. 

T T 

Come, to, to pass ppH* 

T T 

Comfort, to QH3 pi - 

— T 

Comforter Qjl^Q. 
Command, to Hl^ Pi- 

T T 

Commandment HI^D' 

"ttjSS i H$ ? tneten 
comm andments 

Compass, to ^DD -^* 

and Pi. 
Compassion, to have 

QpH Pi- w - acc - 

- T 

Complaint, s. WW* 



272 Concerning 

Concerning, prep. ^}, 
Confidence , to put 

Confined space "1j£D» 

Congregation 7i"fD» 
T » T 
Consider, to *yytf Hit. 

Contention ^**% 
Copy flSgrtfy 
Corn |H' 

Couch Mtfto. 

Counsel, to VJft # 
Counsel n¥)f . 
Counselor }*y\ 
Courageous, to be 

Y m/to. a. 

Covenant J"V^), 
Create, to J03» 

T T 

Crown mjD#, 

Cry, to pyj, p^y, 

cry, s. rrpj^t, npj^y, 

Curse, to *V)K , to be 

cursed, Ho. 
Curse, «. n77D» 

tt|: 

Cut,to, to cut off JTO, 



Damsel n^^» 
Daniel Sw^?. 

•• ' T 

Darius ^Hl» 



Vocabulary. 

Darkness *!$ 



Daughter ri3§75,A.7. 
David TH* 

• T 

Day Q*j», his day, to 

day Di>rr. 

Dead ^ft, 

Death nio c. niD* 

Death, to put to j^Jj 
iK. ; to be put to D. 

Deceit nonp. 

Deed n^Jjb* 
Defence, OJlb>D» 

t : 

Defend, to MJ J2». 
Defile, to tfftft Pi. 
Defraud, to pgty. 
Delight, s.p^y 

Delight, to ^§(1) de- 
light in Y&H w. 5, 

Delighting, <z$. T^^Jl. 

Delilah ,f\h^?% 

t * : 

Deliver into ^j|£) JK. 

Deliver or rescue ^jyjj 

-H*-; DSD -P*. and 

Pi. and Hi. 
Deliverer^7^j?arf.Pi. 

- T 

Deny, to JtfQi tfPD 

Pi. 
Depart, to £*|£, ^p. 
Desert, 5.13HD. 



Dominion 
Desire, to ni^ -P*- an d 

Desire, s. t*£f"[. 

Despise, to Hp, |>JO 

Pi. 
Destroy, to nppnSJ^ 

Pi.;13K^. 
Destruction 



Devise, to 3£TT, DOJ, 

- T 

Dew 7&, 

Die, to rino# 

Dig, torha. nan, 

T T - T 

Dip, to Sdd. 

- T 

Discomfit, to QOn« 

- T 

Discord,*. Q^ID 

(only plur.) 
Disguise, to jj^fj, 

- T 

Dishonor, to j"7J3, 

T T 

Distress, to T)^ Hi. 
Distress, s. HT^* 

TT 

Ditch, s. nUt^. 

Do, to nte#; 

Do good or evil 7DJI 

Do good 3b* ^ 
Do wrong p&^. 

Doings, deeds 
Dominion ^7t^pp, 

nfaetoa /■ 



Door 

Doorf^/. 
Double D'SM. 
Draw, to (water) 2Xt^> 

(a sword) phty» 
Dream, to 07n» 
Dream, s-D^Jl, 
Drink, to nfit5\ 

T T 

Drive out , away £?*J j| 

Pi. 
Dry up , to become 
, dry tfy 1 , to make 

•• T 

dry, Pi. and Si. 
Dry land ft&%\ 

T T - 

Dust -\%y, 

Dwell, to 3£?>, p£>, 
to cause to dwell, to 
let dwell Hi. 

E 

Each #*£, H^; 

py\ B^fr, Ss, 

Eagle hgtj. 
Earjft*/." 

Ear of corn j— t/*}^ 

• T * 

Early adv. D^'pl, 

Earth p^/. 

Eat, to 7^fc$ ; to cause 

- T 

to eat , to give to 
eat Hi. 
Eden n#. 



Vocabulary. 
Edom DiiN, D'iK. 
Education ^D^ltD* 

T 

Egypt onyp. 

Elder (alderman, Zotf. 
senior) jpj, 

Eleven, see § 74. 

Elishah jfl^Jft 

Elijah n-^xorJin^N 

T • •' T * - 

Encamp, to Jl^H* 

T T 

End,*.nnnx> ivp. 

Endure, to 10^, |!)^ 
Enemy y\$ t {Hi. 
Enter, to Ni*3. 
EntTeat, to Jf}Q w. 3, 
the person for whom 

Envy, to tf Jp Pi. 

Envy, «.r?K?p. 
Envious py J^ (prep. 

an evil eye). 
Ephron T\*\&g t 
Ephraim D*1£)^ # 
Esau SW$* 
Escape, to £07ft Ni., 

b)U Ni. 

- T 

Establish, to (a coven- 
ant) Dp Hi. 

Eternal O^lj?, e. g. 
eternal God ^£s$ 
D /ly (p^P- the God 
of eternity, § 83, 6). 

Eternity Q^y, *JJ?, 

Ethiopia £*D< 



False 273 

Ethiopian *£*)3, 
Eunuch D'*"1D# 

■ T 

Evening ^p, 

Ever, for Q^iySnyS 

T ••/ - T 

Everlasting J3 /1)f» 

everlasting kindness 

rzrnsy npn (see 

Eternal). 
Every raan, see § 98, 2- 

Excel, to Sy-ilSy. 
Exile , to carry into 

Expectation J"l7fTifi> 

Expiate, to 153 -P**? 
to be expiated id.Pu., 
to be e. of, w. 7, 

Extremity JTi£p» 

Eye py/. 



Face Q^5, see § 58, 9. 

• T 

i^wrc tffte face of ^^0» 
Fail, to (=desist)71(7 

- T 

Fail, to (— to pine 

away) H/3» *° cawse 

T T 

to fail, id. Pi., Jl^Tl 

T T 

Hi. 
Faithfulness HK3K* 

t v: 

Fall, to ^ 

- T 

False JttBJJ (see § 83,6.) 



tfro. 



274 Falsehood 
Falsehood IpJ^ 

Fame JfDgf , 
Far, «0. pinn. 
Far be it ! j-fb'Sft. 

T ' T 

Far away, to put f. a. 

pm Hi. 

Fast, to Q?|y f 
Fat, adj. myfa 
Father ^tf ,§ 73, A. 1. 

T 

Father-in-law MT)f7» 
Fatherless 01]")% 
Favor rj\f\ 

Favored, to be npj i&. 
Fear, to Jp\ 

t : • t 

Feast, 8. JpT i. JPT. 

T 

Feast, to keep a JJff, 

— T 

Feign, to' (—to pretend 

to be) see § 26, 6. 
Fellow }}% 
Fence, to pty Pi. 

Field rnwJ 
Fig rr^ri. 

t ■■ : 

Fig-tree id. 

Fig, green, unripe Jj£, 

Fight, to Otl^l 2K; 

Fill, to ^^-70, to be 

Filled, jy*i. 
Find, to KtfQ, 

Fir BfJia* T 
Fire gfH/ 



Vocabulary. 

Firmament n^n*), 
•"_ |. T 

First p^*), in speci- 
fying order of time 

Hfias, as nrfesta 

^"inS on the first 

of the month. 
First-born ni03. 
Fish^,nj1 T / 

Five ^'pn/.n^'pn 

m. 

Fiesh i^r/iKt^. 

t t •• : 

Flock ftftf. 
Flourish m£) J5K. 
Fold together p2H* 
Food Vd^D. 

Foolishness JlTl^ » 
Foot ^ 4 DJ^ 
(DvJ*Tonlyfigur.— 

• t : 

times) 

ForS,Sj^. 
For (— because, for the 
sake of) *>£, IJfQ^ 

For (=in, during, 
within) 3, 

Forbid, to nSd. 

T T 

Forbid! God forbid! 

Force ^17. 

Forever Qbij^i "1J/S 

Forget, to R$$tf t 



Girl 
Former state HDIP* 

t :| - 

Forsake, to %fp. 
Fortress iTfitfJp, 

t : 

Found, to *iO\ 

Four y$*j$% 

*t t : ~ 

Free ^'fifT. 
Freely Q^H. 

T - 

From jp, O^p, b#£, 

Fruit H3. 
Fruitful, to make 

Full, to be $s$So -^ 

a. Xi, ya^, T 

Full, adj. tfbo* 

" T 

Fury HDn. 

T " 

G 

Garden M, 
Garment /"" Vjj"H5 » 

t : "■ 

Gate 1^/. 
Gather, to V%p &- 

DpS ** TJK. 

Gazelle Vj^ # 
Generation ""fl^, *i*^ # 
Get, to, out tf¥\ 
Gihon pp^ T 

Giri rn% nnyj. 



Give 

Give, to r;ij. 
Give in possession 

Gladness nflES^ 

t : • 

Glance, to flpfcf J5K. 
Glean, to tOp^« 

Go, to r[Sn» 

Go over, to *"QJ7» 

Go up, to n Sy» 

Go down, to (of the sun) 
Go out, to #¥'♦ 

T T 

Go out, or be quenched, 
of fire, light HDD. 

T T 

Go, to let (= to desist 
from, to cease from) 

titru 

T T t 

God Sx, DTO. 

Gold nnr* 

T T 

Good, adj. 2iD » for 

good rotoS. 

t : 

Good, tobeSV^,^* 
Good, to do, to benefit 
y& Si. 

- T 

Good tidings, to tell 
g. t., to bring good 
news ^£>3 Pi. 

— T 

Goodness HDfT 
Gracious, to be pf7. 
Grape ^^, 
TO<Z Grapes D*t?frO* 
Grass 32^, Ng^/ 

Grave ^5p,Si^» 
Great Vi*!il> ^H 0?^r. 

D*31). T 



Vocabulary. 

Great, to be 7*Jj) (/w£. 
Great man 71^^, [A.) 
Ground nO"T». 

t t _ : 

Ground- corn, grits 
DISH (only plur.) 

Guile nono. 



Habitation J"J3ft« 
Haman fftj-J, 
Hand -|* /. 
Handmaid HDKj see 
§ 73, 9. 

Hang, to nSri* 

Harp-)to» TT 
Harvest *V¥p, 

' It 

Haste, to %-fft Pi. 

- T 

Hate, to JO£\ 
Hazael ^ffT. 
He «!|n. 
Head fc^'frO. 
Heal, to K£7, 

T T 

Hebrew «T>3#. 
Hear, to $&&, 
Hearken, to $£$, 
Heart 2^—? (w. swjf. 

T " 

Heaven B*£#\ 

• - T 

Heavy, to be W^ 

" T 

Heavy, adj. T?!j2j 
Hebron 



Hope 275 

Help, to ^jy, to help 

against f ft ^^ 

Help, s. *tfjf, y%}\ 

Herd 7p^ c. g. 

L 
Hew,to7p3» 

Hezekiah tfip£T, 
Hide, to f §V -K a - m -y 

.... - T 
Hide oneself *1HD -2ft «i 

D^y Hit. 
Hid, to be frd! Hit. 

T T 

High, to set on h. 
Most High pv?}?, 

Hiii 4i (^-DHn), 

Hire, T to "ftt^. 
Hire s. "Ofi?. 

T T 

Hireling, hired servant 

■rates 

• T 

Hirom 0"yn« 
Hither ftjlfj, 

T " 

Hold fast 3 pt|7, 

: I - t 

Holy tP'ilD » see § 83 ' 

6 b. 
Honor, to *fc% 1DD 

s " T T T 

Pi. 

Honor, 3. tl3£ ! Tft\ 

t | T : 

Honorable "Ip** 

. Itt 

Hope , to 7p|7 JK. w. 

?; nDtr A. w. S, 

Hope, *. rr^fiin* 
tribri. 



276 



Horse 



Horse £$£), 
Horseback, to bring on 

Ho8tjo^(ptnix:i» 

T T t : 

m. 
House f^3 e * ]"T^1 

{pi. D^'3). 

• T 

Household J"V3» 
How ? ! -pt, HD^» 
How long? HiKTy* 

IT - 

Humble oneself, to^3 

..M 

Hundred r~(^/D> dual 

• ~ T 

Husband £#$& 
Husbandman *"0$$» 



t ' -: 

if ON,*?. 

Image D/V ♦ 
Images (= idols) 

• t : 

Imagine, to K^fJ, 

- T V 

Incline, to H£3^ ^* 
Increase, to ftO* J2i". 
Inhabit, to ^£"i to be 

- T 

inhabited id. Ni. 
Inhabitant %1$L 
Inherit, to ^7(1 J » to 

- T 

leave as heritage id. 
Mi. 



Vocabulary. 
Inheritance J"} Sf"7^» 

t -: - 

Iniquity jftjH', f,1N, 

Inner part , middle, 

midst 2Hp» 
Innocent ffj). 
Inquire of, to £P*^ 

*c. ace. 
Instead of flFTH* 
Instruction HD1D* 

T 

Integrity DWl. 

• T 

Intelligence n^!W» 
Intelligent p^,D^n 
Into 5, ^tf, "ly, and 

see'§ 19, 6. 
Isaac S|i^ 

Israel SjOtJ>\ 



Jacob ipj?>i 
Jealousy H^OD* 
Jebus DID** 
Jehoshaphat OtDt^in* 
Jerusalem D*Se>YT. 

• — t : 

Jethro Vlfi\ 

jew >-nrv. 

Joash^'KV. 

Job 3i\Nt, 

Jonathan Jf V3ir"V > 

frov. 

Joseph tlp1\ 

Joshua ygrjjr. 



Kiss 

Joy r\ntiw,m\ 
judah mur. 

t : 

Judge, to £D££\ 

- T 

Judge, 5. tDfifc^ 
Judgment bSWp » 

• T 1 

Just pHV» 

Justify, to, or clear one- 
self pl^ Me., to be 

justified, id. 



Keep, to (== to guard, 
watch) -tfj, nDt^' 

J -T - T 

w.7^; (=to observe, 
to perform) "0£\ 

- T 

Keep oneself from (=to 
beware of) ^faQf Ni. 

w. JO. 

Keep a feast j|j|n» 

_ T 

Keeper of sheep Jf}^ 

Km, to jinn, bw* 

- T ~ It 

Kindness HOtl* 

Kindred fnViO. 

KingrjSjJ." 

To make a king 7|7/D 

Hi 
Kingdom nfilD^D* 

Kish gf>n. 

Kiss, to n^'1 J5T. a. #». 

1 - T 



Knit 

Knit, to T&D* 
Know, to yy, to let 

know id. Si. 
Knowledge J1JH* 
Known, to make yp 

m. 



Labor, to Spy, JW* 
Laboring (= toiling) 

Spy* 

Lad *J3jg| 

Ladder Q7p , 
Lame HD5» 
Lamp ^)( pZ.fi Vl})™- 
Land ptf/., nD"J k S 
Large spaed 3 PHD* 
Last ppX. 
Laugh, to pr?¥* 

Law rniri. 

T 

Lay, to y^W m - 

- T 

Lay hold of, to £>£fi 

— T 

w. ace., seldom w.^J, 
Lay up, to J£\f, 

Lead, to )\ \$ Pi., 

T T 

Lean,a<2j. nH*rg*1/- 
Leap, to jjSrj Pi. 

- T 

Learning np A 
Leave, to 3JJf # . 

— T 

Leave off, to fiDtt^ 
Lebanon V)fo 7, 



Vocabulary. 

Left, adj. hW2ty* 
Length Tpfc. 
Lentiles D*t2H]? (only 

J*) /• 
Lestjg), 

Letter n|jp, &$&/' 

Lie, to npt^' j*. 3D 

|-T "T 

Pi. 
Lie, s. *70 t n|3 # 
Lie down, to 2Dt^» 

w. 

Life D^ll, g$$ 
Lift up, to KJ£*j, 

T T 

Light -JiN. 
Like5,iD3>i03» 

: : t. 

Like, to be HDI* 
Lion HX. 

t t • - t : 

Little, small, to be 

Little, adj. ?bP> JtDD 
Live, to J-pfl; to keep 

T T 

alive, to save life 
id. Hi. 

Living, adj. iff, 
Lo ! behold ljn,il3n? 
Lo we are ! behold 

us! ^jn. 

Lofty th 

Look, fo'fiQjfJQ^ 

Look for (= to expect, 

tope) nip i& 



Mercy 



277 



Lord px, nin\ 

Lost, to be -OK. 

Loud on, bfii. 

T T 

Love, to srrNorrK. 

•• T - T 

Lovely *yr\#P art * #V 

" T 

Lying ^p^', see §83,6. 

M 

Magnify, to ^"U «- 

- T 

Maid-servant nrtiD?'** 
Maiden Jl^Sj/* 
Make,ton^y,Sj^D» 
Make a covenant, to 

nn? fro. 

Make a pit, to |"|*"0 

ma. 

Maker H^. 

Man DIN, BNfi "OH 

T T 

Manua ?£)', 
Many tT2*1* 

Martnno^inD. 

t t - : 

Master ptf, OWN 

§ 82, 4, b. T 
Meat -yg£j; 

T T 

Meddle, to yytf Sit. 
Meditate, to JliUl* 

T T 

Meet, to OIP ^v 

tftts 

- T 

Melt, to ODD ® 

- T 

Mercy *7Dl7» 

Mercy , to have M. on 



278 Messenger 
Messenger T|N /D» 
Midian JH& 

Midst -qin c. Tjin, 

Might rrripji. 
Mighty niii. 

Mill-stone H/i3» 
Mine (= to me) *7 # 
Miriam D**)£» 

t : • 

Mischief nV"l» 

**r t 

Mock, to JJfS w. S> 

Moment j7j*l t 
Money hpj. 
Month t^'in. 
Moon n*V» 
Mordechai ££OQ# 

~ : : t 

Morning nj>3, 
Morrow , to mD 5 

mno. 

T t: T 

Mortar gjjjpp. 
Mother Qj& § 73. 

Moses ngjipi 

Mountain nn> § 17, 5. 

Mourn, to -j£p> S?N 

K. a. 5&. 
Mourning ^^£s$ , 

Mouth PIS, § 73, 11. 
Much , many , to be 



Vocabulary. 

Mule f£fcj|, 
Multiply , increase, to 
J-Q"| -£"• a. .52. 

T T 

Multitude pftn. 
Murmur, to p7 iV*. 
a. J2*. 



N 

Naked Dl^ (i^ r - 

D'pljf). 

Name Qgh (i>^r. 

niD$) ™- 

Nation Vjj| # 
Near, a$. Hip, 
Needy }|^ # , 
Neighbour J^JJJ, 

arm. jn. 

Neither K7). 

Never oSi^S'-ltS. 

Nevertheless *2"D£)N 

Nighnilp. 
Night rbb. 

t : - 

No f^,^w.:thewrJ. 
Noise |iN£\ 
Nor^J, 

North rj£\f . 

Not tfS, Sss, S3. 

|»K;w not? kSh. 

Nothing no ^p..^S 
Nothing, for Q^n» 



Or 

now nny. 

Number, to 1£D* 

- T 

Number, 5. 13DD* 



O I (vocative case) see 

§ 80, 5. 
Oh! woe! ho! vj;— |, 

Observe, to 10## 
Of, see § 19, 5; ^ or 

7 ipte § so, 16. 
offer, to npr. 

Offering, «w&«£. nD?' 

nnpp. 

Off, from jp, Syp. 

on jpb>, W, 

Old, s. a. a$. Tpf, 
01d,tobejnj(/««..4.) 
On 5, S#> § fei 6. 
Once ( = one time) 

nrat Qf& 

One inN, § 74. 

T V 

One — the other £?>£ 
VnN> see § 97, 4. 

T 

Only, adv. p-|, rj& 
Only, aw$. (=only one) 

Tfr, rrvrv /• 

• t t • : 

open, to nns* 

- T 

Oppress , to t^n / > 

Or 1, 1N. QN, DN1. 



Ordinance 

Ordinance nnO^'p/- 
Orphan QiJV» 

T 

Other -|rU\\ 
Other (=- the one — 
the other) Htf, § 9 ?> 4 - 
Out of m, 

Outside, abroad T^lfl. 
Oven ^n. 
Over 5, Sf * § 75, 6. 
Over, to be (= to pass 

away) Cpfl. 
Overthrow , to Tj^JIj 

- T 

Ox ~W& c. g. 



Paint (Eye-Paint) *V\Q, 
Palm-tree 7DH» 
Panther *|£J, 
Pardoned, to be HV7 

T T 

m. 

Parted, to be H£) M. 

— T 

Pass over , to ""OJ^, 
Pass, to come to JTH. 

T T 

Path rcrro. 

t • : 

Patience .Tlpf). 
Peace Ql^^ 

T 

Pen ft]/. 

People QJ/ (j>l&tep> 

Peradventure >TlN» 



Vocabulary. 
Perceive, to n*J -^- 
Perish, to "OX. 
Persecute, to £VYn« 
Pestle »*?]/, 
Pharao rtjHB . 
Philistine ^C'Ss* 

pillar naarb. 

T " _ 

pious Ton. 

• T 

pit -y^ (i>z. rrb) *■ 

Place Dip 9 (^ wr - 

moipp) * 9- 

Plant, to y^. 
Plant, s. npV. 
Pleasant Q*JO* 

• T , 

Pledge, take to P.^n 

- T 

plough, to j^nn. 

- T 

Poor, to be made P., 
dispossessed g^j' ifa'. 

— r 

Poor, «. 0^, ?WN. 
Portion ft /Pi* 
Possession , to give as 

a p. bm m - 

~ T 

Potiphar n5'l?i£D. 
Pottage "i^i. 

• T 

Poverty B?fcO, 

Pour out, to T|£t^\ 

P*\ 

Power jy (with sw^*. 

nyy. 

Praise, s. TYftffi* 

t • : 

Pray, I pray thee tf}, 



Put 279 

Prayer ,17??!. 
Preach, to" ^£0 Pi - 

- T 

Precept 11p$). 
Prepare Jlg^, to be 

T T 

prepared |.*Q iV*. 
Preserve , to ~\!2&i 

Price, ;«.13&. 

Pride p-tf. 
Priest jH3. 
Prince 7^ (pJ-DHBO 
Proclaim, to JOD ♦ 
Produce, s. H^JMonly 

const.) 
Profane, to ^ff Pi. 

- T 

Project, s. fjfjJRD. 
Property ftSnj* 
Prophesy, to fr03 ■#*• 

T T 

a. iK£. 
Prophet X'Di. 
Prostrate oneself, to 

T T 

Prove, to HD3 Pi: 
Province H^ltD* 

t • : 

Publish, to yt2& m. 

Purify oneself, to t£?1_0 

I T 

Hit. 
Pursue, to v"lTH« 
Pat, to Q^ EL 
Put forth, to nW, 

- T 

(= to ripen) [jftfi. 
Put on, to (a garment) 



280 



Quarrel 

Q 



Quarrel, to ^^\ or 21*1 
Quarrel, s. *]*tj (jpZwr. 

Queen f^fa. 

t : - 

Question , hard Q., 

riddle HTH. 

T * 

Quiet, to be DDX^". 
1- T 

R 

Rachel Sf"H* 

" T 

Rage, s. nOH» 

T " 

Raiment "]JJ3» 

Rain, to *"^ft, to give 

_ T 

or to send down rain 
id. Hi. 
Rain, s. -\Qf2, QBfo 

T T V V 

Raise, rip?, Dip -Si'. 
Raven yjjfc 
Reach, to yjj Si*. 
Realm nttffc/. 
Reap, to *1^j"5, 

~ It 

Reaper, OVip^^p* 
Reason, by R. of J£J, 
Rebel, s. HJ^. 
Rebuke f-Q* -H*. 

Receive, to np7,73p 
P*. 

Recompense, to Q 7^', 

, - T 

^DJl "P*» p ass - Fy>» 

- T 

Redeem 7KJ|, 



Vocabulary. 

Redeemer 7&0» 
Refine, to ft-\)£ t 
Refined ttV)^ 
Refrain )^£, 
Refuge, * Jj^p (w. 

Refuse, to J^D p *- 
Regard, to Dgf'n. 
Reign, to H7D. 
Reject, to DNO* 
Rejoice, to fSjf, 
Remain, to ^N£J JVi. 

- T 

Remain all night, to 

pS Si. 
Remember, to ")^ t 

- T 

Remove, to ftlTl -S*» 

I - T 
Rend , to (== to tear) 

Render, to ^^'M'. 

Repair, to HI^J* 
I -t 

Report, s. ]}&#* 
Reproach to ft*] ft Pi. 
Reproach, s. Jl 3^)11. 

t : v 

Reprobate, to DJO« 

- T 

Request, to make R. 
Require, to 7NJ#\ 

- T 

Require (the blood), to 
Requite, to 7DJU 

_ T 

Rest, to yy-\ m. 

Rest, to give HO -H** 



Ruth 

Return, to y\\tf t 
Reward, to Q 1 )^ Pi. 
RiblahJlSnn/ 

t : - 

Rich, to be or become 

rich *\0$ Hi. 
Rich , to feign oneself 

rich -}£ty Hit. 

~ T 

Richess "W}f% 
Riddle fTVft. 

T ' 

Ride, to %y\ (fut.A.) 

- T - 

Right, adj. ?\pt. 
Righteous DHV» 
Righteousness p"15f» 

Rise up, to Dip, 
River nni *VlN\ 

T T J 

Rob, to Sa 

. - T 

Robe, s. ^J/p # 

Rock TO. 
Roll, to i^J, 

_ T 

Root out, to EH£> -P*- 
Round about 2^tJi 

Ruby D0^3 (° nl y 

^Zwr.) 
Ruin, s. tiy^ft (plur. 

t t: : t 

Rule, to St^lb. 

- T 

Ruler Sg>D> If? (l& 

• T 

Run, to p"l . 

1 Ruth nru 



Sacrifice 

s 

Sacrifice, to ("Of* 

- T 

Sacrifice, s. flD?* 
Saint £ v i1j^ 

salt, «. uSq. 

Salvation njW*. 
Samaria JnOJ^* 
Samson rtgfjpfi^i 
Sanctuary {£^ip« 
Sand SlfT. 
Sarah ft*l£P. 

TT 

Sarai Hb>. 

~ T 

Satisfied, to be ^5^ 
and ^3^ (fut. A.), 
to satisfy id. Hi. 

Save, to jftgjfc £"1 

Say, to -)DK. 

~ T 

Saying ( = namely) 

y^h> § 48 > 5 «) 

Saying, s. PHON* 

t : • 

Scabbard ^fl, 
Scorn, to DNO» pS. 
Scorner |*"> t 

Scribe ^£3D» 

Sea D* 5^ D W- 

Search, to "OfT 1)F), 

Second *^, § 74, 3. 
Secret, i. Hg!?^! 



Vocabulary. 
See, to HNn. 

T T 

Seed, 8. JHf , 

Seek, to t^f1» ^'p3 

Pi. 
Seer, «. fiftX 
Seize, to gtfJB. 

— T 

Sell, to "Oft, 

Send, to nS^'> to send 

- T 

away id. Pi. 

Separate, to 7*13 , to 
to separate oneself 
id. M. , "HS Ni. a. 

Servant I^V* 
Serve, to "njf, 
Set up, to 3^3 ®- 

_ T 

Set or placed, to be 

id. Ni. 
Settle, to ytf) m. 
Shade, shadow, s. 7^ 

(w. suff. fyjfc 

Shame,*. nE)S?,pbj? 
Shatter, to ^E? Pi. 
Sheaf r\t2h>< (P lur - 

Shed, to i\£&\ to be 
shed, of blood, id.Pu. 

Shine ^'i^ , make to 
shine id. Hi. 

swp n»3K. 

t ■ t: 

Shiver, to r>^, 
Shoe ^jy /. 



Slaughter 281 

Shoot forth, to Tj-tf, 
Shore ftlfT; 

Short pap:-; nVfJ 

(* -^p)- T 

Shut, toS^D. 

- T 

Side ri3T' two s - 

sigh, s. nmx. 

t t -: 

Sight , in the sight of 

sign, s. riiK (P^ r - 
ninfc) «i 

Silence, put to s. Q7X 
Silver JT 



Sin, to ^tOH» to sin 
against »} tf DIT 

: t t 

Sin, 8. Kt?H, fty 

Sinai **»p; 

Sing, to *V}g* -Hi'., 
(= to sing praises) 

no? «■ 

- T 

Singer (singing man) 
Sisera N^D^D. 

sister riin^J 73 ^ 3 - 

T 

Sit, to y&\ 

skmnf^ (pi rir*# 
skuii rhhif- 

Slander, to J^ .Hi*. 
Slaughter HDD. 



282 



Slave 



Vocabulary. 



Tent 



Slave igy, 

Slay, to' ;hn, QtlV 

Sleep, to ?£♦* [fut. 
Sluggard ^f t 

" T 

Smite, to fi3J .52. 

T T 

So, adfo. ?3» 
Solomon loW* 
Son K § 73, A. b. 
Song, s. *y$(f* 
Sorrow, s. 3ifrO£, 

ft:- 

Soul ^gjj, mostly/. 

South Din*!, aaj, 

Spare, to ^OH. 
Speak, to 131 PI 

_ T 

Spear fVW. 

spiritrm^riinn, 
mm) * g- 

Spirt, to, to be sprink- 
led nn 

TT 

Spring up, to ffJDV. 
Spy out, to ^1 I s *-, 

■m 

staffnepc^-nitoD) 

m. 
Stand, to Ifty, Q!)p, 
Stand upright, to 3VJ 

Star 33<J3, 

T 

State, former s. ,1D"Tp 



Statute rjfj (plur. 

<i* hipD)/- 

Stay over night, to ft 7 
Steal, to 2JJ& 

stm, to tiy^f Bl. 

- T 

Stone p$s$ (plur. 
Stop, to Q&K, 

- T 

Strange, to make one- 
self s. 13J Hit. 

- T 

Strangeness , foreign- 
ness 13 J. 

T " 

Stranger nDrpJ 83, 
6. a. §89,4. «U It. 

T 

Street ^1, SIITl /• 
Strength fff, 1^ 

Strengthen, to pffjPi. 
I - T 

Stretch out, to £>15, 

rhv. 

- T 

Strip off, to faWQ Hi., 

- T 

w. two ace. § 85, 2, b. 
Stripe oneself, to id.Hit. 
Stripes ( = beatings) 

Strong, to be pjjf 
(fut.A)mi(fut.A). 

- T 

Strong, adj. pJH, ?# 

(^. Q^), T 

Subdue, to HI, 

- T 

subtlety nana 

t : • 

Suddenly OfcHQ. 



Suffer , to (== to per- 
mit, to let) f"fi3 Hi. 

Sun ^2j£\ 

Surely p k y,QJ, /n/. 

afo. § 105, 1. 
Surround, to 33 D* 

- T 

Sustain, to 1}}0 (fut. 

A.) 
Swear, to yy$ M. 
Swift , to be s. lift 

**, SSp. 

Sword Din/- 
Syria Qltf, 



Table', tablet JTlH> 

(^ mm 1 ?) », 

Tabor Itofl, 

Take away, to f7p/« 

I- T 

Take up, to $'&}, 

T T 

Take from, off, to 1?|Q 
Hi. 

Take, to (capture in 
war) 137, 

- T 

Tarshish {jftgj'lfl. 
Teach, to 1J£*"7 p *> 
HI* S., jH» T J5H. 

TT «" ~T 

Tell, to 1J|J 5*. 

_ T 

Tender, adj. 11 CM 

Tent^JlK (&&$% 
and b^HN)- 



Testimony 

Testimony jTHJ^ /• 
Thanksgiving JTTifl. 

T 

That \r4t.~fr.) *1t?K» 
That, ctf?ij. (in obj. 

sentences ) "Ip'JsJ > 

Vp,§ 111,1,2.' 
That, so that 7 w. inf. 

const. § 106 , 2 and 

§ 113, b; *\m<, 

That not , lest |£) , 

^nSnS, § 112, b.* 

O that !)7 (negatively 

§ no, 1, 2. 

Then 1, t«. 

: t 

Thence Q^', from 

T 

thence Qt^fD* 
Therefore p"Sj/> V 
Therein 3-)p3,T]in3 

Thing -n-i" 

T T 

Thither fl^W . 

T T 

Though QN, 

Thought, *. rntf n»» 

t • : 

Throne fr%£p? (phtr. 

map?) »». 

Through 5, 
Throw down, to (—to 
cast out) J38&\ 

- T 

Thrust down, to Hm 

T T 

Thrust through , to, 



Vocabulary. 
Thus }Uk HDD, p. 

T T I " 

n*tr. 

Tie, to n^'p. 
Tiller -Qj^ 

Time ny (^- D>ny 

Time (= once) &$&/ 
Time to come(=future) 

T T T T 

Tire, to (= dress the 
head) yQ* Si. 

- T 

To, unto -Jj;, § 19, 6. 
To (= Dat.) 7, 
Together 1HK?. 
Tongue p^S/' H5^ 
Top^n^D^iTN^) 
Torch TSS. 
Totter, to ^10 •#*• 
Touch, to JfJJ, 

Towards 7 k N>, ^, § 19,6. 
Tower 7*lJ|D. 

t: • 

Transgress, to "Oj7» 
Traveller {"H N» 
Tread (under foot), to 

DEH. 

- T 

Tree tfj£ 
Trouble J"n^\ 

Trust, to non, HDS 

T T - T 

Truth n9$.A 

Try, to Jg£, H^ r* 

Tumult pOH, 



Violence 283 

Turn, to TlD* 

Turn graciously , to 

T T 

Tyre -)¥♦ 

u 

Uncircumcised y*jV« 
Uncle Ti% 
Under Him § 75 » 6 - 
Until -ty. 

Unto S k X, 7 S^ 1^ 

§ 19, 6. 
Uphold, to 7[ftD, 
Upon Sy, § 75, 6. 
Upper-mill-stone 2D^ 
Upright *\g** DW1» 

T T ' T 

uzziah inw* 



Vain,inV.^p^ 
Vain, to be in V. "QK 

- T 

VaUey Hj/p?* 
Vanity tf^. 

; t 

Vengeance Op3> 

Very nKD» 
Vial ^5/ 
Vine f 5^ 
Vine-dresser Q^O, 
Vinegar HDIl* 
Vineyard D*"^ 
Violence DDI"?* 



284 Virtuous 

Virtuous ^tpj (prop. 

Virtue , accord, to 

§ S3, 6. 
Virtuously , to do v. 

Vision Jiff£ 

voice Sip (^.niSip, 

niVp) «». 
vow, to *yii, 
vow,-«. •fjj, 

w 

Wait upon, to 7 Oft*^ 

walk, to rjSrr! 

Walk with, to Tlbn 

Hit. w. nx. 
Wall, 5. *yp (p?« r . 

Want, 5 . niDHD. 

war nzrbnl " 

Warfare" ^DV» 
Warn, to ^ftf #S. 
Wash, to Vft\ 
Water, to Hpt?" -Si- 
Water, s. Q^, T 
Wave ^ (pi Q^). 
Waxj^ 
Way JjJ£| c. <jr. 

weak ngn, rr£n /. 

Wealth ^gty, tyjjj, 
Weep, to n^ # " 
Weeping ^3, in ^?. 

Weigh, to Sp^". 

Welfare ^CD. T 

Well *|g3 /., -1K3/, 



Vocabulary. 

what n,?, na, no, 

§ 24, 1. 
Wheat H*On. 

T • 

When 13, 3 or ^ w. 

inf. const., §106, 2. 
Whence p^p. 
Where j"pj<,' 
Wherefore nfTTS)^ 
Wherein J"|£Q» 
Wherewith HED. 
Whether Qtf/ 
While 3 w. the mi/. 

const., § 106, 2. 
While, all the W. 

Tir -^ 

Whisper, to $fj-) Hit. 
Whither ? J-Q^, T 

T T 

Whither , adv. rel. 

np 4 f-ntm§23,3. 

Who^p, § 24. ' 
Whole 73, whole of 

Whose (= to whom) ? 

why n^S #np. 

Wicked yV*1 
Wickedness J^'^'j 

widow ropSM 

Wifen^I§73, B2. 

Willingjtober?!!^ 
or by the fut. § 32, 
1, 2and§ 101, la. 

Window p^n» 

Wine p*, $f\if\ : t 

Winter Vnp. 

Wisdom n03PT» 



Zion 

Wise, to be tDDPf 

(fut. A.) 
Wise, adj. Q^n» 

T T 

Wisely (■== in wisdom) 

nppra. 
with l £ Kx (^jo, 
oy. iny (only w. 

within rpn?> ^p3 

Without (= outwards) 

pinp, njnnn. 

Witness *jj^ 
Woman H^^ § 73 > 

B 2. 
Wood p^» 

Word "ft^, 
Work,to T -i3^, Sj^, 

work,;.^, rnirjjf 
world San, oSiy. 

Worn out, <a^j. H/S* 

nW 

Would God that! ?|S» 
Wrath ftjsj (w. suff. 

Wrest, to ntO-3 m . 
Write, to ^Jn3, 
Wrong, to do p$1f; 
Wrong, 8. nSl^. T 

t : - 

Y 

Year ft^ . 

Yet niirl *j& 

Young man *1^J, 

z 

Zion H»y # 



CONTENTS. 



PART I. 

OF THE ELEMENTS. 

CHAPTER I. 

Page. 

§ 1. TheAlphabet 1 

41 2. Division of Letters 3 

4 3. Vowel-Letters and Vowel- 
Signs 3 

" 4. Sh'va • 7 

" 5. Composite Sh'va 8 

" 6. Patach Furtive 8 

" 7. Dagesh and Mappik 9 

11 8. Syllables 10 

11 9. Accents, Metheg, Makkef.. 11 
" 10. Distinction of Kamets and 

Kainets-Chatuph 18 

*' 11. Distinction of Vocal and 

Silent Sh'va 19 



CHAPTER II. 

Peculiarities and Changes of 
Letters and Vowels. 

§12. Changes of Consonants 20 

" 13. Peculiarities of the Gut- 
turals ". 23 

" 14. Vowel Changes 23 

CHAPTER III. 

§15. Servile Letters 26 

" 16. The Prefixes ftgfQ 27 

" 17. The Article 28 

44 18. The Prefixes $£\ 29 

" 19. Cases of Nouns and Pro- 
nouns 32 



§20 
" 21 
"22 
"23 
" 24 



§ 25 
"26 

" 27 
" 28 



The 



§29. 
" 30 
" 31 
"82 

"33 

" 34 
" 35 
"36 
"37 
". 38, 
"39 



§40. 



CHAPTER IV. 

Of the Pronoun. 

Page. 

The Personal Pronoun 34 

. Nominal Suffixes 36 

. Demonstrative Pronoun.... 38 

. The Relative 40 

. The Interrogative Pronoun 41 

CHAPTER v. 

Of the Verb. 

General View 44 

Signification and Charac- 
teristics of the Conjugations 4 5 

Inflection 47 

Classes 47 

CHAPTER VI. 

Regular Verb. Explanation of 
the Second Paradigm. 

The Preterite 48 

The Infinitive 51 

TheFuture 52 

The Lengthened Future or 

Optative 54 

Vav Conversive 55 

The Imperative 57 

The Participle 59 

Niphal 61 

PielandPual 64 

Hiphil and Hophal 67 

Hithpael 70 

CHAPTER VII. 

The Gutturals. 
Verbs Pe Guttural 72 



286 



Contents. 



Page. 

§ 41. Verbs Ay in Guttural. 74 

" 42. Verbs Lamed Guttural .... 76 

CHAPTER VIII. 

The Suffixes of the Verb. 

In General 78 

§ 43. The Preterite with Suf- 



" 44. 
"45. 


fixes 

The Future with Suffixes 
The Infinitive with Suf- 
fixes 


79 
80 

8fl 


"46. 


The Imperative with Suf- 
fixes 


83 


"47. 


The Participle with Suf- 
fixes 


84 



CHAPTER IX. 

Irregular Verbs. 

§48. Verbs "tf"£ 86 

"49. Verbs}*"*? 87 

"50. Verbs j"£j 89 

" 51. Verbs >"£ 91 

"52. Verbs yy 94 

" 53. Verbs )«y and V'y * 98 

" 54. Verbs Jf"? 101 

" 65. Verbs Doubly Anomalous 105 

CHAPTER X, 

Nouns. 

§ 56. In General. Formation and 

Inflection 108 

"57. The Gender 113 

" 58. The Plural and Dual 116 

" 59. The Construct State 119 

" 60. Rules for the Inflection of 

Masculine Nouns 121 

" 61. Declension of Masculine 

Nouns 122 

"62. First Declension 123 

" 63. Second Declension 124 



Page. 

§ 64. Third Declension 128 

" 65. Fourth Declension 130 

"66. Fifth Declension 133 

" 67. The Formation of Femi- 
nine Nouns 138 

" 68. Declension of Feminine 

Nouns 138 

" 69. First Declension 139 

" 70. Second Declension 140 

"71. Third Declension 143 

" 72. Fourth Declension 144 

" 73. Irregular Nouns 147 

"74. The Numerals 149 

CHAPTER XI. 

Particles. 
§ 75. In General 153 

PART II. 

SYNTAX. 

CHAPTER I. 

The Essential Parts of a Sentence. 

§76. The Subject 157 

" 77. The Copula 158 

" 78. The Predicate and its 
Agreement with the Sub- 
ject 159 

" 79, Verbal Arrangement 161 

CHAPTER II. 

Syntax of the Parts of Speech. 

§80. The Article 162 

The Noun 

§81. Gender........ 164 

Number 164 

The Cases. ConstructState 
and the Genitive.. 166 

" 84. Dative...... 168 



Page. 

§85. Accusative 168 

"86. The Absolute Case ".. 170 

"87. Apposition 171 

" 88. Duplication of Nouns .... 171 
" 89. Substantives used in the 

place of Adjectives 171 

"90. Adjectives 172 

" 91. Comparison" 172 

"92. Numerals 173 

Pronouns. 

§93. Personal pronoun 174 

"94. Demonstrative 175 

"95. Interrogative 177 

"96. Relative 177 

u 97. Reflexive and Reciprocal 178 
" 98. Other Pronouus 179 

The Verb. 

§ 99. In General 180 

" 100. The Preterite 180 

41 101. The Future 182 

" 102. The Conversive Vav 183 

" 103. Paragogic and Apoco- 
pated Future 184 

"104. The Imperative 184 

" 105. Infinitive Absolute 185 

" 106. Infinitive Construct 186 

" 107. The Participle 189 



Contents. 287 

Particles. 

Page. 

§ 108. Particles of NegativeSen- 

tences 190 

" 109. Particles of Interrogative 

Sentences 192 

" 110. Particles of OptativeSen- 

tences 192 

" 111. Particles of Objective 

Sentences 193 

' 112. Particles of Final Sen- 
tences 193 

' 113. Particles of Inferential 

Sentences 194 

" 1 14. Particles of Temporal 

Sentences .-. 194 

" 115. Particles of Causal Sen- 
tences 194 

" 116. Particles of Conditional 

Sentences 194 

"117. Particles of Disjunctive 

Sentences 196 

" 118. Particles of Adversative 

Sentences 196 

"119. Interjections 196 

Paradigms 197 

Chrestomathy 220 

Vocabulary I. 243 

Vocabulary II. 269 



288 



Abbreviations and Corrections. 



LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS. 



abs. — absolute 
abstr. — abstract. 
ace. — accusative 
act. — active 
adj. — adjective 
adv. — adverb 
apocop. — apocopated 
art.— article 
const, st. ) construct 
c. st. ) state 
comm. — common 
comp. — compare 
cow). — conjunction 

) exempli gratia, 
e 'V' ) for example 

•/••■■'■[ feminine 

fr. o. — from bottom 
fn, t.— from top 



fut — future 
gen. — genitive 
gen. — generally 
Hi.— Hiphil 
Ho. — Hophal 
Hit.— Hithpael 
i. e. — id est 
ib. — ibidem 
imp. — imperative 
inf. — infinitive 
interj. - interjection 

' \ masculine 

Ni. — Niphal 
N.— Note 
n. p. — proper name 
obj. — object 
orig. — originally 
p.— page 



^•[person 

part. — participle 
pass. — passive 
in p. — in pause 
Pi.— Piel 

% \ plural 

prob. — probable 
prop. — properly 
Pu.— Pual 
reflex. — reflexive 
sc. — scilicet 

f*' \ singula 

subst. ) 

8. \ 

sw#*.— suffix 
tr. — transitive 



lar 



substantive 



CORRECTIONS. 



Page. 


Line. Read. 

i, fr. b. ^y 


Page. 


Line. Bead. 


% 


69, 


2, fr. b. £*ini 


12, 
14, 


i, fr. b. nU^finp^ 

7, fr. t. 1, 14 ' 


73, 
85, 


i6, fr. b. iprm 

12,fr.t. nfcX 


15, 
17, 2 


13, fr. b. JO-ID 

t : •• 

5, fr. t. afformatives 


96, 

97, 


3,fr.t. ?)ji;nn 
Afr.t. ntiipn 


27, 


13, fr. b. n-ruTD 


116, 


4,fr.b.nivni^?? 


31, 


3, fr. b. niptei ' 


119, 


6, fr. b. rUHD 


51, 


3, fr. b. n'nk 


120, 


io,fr.t. nb^p? 


53, 

56, 


1, fr. b. j^nB* 
7, fr. b. ftK^ 

— T 


127, 
141, 


4,fr.t. jTiN^D 

i4,fr.t. npsho 


59, 


14, fr. b. WSft 


147, 


17, fr. t. for step-father, 


u 


13, fr. b. EH3 




read: father-in-law 


61, 

65, 
66, 


4, fr. b. for larger type, 
read : asterisks. 

e, fr. b. rbnin 

2, fr. t. ffy' 


167, 
169, 
180, 


18, mother-in-law 
9, fr. b. § 96, 4 

2,fr.t. yyp 

io,fr.t. rsmn 



A NEW PRACTICAL HEBREW GRAMMAR 

BY 

Solomon Deutsch, A. M., Ph. D. 



8vo. Price $2.50. 



Henry Holt & Co., New York. 



From Prof. A. P. Peabody, Acting President of Harvard University. 

I cailnot express myself too warmly as to its surpassing excellence. My 
belief is that, with the sole use of your Grammar a student could become a 
more accurate Hebrew scholar, than by reading half the Old Testament with 
the use of any other Hebrew Grammar with which I am acquainted. 

Dr. Ezra Allot, of Harvard University. 

says of the work: 

Dr. Deutsch's Hebrew Grammar will be the' means of imparting a more 
thorough knowledge of Hebrew than is gained by the study of the ordinary 
Grammars in the ordinary way. 

From B. L. Gildersleeve, D.D., Prof in the University of Virginia. 

I have introduced the work as a text-book into the University course and I 
should be glad to see it generally introduced into our Theological Seminaries. 

From the Right Rev. W. R. Whittingham, D.D., LL.D., P. H. Bishop 

of the Diocese of Maryland. 

I find Dr. Deutsch's Grammar in many respects much better adapted to 
the use of beginners than any similar work in the English language with 
which I am acquainted. 

From Rev. E. P. Barrows, D.D., Professor at Andover 
Theological School. 

Conciseness and comprehensiveness are the qualities that mark this 

Grammar. The rules are expressed with neatness, brevity, and clearness. 

• Thus he has been able to compress into 219 octavo pages (not reckoning 

the Chrestomathy at the end) a great amount of matter. The author is 

evidently a thorough master of his subject, and his statements are accurate. 

From Prof. Geo. E. Day, D.D., Prof, of Hebrew in Yale College. 

Dr. Deutsch's Hebrew Grammar has some decided advantages over the 
larger Hebrew Grammars in common use. 



From Rev. Dr. S. Adler, Rabbi of the Temple "Emanuel" New York. 

The undersigned has subjected different portions of Dr. Deutsch's Hebrew 
Grammar to a close and careful examination, and has everywhere recog- 
nized the hand of a master — of a man uniting a thorough knowledge of his 
subject, with the skill and experience of a teacher. The work is both con- 
cise and comprehensive, combining thoroughness of treatment and fullness of 
matter with brevity and precision ; and it will prove a valuable auxiliary 
alike to teacher and scholar, and in the schoolroom as well as in the closet. 

The Nation. 

Dr. Deutsch's Hebrew Grammar is evidently the product not only of 
conscientious, but also of long and assiduous labor, as well as of extensive 
knowledge ; and as regards the method, we can say without hesitation, that 
we have never yet met with a manual, so pleasantly paving the way to the 
literary treasures of an ancient language. It fully deserves to be ranked 
among the foremost productions of its kind, whether in America or in Europe. 

The Catholic World 

says, that it is " beyond doubt the best school-book of its kind that has 
appeared from the American Press." 

The Southern Review. 

Dr. Deutsch's Hebrew Grammar is indeed an admirable manual for 
theological students, far superior, as such, to the Grammar of Gesenius. 

The Israelite. 

It is nearer approaching our idea of a practical Hebrew Grammar than 
any other book known to us. It contains all that is necessary to know of 
the Hebrew to read the Bible in their original, and it contains all that in a 
pleasant and practical form. 

The Jewish Messenger. 

Dr. Deutsch of Baltimore is known as a thorough Hebraist, and has evi- 
dently enjoyed valuable experience as a teacher. He has solved the problem 
of presenting a Hebrew Ollendorf. The work is eminently practical and, as 
we have said, should be promptly introduced into our schools. 

The New Jerusalem Messenger. 

We cordially unite with Rev. A. P. Peabody in his commendation of the 
book, and hope it may be speedily introduced into all our theological schools. 

In the Journal and Messenger, A Baptist Family News-Paper f 

Rev. Geo. Varden, Ph. D., says : Everything that facilitates the knowledge 
of the Hebrew Scriptures we hail with unusual delight. Such a work is 
this Grammar by Dr. Deutsch. After a year's acquaintance we unhesi- 
tatingly proclaim its merits. A beautiful simplicity holds sway throughout 
this entire book. The syntax is a model of scholarly condensation. 



A KEY TO THE PENTATEUCH, 

Explanatory of* 

THE TEXT AND THE GRAMMATICAL FORMS, 

By Solomon Deutsch, A. M., Ph. D. 

Author of " A New Practical Hebrew Grammar." 



870. Price $1.50. 



Henry Holt & Co., New York. 



Part I. Genesis. 



From Prof. A. P. Peabody, Late Acting President of Harvard 

University. 

I have examined with care and with great pleasure the First Part of 
your Key to the Pentateuch. It seems to me conformed to the only true 
method of teaching Hebrew. In order to use it, the pupil would need to 
commit to memory, at the outset, very few and simple forms and principles, 
and would acquire his knowledge of the grammar in detail, in immediate 
connection with the word of the sacred text. When I taught Hebrew, I was 
accustomed to do in manuscript for my pupils the very work — as far as I 
was able — which you have done in your Key. Your book has an ulterior 
value as a commentary on Genesis, and in that respect it seems to me pre- 
eminently sound and richly instructive. 

.From Dr. B. L. Gildersleeve, 

Prof, in the University of Virginia. 

Dr. Deutsch's Key to the Pentateuch is a valuable addition to the 
apparatus of the teacher and of the student of Hebrew. 

From Dr. Geo. F. Day, 

Prof, of Hebrew in Yale College. 

The student of Hebrew who has not the help of a living instructor will 
here find the solution of the more important difficulties and references to 
the proper sections in the Grammar. By using it, after his own efforts have 
been unsuccessful, it will become to him a true " Key " to unlock difficulties. 

# From Rev. J. Packard, D.D., 

Prof, of Hebrew in the Theological Seminary of Va. 

The plan on which it is constructed is an admirable one, and exactly 
adapted to the wants of students. 



From Rev. F. S. Hoyt, 

Prof, of Hebrew in the Ohio Wesleyan University. 

The work seems to me to be admirably executed, and the more fre- 
quently I examine it, the more favorably it impresses me with its accuracy, 
and its utility. Students will find it an admirable help in their preparation 
for the recitation-room, and those who have not the aid of a living teacher, 
will find it invaluable. 

From Prof. Howard Osgood, Chester, Pa. 

Your work supplies a want deeply felt by students, and I am sure will 
be hailed with delight not only by students but by a larger class of ministers 
who — by it — will be enabled to keep up and add to their knowledge of 
Hebrew. 

From the Nation. 

The work is to be " the means of introducing the student to a full and 
thorough understanding of the Hebrew text of the Bible," being chiefly cal- 
culated to spare such beginners as have acquired some grammatical knowl- 
edge of Hebrew the trouble of hunting up roots, forms, and exceptions in 
dictionaries and grammars, and to enable them to study the Hebrew text 
without a teacher, or fully to prepare at home for every school lesson. The 
work is very elaborate and very carefully done. It will thus undoubtedly 
be found an excellent help and guide both by students and teachers. 

From the Jewish Times. 
. 1871. No. 23. 

The learned and indefatigable author has presented a manual, which 
greatly facilitates the labor of the teacher, and is of incalculable benefit to 
the student of Hebrew. It is concise, scientific, and practical, and, hence, a 
worthy successor to the author's previous production of " A New Practical 
Hebrew Grammar." Besides the definition and derivation of every word in 
Genesis, there are added the paradigms, and valuable historical, geographi- 
cal, and archaeological explanations, which are remarkable for their concise- 
ness and perspicuity. The execution betrays the hand of a master. The 
work of Dr. Deutsch surpasses all similar school-books, and deserves to be 
introduced into every school and institution where the Hebrew language is 
cultivated. 

From the Jewish 



August 4, 1871. Vol. 30— No. 5. 

A work which students and teachers will cherish, is emphatically our 
opinion of Dr. Deutsch's latest addition to Hebrew Literature. Simple as 
is its plan, it is one which might well be adopted with other languages, and 
thus prove a boon to the hard worked student. The author has thus fur- 
nished ample evidence of his desire to popularize the sacred language, and 
to remove many of the impediments under which the student was wont to 
labor. We cordially commend the work to the public, and trust that Dr. 
Deutsch will be so liberally encouraged that he will not hesitate to produce 
at an early day the remaining volumes of his series. 




. * vs. 



\ 



S 






,**" 
"% 






^ 
















,0' 









w 









*°"^ V 
^ A 



* ^ 


















_^_ 



